PAM STAMP 2G 2003 Reference Manual

Insert the front cover image in this header , then position and resize it !
PAM-STAMP 2G 2004
Reference Manual
Courtesy: Jaguar Cars

PAM-STAMP 2G 2004
REFERENCE MANUAL
The documents and related know-how herein provided by ESI Group subject to
contractual conditions are to remain confidential. The CLIENT shall not disclose
the documentation and/or related know-how in whole or in part to any third party
without the prior written permission of ESI Group.
© ESI Group, 2004. All rights reserved.
September 2004
PAM-STAMP 2G 2004 i REFERENCE MANUAL
© 2004 ESI Group (released: Sep-04)
CONTENTS
GENERAL 1
Introduction---------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
The Menu Bar ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
Toolbars and Docking Dialogs ---------------------------------------------------------- 3
Mouse ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4
Graphical Windows ----------------------------------------------------------------------6
3D Views ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
2D Views ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
Add (or Remove) a Selection of entities to (from) an Object----------------- 13
Wizards ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
Main Direction Wizard------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
Direction Wizard -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
Position Wizard --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
Drawbead Wizards----------------------------------------------------------------------- 16
PROJECT 17
File or Project Menu ------------------------------------------------------------------- 17
New Project ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 20
Project Identifier -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
Project Type ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
Title ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 21
Comment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
Function Buttons ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
New Macro ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
Macro Identifier --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
Save variations-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25
Project Management------------------------------------------------------------------- 28
Selection------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 28
Project Identifier -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30
File Selector------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 31
CAD File Exportation -------------------------------------------------------------------- 34
MESH File Importation------------------------------------------------------------------ 34
Contour Exportation --------------------------------------------------------------------- 39
Curves Importation----------------------------------------------------------------------- 39
Images Exportation ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 39
Animation Exportation------------------------------------------------------------------- 41
VRML Exportation------------------------------------------------------------------------ 41
CONTENTS
REFERENCE MANUAL ii PAM-STAMP 2G 2004
(released: Sep-04) © 2004 ESI Group
User defined mesh formats ---------------------------------------------------------- 43

Defined formats--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 43
Selected Format -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 43
Computed Model ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 44
Save DeltaMESH Module ------------------------------------------------------------ 46
New Design Module ------------------------------------------------------------------- 47
Meshing – Import Tab ----------------------------------------------------------------- 48
General ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 49
Methodology------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 49
Files to import ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 49
Parameters -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 49
Import Parameters --------------------------------------------------------------------- 51
Meshing – Joining Tab ---------------------------------------------------------------- 53
General ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54
Methodology------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54
Objects to Join ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54
Parameters -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
Add Object for Joining and Joining Parameters Dialogs ----------------------- 55
Meshing – Meshing Tab -------------------------------------------------------------- 58
General ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 58
Methodology------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 59
Objects to Mesh -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 59
Parameters -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 60
Add Object for Meshing and Meshing Parameters Dialogs ------------------- 60
Import of CAD MODEL ---------------------------------------------------------------- 64
Inverse import --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 66
General ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 66
Methodology------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 66
File ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 66
Meshing------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 67
DeltaMesh inverse parameters ------------------------------------------------------- 68
Information on the Project ------------------------------------------------------------ 71
Restart Files ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 74
Transfer Mesh to------------------------------------------------------------------------ 75
Print Setup ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 77
Printer --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 77
Paper ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 78
Orientation --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 78
CONTENTS
PAM-STAMP 2G 2004 iii REFERENCE MANUAL
EDIT 79
Edit Menu--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 79
Selection by Propagation ------------------------------------------------------------- 80
Selection by Geometry ---------------------------------------------------------------- 82
Element ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 82
Shell ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 83
Edge ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 84
Node----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 85
Surface-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 86
Function buttons-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 86
Selection by Label---------------------------------------------------------------------- 87
Selection by List of Objects ---------------------------------------------------------- 88
Selection by Contour Value ---------------------------------------------------------- 89
Selection by Plane --------------------------------------------------------------------- 90
Selection by Polyline------------------------------------------------------------------- 91
Selection by Polygon ------------------------------------------------------------------ 93
VIEW 95
View Menu ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 95
View Manager --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 98
Toolbars----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 99
Standard Toolbar --------------------------------------------------------------------- 101
Selection Toolbar --------------------------------------------------------------------- 102
Camera Toolbar----------------------------------------------------------------------- 105
View-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 107
Measure Toolbar---------------------------------------------------------------------- 108
Annotations Toolbar ----------------------------------------------------------------- 109
Entity Display Mode Toolbar ------------------------------------------------------- 110
DieMaker Toolbar -------------------------------------------------------------------- 111
Reverse Engineering Mode-----------------------------------------------------------111
Part Preparation Mode-----------------------------------------------------------------113
Blankholder Mode-----------------------------------------------------------------------116
Addendum Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------122
Simulation Mode-------------------------------------------------------------------------131
DiE Trimming Toolbar --------------------------------------------------------------- 133
Morphing Toolbar--------------------------------------------------------------------- 135
Multistate and animation Toolbar ------------------------------------------------- 139
Show Toolbar-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 140
Reporting Toolbar -------------------------------------------------------------------- 141
Normal stamping post-processor Toolbar -------------------------------------- 142
Springback post-processor Toolbar---------------------------------------------- 143
Output Dialog -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 144
CONTENTS
REFERENCE MANUAL iv PAM-STAMP 2G 2004
Project Dialog-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 145

Project Tab--------------------------------------------------------------------------------145
Visibility Tab ------------------------------------------------------------------------------148
Data Setup ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 151
Cad -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------151
Transformations -------------------------------------------------------------------------152
Process ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------153
Selection Dialog----------------------------------------------------------------------- 154
Selection Modes-------------------------------------------------------------------------155
Additional Tools--------------------------------------------------------------------------156
Customize Dialog--------------------------------------------------------------------- 158
Commands--------------------------------------------------------------------------------158
Toolbars -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------159
External tools-----------------------------------------------------------------------------160
Menu ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------160
Options-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------162
Function Button --------------------------------------------------------------------------162
GEOMETRY 163
Geometry Menu----------------------------------------------------------------------- 163
Delete Mesh --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 166
Smooth mesh-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 168
DELTAMESH history ---------------------------------------------------------------- 170
Restore surfaces---------------------------------------------------------------------- 171
Filleting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 173
General ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------173
Methodology------------------------------------------------------------------------------173
Constant Tab -----------------------------------------------------------------------------174
Single Tab---------------------------------------------------------------------------------175
Interpolated Tab -------------------------------------------------------------------------176
Options Tab-------------------------------------------------------------------------------178
Parameters Tab -------------------------------------------------------------------------179
Function Buttons ------------------------------------------------------------------------180
Meshing Lines ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 181
Blank Meshing------------------------------------------------------------------------- 183
Four Points--------------------------------------------------------------------------------183
Rectangle ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------184
2D Contour--------------------------------------------------------------------------------186
Disk/Pie ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------187
Tube ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------188
Element Criterion------------------------------------------------------------------------189
Generate Blank in -----------------------------------------------------------------------190
Function buttons-------------------------------------------------------------------------190
Create flat blank ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 191
Element Size Wizard ---------------------------------------------------------------- 192
CONTENTS
PAM-STAMP 2G 2004 v REFERENCE MANUAL
Compute Mesh Size ----------------------------------------------------------------- 194

Nodes Management ----------------------------------------------------------------- 195
Creation------------------------------------------------------------------------------------195
Modification -------------------------------------------------------------------------------196
Element Management --------------------------------------------------------------- 201
Creation------------------------------------------------------------------------------------201
Modification -------------------------------------------------------------------------------204
3D curves manager ------------------------------------------------------------------ 205
Creation------------------------------------------------------------------------------------205
Edition--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------207
Parametric --------------------------------------------------------------------------------209
Deletion of Entities ------------------------------------------------------------------- 212
Translation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 213
Rotation --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 215
Symmetry------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 217
Offset ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 219
Extrusion-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 222
Divide/Split ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 225
Divide---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------225
Split -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------226
Projection ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 228
Scaling ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 230
Autopositioning------------------------------------------------------------------------ 232
Trimming-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 234
Description --------------------------------------------------------------------------------235
Wall Creation -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 238
Flattening ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 240
Mesh check ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 242
Element Orientation------------------------------------------------------------------ 247
Presentation of the Morphing ------------------------------------------------------ 249
Topology -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 251
Automatic Detection --------------------------------------------------------------------252
Manual Edit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------252
Function Button --------------------------------------------------------------------------253
Transformations----------------------------------------------------------------------- 254
Jump----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------254
Tangency----------------------------------------------------------------------------------256
Slide ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------257
User-Defined Frame ----------------------------------------------------------------- 258
Surface Reconstruction Parameters --------------------------------------------- 260
DIEMAKER 261
Diemaker Menu ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 261
CONTENTS
REFERENCE MANUAL vi PAM-STAMP 2G 2004
Die Preparation ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 262

Part Preparation ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 263
Flange--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------264
Holes ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------265
Rolling Cylinder --------------------------------------------------------------------------268
Symmetry/Double Part-----------------------------------------------------------------273
Tipping ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 275
Active System ----------------------------------------------------------------------------275
Edited System----------------------------------------------------------------------------276
Center --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------276
Balancing----------------------------------------------------------------------------------276
Display -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------277
Cumulated --------------------------------------------------------------------------------277
Function Button --------------------------------------------------------------------------277
Exchange Part------------------------------------------------------------------------- 278
Blankholder Editor-------------------------------------------------------------------- 281
Interaction Toolbar ----------------------------------------------------------------------282
Right-Click Menu ------------------------------------------------------------------------282
Section Plane ----------------------------------------------------------------------------283
Edit Outline/Section Curves ----------------------------------------------------------284
Curve Parameters-----------------------------------------------------------------------284
Modify Surface ---------------------------------------------------------------------------285
Accurate Binder Movement -------------------------------------------------------- 286
Translate ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------286
Rotate --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------287
Function Button --------------------------------------------------------------------------288
Move with Arrow Key-------------------------------------------------------------------289
Theoretical Binder -------------------------------------------------------------------- 290
Reference Object------------------------------------------------------------------------290
Binder Surface ---------------------------------------------------------------------------291
Surface Linearity ------------------------------------------------------------------------292
Application and Parameter Settings ------------------------------------------------292
Binder Section------------------------------------------------------------------------- 293
Binder------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 297
Reference Object------------------------------------------------------------------------297
Binder Surface ---------------------------------------------------------------------------298
Surface Linearity ------------------------------------------------------------------------299
Create Inner Blankholder ----------------------------------------------------------- 300
Punch Impact -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 302
Profile Editor --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 304
Interaction Toolbar ----------------------------------------------------------------------305
Right-Click Menu ------------------------------------------------------------------------305
Import and Save Profiles --------------------------------------------------------------306
2D Window--------------------------------------------------------------------------------306
Profile Editor Page ----------------------------------------------------------------------306
Template Editor Page ------------------------------------------------------------------313
Error Messages and Faulty Behavior of the Software -------------------------314
CONTENTS
PAM-STAMP 2G 2004 vii REFERENCE MANUAL
Control Lines--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 316

Movement Control-------------------------------------------------------------------- 320
Check Die Sections ------------------------------------------------------------------ 323
Section Normal --------------------------------------------------------------------------323
Section by Section ----------------------------------------------------------------------323
Automatic----------------------------------------------------------------------------------324
Common Functions ---------------------------------------------------------------------324
Die Opening Line --------------------------------------------------------------------- 326
Import --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------326
Define --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------327
Modify --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------330
Function Button --------------------------------------------------------------------------334
Intersect Addendum ----------------------------------------------------------------- 335
Develop Flanges---------------------------------------------------------------------- 339
Polygon Editor------------------------------------------------------------------------- 341
Edited curve ------------------------------------------------------------------------------341
Actions -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------341
Corners ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------342
Coordinates-------------------------------------------------------------------------------343
Add Basecurve ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 344
Operation Basecurve-------------------------------------------------------------------344
Create Basecurve -----------------------------------------------------------------------346
Coordinate Systems ----------------------------------------------------------------- 347
Active Coordinate system -------------------------------------------------------------347
Edited Coordinate system-------------------------------------------------------------347
Modify Trimline ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 351
Active Trimline ---------------------------------------------------------------------------351
Definition ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------352
Trimming Operation Punching----------------------------------------------------- 354
Operation Punching --------------------------------------------------------------------354
Create Hole -------------------------------------------------------------------------------354
Set Workdirection--------------------------------------------------------------------- 357
Active Coordinate system -------------------------------------------------------------357
Trim operation----------------------------------------------------------------------------357
Post Values ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 359
Curve Selection--------------------------------------------------------------------------359
Colortable Definition --------------------------------------------------------------------360
Post Values -------------------------------------------------------------------------------361
Object Tree----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 362
CONTENTS
REFERENCE MANUAL viii PAM-STAMP 2G 2004
MATERIAL 363
Material Menu ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 363
Material Database -------------------------------------------------------------------- 364
Database ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------364
Directory -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------365
Materials-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------365
Material List-------------------------------------------------------------------------------366
Material Properties ------------------------------------------------------------------- 368
Material Name ---------------------------------------------------------------------------369
Material Type-----------------------------------------------------------------------------369
Material Law ------------------------------------------------------------------------------370
Parameters -------------------------------------------------------------------------------371
Material Curve ---------------------------------------------------------------------------373
Strain Rate Model -----------------------------------------------------------------------374
Lankford Coefficients Calculation ---------------------------------------------------375
Calculation of Coefficients for Barlat's Law---------------------------------------377
Calculation of coefficients for Mooney-Rivlin's law -----------------------------379
New Material -----------------------------------------------------------------------------380
Copy Material in -------------------------------------------------------------------------382
Unit Array----------------------------------------------------------------------------------383
Material data------------------------------------------------------------------------------384
PROCESS 385
Process Menu ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 385
BLank OptimiZation ------------------------------------------------------------------ 387
Target --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------387
Blank ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------388
Optimization ------------------------------------------------------------------------------389
QuikStamp Macro Process--------------------------------------------------------- 391
Groups -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------392
Objects-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------392
Process ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------396
Forming Severity---------------------------------------------------------------------- 398
Data setup wizard (End-user macro) -------------------------------------------- 399
Stage Toolbar ----------------------------------------------------------------------------400
Group---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------401
Blank ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------402
Die, Punch… Parameters -------------------------------------------------------------403
Process Parameters--------------------------------------------------------------------403
CONTENTS
PAM-STAMP 2G 2004 ix REFERENCE MANUAL
Import Macro-Command --------------------------------------------------------------403

Pre-defined Macro-Commands ------------------------------------------------------403
Tool Builder ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 404
Macro---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------405
Groups -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------405
Parameters -------------------------------------------------------------------------------406
Accessory ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 410
Guide ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------410
Locator Pin--------------------------------------------------------------------------------411
Common Parameters ------------------------------------------------------------------412
Inverse solver project creation ---------------------------------------------------- 414
Part geometry ----------------------------------------------------------------------------414
Part object---------------------------------------------------------------------------------414
Material definition -----------------------------------------------------------------------415
Initial geometry---------------------------------------------------------------------------415
Parameters -------------------------------------------------------------------------------415
Process direction ------------------------------------------------------------------------415
Simplified tube bending ------------------------------------------------------------- 416
New Object----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 418
Delete Objects------------------------------------------------------------------------- 419
Object Information-------------------------------------------------------------------- 420
Objects Attributes--------------------------------------------------------------------- 421
Notion of Object -------------------------------------------------------------------------421
Notion of Stage --------------------------------------------------------------------------421
Description of the Dialog --------------------------------------------------------------422
Stage Management ------------------------------------------------------------------ 431
Kinematics checks ------------------------------------------------------------------- 433
Type of Object------------------------------------------------------------------------- 435
Surface Blank Object-------------------------------------------------------------------435
Volume Blank Object -------------------------------------------------------------------435
Surface Tool Object --------------------------------------------------------------------435
Volume Tool Object---------------------------------------------------------------------435
Drawbead Object------------------------------------------------------------------------435
Bar Object---------------------------------------------------------------------------------435
Guide Object -----------------------------------------------------------------------------436
Spotweld Object -------------------------------------------------------------------------436
Plane Object------------------------------------------------------------------------------436
Coordinate System Object ------------------------------------------------------------436
Undefined Object------------------------------------------------------------------------436
Global Object-----------------------------------------------------------------------------436
Material Definition -------------------------------------------------------------------- 437
Thickness------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 439
Behavior -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 440
Mass Information ------------------------------------------------------------------------441
Position of the Plane----------------------------------------------------------------- 442
CONTENTS
REFERENCE MANUAL x PAM-STAMP 2G 2004
Coordinate System------------------------------------------------------------------- 444

Spotweld definition ------------------------------------------------------------------- 446
Global advanced parameters ------------------------------------------------------ 448
Contact ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 449
Contact Definition--------------------------------------------------------------------- 450
Contact Advanced Parameters---------------------------------------------------- 451
Cartesian Kinematics ---------------------------------------------------------------- 454
Cartesian Kinematics (QUIKSTAMP)-------------------------------------------- 457
Cartesian Kinematics (QUIKSTAMP Full Process) -------------------------- 458
rotational kinematics ----------------------------------------------------------------- 459
Forces ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 461
Sensor definition ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 463
Function multiplier -------------------------------------------------------------------- 464
Force (QUIKSTAMP) ---------------------------------------------------------------- 465
Pressure -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 466
Pressure (QUIKSTAMP AND QUIKSTAMP Full Process) ----------------- 468
Gravity----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 469
Advanced Damping Parameters -------------------------------------------------- 471
Fluid cell -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 472
Functions and Applications -----------------------------------------------------------472
Dialog Box --------------------------------------------------------------------------------473
Aquadraw------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 476
Dialog Box --------------------------------------------------------------------------------477
Refinement ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 480
Drawbead forces---------------------------------------------------------------------- 483
Restraints Definition --------------------------------------------------------------------485
Drawbead Calculation------------------------------------------------------------------486
Forces Calculation ----------------------------------------------------------------------488
Opening Force ---------------------------------------------------------------------------491
Post Analyze--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 492
Rigid Body------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 493
Springback ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 495
Symmetry------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 496
Boundary conditions on points ---------------------------------------------------- 497
Transformation ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 499
Spotweld action ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 501
Mapping import------------------------------------------------------------------------ 502
Binder wrap ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 504
Stage Information--------------------------------------------------------------------- 505
Control----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 506
Progression Type -----------------------------------------------------------------------506
Start/stop ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------507
Outputs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------510
Pinch Definition --------------------------------------------------------------------------513
Plot at --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------514
CONTENTS
PAM-STAMP 2G 2004 xi REFERENCE MANUAL
Contour Settings-------------------------------------------------------------------------515
History Curve Settings -----------------------------------------------------------------516
Control (QUIKSTAMP) -------------------------------------------------------------- 517
Control (QUIKSTAMP Full Process) --------------------------------------------- 519
CPU Control --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 521
Global Refinement ------------------------------------------------------------------- 523
Global Refinement (QUIKSTAMP) ----------------------------------------------- 525
Trimming-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 526
Trimming Definition ---------------------------------------------------------------------527
Autopositioning------------------------------------------------------------------------ 530
Autopositioning Definition -------------------------------------------------------------531
Picking----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 534
DMP Decomposition ----------------------------------------------------------------- 535
Advanced Parameters--------------------------------------------------------------- 537
Element ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------537
Implicit Calculation ----------------------------------------------------------------------540
Other ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------542
Advanced Implicit Parameters (QUIKSTAMP and QUIKSTAMP Full
Process) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 544
Mapping--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 547
User-defined attribute --------------------------------------------------------------- 549
Object content MANAGEMENT--------------------------------------------------- 551
Source objects ---------------------------------------------------------------------------551
Target objects ----------------------------------------------------------------------------552
ANALYSIS 553
Analysis Menu------------------------------------------------------------------------- 553
Entity Information --------------------------------------------------------------------- 555
Measure Distance -------------------------------------------------------------------- 557
Measure Angle ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 559
Strain path------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 561
Curve Plotter--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 563
Right-Click Menu ------------------------------------------------------------------------564
Toolbar-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------564
Graphical Window-----------------------------------------------------------------------566
Curve List ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------566
Curve Properties ------------------------------------------------------------------------567
Keeler and Goodwin Law -------------------------------------------------------------569
Curve Creation---------------------------------------------------------------------------570
Plotter Properties------------------------------------------------------------------------571
Model locking -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 573
Model reporting ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 575
Image reporting ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 576
CONTENTS
REFERENCE MANUAL xii PAM-STAMP 2G 2004
Material reporting --------------------------------------------------------------------- 578

Process reporting--------------------------------------------------------------------- 580
Report table ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 581
Draw-in ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 583
Analysis Dialog------------------------------------------------------------------------ 589
Contours-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------589
Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------593
Curves -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------596
Analysis------------------------------------------------------------------------------------598
Legend Configuration---------------------------------------------------------------- 600
Values Range ----------------------------------------------------------------------------600
Colors Range-----------------------------------------------------------------------------601
Graduations-------------------------------------------------------------------------------602
Isolines-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------603
Zone Color --------------------------------------------------------------------------------604
Thickness------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 606
Description --------------------------------------------------------------------------------606
Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------606
Strain ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 608
Description --------------------------------------------------------------------------------608
Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------608
Stress------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 610
Description --------------------------------------------------------------------------------610
Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------610
Forming Limit Diagram (FLD)------------------------------------------------------ 612
Description --------------------------------------------------------------------------------612
Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------614
Utilization of the Forming Limit Diagram (FLD) ----------------------------------615
FLD Configuration-----------------------------------------------------------------------616
Displacement -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 618
Description --------------------------------------------------------------------------------618
Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------618
Velocity---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 619
Description --------------------------------------------------------------------------------619
Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------619
Energy----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 620
Description --------------------------------------------------------------------------------620
Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------620
Mesh Quality--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 621
Description --------------------------------------------------------------------------------621
Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------621
Undercut -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 623
Description --------------------------------------------------------------------------------623
Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------623
Distance between objects ---------------------------------------------------------- 624
Description --------------------------------------------------------------------------------624
Procedure (single state mode)-------------------------------------------------------624
Procedure (multiple state mode) ----------------------------------------------------625
CONTENTS
PAM-STAMP 2G 2004 xiii REFERENCE MANUAL
Numerical------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 627
Refinement--------------------------------------------------------------------------------627
Wrinkle Criterion-------------------------------------------------------------------------627
Contact Pressure --------------------------------------------------------------------- 628
Description --------------------------------------------------------------------------------628
Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------628
Marker ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 629
Description --------------------------------------------------------------------------------629
Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------629
Section Planes ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 630
Section Options ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 631
New contour Cut ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 632
Type ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------632
Curve ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------633
Start Point ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------633
Load several states ------------------------------------------------------------------ 634
Animation Properties ---------------------------------------------------------------- 635
SOLVER 636
Solver Menu --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 636
Start a calculation -------------------------------------------------------------------- 637
Restart a calculation ----------------------------------------------------------------- 639
Hosts------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 641
New Host ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 642
New Equivalence --------------------------------------------------------------------- 645
Solver Messages --------------------------------------------------------------------- 646
CUSTOMIZE 648
Customize Menu---------------------------------------------------------------------- 648
Licences -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 649
Options ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 650
Diemaker ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------650
DeltaMesh---------------------------------------------------------------------------------652
Process ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------653
Files Location ----------------------------------------------------------------------------654
GUI Parameters -------------------------------------------------------------------------655
Geometry Parameters -----------------------------------------------------------------657
Contours-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------658
Meshing Parameters -------------------------------------------------------------------660
Addendum Parameter------------------------------------------------------------------661
Simulation Model Options ---------------------------------------------------------- 663
CONTENTS
REFERENCE MANUAL xiv PAM-STAMP 2G 2004
DeltaMESH Advanced Parameters ---------------------------------------------- 666

Geometry----------------------------------------------------------------------------------666
Meshing------------------------------------------------------------------------------------668
Filleting-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------670
QUIKSTAMP Configuration -------------------------------------------------------- 672
Solver Parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------674
Drawing style -----------------------------------------------------------------------------678
Display Options ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 680
WINDOW 682
Window Menu ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 682
HELP 683
Help Menu------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 683
MACRO 684
Presentation of the Macro-Commands------------------------------------------ 684
General Overview -----------------------------------------------------------------------684
Macro-Command – Supervisor's Level --------------------------------------------685
Macro-Command – User's Level ----------------------------------------------------686
Menu Bar ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 687
Toolbar ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 689
Blank Definition ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 691
Stage Definition ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 692
Add Stage ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------694
Tool Definition ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 696
Parameter Definition ----------------------------------------------------------------- 699
Add/Edit Parameter---------------------------------------------------------------------700
Attribute Definition-------------------------------------------------------------------- 702
CONTENTS
PAM-STAMP 2G 2004 1 REFERENCE MANUAL
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
PAM-STAMP 2G is an integrated solution for simulation of stamping processes. It
enables the user to perform a complete simulation using a unique Graphical User
Interface, i.e. imports a CAD file, reworks the geometry, meshes the different parts,
specifies the stamping process, launches the calculation and finally post-processes
results without changing software environment.
Menu Bar 3D or 2D Graphical Windows
Toolbars
Status Bar Output Dialog Docking Dialogs Graphical Window Area
Main screen lay-out
This section describes the different parts of the PAM-STAMP 2G Graphical User
Interface and shows how to use them.
The graphical user interface is composed of:
- A menu bar presenting all the options available for the pre-processing, solver and
post-processing.
GENERAL
Introduction
REFERENCE MANUAL 2 PAM-STAMP 2G 2004
- Various toolbars and docking dialogs offering tool buttons, which are shortcuts to
some menu options.
- A graphical window area where the 3D and 2D windows are displayed.
- An output dialog which displays in the corresponding tab the actions performed by
the program.
- A status bar that shows the percentage of progress of the actions (import, export,
meshing…).
The Menu Bar

The Menu Bar presents the following menu options:
- File or Project menu: Opens and saves PAM-STAMP 2G files, preparing print files,
and exits the program.
*
- Tools : Manages the creation and manipulation of tools in the Macro-commands
Editor.
*
- Stages : Manages the creation and manipulation of stages in the Macro-commands
Editor.
*
- Parameters : Manages the creation and manipulation of parameters in the Macro-
commands Editor.
- Edit: Selects and edits objects.
- View: Displays and hides objects, also sets viewing options.
- Geometry: Prepares the meshing of the surface model used for the geometry
description.
- Material Database: Manages a material database (standard or user-defined).
- Process: Manages the input of the boundary conditions and the definition of the
forming process.
- Solver: Manages the solver calculations.
- Analysis: Displays results of the calculation, pre-processing information, and
manages curves or sections.
- Customize: Sets options.
- Windows: Creates and arranges 3D and 2D windows.
- Help: Used for accessing on-line Help and displaying Tool Tips.
*
This menu is displayed only when the STAMP Tool Kit is used, i.e. when a new macro-
command is created (File/New Macro option) or when a macro-commands file is opened (File/Open
option with a *.mct type file).
GENERAL
Introduction
Toolbars and Docking Dialogs

Located under the Menu Bar by default, these buttons, called tools, are used either to
interact with the model or as a shortcut menu (to bring up a dialog). A distinction has to
be made between toolbars and docking dialogs. The toolbars only gather tool buttons
and can be customized by the user. Docking dialogs also gather tool buttons but in
addition can perform specific operations not accessible through the menu bar.
The position of a toolbar or a dialog is memorized by the program, therefore from one
session to another a toolbar or a dialog retrieves its last position.
By default, toolbars and dialogs are displayed on sides of the main screen. However,
they can be moved to any location in the main window and their display is controlled by
the View menu. The list of tool buttons and their functions are described in the Toolbars
Section.
For a docking dialog three icons located in the upper left corner have the following
functions:
- : Minimizes the size of the dialog.
- : Maximizes the size of the dialog.
- : Closes the dialog.
GENERAL
Introduction
MOUSE
For a standard use of the mouse, the buttons are described as follows:
- M1: Left Button (picking button)
- M2: Central Button (movement button)
- M3: Right Button (menu button)
Using the mouse (which moves the pointer on the screen), the user can:
- Do movements in the 2D and 3D views (movement button M2). The middle mouse
button can be used for rotations, translations and clipping according to the function
(F2 to F5), Shift or Ctrl keys of the keyboard. All transformations are relative to the
screen reference: coordinates X, Y, and Z are respectively horizontal, vertical, and
normal to the screen surface. The cursor shape changes during the transformation,
indicating the type of transformation being performed:
· : Any rotation around the model origin. Default mode of the middle mouse
button.
· : Any translation in the screen XY plane. Ctrl + M2.
· : Rotation around the origin of the model in the screen XY plane only
(about the screen Z-axis). Ctrl + Shift + M2.
· : Zoom-in or out the view along the screen Z-axis. Shift key + M2.
Note:
If the workstation uses a Windows 2000, NT or XP operating system, and is
equipped with a mouse track ball as middle button, mouse wheel actions will
correspond to a zoom-in and out.
· : Rotation of a section plane around any axis. Alt + M2.

- Gain access to the various right-click menus of the graphic windows (menu button
M3),
- Click on controls or list of the interface (interface button M1). The standard Shift
and Ctrl keys apply for multiple selections in a list (range selection and non-
contiguous group selection respectively).
- Select entities in the graphic windows (picking button M1). Two modes can be
distinguished:
· Picking of an entity such as node, element, and material by clicking with the left
mouse button on this entity. A second picking on an entity already selected,
deselect it. The standard Shift and Ctrl keys apply for multiple selections (range
selection and non-contiguous group selection respectively).
GENERAL
Mouse
· Picking of several entities by defining a window: click one point of a diagonal

with the left mouse button, drag then release the mouse button on a second
point,
Limitations
- For curves, i.e. 2D graphical area, the only authorized graphical manipulations are
picking, translation and zooming.
GENERAL
Mouse
GRAPHICAL WINDOWS
Various graphical windows are available: 3D views, 2D cross section, curve plotter,
FLD… They all have the following characteristics:
- Their size can be modified.
- They can be moved.
- They cannot be iconed.
Notes:
· The user opens only one window per project loaded for 2D cross section and
FLD.
· The user opens only one window for the plotter during a session.
· The user can open as many 3D views as required during a session.
3D Views
A 3D view automatically belongs to a project. Several 3D views (corresponding to only
one or several different projects) can be opened at the same time although only one can
be active at a time. A project window is activated by clicking anywhere on it with the
mouse.
A customizable right-click menu provides for easy and quick manipulations for the
most frequently used tasks. Most of the items of this right-click menu are accessible
through the menu bar, but some of them can only be used with it.
GENERAL
Graphical Windows
3D View right-click menu
The different options of the right-click menu are listed and described below:
- Show:
· Show all: Displays all objects in the active model, overriding any visibility
setting.
· Free edges: Highlights the free edges of surface meshes. This option is useful to
check the connection between surface meshes. A connected surface mesh has
one closed free edge only, which is the boundary surface.
· Multiples edges: Highlights the multiple edges of the mesh. This option is useful
to check the T-junction or multiple junctions.
1
· Surfaces free edges : Higlights the free edges of surfaces. This option is useful
to check the connection between surfaces (a connected surface only has one
closed free edge, which is the boundary surface).
GENERAL
Graphical Windows
· Normals: Displays arrows representing the normal of each shell element.

· Duplicated surfaces: Displays the duplicated surfaces, i.e. the surfaces which
were detected at the joining session as double surfaces and which will not be
considered at the meshing. By default, these surfaces are not displayed.
· Thin surfaces: Displays the thin surfaces, i.e. the surfaces which were detected
at the joining session as too thin surfaces for the mesh and which will not be
· Remeshed surfaces: Displays the remeshed surfaces, i.e. the surfaces which
were meshed again through the “automatic remeshing” option, because of the
quality of the mesh after an initial meshing strategy.
· Control nodes: Displays control nodes, used in the morphing module, in blue.
· Feature lines: Displays feature lines, used in the morphing module, in green.
· Spotweld: Display spotwelds in the post-processing module. Each spotweld is
represented by a 2D element plus as many as extra spotwelds (defined in the
spotweld attribute). Caution: these 2D elements may be very small.
· Locked nodes: When the attributes Boundary Condition on Points is used for an
analysis, the nodes selected in the solver can be displayed in the post-processing
module.
- Hide: Hides or displays objects.
· Hide Selected: Hides the objects that have been selected from the project 3D
views.
· Hide Unselected: Hides objects that have not been selected from the project 3D
views.
- Add Selection to Object: Adds the entities selected to an object. It brings up the
Objects dialog.
- Remove Selection from Object: Removes the entities selected from an object. It
brings up the Objects dialog.
- PAM-DIEMAKER:
1
· Add Selection to Design Part : Adds the content of the selection to an object of
"Part" type. This object is used by the program to identify the meshed entities
used by PAM-DieMaker module as starting geometry.
1
· Remove Selection from Design Part : Removes the content of the selection from
the object named "Part".
· Hide selected flanges: Hides "Flange type" objects. The definition of this object
may be necessary for the creation of the addendum. Note that this object is not
accessible to the user and cannot be manipulated as a standard object.
· Show Flanges: Shows "Flange type" objects.
GENERAL
Graphical Windows
· Symmetry active: When parts are duplicated using the symmetry feature all
interactions concerning the blankholder and profile functionality are symmetric.
The symmetry properties can be switched off/on.
· Smooth control lines: The transition from one control line to an adjacent one is
tangential; nevertheless it is possible that a sequence of control lines is not that
smooth the user expects it. Therefore a smooth functionality is implemented to
optimize the curve characteristic.
Three different ways to generate these lines are implemented:
The user uses a fixed DOL and will use the control lines as a
stabilizer for the die shoulder (or die wall). So if a DOL exists the
control line will be generated as a kind of DOL offset (as shown
below). This could lead to rather unattractive curve characteristics for
the inner control lines.
Before smoothing After smoothing
The second case is when the connecting lines were already

generated. The part curve and the blankholder (DOL) curve are used
as reference lines for the creation. The resulting control line is an
interpolation with the effect that control lines near the part has more
part characteristics and control lines near the blankholder have more
DOL characteristics.
The generation of the control line is completely free whether no DOL

nor connecting lines exist. Only the tangents perpendicular to each
profile is used to generate a free spline curve.
GENERAL
Graphical Windows
- Align selected profiles: A selected set of profiles and/or modifiable DOL points can
be aligned onto a straight. This line is defined by the linear connection of the most
left (upper) respectively most right (lower) selected profile.
GENERAL
Graphical Windows
Note that only the profile end points will be aligned. Using the connecting line approach
for building the die opening line might generate light oscillations.
- Section: Controls the cross-section display.
GENERAL
Graphical Windows
1
- Feature Line Tangency : Allows the user to handle the feature line tangency
(Enforced or Released). This parameter determines the shape of the deformed mesh
after the morphing operation.
2D Views
2D graphical windows are numerous in PAM-STAMP 2G and have very different
utilization and characteristics. They are usually dedicated to specific functions such as:
- Create the shape of the blankholder in the PAM-DIEMAKER module.
- Draw curves called templates in the PAM-DIEMAKER module.
- Plot curves of any kind (material law, history…) in the Curve Plotter.
- Plot cross-section.
- Display Forming Limit Diagram in post-processing.
- Edit the shape of drawbeads in the Drawbead Editor.
Since it is difficult to summarize in this paragraph all the capabilities of those windows,
each type of 2D view will be described with the function they are working with.
1
This item is accessible via the right-click menu only. It cannot be used in the CAD and post-
process modules.
GENERAL
Add (or Remove) a Selection of entities to (from) an Object
ADD (OR REMOVE) A SELECTION OF ENTITIES

TO (FROM) AN OBJECT
Whenever a selection of entities (elements, 3D curves, nodes...) has been performed
using one of the selection mode available in the Selection toolbar or Selection dialog, it
can be added to or removed from an object using the following dialog.
The dialog can be called up either by the Add Selection to Object or Remove Selection
from Object options of the Process/Attributes menu and also by the right-click menu in
the 3D graphical window.
The Objects dialog
Description
- Select an object or dial a name: Selects an object in the drop-down list.
- Remove from other objects: When active, the entities selected will be removed from
the objects to where they currently belong.
Function Buttons
- Add: Adds the selected entities to (or removes from) the object chosen in the list
and closes the dialog.
- Replace: Replace the entities of the object chosen by the entities selected in the 3D
view.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing any changes.
GENERAL
Add (or Remove) a Selection of entities to (from) an Object
WIZARDS
A wizard is a tool that enables one or several text fields to be filled in a dialog. It is
generally called by clicking on a button located on the side of the text field to be filled.
Certain wizards open a dialog in order to be parameterized whereas other fill the text
fields immediately.
Main Direction Wizard
These wizards give priority to the direction indicated on the button.
Example:
· Click once on the Z button to define the vector (0,0,1).

· Click twice on the Z button to define the vector (0,0,-1).
· When the vector is a displacement, a box pops-up for the user to define the norm
of that vector in a text field.
Direction Wizard
Enables the user to define a vector using a list of options. The following modes are
available:
- , , buttons can be used to define a unitary vector in one of the three main
directions.
- The three text fields can be used to define any vector.
- : When active the user can pick directly in the graphical window with one of the
modes described below.
GENERAL
Wizards
- Two Points: The vector is defined by two picked points (or type them in the text
fields).
- Two Nodes: The vector is defined by two picked nodes.
- Element Normal: The vector is defined by the normal of a picked element (type in
the vector norm in the case of a displacement).
- Three Points Normal: The vector is defined by the normal of a plane built with three
points.
- Reverse Direction: The value of the direction displayed in the three text fields is
reversed.
- Unitize: The maximal component of the direction displayed in the three text fields is
set to unit and the two other components calculated accordingly.
Note:
· Arrows may be positioned next to the text fields. They are used to increment or
decrement the values step by step.
Position Wizard
Enables the user to define a 3D position using a list of options or by typing in its
coordinates in the text fields. The following modes are available:
- Single point: Pick a point to define the position.
- Single node: Pick a node to define the position.
- Center of element: Pick an element. Its center will define the position.
- Center of edge: Pick an edge. Its center will define the position.
- Center of points: The center of the positions successively input (picked or typed in
the text field) will define the position.
- Center of object: The center of the picked object will define the position.
GENERAL
Wizards
- Center of selection: The position is immediately set to the center of the selected
mesh.
Note:
· Arrows may be positioned next to the text fields. They are used to increment or
decrement the values step by step.
Drawbead Wizards
These wizards are used to define a "drawbead" material. They use an analytic function
and allow to compute/estimate:
- Drawbead forces (restraining and opening) from its geometry.
- A geometric parameter of the drawbead from the restraining force and its geometry.
GENERAL
Wizards
PROJECT
FILE OR PROJECT MENU
Project Menu after a File or Project has been opened
Depending if a project (or a file) is currently open or not, the layout of the menu
changes.
The different options provided by the File or Project menu are listed below:
PROJECT
File or Project Menu
- New: This option allows the user to create a new project, a DeltaMESH module, a
Design module, a macro-command or a material.
· Project: Brings up the New Project dialog.
· DeltaMESH module: This option allows the user to create a module in which he
can import and mesh CAD files by using the mesh generator DeltaMESH®.
· Design module: This option allows the user to create a module in which he can
import and work on mesh files as well as perform a PAM-DIEMAKER session.
· Stamp Toolkit: Brings up the New Macro dialog.
· Material: Calls up the New Material dialog.
- Open: Brings up the standard File Selector to open various types of files ranging
from Pam-Stamp project to pre/post-processing files.
- Close: Closes the active project window (i.e. the active 3D graphical window).
- Close All: Closes all the project windows (i.e. all the 3D graphical windows).
- Save: Save the active project (*.psp).
- Save As:
· New Project: Saves the project with a new name, a new location or changes its
type.
· New module: When a DeltaMESH module is currently active, it brings up the
Save DeltaMESH module dialog to copy partially or totally the current
DeltaMESH module in a new one. When a design module is currently active, it
brings up the Creation of new design module dialog.
- Save variations: Leads to the Save variations dialog for saving different versions of
the current AutoStamp project where the blank is slightly moved or resized, for
sensibility study. This menu is available only if the “Optimization” option is active.
- Management: Brings up the Management Project dialog to copy, paste or delete a
project.
- Information: Gives information about the project structure.
- Restart files: This option allows the user to modify the access pathway to the restart
files.
- Transfer mesh to: Transfers a mesh from a DeltaMESH module or a design module
or to the set up module. Can also transfer a mesh from a DeltaMESH module to a
design module.
- Import: Imports 'geometry' or 'mesh' data from various types of files in the current
3D graphical window.
· CAD: This option allows the user to import and mesh CAD files depending on
the current module. If the current module is a DeltaMESH module, it brings up
the Meshing dialog. If the current module is the setup or the Design module of
an AutoStamp or QuikStamp project, it brings up the Import of CAD model
PROJECT
dialog. If the current module is the setup of an Inverse project, it brings up the
Inverse import dialog.
· Mesh: Brings up the standard File Selector to open a mesh file originated from
the most common simulation software products.
· Computed Model: Imports entities and their attributes from a previous
calculation.
· DieMaker 2001 Project: Brings up the standard File Selector to open a Viking
project file with the extension .prj
· DieTrimming mesh: Brings up the standard File Selector dialog to import
- Export: Exports 'geometry', 'mesh' or 'graphic' data from the current 3D graphical
window to various types of files.
· CAD: Brings up the standard File Selector to export a CAD file with the
extension .igs or .vda
· Mesh: Brings up the standard File Selector to export a mesh file into the format
of one of the most common simulation software products.
· DieMaker 2001 Project: Brings up the standard File Selector to save a Viking
project file with the extension .prj
· DeltaMesh database: Brings up the standard File Selector to save a DeltaMesh
project file with the extension .dtc
· Contour: Brings up the standard File Selector to save a binary file, with the
extension .bf, containing the node or element labels plus their associated result
value. Countours may be reimported in a postprocessing session.
· Image: Saves an image of the active 2D or 3D graphical window.
· Animation: Saves the animation of an active 3D graphical window.
· VRML: Brings up the standard File Selector to save the active 3D view into a 3D
scene using the VRML format (extension .wrl).
· Frame: Brings up first a dialog to choose the frame to save then the standard File
Selector to save the coordinate system (extension .vda).
· DieTrimming mesh: Brings up the standard File Selector dialog to export

- Print Setup: Not yet implemented. Defines the printer and specifies the printer
properties.
- Print Preview: Not yet implemented.
- Print: Not yet implemented.
- 1,2,3…: Lists the previous opened files, and allows the user to re-open one of them.
- Exit: Closes all the dialogs and exits the program.
PROJECT
NEW PROJECT
A project is an industrial study where CAD, mesh, pre-processing, solver and results
files are stored in a unique directory.
A new directory can be created and must be selected. When the project's name is set,
the following dialog box appears:
The New Project dialog
PROJECT
New Project
Project Identifier
The user needs to name the new project and define its location. For that purpose the
following fields and buttons are available:
- File: Defines the new project name. It will be used as generic name for the files
created by the program.
- Location: Defines the directory that will contain the project files.
Project Type
Four types of project are available:
- Mesh: Only CAD data and meshes can be manipulated in this type of project. It is
not possible to assign pre-processing data to the mesh and to perform an analysis.
- QUIKSTAMP: The project is dedicated to a PAM-QUIKSTAMP analysis, i.e. a
single stage implicit calculation. Therefore all the capabilities of the program are
available except those dedicated to a PAM-Stamp analysis.
- QS Full Process: The project is dedicated to a PAM-QUIKSTAMP Full Process
analysis, i.e. a multi-stage implicit calculation. Much of the program capabilities are
available to provide a fast time but accurate analysis.
- Inverse: The project is dedicated to an inverse analysis, i.e. a single stage implicit
calculation.
- AUTOSTAMP: The project is dedicated to a PAM-STAMP analysis, i.e. a multiple-
stage explicit calculation. Therefore all the capabilities of the program are available
except those dedicated to a PAM-QUIKSTAMP analysis.
Note:
· Whatever the type of project chosen, the project file saved have the '.psp'
extension.
Title
Defines the name of the pre-processing session. If no name is entered in this field the
name of the project is assigned to the pre-processing session.
Comment
In this window the user can add some notes about the project.
PROJECT
New Project
Function Buttons
Two function buttons are associated with this dialog:
- OK: Validates the project creation.
PROJECT
New Macro
NEW MACRO
A macro is used to automatically set-up computations and automatic filling of
attributes.
The New Macro dialog
Macro Identifier
- Name: Name of the macro-command file. The following extensions are
automatically added to this name:
· .ksa for AutoStamp standard forming
· .ksq for QuikStamp full process
· .ktf for AutoStamp tube forming
- Location: Defines the directory that will contain the macro-command file. The
button next to the input field opens a Browser for Folder dialog from which the
user may select a directory for the location.
- Type: Chose the desired type in the available list
PROJECT
New Macro
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the creation of the new macro. Once the OK button is pressed the
Graphical User Interface changes with the addition of two new menus in the main
screen Menu Bar and by the deactivation of all the menus, but the File and Window
menus. The program switches to Stamp Tool Kit mode.
PROJECT
Save variations
SAVE VARIATIONS
The Save variations dialog
- Blank object: Selects the blank object to move or resize

- Projection object: Selects the die or binder object on which the blank has to move.
- List of all variations
- Stamping direction: Selects the direction of projection of the blank on the projection
object. So this direction must go from the blank to the projection object.
- : Adds a variation in the list by bringing the Variation properties dialog.
PROJECT
Save variations
For the location type of variation, the user must define a direction (defined by a
vector either by using the help of the wizard or by typing its components in the
text fields) and a magnitude (expressed in the unit system of the model).
For the size type of variation, the user must define the four corners of the blank
sheet by selecting 4 nodes placed on a free edge and set a value of translation for
the border between these nodes.
- : Deletes the selected variation in the list.
- : Deletes all variations in the list.
PROJECT
Save variations
Note:
Double-click on a item of the list brings up the Variation properties dialog to modify this
variation.
Functions Buttons
- Create: Brings up the Create variations dialog.
- If the user click OK, a project containing the new blank is built for each variation.
The names of the projects are “referenceprojectname_var_i” where
referenceprojetname is the name of the current project and I is the variation number
(starting from 1).
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing anything
PROJECT
Save variations
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
This dialog allows creating, deleting, pasting projects as well as changing their type.
The Project Management dialog
Selection
The roles of the various panel components are as follows:
- Look in: Displays the name of the current directory. The drop-down button displays
the directory tree.
- : Allows the user to return to the previous selection in the directory tree.
- : Allows the user to go one step up in the directory tree (e.g. to go in the father
directory of the current one).
- : Allows the user to create a new directory in the current one.
- : This two buttons are used to select the way the files are displayed in the
window below.
PROJECT
Project Management
- A window lists the files and sub-directories of the current directory and allows the
user to:
· Go down in the directory tree by double clicking a directory name.
· Select a project by clicking on its name in the Tree Window. Use the action
buttons to take an action.
- Files name: This text field allows the user to enter the name of the file or to display
the currently selected file name.
- Files of Types: Reads native PAM-STAMP 2G projects only, i.e. meshes, CAD
entities, pre-processing data, results and macro-commands. This type of file uses
binary format and cannot be edited.
Action Buttons
- New: Brings up the New Project dialog. If the name of the project corresponds to a
project which already exists in the current directory, a confirmation message
appears.
- Copy: Copy the selected project and all its associated files.
- Paste: Brings up the Paste Project dialog that allows the user to control the type of
files to be pasted. Prior to this action the destination directory must be the current
directory in the Project Management dialog window.
-
- The above dialog allows the user to change the name and title of the project as well
as the associated comment. By default all the files of the project are pasted but the
user may paste only files of certain types (CAD, Pre, Post and Restart).
- Change type: Similar to the menu Project / Save As, which saves the project with a
new name, a new location or changes its type.
- Clean: Deletes the files that are not compulsory for a project, i.e. some control and
listing files issued from the mesh generator or from the project itself.
PROJECT
Project Management
- Delete: Deletes the selected project. It is not possible to delete several projects at a
time. A box appears asking confirmation for the suppression.
Project Identifier
This panel summarizes the characteristics of the project: Name, Title, Location… None
of the fields can be edited.
Function Buttons
- Close: Closes the dialog.
PROJECT
File Selector
FILE SELECTOR
Whenever a file has to be selected, the program calls up the standard file selector,
shown below.
The File Selector
The roles of the various dialog components are as follows:

- Look in: Displays the name of the current directory. The drop-down button displays
the directory tree.
- : Allows the user to return to the previous selection in the directory tree.
- : Allows the user to go one step up in the directory tree (e.g. to go in the father
directory of the current one).
- : Allows the user to create a new directory in the current one.
- : This drop-down list is used to select the way the files are displayed in the
window below. Files can be represented as large or little icons, detailed…
- A window lists the files and sub-directories of the current directory and allows the
user to:
· Go down in the directory tree by double clicking a directory name.
· Select a file either by double clicking a file name or by selecting a file name
and clicking the Open button. A specific action is associated with the selection,
depending on the context of the application. For example the file selector is used
to open, save, export or import mesh files.
PROJECT
File Selector
- Files name: This text field allows the user to enter the name of the file or to display
the currently selected file name.
- Files of Types: Allows the user to filter the list of files, using the standard
wildcards.
· The following types of files can be opened:
PAM-Stamp Projects (*.psp): Reads native PAM-STAMP 2G
projects, i.e. meshes, CAD entities, pre-processing data, results and
macro-commands. This type of file uses binary format and cannot be
edited.
Pre-Processing Files (*.pre): Reads pre-processing data originated
from PAM-STAMP 2G, i.e. meshes and associated pre-processing
data plus macro-commands. This type of file uses binary format.
CAD Meshing Files (*.msh): Reads CADs and meshes originated
from PAM-STAMP 2G. This type of file uses binary format.
Post-Processing Files (*.res): Reads post-processing originated from
PAM-STAMP 2G, i.e. meshes and associated results.
Ficture preprocessing files (*prj): Reads pre-processing data
originated from Ficture, i.e. meshes and associated pre-processing
data plus macro-commands.
Pam Stamp files (*.ps, *.pc): Reads meshes and materials originated
from PAM-SYSTEM simulation softwares.
Macro-command templates (*.ksa, *.ksq, *.ktf, *.mct): Reads a macro-
command template and then opens the Stamp Tool Kit.
All Files (*.*): Can only open a file which format corresponds to the
types listed above.
· The following types of CAD files can be imported:
IGES Files (*.igs): The IGES format (Initial Graphics Exchange
Specification) is a classical format used by the CAD systems to store
3D models grouping surfaces and 3D curves.
VDA Files (*.vda): The VDA format (Verband der
Automobilindustrie), mostly used in the german automotive industry,
is also a classical format of CAD files.
UniSurf Files (*.uni):
All Imported Files (*.igs;*.vda;*.uni): Can only import a file which
format corresponds to the types listed above.
DieMaker 2001 project (*.prj, *.add)
· The following types of CAD files can be exported:
IGES Files (*.igs): See explanation above.
VDA Files (*.vda): See explanation above.
PROJECT
File Selector
VIKING Files (*.prj): The data exported have information about

addendum surfaces, the blankholder and contain the transformation
rules for the local coordinate system.
DieMaker 2001 project (*.prj, *.add)
· The following types of mesh files can be imported or exported:
ANSYS files (*.cdb)
ASCII files (*.asc)
IDEAS files (*.unv)
Binary files (*.bf)
NASTRAN files (*.nas)
PAM SAFE 2000-2001 files (*.pc)
PAM STAMP 2000-2001 files (*.ps)
PATRAN files (*.pnf)
The detailed description of data sets read for each file type is
specified in the paragraph Mesh File Importation.
· The following type of profile templates files can be imported or exported:
Profile template (*.pfl)
· The following type of curve files can be imported or exported:
ASCII files (*.asc)
Binary files (*.bf)
· The following types of material files can be imported:
Material files (*.psm): PAM-STAMP 2G format.
Optris material files (*.mat)
Pamstamp V2000 material files (*.mat)
· The following types of image files can be exported:
TIFF (*.tif): Tagged Image File Format.
JPEG (*.jpg)
PNG (*.png): Portable Network Graphics.
PostScript (*.ps)
Encapsulated PostScript (*.eps)
· The following type of animation files can be exported:
AVI (*.avi): Tagged Image File Format.
VRML (*.avi): Virtual Reality Language.
PROJECT
File Selector
CAD File Exportation

When the Export/CAD… option of the Project menu is chosen, two specific panels are
added to the dialog.
Object Types
It is possible to select the type of objects that are exported from the project (Surfaces,
3D Curves, Sections, Feature Lines).
Export Data
A project can be exported as a CAD file in its totality (Whole) or only the selected parts
(Selection) or only the parts displayed in the 3D graphical window (Visible) with respect
to the selection done in the Object Type panel.
MESH File Importation

When the Import/Mesh… option of the Project menu is chosen, a Mesh Importation
Options panel is added to the dialog.
- Keep identifiers: When this toggle is enabled, there are two possibilities:
· Keeping the number of imported entities.
· Importing elements of a file that does not contain all the associated nodes, and
attaching these elements to nodes already present in the project by their numbers
indicated in the file. If there is no possible correspondence for an element, there
will be an error message.
- Transform bars into 3D curves: Transforms the bars read into 3D curves. The curves
obtained are closed if the first and the last node of the bars are identical. Otherwise,
they are open.
- Keep thicknesses: Enables the thicknesses of the elements to be recovered.
- Merge objects: To be documented.
- User Defined Format: Brings up the User Defined Mesh Formats dialog which
allows the user to specify its own import and export programs.
Once the file is selected and the OK button pushed, the program enables meshes to be
imported or exported. The written or read data varies depending on the interface, and is
described below.
PROJECT
File Selector
ANSYS files (*.cdb)

Reading
The files that can be read by the interface are .cdb files from ANSYS versions 5.0 to
5.5. The mesh data read is as follows:
· Nodes
identifier
coordinates
· Elements
identifier
connectivities
Element selections based on the material, the type and the real.
Writing
The format of the file written by the interface is the .cdb format. The data written is as
follows:
· Nodes
identifier
coordinates
· Elements
identifier
connectivities
IDEAS files (*.unv)

Reading
The files that can be read by the interface are universal .unv files from IDEAS versions
5.6 and Master Series. The mesh read is as follows:
· Nodes
identifier
coordinates
· Elements
identifier
connectivities
Node selections based on color.
Element selections based on the physical table, the material, the color.
PROJECT
File Selector
Writing
The format of the files written by the interface is the universal format of IDEAS version
6. The data written is as follows:
· Nodes
identifier
coordinates
· Elements
identifier
connectivities
BINARYfiles (*.bf)
Reads and writes the geometric data in a binary and not open format. It corresponds to
the FICTURE® format (the whole list). The reading and writing are faster and more
accurate than in ASCII format. The content is as below:
· NBNODE number of nodes
· NUM (identifier),X,Y,Z,AUX (auxiliary field) ...
· NBELT2 number of bars
· NUM,N1,N2,AUX ...
· NBELT3 number of 3-node plates
· NUM,N1,N2,N3,AUX,THK (thickness) ...
· NBELT4 number of 4-node plates
· NUM,N1,N2,N3,N4,AUX,THK ...
· NBELT8 number of bricks
· NUM,N1,N2,N3,N4,N5,N6,N7,N8,AUX ...
· NCOURB3D number of 3D curves
· NUM,NPOINT (number of curve points),LOOP (LOOP : 1 for a closed curve, 0
for an open curve)
X,Y,Z (curve points coordinates)... (NPOINT times)
· ...
· NSELND number of node selections
· NOMSEL name of node selection
· NBND number of nodes in the selection
NUM identifier of a selection node... (NBND times)
· ...
· NSELELT number of element selections
PROJECT
File Selector
· NOMSEL name of the element selection

· NBELT number of elements in the selection
NUM identifier of a selection element... (NBELT times)
· ...
· NSELCRB3D number of 3D curve selections
· NOMSEL name of the 3D curve selection
· NBCRB3D number of 3D curves in the selection
NUM identifier of a curve in the selection... (NBCRB3D times)
· ...
Notes:
· In reading, if an entity does not belong to any selection, it will be placed in

Others.
NASTRAN files (*.nas)

Reading
The files that can be read by the interface are NASTRAN .nas formatted files. The
mesh read is as follows :
· Nodes
identifier
coordinates
· Elements
identifier
connectivities
Element selections based on the property.
Writing
The write format is the same as the read format. The data written is as follows:
· Nodes
identifier
coordinates
· Elements
identifier
connectivities
PROJECT
File Selector
PAM SAFE 2000-2001 (*.pc) and PAM STAMP 2000-2001 files (*.ps)
Reading
The files that can be read by the interface are Pam-Generis formatted files coming either
from PAM SAFE 2000-2001 (*.pc) or PAM STAMP 2000-2001 files (*.ps). The
mesh data read is as follows:
· Nodes
identifier
coordinates
· Elements
identifier
connectivities
Element selections based on the material.
Writing
· Nodes
identifier
coordinates
· Elements
identifier
connectivities
Element selections based on the type of element.
PATRAN files (*.pnf)

Reading
The files that can be read by the interface are PATRAN formatted files. The mesh data
read is as follows :
· Nodes
identifier
coordinates
· Elements
identifier
connectivities
Element selections based on the material and the property.
PROJECT
File Selector
Writing
· Nodes
identifier
coordinates
· Elements
identifier
connectivities
Contour Exportation
This option is only available when a contour is displayed in a post-processing session.
A contour is exported in a binary format (.bf). The file contains the list of node or
element labels depending of the type of the contour exported (if the results displayed are
at nodes or in element), and the value at each node or element.
The values can be imported again and mapped on the same structure (same labels for
nodes or elements).
Curves Importation
When a curve is imported, the program needs to know what is the type of the curve. The
following types can be imported (ASCII or binary format):
- Pre-process curve.
- Forming Limit Curve.
- History curve.
- Contour cut.
Images Exportation
When the Export/Image… option of the Project menu is chosen, a specific panel is added
to the dialog.
It allows the user to save the active 2D (blankholder editor, profile editor, curve plotter,
sections, FLD) or 3D graphical window to a raster or PostScript file.
The Files of Types drop-down list is used to select the format of the output file. Three
formats are proposed: TIFF, JPEG, PNG, PostScript and Encapsulated PostScript.
Depending on the image format chosen the parameters change.
PROJECT
File Selector
TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)

A snapshot of the active graphical window is taken and written pixel by pixel in the Tiff
output format. Only one graphical window will be copied per file. When using this
format, the file extension is automatically set to .tif.
- Width: Defines the width of the image in pixels. A default value is proposed
corresponding to the width of the current window on the screen.
- Height: Defines the height of the image in pixels. A default value is proposed
corresponding to the height of the current window on the screen.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

A snapshot of the active graphical window is taken and written pixel by pixel in the
jpeg output format. Only one graphical window will be copied per file. When using this
format, the file extension is automatically set to .jpeg.
A slider define the compression rate, therefore the quality of the saved image.
JPEG is "lossy," meaning that the decompressed image is not quite the same as the one
the user started with.
PNG (Portable Network Graphics)

PNG has the following advantages: alpha channels (variable transparency), gamma
correction (cross-platform control of image brightness), and two-dimensional
interlacing (a method of progressive display). Since PNG's compression is fully
lossless--and since it supports up to 48-bit truecolor or 16-bit grayscale--saving,
restoring and re-saving an image will not degrade its quality.
A snapshot of the active graphical window is taken and written pixel by pixel in the
jpeg output format. Only one graphical window will be copied per file. When using this
format, the file extension is automatically set to .png.
PostScript
A plot is created with the active graphical window. Due to limitations of the PostScript
language and the software algorithms used to simulate the graphical hardware, the plot
may not be exactly as on screen. The precision and quality of the plot will be
independent of the graphical hardware used.
- Scale Factor: Factor by which the image is expanded or reduced.
- Orientation: This option is used to define the orientation of the plot on the page of
the PostScript file. The default status is Portrait (vertical orientation). It can be
switched to Landscape (horizontal orientation).
PROJECT
File Selector
Encapsulated Postscript
Encapsulated PostScript should be used if the plot has to be imported in some editing
program (word processor, etc.). Parameters are identical to those used for PostScript
format.
Common Parameters
- Color Mode: This option is used to choose whether the output image must be in
color (one or two options depending on the format chosen) or gray.
- White Background: By default (inactive) the background color is set to the
background color of the selected graphical window. If a white background is
chosen, black and white colors will be switched on the PostScript output wherever
they are used: i.e. be careful when using this option with white or black colors for
special attributes, like material color or contour color.
- Add a Cartouche: When active a frame is added to the image with the name of the
project.
- Color dithering: Dithering is the process of converting an image with a certain bit
depth to one with a lower bit depth. This option is enabled when the Color mode is
set to 256 colors.
Animation Exportation
This option allows the user to save an animation in the AVI format. The parameters of
the saved animation can be defined as follows:
- Width: Defines the width of the AVI movie. By default the width in pixels of the
active 3D view.
- Height: Defines the height of the AVI movie. By default the height in pixels of the
active 3D view.
- Color Mode: Defines the quality of the animation, by defining the encoding of a
pixel. The higher the quality requested is, the costlier in terms of space disk it is.
The default is the highest quality (24-Bits).
- White Background: Allows the user to change to white the background color of the
graphical window where the animation takes place.
VRML Exportation
Vrml is a standard to describe interactive 3D objects on the web. These objects can be
displayed in real time, with different angles, and can be manipulated by a web
navigator. This is an ASCII format comparable to HTML language.
PROJECT
File Selector
Function Buttons
- Open (Import, Export or Save): Performs the action.
- Cancel: Closes the File Selector without selecting any files.
PROJECT
User defined mesh formats
USER DEFINED MESH FORMATS

This dialog allows the user to define his own format file.
The User-defined mesh formats dialog
Defined formats
This section lists all the formats already defined.
Selected Format
- Name: Allows the user to set the name of the format.
- File extension: Defines the extension of the file in the format.
- Importation tool: Defines the executable to use for import such a file.
- Exportation tool: : Defines the executable to use for export such a file.
- Add: Adds the new format in the list.
- Update: Updates parameters for the selected format already existing in the list.
- Remove: Removes the selected format from the list.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates all changes in the list of formats.
PROJECT
User defined mesh formats
COMPUTED MODEL
This option allows the user to import entities and their attributes from a previous
calculation into the first stage of the pre-process module (data set-up) of the active
project. The restart "picking" is useful in recovering geometric and physical data
(particularly stress and strain) of a calculation to start a new process (example: picking
of a holding to calculate a stamping).
The Picking dialog
- File name: Defines the name of the restart file. The button brings up the
standard File selector. Restart files have the extension .rst.
- Progression: Displays the progression value (time or stroke) reached at the end of
the previous computation.
- Objects: This window is used to select the objects from the previous computation.
- Pick nodes velocities: the value of this option is set in picking attribute of first stage
of activated project.
- Multiply stress by factor: the value of this option is set in picking attribute of first
stage of activated project.
- Pick attributes: If this option is checked, all attributes of the objects selected are
imported and the attributes of Global Object are always destroyed and imported
again.
PROJECT
Computed Model
- Pick progression and time:

- the progression type
- the value of progression is set in the control attribute in the parameter start at
without Recomputed parameter
- if the progression of picking project is stroke, the value of time is set in the control
attribute in time origin parameter
- OK: Imports the objects selected and the options in the current pre-process module
of the active project.
- Cancel: Cancels the import without modifying the current project and closes the
dialog.
Notes:
· The identifiers of the imported entities are modified.

· The picked entities can be deformed by a meshing editing operation or by a
transformation, but a warning message always appears beforehand. It should be
noted that the strains and stresses of the picked elements are not modified by
these transformations.
· The material attributes of the picked objects cannot be modified, except (for the
drawbeads) restraining and opening forces and objects to which they apply.
· The objects that define the material properties of the picked elements must be
picked simultaneously with them.
· If a default contact thickness is defined in the restart file and if it has been used
by the solver, its value is always recovered in the global object (even if its
attributes are not picked) and it can no longer be modified.
· Data can be picked from several restart files. Concerning global attributes, the
last ones picked overwrite the previous ones.
· Whenever refined elements have been picked, the adaptive meshing must be
enabled (see adaptive meshing attribute of objects).
· The list of picked restart files (with access path, name and information) is kept
in the project restart file. The names of the restart files can thereby be updated if
they have been renamed or moved after having been picked.
· When a recovered object has the same name as an object that is already present
in the project, the name of the imported object will be modified by the addition
of a number.
Example:
· If an object called "Blank" is recovered in a project where there is already an

object with this name, the new object will be named "Blank 1", or if "Blank 1"
already exists, it will be named "Blank 2", etc.
PROJECT
Computed Model
SAVE DELTAMESH MODULE

This option allows the user to save an active DeltaMESH module into a new module
and eventually modify the nature of data saved.
The Save DeltaMESH module dialog
- Name: Defines the name of the new module. This name is the name displayed in the
Project dialog but not the name of the files that are saved. Usually a various number
of files are attached to a DeltaMESH module and originally have the name of the
project. When a DeltaMESH module is saved, this name is kept and incremented by
a number, and all the files that are saved, are attached to the new module.
- Save CAD entities: When checked, the CAD entities that have been used to build
the mesh are also saved.
- Save joining information: When checked, the joining information are also saved.
- Save mesh elements: When checked, the mesh is also saved.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the creation of the new DeltaMESH module and saves the various
files attached to it, and then closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Cancels the module creation and closes the dialog.
PROJECT
New Design Module
NEW DESIGN MODULE

This dialog is called up either by choosing the New / CAD Module option in the Project
menu, or by clicking on Add design module option in the right-click menu which
appears when pointing Meshing label (Project tab).
A module contains the geometry, topology and elements corresponding to a meshing
strategy imported or obtained by PAM-DIEMAKER or eventually transferred from a
DeltaMESH module. The New module name field allows the user to enter a name for
the module or to confirm the name assigned by default.
The notion of 'design module' is a convenient way to test various strategies for the
meshing of a part. Often, the same geometry is used to generate different meshes in
different modules, using different criteria or different meshing rules. Therefore, in a
project the user will have at his disposal several meshes that he could transfer to the pre-
processing session.
A contextual menu can also appear by a right-click on Design module label. It is
possible to:
- Transfer mesh to: another module that could be
· New design module: It is an easy way to copy the current module with another
name and to perform other meshing operations.
· Set up: The set up module is the pre-processing module. In this module the user
defines the process either by using a pre-defined macro-command or by
assigning directly the attributes to the press components.
· one of the design modules currently in the project.
- Activate a previous created module using Set as active option (a double-click on its
name is equivalent).
- Rename a previous created module with Rename.
- Delete a previous created module using Remove option.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the creation of the module and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without creating any module
PROJECT
New Design Module
MESHING – IMPORT TAB

With this dialog, CAD files can be imported. After importation, one or several objects
will be created. These objects are a set of 3D curves or surfaces (CAD) and can be
joined and meshed using the mesh generator DeltaMESH Stamping. These objects are
thus completed with elements, faces, edges or nodes.
It is advisable to read the "Recommendations for surfacic CAD model Exchange from
CAD SYSTEMS to DeltaMESH Stamping" Section of the User’s Guide before any CAD
surface meshing. This section presents the description of entities and also the CAD
export options for different softwares (CATIA, UNIGRAPHICS, PRO ENGINEER,…)
Function
button
The Meshing Dialog - Import tab
This dialog is divided in three tabs presented from left to right in the order the user can
logically perform the operations:
- Import: This tab enables the user to choose the file(s) containing a CAD model that
he wants to import, to define the parameters used in the import (format, entities,
tolerance) and to launch execution of the import session.
- Joining (see explanation in the related Section).
- Meshing (see explanation in the related Section).
At the end of this section are described the Function Buttons commons to all tabs.
PROJECT
Meshing – Import Tab
General
DeltaMESH can import CAD files in the following formats: IGES, UNISURF, and
VDA. The resulting geometry is transferred to the PAM-STAMP 2G's active model.
The CAD files can be imported one by one, or in groups. In all cases the files must be
imported before the joining and meshing phases.
Methodology
Set up the list of files to be imported by adding/removing files from the list and define
the corresponding import parameters. Click on Import to import the entities
immediately, or on Close to store the import parameters.
Files to import
- : Allows the user to add the file(s) to import by selection in the File selector
dialog.
- : Allows the user to remove the selected file(s) from the list.
- and : Allows the user to change the order of the CAD files in the list.
- Import list: List containing all the CAD files to be imported. This list is empty
when you create a CAD module, and after the launch of a DeltaMESH import
session (there are no files left to import).
Parameters
This panel displays the import parameters of the selected CAD file(s). These parameters
have been updated in the Import parameters dialog, once the user has selected his file
from the File selector. However, they can be modified directly by double clicking on
the chosen parameter in the Parameters tree.
Notes:
· It is impossible to import files with different unit systems in the same session.
· PAM-STAMP 2G checks whether geometry, topology or meshes are present in
the module.
· If a topology or mesh is already present in the module, a warning is displayed:
Topological entities and the mesh will be deleted if the user starts the import
session.
· If a geometry is present in the module, a warning message is displayed: The
user can either delete the existing geometrical entities or add to them.
PROJECT
Meshing – Import Tab
Function Buttons
- Import, Join, Mesh: Each tick-box defines if the action corresponding to a tab is
performed when the Apply button is pressed. If only one tick-box is activated, the
"Apply" button is renamed with the name of the corresponding action (see figure
The Meshing Dialog - Import tab).
- Advanced parameters: This button opens the Advanced Parameters dialog that
allows the user to configure advanced values used for importing, joining and
meshing operations. This is the same dialog that allows the user to set default values
(accessed from the customize menu) except that when it is accessed from the
DeltaMESH® Stamping dialog, all parameters specific to filleting operations are
grayed out.
- Apply: This button launches the action defined in each tab if the buttons Import,
Join and Mesh are activated. The run dialog is displayed.
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any actions (all the parameters setting
is saved until a next launch).
PROJECT
Import Parameters
IMPORT PARAMETERS
This dialog is called up when a user selects one (or several) file(s) to import.
The Import Parameters dialog
Parameters
- Defines the tolerance value for reading the CAD file. This value is given in the
model length unit and must be positive (default value is: 0.1). Depending on the
tolerance value, DeltaMESH builds a geometrical model with following
characteristics:
· Surfaces smaller than the tolerance are filtered out (eliminated),
· 3D curves shorter than the tolerance are eliminated from surfaces boundaries,
· Tangent curves are merged to build longer curves,
· Surface boundaries are closed,
· Surfaces groups or curves groups are created according to CAD file group
entities.
- Prefer 3D boundaries: Makes it possible to prefer the faces boundaries' 3D definition
to parametric definition of faces boundaries when DeltaMESH cannot make the
choice automatically.
PROJECT
Import Parameters
Entities
The user defines here the object type that he wants to mesh. The surface option is used
to mesh a surface model and for generate triangular and quadrangular elements. The
Lines option is used to mesh curves (for example for drawbead simulation) and generate
bar elements. The default value is surfaces.
Groups by
This panel allows the user to choose how the CAD surfaces will be grouped into object
according to the following common characteristics:
- Entities: Takes (or not) into account the predefined groups in the CAD file (IGES
402 form 7; VDA Group; UNISURF Family).
- IGES Level: Takes (or not) into account the predefined groups in the IGES file by
the “level” field (5th field of IGES entities) present in each geometric entity
definition.
- IGES Color: Takes (or not) into account the predefined groups in the IGES file by
the “color” field (13th field of IGES entities) present in each geometric entity
definition.
When VDA or UNISURF files are selected, only the Entities toggle is available.
- For IGES, the default value is Entities.
Function Buttons
- Add: Enables to add the selected file(s) to the list of the Import tab of the Meshing
dialog and to close the Import parameters dialog.
- Cancel: Closes this dialog and stops the import process.
Note:
· If the user has selected simultaneously several CAD model files in File selector,
the import parameters setting will be applied to each file.
· Import parameters can be also modified directly by double clicking on the
chosen parameter in the "Parameters" tree of The Meshing Dialog - Import tab.
PROJECT
Meshing – Joining Tab
MESHING – JOINING TAB

This dialog is divided into three tabs presented from left to right in the order the user
can perform logically the operations:
- Import: (see explanation in the related Section).
- Joining: This tab provides the management of the joining phase by defining the
object to join. It enables the user to select objects whose surfaces and 3D curves
will be joined together, to display and to modify the general joining parameters.
- Meshing (see explanation in the related Section).
The Meshing Dialog - Joining tab
PROJECT
General
In this phase, a topological model is automatically constructed by DeltaMESH from the
geometrical model created beforehand in the CAD file import phase. This construction
consists in joining patches from the geometry. The construction of the topological
model is a very significant step to obtain a mesh with a good quality. The topology can
be checked by displaying the free edges of surfaces (Show Surfaces Free Edges option
can be activated through the right-click menu in a 3D window). A connected surface
only has one closed free edge, which is the boundary surface.
The result of the description of the topology is stored in the DeltaMESH database. The
free edges are transferred to PAM-STAMP 2G (these are the results of the joining
session).
Methodology
The user can choose to join the whole model or only certain objects (and, in this case,
set up the list of objects to be joined by adding/removing objects). He can display and
modify, in the "parameters" tree, the joining parameters which correspond to the whole
model or to the object selected in the list. If he clicks on Join button, objects will be
joined immediately, or if he clicks on Close button, the joining parameters will be
stored.
Objects to Join
- : Adds an object to the list by opening the Add object for joining dialog.
- : Removes a previously selected object from the list.

- Apply to all objects: If this option is selected, the list of objects is deactivated since
the surfaces and curves of all the objects will be joined. It is the default status, and
this is the method used to join all module's geometry.
Notes:
· If this tick-box is not selected, each object in the list will be joined together.
· Join list: Displays the list of objects whose surfaces will be joined together.
This list is empty prior to the first DeltaMESH joining session and after each
launch of a joining session (once the objects have been joined).
PROJECT
Parameters
This panel displays, in a list, the joining parameters of the selected objects. If the user
double clicks on an object of this list, then the Joining parameter dialog is displayed to
modify the parameters of the selected object.
Notes:
· If the Apply to all objects check box is selected, these parameters apply to the
whole geometrical model. Otherwise they correspond to the selected object(s) in
the list and can be updated in the Joining parameter dialog. In this case, only the
surfaces and 3D curves of objects in the list will be joined. The user can modify
these parameters directly.
· PAM-STAMP 2G checks whether topology and mesh are present in the active
module.
· If a mesh is already present in the active module, a warning message is
displayed: mesh entities will be deleted if the user starts the joining session.
· If a topology is present in the active module, a warning message is displayed:
the user can either delete the existing topological entities or add to them.
Function Buttons
- Import, Join, Mesh: Each button defines if the action corresponding to a tab is
performed when the Apply button is pressed. If only one checkbox is activated, the
The Meshing Dialog - Joining tab).
grayed out.
- Apply: This button launches the action defined in each tab if the check boxes
Import, Join and Mesh are activated. The run dialog is displayed.
Add Object for Joining and Joining Parameters Dialogs

The two dialogs shown below are respectively opened by clicking once on the
button, and by double clicking on a parameter in the Joining tab of the Meshing dialog.
PROJECT
It enables the user to add an object to the list in the Joining tab and eventually edit its
joining parameters.
The Add Object for Joining dialog The Joining Parameters dialog
Objects to join
The list contains all the structure objects of the current CAD module. The selected
objects will be added in the list of objects to join together. Click to select all
objects; click to invert the selection in the list.
Parameters
Panel containing the object's joining attributes.
- Joining tolerance: minimal absolute joining tolerance used during the first step of
the joining session. This parameter makes it possible to join generally 90% of the
geometrical model without any degeneration of this one. If the distance between
two contiguous edges of two surfaces is lower than this value, these two edges will
be connected (default value: 0.1).
- Minimum feature size: This is the minimal size of the geometrical details that will
not be deleted during the joining session (default value: 0.5). This value is used
· to join the remaining free edges of the first step which the reattachment distance
is lower than this value
· to correct the erroneous faces which present a thin zones
· to define the maximum size of the thin surfaces that could be eliminated during
this session.
- Automatic deletion of thin surfaces: This toggle makes it possible to
activate/deactivate the elimination of the thin surfaces that could induce a bad
quality mesh (default value: activated). A face is considered as a thin surface if its
width is smaller than the “Minimum Feature size” value.
PROJECT
- Automatic deletion of duplicated surfaces: This toggle permits to activate/deactivate

the detection and the elimination of the duplicated surfaces
(default value: activated).
Function Buttons
- Add: To add an object to the joining list, select it in the list (directly or by clicking
on it in the active view), and then enter its parameters. Finally click on the Add
button. If the joining parameters correspond to what is required, you can double-
click on the object's name in the list to automatically place it in the list of the
Joining tab of the Meshing dialog and close this dialog.
Note that if the object was already displayed in the list, it will be deleted and
redisplayed at the bottom of the list.
- Close: Cancels the operation and returns to Joining tab of the Meshing dialog.
PROJECT
MESHING – MESHING TAB

This dialog is divided into three tabs presented from left to right in the order the user
have to logically perform the operations:
- Import: (see explanation in the related Section).
- Joining: (see explanation in the related Section).
- Meshing: Meshing consists in defining the discretization criteria on the topological
model and then automatically meshing geometric entities (surfaces and curves).
The Meshing Dialog - Meshing tab
General
Files to import have been defined (Import phase) and the topological model has been
created (Joining phase). Then this new phase starts the DeltaMESH meshing session
that will automatically generate meshing of the selected geometric entities.
It consists to define the discretization criteria:
PROJECT
Meshing – Meshing Tab
- the type of meshing algorithm,

- the minimum and maximum sizes of the elements,
- the maximum distance between the elements and the geometry (chordal error),
- the maximum angle between two adjacent elements (angle criteria),
- and to define the meshing post-treatment parameters (Automatic remeshing) for
each object or for groups of objects.
Continuity of the mesh between each surface is ensured automatically on the surface
edges where joining has been performed beforehand. The result of the mesh description
is stored in the DeltaMESH database. The nodes and elements are transferred to
PAM-TAMP 2G.
Methodology
The user can choose to mesh the whole model or only certain objects (in this case, the
user must set up the list of objects to be meshed by adding/removing objects). He can
displays and modifies, in the tree, the meshing parameters which correspond to the
whole model or to the selected objects in the list. Then, it is enough to click on Mesh
button for launching immediately DeltaMESH meshing session or on Close button for
storing meshing parameters.
Objects to Mesh
- : Adds an object to the list by opening the Add object for meshing dialog.
- : Removes a previously selected object from the list.

- Apply to all objects: If this option is selected, the list of objects is deactivated and
all objects' surfaces and curves will be meshed. It is the default status, and this is the
method used to mesh all the imported CAD geometry.
Note:
· If this tick-box is not selected, each object in the list will be meshed seperately.
- Objects to mesh list: Displays the list of objects the user wants to mesh.
- Assign all criteria before meshing: This option affects the meshing as follows: the
meshing parameters are applied to the surfaces and 3D curves belonging to the
listed objects. If the toggle is selected, the parameters are smoothed at the
intersections between the entities belonging to all the objects in the list before they
are meshed. If the toggle is not selected, then the parameters are applied to each
object's entities and the mesh is computed immediately on these entities. The
parameters used at the intersection between the two objects will be those of the first
object in the list, not the average values.
PROJECT
Parameters
This panel displays, in a list, the meshing parameters of the selected objects. If the user
double clicks on an object of this list, then the Meshing parameter dialog is displayed to
modify the parameters of the selected object.
Note:
· If the Apply to all objects option is selected, these parameters apply to the
overall model’s geometry and have the default values defined in the Options
dialog. Otherwise they correspond to the selected object(s) in the list and can
be updated in the Meshing parameter dialog.
In this case, only the surfaces and 3D curves of objects in the list will be
meshed. These parameters can be modified by double clicking in the tree.
Function Buttons
- Import, Join, Mesh: Each button defines if the action corresponding to a tab is
performed when the Apply button is pressed. If only one checkbox is activated, the
The Meshing Dialog - Meshing tab).
grayed out.
- Apply: This button launches the action defined in each tab if the check boxes
Import, Join and Mesh are activated. The run dialog is displayed.
Add Object for Meshing and Meshing Parameters Dialogs

The two dialogs shown below are respectively opened by clicking once on the
button, and by double clicking on a parameter in the Meshing tab of the Meshing dialog.
It enables the user to add an object to the list in the Meshing dialog and eventually edit
its meshing parameters.
PROJECT
The Add Object for Meshing dialog The Meshing parameters dialog
Objects to mesh
The list contains all the structure objects of the current CAD module. The selected
objects will be added in the list of objects to mesh. Click to deselect all objects;
click to invert the selection objects in the list.
PROJECT
Algorithm
- Algorithm: Drop-down list where several meshing algorithms are defined. They
ensure that the geometric constraints of the different areas are automatically
satisfied for the stamping simulation. The meshing algorithms are the following:
· Parametric: A regular mesh generator in the parametric space, which puts the
priority on compliance with the natural lines of CAD surfaces (default).
· Uniform: A free mesh generator in the 3D space that puts the priority on the
shape quality of the elements without constraints in relation to the parametric
definition of surfaces. The size of the elements is uniform within each surface.
· Progressive: A free mesh generator in the 3D space that puts the priority on the
definition of surfaces. The size of the elements varies according to the
Progression ratio, which defines the size ratio between two adjacent elements.
- Progression ratio: Defines the progress coefficient for the progressive algorithm
(default value: 1.2).
- Quad surfaces detection: Automatically detects surfaces with 3 or 4 sides (active by
default). Once detected, these surfaces have priority for meshing.
- Density variation: Defines the density variation of the element size between
surfaces detected by the option Quad surfaces detection (default value: 1.2).
- Nodes only: Generates nodes without the elements (inactive by default). Useful if a
surface or a curve cannot be meshed.
Size
This panel is used to control the size of the element.
- Minimum size: Minimum element size for an object.(default value: 0.1).
- Maximum size: Maximum element size for an object (default value: 30).
Chordal Error
The chordal error is the Maximum distance between a point located in an element plane
and the model geometry that must be preserved when meshing.
- Active: The maximum chordal error test is activated (active by default value).
- Follow isoparametrics:
· When activated the maximum chordal error test is performed along the
isoparametric curves (default).
· When deactivated the maximum chordal error test is performed on the surface.
PROJECT
- Maximum distance: Maximum authorized value for the chordal error (default value:
0.15).
Angle Criteria
This parameter defines the Maximum angle between two adjacent elements for meshing
within the same surface and/or the same 3D curve.
- Active: The test for the maximum angle error between 2 normals of elements is
activated (by default).
- Follow isoparametrics: If the Active toggle is activated:
· If Follow isoparametrics is activated the angle error test is performed along the
isoparametric curves (by default).
· If Follow isoparametrics is not activated the angle error test is performed on the
surface.
- Maximal angle: If the Active toggle is activated, it is the maximum authorized value
for the angle error (in degrees) - (default value: 15).
Automatic remeshing
This functionality makes it possible to activate a meshing post-treatment. This
functionality permits to detect the faces which may present a bad quality mesh and to
remesh them automatically with a new meshing strategy.
- Active: The meshing post treatment is activated (by default).
- Angle between elements: this threshold permits to detect the surfaces such that the
angle between element normals is greater than this threshold value (30° by default).
However, the faces situated along geometrical sharp edges will not be detected.
- Warping: this threshold permits to detect the surfaces containing elements with
warping greater than this value (15° by default).
- Area: this threshold permits to detect the surfaces containing elements whose area is
lower than this value (0.001 by default).
Function Buttons
- Add: To add an object to the meshing list, select it in the list (directly or by clicking
on it in the active view), and then enter its parameters. Finally click on the Add
button. If the mesh parameters correspond to what is required, you can double-click
on the object's name in the list to automatically place it in the list of the Meshing tab
of the Meshing dialog and close this dialog.
Note that if the object was already displayed in the list, it will be deleted and
redisplayed at the bottom of the list.
- Close: Cancels the operation and returns to Meshing tab of the Meshing dialog.
PROJECT
IMPORT OF CAD MODEL

This dialog is called up either by choosing the Import / CAD in the Project menu or by
clicking on button of data setup toolbar, if your current module is a design

module or a setup module of QUIKSTAMP (Full Process) or PAMSTAMP project.
You will here import a CAD model, mesh it and transfer the results into a destination
module.
The Import of CAD model dialog
Destination
By default, the current module is selected. The user selects his choice (module of the
current project). If the choice is a design module, the mesh can be added in an existing
module by selecting it in the drop list, or put in a new one by entering a new name. If
the destination module is a meshing module, this will be the “temporary meshing
module”.
Temporary meshing module

- Name: In all case, not depending on the destination module, a new meshing module
is created; its name is given as the “temporary meshing module” name.
Functions Buttons
If the destination module is not a meshing module the following buttons for defining the
transfer are displayed:
PROJECT
Import of CAD MODEL
- Automatic transfer: After meshing in the temporary meshing module, all new
entities are automatically transferred in the destination module and this module is
loaded.
- Custom transfer: After meshing in the temporary meshing module, a dialog is
prompted to ask the user if he finally wants to transfer to a destination module, and
then the transfer mesh to dialog is displayed for letting the user choose entities and
objects to transfer.
- Cancel: Cancels the import and closes the dialog.
If the destination module is a meshing module the following buttons are displayed:
- OK: Leads to the import-meshing dialog.
- Cancel: Cancels the import and closes the dialog.
PROJECT
Import of CAD MODEL
INVERSE IMPORT
General
This dialog controls DeltaMESH Stamping Inverse. This is a patch independent mesh
generator that makes it possible to create a mesh with a finite element quality.
The generation of this mesh consists to import either a CAD model or a DeltaMESH
geometrical database and to join it (topological model creation). From this topological
model, DeltaMESH Stamping Inverse will create zones from connected faces groups
(for example, blank holder, …). Inside a zone, the boundaries of internal faces are not
considered for the discretization. Thus, we obtain a mesh coarser than
DeltaMESH Stamping mesh but with a finite element quality.
Methodology
The user can choose to mesh either a CAD model or a DeltaMESH geometrical
database. The session will consist to generate a mesh without any other interactive
manipulations. The mesh generator can be controlled with few parameters. Then, it is
enough to click on Import button for launching immediately DeltaMESH meshing
session or on Close button for storing meshing parameters.
File
The user can select an .igs, a .vda file or a DeltaMESH geometrical database to import.
The button brings up the File selector dialog.
PROJECT
Inverse import
Meshing
satisfied. The meshing algorithms are the following:
- Uniform: A free mesh generator in the 3D space that puts the priority on the shape
quality of the elements without constraints in relation to the parametric definition of
surfaces. The size of the elements is uniform within each zone.
- Progressive: A free mesh generator in the 3D space that puts the priority on the
definition of surfaces. The size of the elements varies according to the Progression
ratio, which defines the size ratio between two adjacent elements.
- Minimum element size: Minimum element size for an object.(default value: 5).
- Maximum element size: Maximum element size for an object (default value: 10).
- Chordal error: The chordal error parameter defines the maximum distance between
elements and exact geometry. (default value: 0.3). Deactivated by default.
- Angle criterion: The angle parameter defines the maximum angle between two
adjacent elements normals attached to the same zone (default value: 30°).
Deactivated by default.
- The button calls the DeltaMESH inverse parameters dialog that

allows the user to configure advanced values used for importing, joining, part
creation and meshing operations.
Function Buttons
- Import: This button launches the following actions:
- Import the geometrical model,
- Join the geometrical model,
- Create the zones on the part,
- Mesh the zones.
PROJECT
Inverse import
DeltaMesh inverse parameters

This dialog allows the user to interactively change some general
DeltaMESH® Stamping Inverse parameters.
This dialog can be called with the Advanced button situated in the Inverse import dialog.
CAD import
- Reading tolerance: tolerance value for reading the CAD file. This value is given in
the model length unit and must be positive (default value is: 0.1). Depending on the
tolerance value, DeltaMESH builds a geometrical model with following
characteristics:
PROJECT
Inverse import
· Surfaces smaller than the tolerance are filtered out (eliminated),

· 3D curves shorter than the tolerance are eliminated from surfaces boundaries,
· Tangent curves are merged to build longer curves,
· Surface boundaries are closed,
· Surfaces groups or curves groups are created according to CAD file group
entities
- Model space: Size of the space containing the CAD model (in the automobile sector,
4,000 mm is a common value). The system's precision will be calibrated according
to this parameter. The minimum authorized value for tolerances or dimensions
specified in DeltaMESH Stamping (import tolerance, joining tolerance, element
size, etc.) is computed based on this parameter and is equal to: « Reference space »
x 10-5 (i.e. default value: 0.04).
Important notice:
· Therefore it is very important to modify this parameter if the size of the relevant
part is very different from 4000, or if another unit of measurement is used
(meter, inch, etc.).
(Default value: 4000)
Joining
- Joining tolerance: minimal absolute joining tolerance used during the first step of
the joining session. This parameter makes it possible to join generally 90% of the
geometrical model without any degeneration of this one. If the distance between
two contiguous edges of two surfaces is lower than this value, these two edges will
be connected (default value: 0.1).
- Minimum feature size: This is the minimal size of the geometrical details that will
not be deleted during the joining session (default value: 0.5). This value is used
· to join the remaining free edges of the first step which the reattachment distance
is lower than this value
· to correct the erroneous faces which present a thin zones
· to define the maximum size of the thin surfaces that could be eliminated during
this session.
Zone definition
- Zone tolerance: It is the larger size of geometric details that won’t be deleted during
the creation of Zones. If in the initial geometric model, there are some holes which
size is inferior to this parameter value, it will not be taken into account during zones
creation. These holes won’t appear in the meshing model. This parameter must be
inferior to the Minimal element size. (default value:0.1)
PROJECT
Inverse import
Meshing
satisfied. The meshing algorithms are the following:
· Uniform: A free mesh generator in the 3D space that puts the priority on the
definition of surfaces. The size of the elements is uniform within each surface
(activated by default).
· Progressive: A free mesh generator in the 3D space that puts the priority on the
definition of surfaces. The size of the elements varies according to the
Progression ratio, which defines the size ratio between two adjacent elements.
- Progression ratio: Defines the progress coefficient for the progressive algorithm
(default value: 1.2).
Size
- Minimum size: Minimum element size for an object.(default value: 5).
Chordal Error
- Active: The maximum chordal error test is activated (deactivated by default value).
0.3).
Angle Criteria
This parameter defines the Maximum angle between two adjacent elements for meshing
within the same zone.
activated (deactivated by default).
Function Buttons
- OK: Apply
PROJECT
Information on the Project
INFORMATION ON THE PROJECT

This option gives information on the structure of the project. A scrolling window allows
the user to consult the detailed structure of the project.
The Information on project dialog
Information on a Project
Present if the active module is a meshing, pre-process or post-process module.
Information available are the following:
- Solver
- Title.
- Comments.
- File name and location.
- List of CAD-Meshing.
- Pre-process present in the project (yes or no).
PROJECT
- Input file present in the project (yes or no).

- Number of restart files present in the project.
- History file present in the project (yes or no).
- Solver messages file present in the project (yes or no).
- Post-process configuration file (yes or no).
- List of states with the progression variable value
Information on a Meshing Module

In the case where the active module is a meshing module.
- Project name.
- Module name.
- Import : list of imported CAD files.
- Curves:
· Total number of curves.
· Number of meshed curves.
· Number of non meshed curves.
· Number of unsuccessful meshes.
- Surfaces:
· Total number of surfaces.
· Number of meshed surfaces.
· Number of non meshed surfaces.
· Number of unsuccessful meshes.
- Topology:
· Number of free edges of surface.
- Meshing:
· Total number of elements.
· Number of bars.
· Number of 3 node plates.
· Number of 4 node plates.
· Number of connected nodes.
· Number of free nodes.
PROJECT
- Objects:
· List of objects with their names, the number of curves, surfaces and elements
that they contain.
Information on the Active Module

- Only in post-process (Solver information):
· State number.
· Type of progression variable and value.
- In pre and in post-process:
· Entities:
Number of nodes (including mid-nodes, 0 if non adaptive).
Total number of elements.
Number of bars.
Number of 3-node plates.
Number of 4-node plates.
Number of bricks.
Number of brick faces.
Number of edges.
Number of 3D curves.
· Objects content:
List of objects with the number of entities that they contain.
Function Button
PROJECT
RESTART FILES
This option allows the user to modify the access pathway to the restart files in which he
has picked entities. This is useful if the files have been displaced since or in the case of
change of the disk mounting point.
The Picking dialog
Description
- Restart files: List of files in which entities were picked.
- Host: Name of the machine containing the selected file.
- Path: The directory in the host computer where is located the restart file.
- Information (cannot be edited): Describes the selected file (progression type, the
value of the progression, list of picked objects).
Function buttons
- Apply: Modifies the path and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog.
PROJECT
Transfer Mesh to
TRANSFER MESH TO
This dialog is called up either by choosing the Transfer mesh to / Design Module or /Set
up options in the Project menu or by clicking on the same options in the right-click
menu which appears when pointing a meshing module in the Project tab.
It allows the user to transfer a mesh and its bearing entities:
- from a DeltaMESH module to a design module or to the set up module,
- from a design module to the set up module.
The Transfer of mesh dialog
Objects to Transfer
This list displays the objects that can be transferred.
Entities to Transfer
It is possible to select what type of entities are transferred with the mesh:
PROJECT
Transfer Mesh to
- Nodes and elements: When checked, the mesh is transferred, i.e. nodes and
elements.
- 3D curves: When checked, the 3D curves are transferred.
- Surfaces: When checked, the CAD surfaces are transferred. Note that CAD
surfaces cannot be transferred to the set up module. In this case this option is grayed
out.
Design Part
The layout of this panel changes depending where the mesh is transferred (see below).
Transfer from a DeltaMESH module to a Transfer to the set up module

design module
Design part
The mesh is transferred to a design module.

- Add mesh to design part: When checked and if the module does not have already a
design part, the user enters a name for the new design part. When checked and if the
module has already a design part, the mesh is added to the design part the name of
which is displayed in the field. When unchecked, the mesh is only transferred but
not assigned.
- Remove previous part's mesh: When checked, the mesh that was assigned to the
design part is removed.
Design part
The mesh is transferred to a set up module.

- Add mesh to object: When checked it is possible to choose in the list the object into
which the mesh will be added. If a name is entered a new object will be created
with the mesh attached. When unchecked, the mesh is transferred and assigned to
the 'Other' object.
- Remove previous part's mesh: When checked, the mesh that was assigned to the
object chosen is removed.
Functions Buttons
- Transfer & load: Validates the transfer, loads the module transfer to and closes the
dialog.
PROJECT
Transfer Mesh to
- Transfer: Validates the transfer and closes the dialog.
PRINT SETUP
This dialog makes it possible to print in a file from the following graphic windows:
- Active 3D view.
- 2D section of the active project.
- Forming Limit Diagram of the active project.
It is also used to specify the printer and printer properties. The user cannot, however,
save print options; he must reset print options every time he prints. To see the results of
the changes immediately, click Preview in the Project menu.
The Print dialog
Printer
This panel specifies the printer that is currently connected.
- Name: Selects the printer to use. The information that appears below the Printer
panel applies to the selected printer.
- Status: Describes the state of the selected printer, such as busy or idle.
- Type: Specifies the type of printer that is connected.
- Where: Identifies the location of the printer, if the printer is connected to a network
printer, or the port on the user's computer if it is a local printer.
- Comment: Specifies a comment about the connected printer.
PROJECT
Print Setup
- Properties: Calls up a dialog where the options of the selected printer can be
changed. The settings specified in this dialog apply to the active project. They may
also affect print settings in other programs in use.
Paper
This panel specifies the Size (A4, B5,…) of the paper and its Source (paper tray).
Orientation
This panel defines the orientation of the plot on the page. The default status is Portrait
(vertical orientation). It can be switched to Landscape (horizontal orientation).
Function Buttons
- Network: Brings up a dialog to select the printer on the internal network.
- OK: Applies the settings to the printer.
- Cancel: Cancels the printing.
PROJECT
Print Setup
EDIT
EDIT MENU
The Edit menu

The Edit menu provides the following functions:
- Undo: A one-step undo function is available for most of the actions (shortcut: Ctrl +
Z keys).
- Select All: Selects all visible entities in the active 3D window (shortcut: Ctrl + A
keys).
- Deselect All: Deselects all selected entities.
- Invert Selection: Deselects all selected entities and selects all visible non-selected
entities.
- Selection Tools: This sub-menu groups advanced selection tools:
· Propagation: Selects nodes, edges and elements by propagation criteria.
· Geometry: Selects elements, nodes and edges according to various geometrical
or topological criteria.
· Labels: Selects entities by label.
· Objects: Selects entities of objects picked in a list.
· Contour: Selects entities within a range of contour values (available for post-
processing only). This item is disabled if no contour is displayed.
· Plane: Selects entities that are “close” to a plane.
Note:
· All the selection tools listed above can be activated using either the Selection
toolbar or the Selection dialog.
EDIT
Edit Menu
SELECTION BY PROPAGATION
This dialog is used to select the entities (nodes, edges or elements) by a propagation
algorithm.
The Selection by propagation dialog
Description
- Entity type: There are different propagation modes for each type of entity. The
available modes are enabled according to the chosen type. Once the type is selected,
the picking button is automatically activated (3D picking).
· Elements: Propagation is performed via the displayed elements. Only displayed
elements affected by propagation (connected to the starting element) will be
selected.
· Nodes: Propagation is performed via the displayed elements and edges. Only
nodes affected by propagation (connected to the starting node) will be selected.
· Edges: Propagation is performed via the displayed elements and edges. Only
edges affected by propagation (connected to the starting edge) will be selected.
- Start from: Label of the element or node from which the propagation algorithm is
starting. It can also be picked (see below). Note that for the edge type this field is
grayed out.
EDIT
Selection by Propagation
- 3D Picking: According to the type selected in the Entity Type drop-down list a
different picking button is displayed to select the starting entity:
· : Elements.
· : Node.
· : Edges.
Pick an entity in the 3D view, and then the propagation will automatically be
performed. The picked entity will always be selected.
- Propagation Criterion:
· None: Selects all the elements (or nodes, or edges) connected to the starting
element (nodes, edges).
· Maximal Angle Variation: Propagation takes place from the starting element to
another if they have a common node and if the angle between their normals does
not exceed the value (in degrees) entered in the text field. If the chosen type is
edge (or node) then the edges (or nodes) of the elements met through the
propagation will be selected.
· Maximal Contour Value Variation (not yet implemented): Propagation takes
place from one entity to another if they have a common node and if the
difference between their two contour values does not exceed the value entered in
the text field. Only the entities which contour is valid can be selected. The
contour value must be displayed (3D View).
· Minimal Sharp Angle: Select the edges that belong to two shell elements which
angle (in degrees) between their normals is greater than the value entered in the
adjacent text field. Propagation takes place from edge A to edge B if they have
one common node N, if they both verify the angle criterion and if node "N" only
belongs to two edges that verify the angle criterion: A and B.
Function Buttons
- Select: Applies the selection of the entities according to the type and propagation
criterion filled in the above panel. Usually propagation is automatic, but if the user
changes entity label manually, the Select button updates the selection.
- Cancel: Cancels the selection and closes the dialog.
EDIT
Selection by Propagation
SELECTION BY GEOMETRY
This dialog allows the user to select elements, shells, edges, nodes or surfaces’
elements according to topological or geometrical characteristics.
Element
The Geometry dialog – Element tab
In the Criterion panel, elements can be selected by a tick box according to the following
characteristics:
- Characteristic Length: Selection of elements which characteristic length is lower
than the indicated value. This length is used by the program to determine the
stability time step of each element. For elements with the same material property
and a low thickness with respect to the characteristic length, the stability time step is
proportional to the characteristic length.
- Volume: Selection of 3D elements which volume is lower than the indicated value.
- Area: Selection of 2D elements which area is lower than the value indicated in the
text field.
- Length: Selection of 1D elements shorter than the indicated value.
- Double elements: Selection of double elements (with the same connectivities).
EDIT
Selection by Geometry
Shell
The Geometry dialog – Shell tab
In the Criterion panel, shell elements (4-node or 3-node) can be selected by a tick box
according to the following characteristics:
- Min inner angle: Selection of 2D elements which minimum inner angle (in degrees)
is lower than the indicated value.
- Max inner angle: Selection of 2D elements which maximum inner angle (in degrees)
is greater than the indicated value.
- Warping: Selection of 4-node elements which warp angle is greater than the
indicated value. For each corner, the vector normal to the two edges is determined.
The value corresponds to the maximum angle (in degrees) between two of these
vectors (which indicates the elements level of twisting).
EDIT
Edge
The Geometry dialog – Edge tab
In the Criterion panel, edges can be selected by a tick box according to the following
characteristics:
- Length: Selection of edges which are shorter than the indicated value.
- Angle: Selection of edges contained shared by two 2D elements. Note that the angle
of the free edges is 0. The edge is selected if the angle (in degrees) between the
normal of these two elements is greater than the indicated value.
- Curvature radius: Selection of edges which curvature radius is lower than the
indicated value.
EDIT
Node
The Geometry dialog – Node tab
In the Criterion panel, nodes can be selected by a tick box according to the following
characteristics:
- Free nodes: Selection of displayed nodes that are not connected to any element.
- Double nodes: Selection of double nodes. When nodes are “close” to each other (i.e
the distance between them is lower than the tolerance entered in the text field) then
those nodes are selected.
EDIT
Surface
The Geometry dialog – Surface tab
In the Criterion panel, elements of CAD surfaces can be selected according to the
following characteristics:
- Undercut: Selection of all surface elements if at least one element of this surface
presents an angle with a reference vector (see the Direction control) greater than the
indicated value.
- Direction: Defines the reference vector for undercut either by using the help of the
wizard or by typing its components in the text fields.
Function buttons
- Select: Applies the selection of entities according to the chosen criteria.
- Close: Cancels the selection and closes the dialog.
EDIT
Selection by Label
SELECTION BY LABEL
This dialog is used to select visible entities by entering their label. To identify an entity
label, the user can activate the Info pointer option in the View menu and then read the
label of the entity in the Status bar when moving the mouse cursor over the entity.
The Selection by label dialog
- Entity Type: User selects the type of selected entities in this combo.
- All: All the entities of the chosen type are selected.
- Range: All the entities of the chosen type, which label is in a given range, are
selected.
- List: All the entities of the chosen type, which labels are entered in the list, are
selected. Labels must be separated by a blank character or tabulation or " ; " or " , ".
Function Buttons
- Select: Applies the selection of the entities according to the labels entered in the
above panel.
EDIT
Selection by Label
SELECTION BY LIST OF OBJECTS

This dialog box enables the user to select the visible entities of one or several objects
chosen from a list.
The Select Objects dialog
Objects
List containing all the objects of the current project.
Function buttons
- Select: Applies the selection to the visible entities of the object(s) picked in the list.
EDIT
Selection by Contour Value
SELECTION BY CONTOUR VALUE

This dialog is used to select the elements, edges or nodes that have a contour value
within a given range. This option is grayed out if none of the contour types is selected in
the Contours tab of the Analysis dialog.
The Selection by contour value dialog
- From: Enter the lower bound of the contour.

- To: Enter the upper bound of the contour.
Function Buttons
- Select: Select the entities which contour value is within the value range entered in
the above panel.
EDIT
Selection by Contour Value
SELECTION BY PLANE
This dialog is used to select visible entities (edges, elements, nodes, or 3D curves),
which are ‘close’ to a given plane.
The Selection by Plane dialog
- Plane: Select the plane in this combo box.

- Tolerance: If the distance from a node/point to the plane is lower than this
tolerance, it will be “detected” by the selection function. An edge or an element will
be selected if all its nodes are detected. A 3D curve will be selected if all its points
are detected.
Function Buttons
- Select: Selects entities according to the parameters entered in the above panel.
EDIT
Selection by Polyline
SELECTION BY POLYLINE
This dialog box enables the user to select entities by drawing a polyline in the 3D
graphical window. The polyline is projected along the screen Z-axis onto the structure
displayed, and all the entities crossed by the polyline are selected.
The Select By Polyline dialog
Entity type
Select the type of entities to grab. If an entity is crossed by the polyline it is selected. If
the entity type is Node, a node is selected if an entity (edge, element) has this node for
connectivity and is crossed by the polyline.
Polyline
This panel groups the functions that can be used to create, modify, move a polyline.
- : This button is activated by default at opening of the dialog. It is the creation

mode. Click in the 3D graphical window to define the polyline points in succession.
Terminate the polyline by double-clicking, and then the entities will be
automatically selected.
Notes:
· The entity type shall be defined before drawing the polyline. If the entity type is
modified the entities are not selected until the Select button is pressed.
· If the polyline is modified the entities are not selected until the Select button is
pressed.
· Do not apply any camera movements to the structure while drawing the
polyline. Since the polyline is drawn by projection along the screen Z-axis, any
movements would break away the polyline from the structure.
EDIT
Selection by Polyline
- : Deletes a point of the polyline. Click in the 3D graphical window onto the
polyline point to delete.
- : Moves a point of the polyline. Click in the 3D graphical window onto the
polyline point to move and drag it.
- : Moves the polyline in the screen XY plane. Click in the 3D graphical window
onto the polyline and drag it.
- New polyline: Erases the polyline and returns to the creation mode.
Function buttons
- Select: Selects the entities crossed by the polyline.
EDIT
Selection by Polygon
SELECTION BY POLYGON
This dialog box enables the user to select entities by drawing a polygon in the 3D
graphical window. The polygon is projected along the screen Z-axis onto the structure
displayed, and all the entities surrounded by the polygon are selected.
The Select By Polyline dialog
Entity type
Select the type of entities to grab within the polygon.
- If the type is “Objects”, then all the visible entities of the object must be within the
polygon to be selected.
- If the type is “Elements” or “Edges”, then to select an entity, all its nodes must be
within the polygon.
- If the type is “3D curves” , then to select a 3D curve, all its points must be within the
polygon.
Polygon
This panel groups the functions that can be used to create, modify, move a polygon.
- : This button is activated by default at opening of the dialog. It is the creation

mode. Click points in the 3D graphical window to define the polygon. Terminate the
polygon by double-clicking, the entities will be automatically selected. For example,
if the user clicks three different positions (the last being a double-click), he will
draw a triangle.
Notes:
· The entity type shall be defined before drawing the polygon. If the entity type is
modified the entities are not selected until the Select button is pressed.
EDIT
· If the polygon is modified the entities are not selected until the Select button is
pressed.
· Do not apply any camera movements to the structure while drawing the
polygon. Since the polygon is drawn by projection along the screen Z-axis, any
movements would break away the polygon from the structure.
- : Deletes a point of the polygon. Click in the 3D graphical window onto the
polygon point to delete.
- : Moves a point of the polygon. Click in the 3D graphical window onto the
polygon point to move and drag it.
- : Moves the polygon in the screen XY plane. Click in the 3D graphical window
onto the polygon and drag it.
- New polygon: Erases the polygon and returns to the creation mode.
Function buttons
- Select: Selects the entities surrounded by the polygon.
EDIT
VIEW
VIEW MENU
The View menu
The different options and functions provided by the View menu are listed below:
VIEW
View Menu
- View Manager: Displays the view manager which saves and restores custom views
of the 3D graphical window.
- Info Pointer: When the cursor of the mouse passes over an entity in a 3D view, this
entity is highlighted.
- Toolbars: Controls the display of toolbars and docking dialogs.
- Status Bar: Displays information about the current action. When the cursor of the
mouse pass over an entity in a 3D view, its type (element, edge, node), its label or
number in the whole model (L:3241), its number in the type (I:230) and eventually
its contour value are displayed. This option works only for visible entity and in the
contour case if the results have been displayed.
- Show:
· Show All: Displays all objects in the project 3D views.
· Model Origin: Displays a marker at the origin point of the model.
· Coordinate System Triad: Displays the view coordinate system with the three
main axes X, Y and Z colored in red.
· State Title: Displays in the 3D view the name of the project and the name of the
active module (CAD, Set-up or number of state in the post-processing).
· Free Nodes: This option is used to show free nodes. For various reasons
(deletion of elements for example), several points can be unconnected. Since
they are not part of any facet they are considered as free nodes. In general, they
are not displayed. Two successive activations will remove those points from the
3D view.
· Free Edges: Displays free edges of a mesh in purple.
· Multiple Edges: Displays multiple edges in a special color. Multiple edges
correspond to neighboring surfaces which normal present an important angle.
· Double Elements: Not yet implemented.
· Surface Free Edges: Displays free edges of a CAD surface in red.
· Normals: Displays the normal of elements with white arrows.
· Duplicated surfaces: Displays the duplicated surfaces, i.e. the surfaces which
were detected at the joining session as double surfaces and which will not be
· Thin surfaces: Displays the thin surfaces, i.e. the surfaces which were detected
at the joining session as too thin surfaces for the mesh and which will not be
· Remeshed surfaces: Displays the remeshed surfaces, i.e. the surfaces which
were meshed again through the “automatic remeshing” option, because of the
quality of the mesh after an initial meshing strategy.
· Control Nodes: Displays control nodes, used in the morphing module, in blue.
VIEW
View Menu
· Feature Lines: Displays feature lines, used in the morphing module, in green.
· Spotwelds: Display spotwelds in the post-processing module. Each spotweld is
represented by a 2D element plus as many as extra spotwelds (defined in the
spotweld attribute). Caution: these 2D elements may be very small.
· Locked nodes: When the attributes Boundary Condition on Points is used for
an analysis, the nodes selected in the solver can be displayed in the post-
processing module.
· Flattening Origin Curves: Displays the initial 3D curves that are used by the
flattening function.
· Flattening Projected Curves: Displays the projected 3D curves that are used by
the flattening function.
- Hide: Hides or displays objects.
· Hide Selected: Hides the objects that have been selected, from the project 3D
views.
· Hide Unselected: Hides objects that have not been selected, from the project 3D
views.
- View Links: Allows the user to move several models displayed in several 3D views
exactly in the same way.
· No link (default): Graphical manipulations are independent from a 3D view to
another.
· Link by document: All graphical transformations (rotations, translations,
zoom…) done in the active 3D view will be reported in all 3D views of the same
project.
· Link all: All graphical transformations (rotations, translations, zoom…) done in
the active 3D view will be reported in all 3D views of all opened projects.
· Synchronize: All the 3D views are synchronized on the active 3D view, i.e. the
model has the same point of view and zooming factor.
- Light Mode: Not yet implemented.
VIEW
View Menu
VIEW MANAGER
This dialog manages a list of camera settings (view). This list contains some default
views (isometric, X, -X, Y, -Y, Z, -Z) and some other views stored by the user (the
saved view is then the current camera position).
The View Manager dialog The Notes about dialog
The following function buttons are associated with this dialog:
- : Stores the camera angle and zoom factor of the active 3D graphical window.
A dialog opens to enter a name for the new view. After validation, the view is stored
in the list.
- : Deletes the selected view from the list.
- : It brings up the Notes about dialog.
- Reset zoom: Resets the zoom factor in the active 3D graphical window when
Restore button is clicked.
- Restore: Resets the camera angle and, if Reset factor is checked, zoom factor in the
active 3D graphical window to those chosen in the list.
VIEW
Toolbars
TOOLBARS
The Toolbars sub-menu
The program provides toolbars and docking dialogs for quick access to the most
commonly used commands. Toolbars can be moved to any location in the main window
and be opened or closed in any combination to suit the user’s needs. When the mouse
cursor is moved over a tool button, a text field pops up under the tool button and
displays tips about the tool.
The program offers the following toolbars and dialogs:
· Standard toolbar
· Selection toolbar
· Camera toolbar
· Views toolbar
· Measure toolbar
· Annotations toolbar
VIEW
Toolbars
· Entity Display Mode toolbar

· Diemaker
· DieTrimming
· Morphing
· Multistate and animation toolbar
· Show toolbar
· Reporting toolbar
· Normal stamping post-processor toolbar
· Springback post-processor toolbar
· Output
· Project
· Analysis
· Data Setup
· Selection
· Customize
Each Toolbar or dialog can be shown or hidden and moved anywhere in the main
window: From the View menu select Toolbars, then any of the toolbars listed above. A
checkmark next to the toolbar indicates that the toolbar is displayed.
The toolbars are also accessible through a right-click menu. To activate or deactivate a
toolbar, press the right mouse button in the toolbars area and select the required toolbar
in the menu.
The functions of the toolbar buttons are described in the following paragraph. A
“working step” description is associated with each button, except if the only action to be
performed by the user is to press the button or choose an item in a drop-down menu.
Notes:
· Toolbars are view dependent, this means that the status of the different buttons
in the toolbars depends on the view and are updated when the view becomes
active.
· Every toolbar has a title.
· The contents and the position of the different toolbars are stored in the user part
of the registry and restored the next time the user opens the application.
· When possible the common native system icons are used. For example the open,
new icons are the ones we find on Windows applications.
VIEW
Standard Toolbar
STANDARD TOOLBAR
Button Purpose
Brings up the New project dialog to create a new project.
Brings up the File Selector dialog to open PAM-Stamp files.
Saves the current model to a PAM-STAMP project (*.psp).
Arranges all open 3D windows horizontally side by side so that each model
is completely visible. This will change the position and the size of all
displayed 3D windows.
Arranges all open 3D windows vertically side-by-side so that each model is
completely visible. This will change the position and the size of all displayed
3D windows.
Arranges all open 3D windows as a cascade. This will change the position
and the size of all displayed 3D windows.
Displays the Output dialog.
Displays the About Pam-Stamp 2G dialog.
VIEW
Standard Toolbar
SELECTION TOOLBAR
Whenever a dialog of the program needs to select an entity in a view (node, element,
edge, 3D curve...) a selection mode is associated with it. A selection mode can define
the way the user picks the entity in the view but also if the entity is added or suppressed
from the selection, and eventually if a specific method of selection is applied (selection
by geometrical characteristics, by propagation…). More selection modes can also be
controlled through the Selection dialog.
Selection toolbar
Button Purpose
Entities picked are added to the selection.
Entities picked are subtracted from the selection.
Entities picked are the selection.
Selects nodes.
Selects elements.
Selects edges.
Selects 3D curves.
Selects objects.
Selects CAD surfaces.
Selects the entities cut by a polyline (in 2D). It brings up the Selection by
polyline dialog.
Selects the visible entities contained into a polygon (in 2D). It brings up the
Selection by polygon dialog.
Selects visible entities with a propagation algorithm. It brings up the

Selection by propagation dialog.
Selection by characteristics. It brings up the Geometry dialog which allows

the user to select nodes, edges and elements according to several geometrical
criteria.
Selects entities through a range of contour values (available for post-
processing only). It brings up the Selection by contour dialog.
VIEW
Selection Toolbar
Button Purpose
Selects entities intersecting a plane. It brings up the Selection by plane
dialog.
Selects entities by label. For each type of entity, the entities, whose label is
included in the finite list or in the range of identifiers specified by the user in
the Selection by label dialog, are selected.
Not yet implemented.
Selects a list of objects. The entities contained in the objects that are selected
in the Selection by list of objects dialog are added to (or removed from) the
selection.
Adds all the visible entities to the selection.
Clears the selection. This button is grayed out when the active selection is
empty.
Invert the selection.
This button is one-step undo function for any selection operation.
Opens the selection information dialog, which displays the selection content
(see the figure below).
Notes
· When an entity is selected, its color changes to white.

· For interactive single selection tools (one node, one element...), the user can
press the Ctrl or Shift key when selecting the entity. Selecting an entity with the
Ctrl key down is equivalent to pushing the button and then selecting the
entity. Selecting an entity with the Shift key down is equivalent to pushing the
button and then deselecting the entity.
VIEW
Selection Toolbar
· The user can select a lower entity even if it is not displayed. For example nodes
can be selected when only elements are displayed.
Picked Elements Edges Nodes
Displayed
Elements X X X
Edges X X
Nodes X
· The entity pointed to by the user is highlighted so that he can see what he is
about to pick (only when the Info pointer option is active).
VIEW
Camera Toolbar
CAMERA TOOLBAR
Button Purpose
- Zooms in on a rectangular area specified by its center and a corner*.
- Working steps:
- The first click specifies the center of the zoom area.
- Release the position to specify one of the corners.
- The window’s size ratio (width/height) must not be considered during the
zoom area definition.
- Zooms in on a rectangular area specified by two corners*.
- Working steps:
- The first click specifies the first corner of the zoom area.
- Release the position to specify the opposite corner.
- The window’s size ratio (width/height) must not be considered during the
Zooms out the view.
Reset the zoom*.
Automatically performs the maximum zoom-in or minimum zoom-out to
ensure all the displayed entities are visible in the 3D view, while occupying
the maximum space.
Positions the center of the view to the clicked point.
Brings up the Camera rotation dialog (see below). The + and - keys
respectively apply a positive or negative rotation of the camera (or object)
according to the Angle value. Each key action rotates the view about the
Screen axes or about Model axes (global axes).
*
This option is also available for a 2D graphical window
VIEW
Camera Toolbar
Button Purpose
Allows the user to display a perspective view of the model.

Displays each element face as a flat facet.
Blends the edges of each element face to form smooth surfaces.
Applies a light illuminating the space where the structure is displayed. This
main headlight is positioned at an infinite distance from the structure in the
upper right corner coming from behind the user.
Displays the pointer of the mouse as two dotted lines, one horizontal and the
other vertical, such as it represent a cross. This representation is available in
all 2D and 3D views.
Accelerates the movement of the model in the 3D view by displaying only is
edges in orange.
VIEW
View
VIEW
This option is used to modify custom views of the model window.
This tool manages a list of camera settings (positions). It contains some default views
(isometric, X, -X, Y, -Y, Z, -Z) and some other views that have been stored by the user
(the saved position is then the current camera position).
The user can select a position in the list to which will correspond the current camera
position, in order to save it or delete it.
Button Purpose
Isometric perspective according to the OXYZ direct trihedral (120° angle
between axes). This is the default view.
View in ZOY plane (OX away from plane).
View in XOZ plane (OY away from plane).
View in XOY plane (OZ away from plane).
View in YOZ plane (OX towards plane).
View in ZOX plane (OY towards plane).
View in YOX plane (OZ towards plane).
Enables the selection of a view saved previously by the user or of one of the
default available views within the application.
VIEW
View
MEASURE TOOLBAR
Button Purpose
- Activates a tool to measure the distance between two points. Once
activated, pick the first point and then the second point. The measure
value is then displayed either with an annotation or in the console
window
- Activates a tool to measure the length of a path defined by several points.
Once activated, pick all the points and terminate the path either by
pressing the “Return” key or by double-click during the last point
picking. The measure value is then displayed either with an annotation or
in the console window
Activates a tool to measure the radius of the circle defined by three points
and the angles of the triangle defined by these three points. Once activated,
pick the three points. The measure value is then displayed either with an
annotation or in the console window
Brings up the dialog that allows to customize the active measurement tool. In
this dialog, you can select a different type (node position or free position) for
each parameter
Resets the active measurement tool to its initial state
Enables the writing of measured values in the console window
Enables the display of measured values as graphic annotations (each new
measurement annotation replaces the previous one)
Enables the display of measured values as graphic annotations (each new
measurement annotation is added to the previous ones)
Activate a tool to pick a measurement annotation in order to delete it.
Deletes all measurement annotations
Notes:
· When picking a measure parameter, the exact position under the mouse pointer
is captured by default. If you rather want to capture the position of the nearest
node, just keep the “Shift” key pressed while picking near this node. This is a
shortcut to opening the “customize” dialog (fourth button of the toolbar)
VIEW
Annotations Toolbar
ANNOTATIONS TOOLBAR
Button Purpose
- Activates a tool to define an annotation of type “Text”. Once activated,
pick a position inside or outside the model and set the annotation
attributes in the dialog that is then displayed
- Activates a tool to define an annotation of type “Circle”. Once activated,
pick a position inside or outside the model and drag the mouse to define
the circle radius. If you pick the position without dragging the mouse, a
default radius is selected. Set the annotation attributes in the dialog that is
then displayed
Activates a tool to define an annotation of type “Arrow”. Once activated,
pick the first end of the arrow inside or outside the model and drag the mouse
until the second end of the arrow. Set the annotation attributes in the dialog
that is then displayed
Activates a tool to define an annotation of type “Contour”. A contour must
be selected in the active view in order to activate this tool. Once activated,
pick a node or element and a “Text” annotation is then automatically created
with the contour value of this node or element
Activates a tool to define an annotation of type “Attributes”. Once activated,
pick an object and a “Text” annotation is then automatically created with a
summary of this object’s attributes
Activates a tool to edit an annotation. Once activated, pick an annotation
control point (the two ends of an arrow, the center or a point of a circle…)
and drag the mouse to the new position of this point
Activates a tool to select an annotation in order to delete it. Once activated,
pick an annotation and it is then deleted
Deletes all annotations. A confirmation is asked
Notes:
· Picking a position outside the model means picking a fixed position. Picking a
position inside the model attaches this position to the model. For example, if you
define an arrow with one end inside the model and the other end outside, when
rotating the model, the first end will follow its original position while the other
will stay at the same position.
VIEW
Annotations Toolbar
ENTITY DISPLAY MODE TOOLBAR

This toolbar is used to activate predetermined display mode.
Button Purpose
Displays all edges of all objects in the same color.
Displays in wire frame mode.
Displays in wire frame mode and fills also elements.
Displays elements in transparency mode.
Customizes the colors used for edges and elements. It calls up the Custom
Color.
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
DIEMAKER TOOLBAR
The DieMaker toolbar groups five buttons that give access to specific toolbars. Each
toolbar represents a functioning mode and groups various tools, which allow the user to
design a deep-drawing tool starting from a meshed part:
· : Reverse engineering mode.
· : Part preparation mode.
· : Blankholder mode.
· : Addendum mode.
· : Simulation mode.
Note:
· A one-step Undo function (CTRL + Z keys) is available for most of the actions
performed with the tool buttons. This capability is especially useful for the
profile management.
Reverse Engineering Mode
This mode offers the possibility to generate a parametric model from a given CAD die
(part, addendum and blankholder).
Button Purpose
Pressing this button brings up the Preparation dialog where the different
areas of the part can be assigned to specific DieMaker objects.
Pressing this button brings up the Tipping dialog where the stamping
direction can be defined.
Pressing this button brings up the Binder dialog to design a theoretical
blankholder surface.
This button brings up the Die Opening Line in which a die entry line for the
punch can be created from the addendum outer edge.
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
Working step:
- Click on the Generate button and the die opening line is automatically
created from the addendum object's outer edge.
- Click OK to validate the creation.
Pressing this button brings up the Intersect Addendum dialog. This option
allows the user to create profile curves to define the addendum surface.
This button is used to delete one or several profile curves.
Working step:
- Click on the button and click on the profile curves in succession or use
the rubber band selection frame to delete a selection of curves.
This option is used to create control lines between two control points.
Working step:
- Click on the button.
- Press the SHIFT key and with the left mouse button pick two control
points successively. Once the second point has been picked the control
lines is created.
Note:
· The transition from one control line to an adjacent one is tangential,

nevertheless it is possible that a sequence of control lines is not that
smooth the user expects it. Therefore a smooth functionality is
implemented to optimize the curve characteristic. Smooth control
lines is available via right-click menu in the 3D view.
st
1 picked control point + SHIFT
nd
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Control point capabilities. See

explanations given in Part Preparation
mode.
This button generates the connection curves for the future addendum surfaces
for the three segments of the profile curves (see explanation given below in
the Addendum Mode).
Part Preparation Mode
Button Purpose
Pressing this button brings up the Part Preparation dialog where:
- The part flanges can be hidden.
- Holes inside the part can be closed.
- Outer regions can be smoothed with the rolling cylinder approach.
- Symmetry of the part or double part can be taken into account.
Pressing this button brings up the Tipping dialog where the stamping
direction can be defined.
Pressing this button brings up the Exchange Part dialog which is used to
replace the current part geometry (CAD surface) by another one. It can also
be used to rework the current geometry then reattach profiles.
This button brings up the Profile Editor in which the profile curves can be
edited (modified, saved, imported…). In this context, the Profile Editor is
used to edit spline curves only. These are usually created to control the
meshing of holes.
This button selects the Spline Template creation mode. In this context, the
spline template is used in order to create control lines (e.g. to control the
meshing of holes).
Working steps:
- Click on the button,
- Press the SHIFT key and select a node on the part edge.
- Keep the SHIFT key pressed and select a second node on the part edge
(see figure below).
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
Notes:
· Prior to create spline it is advisable to do the Tipping.

· To control more firmly the position of the profile curve on the part,
view the part as a Wire Frame representation (use button of the

Visibility dialog).
This option is used to create control lines between two control points (see
explanations given in the reverse engineering mode). Picking twice onto the
part border allows the user to create rolling cylinder curves manually.
Insertion of additional control points for spline profiles, rolling cylinder
curves or control lines. This functionality can be used in 3D and 2D windows
by simply picking onto the appropriate curve.
Select control points in 3D or 2D windows by picking or using a rubberband.
All selected control points are taken into account when applying the move
control point capability.
This button is used to modify the shape of a spline profile, rolling cylinder
curve or control line by moving inner control points interactively in 3D or
2D. The red arrow (lower right corner) indicates that a special movement
control dialog can be opened by using the right mouse click feature.
Working steps:
- Click on the button and click on the control point to move. If this control
point is part of a selected group of control points all these points will be
taken into account.
- Drag the mouse until the control point moves to the desired location.
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
Deletion of control point(s) for spline templates, rolling cylinder curves or

control lines.
Approximate circular arc for the Spline template. See explanation given in
Addendum Mode and the Profile Editor.
This button is used to select one or several spline curves.

Working step:
- Click on the button to activate the selection option
- Click left mouse button, hold it and drag the mouse. A rectangular area
over the spline curves is visualized. Once a curve is selected, its color
changes from dark to light blue.
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
This button is used to select and move profiles directly by picking and
moving one of its end points.
Working steps for moving the end point of an inner hole spline:
- Click on the button to activate the selection option.
- A profile can now be selected by selecting any control point of the spline
curve. Once a curve is selected, its color changes from dark to light blue.
- Drag the end point of the spline curve to move the end-point. Drag the
mouse until the profile moves to the desired location.
- Drag the start point of the spline curve to move the start-point. Drag the
mouse until the profile moves to the desired location.
Using this functionality with holding the Ctrl key a copy of this profile will
be created.
Working step:
Blankholder Mode
The second step of the PAM-DIEMAKER module is to create the blankholder surface.
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
Pressing this button brings up the Blankholder Editor dialog where a
blankholder can be created and edited from outline or section curves.
Pressing this button brings up the Binder dialog to design a theoretical
Pressing this button brings up the standard File Selector dialog to load a CAD
surface (*.igs file) which will be used as blankholder surface.
This drop-down list is used to switch from one addendum to another. Only
two choices are available:
- addendum corresponds to the first blankholder created with the initial
part. Later when profiles and addendum surfaces will be created, they will
be added to this group.
- inner-addendum corresponds to the other blankholders created or copied
to be used as support for inner holes (see Create Inner Blankholder). As
for the addendum group, profiles and addendum surfaces will be added to
this group.
If no blankholder has been defined this function creates a simple rectangular
blankholder frame (without surface) by picking this button.
Activating this button creates a meshed blankholder surface according to the
outer (blue) blankholder frame curves. Deactivating this button destroys the
meshed blankholder surface if it has been created via the outline&section
approach. Imported blankholders or surfaces generated with the theoretical
binder approach are not(!) only defined by its boundary (or frame) curves.
Because also the underlying NURBS surface is affected using this function
these blankholder types are write protected. They can be completely
destroyed by using the Delete blankholder function (next button).
Pressing this button destroys an entire blankholder frame (meshed surface
and blue boundary curves).
Pressing this button brings up the Create Inner Blankholder dialog for
managing inner blankholder respectively addendum regions. The usage is
described in the corresponding chapter.
Create binder section for modifying existing blankholder surfaces (of any
type). Please see corresponding chapter.
Binder sections created by the function explained above can be deleted by
picking (or selecting using a rubberband) one or a couple of associated
control points. All inner control points of such curves will be deleted as well.
Insertion of additional points on blankholder boundary or section curves in
3D or 2D windows.
Selection of control points within blankholder outline or binder section
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
curves.
Translation of control points on blankholder outline or binder section curves.
This functionality is similiar to moving control points within profiles and
control lines (see Part Preparation Mode).
- Usage for blankholder outline curves: in 2D the corresponding point of
the parallel curve will be moved as well if Process both curves is
activated. In 3D Process both curves is always deactivated.
- Independent from the setting of the Movement control dialog points will
be moved only onto the curve’s plane. Outline end points can be moved
only in Z direction of the active coordinate system.
- Part section approach: depending on the state of the lock within the list of
parameters (whether the angle is free or confined) it is possible to
undertake a free or tangential translation.
- Part section approach: translating the end points engenders either an
increase or decrease in the size of the blankholder.
Note:
· The meshing of the blankholder surface is dependent on the curvature

of the outline curves as illustrated on the figures below. The more the
outlines are curved the finer the mesh is.
Deleting control points on curve templates:

- Control points can be deleted after clicking on the relevant points with the
left hand mouse button.
Note:
· By pressing the left hand mouse button and opening a selection frame
multiple control points can be deleted simultaneously. However, keep
in mind that it is impossible to delete end points.
· This button is grayed out until the Blankholder Editor dialog is
opened, .
Extending the part section curve:
- By default the tangential extension of the section curve are the endpoints
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
of the intersected part. The user when picking onto the intersected part
can set the position of this extension point interactively.
This button is used to translate the blankholder surface.

Working steps:
- Move the mouse over one of the outline curve or section control points of
the blankholder surface until the cursor changes from to .
- Press the left button of the mouse and move the blankholder surface along
the tipping direction.
Notes:
· The movement of the blankholder can be adjusted with the Accurate

binder movement dialog. To call up this dialog right-click on the tool
button.
· The translation can also be performed by using the up and down
arrows of the keyboard (see the Move by arrow key dialog for further
details).
This button is used to resize the blankholder surface in the 3D window.
Working steps:
- Move the mouse over one of the outline curve control points of the
blankholder surface until the cursor changes from to .
- Press the left button of the mouse and move the outline curve along a
direction perpendicular to the curve. Depending on the orientation chosen
the blankholder surface is enlarged or reduced.
This button is used to rotate the blankholder surface in the 2D window.
Working steps:
- Move the mouse over one of the outline curves or section control points
of the blankholder surface until the cursor changes from to .
- Press the left button of the mouse and rotate the blankholder surface
about the rotation axis.
Note:
· The rotation of the blankholder, and especially the position of the

rotation axis, can be adjusted with the Accurate binder movement
dialog. To call up this dialog right-click on the tool button.
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
Create blankholder surface and/or display it dynamically:
- Click on this button to generate a blankholder. Since the curves are
synchronized with the blankholder shape any modification of the curves
are transmitted to the blankholder.
Note:
· A second click on this button cancels the blankholder surface

creation.
Examining the created blankholder surface for developability:
- Click on the button to examine the developability of the created
blankholder.
Note:
· As necessary condition for developability, there must exist a plane

form of the geometry which can be taken on without the prior need for
local contortions to its shape. It will simply be simulated, without
consideration for the material from which it will consist. A
developable geometry will have a relative thickness of zero.
Developable blankholder None developable blankholder
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
The distance of each node of the part to the blankholder surface is visualized.
- Click on the button to examine the drawing depth.
Visualizing drawing depth
Activating this button generates a ghost copy of the blankholder surface.

Deactivating this button will remove the ghost surface. For details refer to
chapter Punch Impact.
for the three segments of the profile curves (see explanation given below in
the Addendum Mode).
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Addendum Mode
The structure of an addendum is defined with profile curves. The program offers six
different forms of curves (Templates) – Standard, Bulge, Bulge+Step, Step, freely
editable Spline, Simple Cir Arc, Flange and the User-Defined Template (UDT).
All profiles allow radial or tangential transition to the part. With the Spline template
after switching to tangential transition of the spline it is converted in such a way that the
curve up to the transition to the die radius runs tangential. This is of relevance if sub-
areas of the part have to flow 'directly' into the blankholder.
The connection to the part can be either Free or Contour Dependent.
Button Purpose
This button brings up the Profile Editor in which the profile curves can be
edited (modified, saved, imported…).
This button brings up the Die Opening Line dialog in which a die entry line
for the punch can be imported from an IGES file or created from the part
outer edge.
This button selects the Standard Template creation mode.
Working step:
- Click on the button and use the mouse to select a suitable spot on the part
by clicking on the part border or by pulling out a frame, which encloses
that spot (see figures below).
Notes:
· It is possible to attach more than one profile per node. It is useful

when the part geometry has sharp corners.
· The program looks for a suitable facet node at the outline of the part
and generates the standard profile curve orthogonal to the edge of
the part. To control more firmly the position of the profile curve on
the part, view the part as a Wire Frame representation ( button

of the Visibility dialog) before the user creates the profile.
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
This button selects the Bulge Template creation mode.

Working step:
- Identical to the Standard Template creation mode described above.
This button selects the Bulge+Step Template creation mode.
Working step:
This button selects the Step Template creation mode.
Working step:
This button selects the Spline Template creation mode.
Working step:
This button selects the Arc Template creation mode.
Working step:
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
This button selects the Flange Template creation mode. To guarantee a well-
formed set of addendum surfaces it is important to know that for each
addendum exactly one left and one right flange profile has to be created. For
evaluating a consistent profile orientation the first pick must be “inside” the
regarding part contour and the second pick at the most outer point of this
contour.
Working step:
- Click on the button + SHIFT key and use the mouse to select a suitable
spot on the part by clicking on the part border or by pulling out a frame,
which encloses that spot (see figures below).
- Hold the SHIFT key and select a second point. In this case a right
boundary profile is generated. The result is printed into the Output dialog.
The flange profile is generated as a spline curve and must consist of at
least four control points or three inner segments (for part transition, mid
region and blankholder transition).
Note:
· For evaluating a consistent profile orientation the first pick must be
"inside" the regarding part contour and the second pick at the most
outer point of this contour.
· After generating the second flange profile and some "normal" profiles
in between the connecting lines and addendum surfaces can be
generated with the button.
st
nd
Via this button new profile templates can be defined at specific part positions
or already defined (or imported) UDT profiles can be created by picking onto
the part border. The usage of this functionality is described in the chapter
Profile Editor.
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
Note:
· A right-click onto the UDT button calls up a
separate manager dialog where the user can
delete UDT’s from the drop-down list right
beside this button, load individual shapes
from or save them into a .udt (ascii) file.
With this file transfer UDT’s can be
transferred between different projects.
This drop-down list is used to select an already defined UDT profile or, if
<new template> has been chosen, to create a new one. The UDT’s are
described in the chapter Profile Editor.
This option is used to create control lines between two control points (see
explanations given in the reverse engineering mode). Picking twice onto the
part border allows the user to create rolling cylinder curves manually.
Control point capabilities. See explanations
given in Part Preparation Mode.
Approximate circular arc for the Spline template.
Additional inserted points can be approximated to a circular arc. When
clicking on this button the panel in the left lower part of the Profile Editor
changes and the following parameters become available:
- Number of Nodes: Fill up the circular arc with the specified number of
nodes.
- Radius: Radius of the approximated circular arc.
- Entry tangential: Tangential transition to the part border if the first (most
left) control point(s) is/are used for the circular arc approximation.
- Length: distance to the previous control point.
- Outgoing angle: Slope (tangent) for the last (most right) point of the
approximated circular arc. If the next control point is the start point of the
blankholder region, the profile's end point will be automatically moved to
achieve a straight line/slope.
This button is used to select one or several profile curves.
Working step:
- Click on the button to activate the selection option
- Click left mouse button, hold it and drag the mouse. A rectangular area
over the profiles is visualized. Once a profile is selected, its color changes
from dark to light blue.
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
This button is used to move the profile curve freely on the blankholder by
moving the blankholder point of the curve.
Working step:
- Click on the button to activate the selection option.
- A profile can now be selected by selecting any control point of the
profile. Once a profile is selected, its color changes from dark to light
blue.
- Drag the end point of the profile to move the end-point. Drag the mouse
until the profile moves to the desired location.
- Drag the start point of the profile to move the start-point. Drag the mouse
until the profile moves to the desired location.
Displacement of a curve by displacement of its blankholder end point
A profile can be moved to another part border node (anchor point) by picking
and moving its start (or part) point. For re-attaching the profile at the new
position three different options are available via the Customize Options
dialog (DieMaker page, Addendum options, Profile attach type): Displace,
Keep BHolder Point, Normal to Part.
Using this functionality with holding the Ctrl key a copy of this profile will
be created.
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
Working step:
This button allows the user to modify the die opening line by the creation of
a new control point.
Working steps:
- Click on the die opening line, a control point will be created.
- Move the control point to the desired position.
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
This button is used to automatically create drawbead.
Working steps:
- Clicking on the button automatically creates the drawbead by offsetting
the die opening line.
Notes:
· To suppress the drawbeads click again on the tool button.

· To control the drawbead position or to create two drawbeads, right-
click on the tool button. It brings up the following dialog:
The distance entered in this dialog represents the distance from the
part outline as illustrated below.
outer drawbead
inner drawbead
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
for the three segments of the profile curves. So the user gets a much more
precise impression as to the trend of future surfaces.
Working step:
- Click on the button and the connection curves are created as illustrated on
the figure below.
Notes:
· The complete set of curves can be interactively relocated in line with

the stamping direction by using the button (Translate
blankholder). All connecting curves will be erased, while the contact
points of the profile curves will remain anchored to the blankholder.
· When this button is pressed after the addendum has been created, all
the created surfaces and associated meshes are destroyed. The part,
blankholder, profiles and connecting lines are kept.
Connected curves before translation Curves after translation.

The profile curves remain anchored to
the blankholder.
This button generates free form surfaces for the set of pre-modeled profile
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
curves. These are nodes compatible with each other as well as to the edges of
the part.
Working step:
- Click on the button and the surfaces are created as illustrated in the figure
below.
This button is used to trim the blankholder surface.

Working step:
- Click on the button and the blankholder surface is 'trimmed' as illustrated
in the figure below.
Pressing this button serves to generate from the modeled die a connected,
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
gap-free mesh simulation model. The created object will be used in the pre-
processing session (data set-up).
Using a right mouse click onto this button will open the Simulation model
options dialog. See chapter Create Simulation Model for more details.
Simulation Mode
Button Purpose
This button brings up the Die verifications dialog to control the shape of the
die simulation model by drawing section lines onto its surface.
This button brings up the Inverse Solver Project Creation dialog.
This button brings up the Mesh Quality dialog to control the quality criteria
for surface elements.
Activating this button will show the drawing depth as a contour value plot.
The reference point is the origin of the active coordinate system.
VIEW
DieMaker Toolbar
Button Purpose
Deactivating this button will delete the contour values again.
Activating this button will show possible undercutting zones of the visible
objects. For each element the angle between normal and Z direction (of the
active coordinate system) is calculated. The tolerance angle is 5 degrees,
means up to 85 degrees the result is Safe, between 85 and 90 degrees the
result is Critical and above 90 degrees the result is Undercut.
Deactivating this button will delete the contour values again.

Hidden flanges can be developed onto the mesh of the simulation model by
using this functionality. For more details please see chapter Develop Flanges.
VIEW
DiE Trimming Toolbar
DIE TRIMMING TOOLBAR
The Die Trimming toolbar offers functionality for manually defining and optimizing an
arbitrary number of cutting operations. This functionality can be applied on a built
simulation model designed with DieMaker or on any imported die object.
Button Purpose
Pressing this button automatically generates a so called base geometry
coloured in steel blue. This object is a copy of the referring simulation model
or imported die object. The base geometry object only contains triangle
elements.
This operation uses a visible or selected object preferable of type simulation
model. If no simulation model is available the first visible or selected object
found will be taken for defining the base geometry.
Pressing this button brings up the Polygon Editor where 3D curves can
manually be modified.
Pressing this button brings up the Add Basecurve dialog to develop hidden
flanges onto the base geometry and define it as basecurve.
Pressing this button brings up the Coordinate Systems dialog where the
global cutting direction can be defined.
Pressing this button brings up the Modify Trimline dialog. Each pair of
timlines (left and right) defines a cutting knife for a certain region.
Pressing this button brings up the Trimming Operation Punching dialog. With
use of the Polygon Editor knifes for inner regions can be defined.
VIEW
DiE Trimming Toolbar
Button Purpose
Pressing this button brings up the Set Workdirection dialog. The tipping
direction for a certain cutting area can be set respectively optimised using
this function.
Pressing this button brings up the Post Values dialog where the user can
validate the cutting angles globally or of a certain cutting area.
Navigation to previous cutting operation. If the first operation is active
Stamp2G will navigate to Diemaker (if available).
Navigation to next cutting operation. Coming from Diemaker a specific
Trimming page called Object Tree will be installed inside the Project panel
(right beside Visibility). This object tree will be removed again if the user
navigates back to Diemaker or switches to any other Stamp2G module.
All specified cutting areas (which has been defined using the trimlines) will
be explicitly removed from the base geometry if switching to a next cutting
operation.
VIEW
Morphing Toolbar
MORPHING TOOLBAR
This toolbar is available in the Data Set-up module (pre-processing) only. It can be used
conjointly with the Geometry/Morphing menu option.
Button Purpose
- Automatically detects feature lines and control nodes from the meshed part
and display them respectively with green lines and red points. To modify
the detection parameters select the Geometry/Morphing/Topology option.
- Working steps:
- Press the tool button. The algorithm works on angle between surfaces and
edges for meshed part and selects all patch edges for CAD surfaces.
- Adds or removes control nodes.

- Working steps:
- Pick a point on the mesh then the nearest node is used to define a control
node, which is displayed as a red marker.
- Each time a new control node is selected the application tries to
automatically propagate through the mesh lines until it encounters another
control node. Then a feature line is created to join the two control nodes. A
feature line is displayed in green or blue depending on its type (enforced or
released).
In the propagation process, the application moves from one edge to another
if the angular transition between them remains lower than a user-specified
threshold entered (parameter Edge Angular Threshold in the Topology
VIEW
Morphing Toolbar
Button Purpose
dialog). If the picked node is already a control node, the application
performs no actions.
- Adds features lines.
- Working steps:
- Pick control nodes in succession. The first picked node flashes in blue
while possible ending nodes for feature line construction flash in orange.
- Each time a new control node is selected the application tries to
automatically propagate through the mesh lines between the control nodes.
- Deletes feature lines.
- Working steps:
- Pick feature lines in succession will delete them and their associated
control nodes if they are not connected to any other feature lines.
- Selected control node(s) are moved from the current position to another
one based on a vector.
- Working steps:
- Prior to pressing this tool button the user must select the control nodes to
move. For that, use the button (selected control nodes are highlighted).
- Press the button.

- Pick a control node to define the first point of the vector.
- Pick a point on the mesh to define the jumping vector. The jumping of the
control node takes effect immediately.
- Press the button to effectively apply the transformation to the mesh.
- Selected control node is moved from the current position along a feature
line to a picked point.
- Working steps:
- Prior to pressing this tool button the user must select the feature line that
will be used as reference line and the control node that will slide along this
feature line. For that, use the button (selected control nodes and feature
lines are highlighted).
- Press the button.

- Pick a control node. This node flashes in blue.
- Pick a point on a feature line joining the control node. The sliding of the
control node takes effect immediately.
VIEW
Morphing Toolbar
Button Purpose
Stretches curved features lines, which is equivalent to open or close a fillet.
Working steps:
- Prior to pressing this tool button the user must select the feature lines to
modify. For that, use the button.
- Press the button, which opens the following dialog.
· Current Radius: Displays the radius of the first selected feature line.
· New Radius: The user enters the new radius that will be applied to the
selected feature lines.
· OK: Validates the transformation and closes the dialog.
Note:
· When no control nodes are selected, the fillet change will appear on
both sides of the selected feature line (fillet). However, if a control
node is selected along with the feature line, the fillet will only be
modified at the (selected) control node.
Feature lines selection Fillet opening Blend
VIEW
Morphing Toolbar
Button Purpose
Selects or deselects control nodes and/or feature lines. Once a control node or
feature line is selected, it is highlighted. This button can also be used in
conjunction with some keyboards or with the selection tools.
In all cases the latest selected control nodes are considered as the master
control node. If for example the user wants to define one of the previously
control nodes as master, he has to hold the Shift key, first deselect and then
reselect the control node.
Key Button Action
None Resets the current selection and selects the picked
control nodes so that the selection contains the latest
picked control nodes.
Shift Adds the latest picked control node to the current
selection. If this picked node is already in the selection
it is removed.
Ctrl Remove the picked control nodes from the current
selection.
Hides the mesh so that only the control nodes and feature lines are displayed.
To show the mesh, press again this button.
Resets all the control nodes and feature lines to their original state. This
operation is effective only between two mesh transformations (Blend).
The Blend button applies the transformations performed on the control nodes
and feature lines to the mesh by propagating their displacements to the other
nodes of the mesh.
Note:
· The Feature line tangency option of the 3D view right-click menu allows the user
to handle the feature line tangency (Enforced or Released). This parameter
determines the shape of the deformed mesh after the morphing operation as
illustrated below.
tangency
Original feature line Original feature line

Final feature line Final feature line
Feature line without tangency Feature line based on tangency
(Released) (Enforced)
VIEW
Multistate and animation Toolbar
MULTISTATE AND ANIMATION TOOLBAR

This toolbar is used to animate deformed structures and define animation over time in
the active mesh window.
Button Purpose
Displays the animation backward to the first state loaded.
Displays the animation one single step backward.
Switches from animation mode to static mode, i.e. stops the animation.
Displays the animation step by step forward.
Pauses the animation, while the animation remains loaded.
Displays the animation one single step forward.
Displays the animation forward to the last state loaded.
Pressing this button brings up the dialog to control display delay between
animation steps.
Pressing this button brings up the Animated states dialog to load an
animation.
Unloads the animation. The first seven buttons of the toolbar are grayed-out.
Notes:
· The user can perform all the movements and all the displays available while the
motion is in progress.
· If several 3D views of the same project are opened, they are animated
simultaneously.
VIEW
Multistate and animation Toolbar
SHOW TOOLBAR
This toolbar is used to show some topological features.
Show toolbar
Button Purpose
Displays free edges.
Displays multiple edges
Displays surface edges.
Displays normal vectors.
Displays control nodes (see Morphing).

Displays feature lines (see Morphing).
Displays duplicated surfaces
Displays thin surfaces
Displays remeshed surfaces
VIEW
Reporting Toolbar
REPORTING TOOLBAR
Reporting toolbar
Button Purpose
Allows to select an HTML file and then edit it in an external Web editor (the
command to launch this editor can be defined in the Options
Brings up the Image export dialog
Brings up the Material reporting dialog
Brings up the Model reporting dialog
Brings up the Process reporting dialog
Brings up the Reporting table dialog
VIEW
Reporting Toolbar
NORMAL STAMPING POST-PROCESSOR

TOOLBAR
Button Purpose
Displays Thickness contour
Displays Thinning contour
Displays Major strain contour
Displays Minor strain contour
Displays FLD by quality contour
Displays FLD by rupture contour
Displays Contact force contour
Displays 2D section
Displays 3D section
VIEW
Springback post-processor Toolbar
SPRINGBACK POST-PROCESSOR TOOLBAR
Button Purpose
Brings up the Model locking dialog
Brings up the File Selector dialog
Brings up the Distance between objects dialog
Displays Directional displacement
Displays Displacement magnitude
Displays Displacement vector
Displays 2D section
Displays 3D section
VIEW
Springback post-processor Toolbar
OUTPUT DIALOG
This three-tab dialog is positioned by default at the bottom of the main screen and gives
report on the progress of the session. Depending on the current action the tab concerned
is automatically displayed:
- Console: All actions from opening to exiting the program are reported in this tab.
Only calls to DeltaMesh mesh generator and repetitive operations are treated in the
other dedicated tabs.
- DeltaMesh: This mesh generator is used for meshing of imported CAD file as well
as for blank meshing and filleting. It has its proper management and its own
messages.
- Repetitive Operations: To be documented.
The Output dialog
VIEW
Project Dialog
PROJECT DIALOG
Project Tab
The Project tab is used to select the active project and to select the current session
within that project.
The Project dialog
List of Projects Loaded

This is a drop-down list of all projects loaded. The name of the active project is
displayed. By clicking on the name of this project, the list of all the projects loaded
appears. The active project can then be changed if necessary. It is also possible to
change the active project by clicking in a 3D view of this project. In addition, this view
becomes the active view.
List of Modules
List of all the modules present in the active project. It is a single selection list updated
by project. Use the right-click menu described below to make this module active (or
double-click for a post-processing module). To open two different modules of the same
VIEW
Project Dialog
project, the project must be loaded twice. An active module corresponds to an active
project. There are 3 types of modules:
- Meshing (sub-projects): DeltaMESH or Mesh sub-projects
- Set-up (pre-process).
- Results (post-process, states).
Right-click Menus
Depending on the module or phase onto which the mouse pointer is positioned, two
right-click menus are available. The first one may act on the Meshing modules or on the
set-up (pre-processing) modules. All the options of this menu are not available at the
same time; they are context dependent. The second one is used to refresh post-
processing results.
Right-click menus
The functions provided by the right-click menus are the following:

- Add DeltaMESH module (for meshing module only): This option allows the user to
import and mesh with DeltaMESH generator CAD files.
- Add Design module (for meshing module only): A design module contains the
geometry, topology and elements corresponding to a meshing strategy imported or
obtained by PAM-DIEMAKER or eventually transferred from a DeltaMESH
module.
- Transfer to: This option is used to transfer data from a module to the other. At the
end of the DeltaMESH session, the user has imported a CAD file representing the
part, meshed the surfaces. He needs to transfer this mesh to a Design module to
create an addendum surface and a simulation model. Then he can switch from the
Design module to the data set-up session. Only meshes relevant to the pre-
processing session are transferred when CAD surfaces and unnecessary meshes are
not kept.
VIEW
Project Dialog
- Set as active module: Activates the selected module. This action is necessary to
switch from a module to another or from the meshing session to the data set-up
session.
- Rename (for meshing module only): Allows the user to rename the meshing
module.
- Save as (for meshing and setup modules only): Allows the user to save the active
module in another :
- for a meshing module, it will be saved as new module in the current project (see Save
DeltaMESH module and New design module)
- for a setup module, a new project will be created with the current saved setup
module (see New project).
- Remove: Removes the module and its associated files.
- Refresh (for post-processing only): Since it is possible to visualize results display
during the calculation, it may be useful to refresh post-processing to visualize
intermediate states.
- Include multistage states…(for post-processing only): Allows the user to add post-
processing states of the other stages of the process. It brings up the File selector
dialog.
- Remove multistage states(for post-processing only): Allows the user to remove
post-processing states of the selected stages.
- Multistate mode(for post-processing only): Allows the user to set the multistate
mode to be able to activate Include project, Load states, Unload states, Show al
states, Hide all states options.
- Include project…(for post-processing only): Allows the user to include post-
processing states of an other project.
- Load states…(for post-processing only): Allows the user to activate simultaneously
several states. It brings up the load several states.
- Load all states(for post-processing only): Allows the user to activate simultaneously
all states.
- Unload all states(for post-processing only): Allows the user to deactivate
simultaneously all states.
- Show all states(for post-processing only): Show simultaneously in the 3D view all
states loaded of the project.
- Hide all states(for post-processing only): Hide all states of the project.
VIEW
Project Dialog
Visibility Tab
The Visibility tab allows the user to manage the visibility of objects and their related
display mode.
The Visibility docking dialog
The first drop-down list allows the user to select the module to activate (CAD, Set-up or
state of post-processing).
The second drop-down list is a filter:
- All objects: Lists all objects of the project.
- Active objects: Lists all objects active in the module.
- Inactive objects: lists all objects inactive in the module.
The name of the visible objects are highlighted in the list.
The buttons at the bottom of the dialog represent the different display modes. They are
applied to the object selection.
VIEW
Project Dialog
Button Purpose
Displays the nodes of the selected object(s).
Displays the elements of the selected object(s).
Displays the edges of the selected object(s).
Displays the surface normals (not yet implemented).
Displays the 3D curves of the selected object(s).
Displays the CAD entities (B-splines, surfaces...).
Note:
· Others contains meshes which are present in the project, but not contained in
any object.
Right-click Menus
- Information: Brings up the Object information dialog.

- Attributes: Brings up the Object attributes dialog.
- Add object: Brings up the New object dialog.
- Delete object: Brings up the Delete object dialog.
- Lock all selected: The display mode of all selected objects will be freezed
- Unlock all selected: Unfreezes all selected objects
VIEW
Project Dialog
- Transfer content to: Brings up the dialog below.
Note:
· Pressing <Ctrl> and right click lock / unlock the object pointed by the mouse
without loosing the visibility selection.
- Exchange content with: Brings up the dialog below.
VIEW
Data Setup
DATA SETUP
Cad tab Transformations tab Process Tab
Cad
Button Purpose
This option allows the user to import and mesh CAD files. The following
dialogs are opened, depending on the current module:
· Import of CAD model: You will here import a CAD model, mesh it
and transfer the results into a destination module, if the current
module is the setup or design module of an AutoStamp or QuikStamp
project
· Meshing: Calls up the mesh generator DeltaMesh® if the current
module is a DeltaMESH module.
· Inverse import : Calls up the inverse mesh generator DeltaMesh® if
the current module is the setup of an inverse project.
Note:
· It is advisable to read the "Recommendations for surfacic CAD model

Exchange from CAD SYSTEMS to DeltaMESH Stamping" Section
before any CAD surface meshing.
Inverse mesher: not used. The previous icon calls inverse mesher dialog
automatically if the current project in an inverse project.
This option is used to fillet the sharp edges of a 2D mesh. It calls up the
DeltaMESH Fillet dialog.
Delete mesh. It calls up the Delete mesh
Merge nodes. Not yet implemented
VIEW
Data Setup
Button Purpose
This option is used to improve the element shape quality. It brings up the
Smooth dialog.
Display cad history files Cad history
Restores surfaces Restore surfaces
Transformations
Button Purpose
Displacement or copy of a mesh by translation. Pressing this button brings up
the Translation dialog.
Displacement or copy of a mesh by rotation. Pressing this button brings up
the Rotation dialog.
Displacement or copy of a mesh by symmetry. Pressing this button brings up
the Symmetry dialog.
Displacement or copy of a mesh by offset. Pressing this button brings up the
Offset dialog.
Displacement or copy of a mesh by scaling. Pressing this button brings up

the Scaling dialog.
Positioning by translation of a group of objects onto another.
Projection of 3D curve or node onto an object following a user-defined

direction. Pressing this button brings up the Projection dialog.
Two different actions are possible here:
- Divides 4-node shell element (quadrangle) into two 3-node shell elements
(triangles). Pressing this button brings up the Divide/split mesh dialog.
- Subdivision of 2-node bar into n bars, and 3-node triangle or 4-node
quadrangle into 2 n quadrangles
Trimming of a mesh by projection of a curve onto an object following a user-
defined direction. Pressing this button brings up the Trimming dialog.
Creation of walls by extrusion and meshing of the free edges of a selection of
shells.
Transformation by extrusion of bars into 4-node shell elements and bars into
4-node shell elements.
Deletion of elements, nodes or 3D curves. Pressing this button brings up the
Deletion of entities dialog.
VIEW
Data Setup
Process
Button Purpose
Pressing this button brings up the Inverse solver project creation dialog.
Creates shell mesh to define a blank sheet. Pressing this button brings up the
Blank meshing dialog.
Creates guides, locator pins or springs to guide or restrain the sheet

movement during the process. Pressing this button brings up the Accessory
dialog.
Constructs the punch, the blankholder surface(s) and the die from a mesh that
has been subdivided beforehand. Pressing this button brings up the Tool
Builder dialog.
Pressing this button brings up the QuikStamp macro process or the

QuikStamp Full process macro dialog depending on the type of project
currently opened.
Opens the Data setup wizard dialog.
Adds an object to the project. Pressing this button brings up the New object
dialog.
Removes an object from the project. Pressing this button brings up the Delete
Object dialog.
Displays information about objects. Pressing this button brings up the Object
Attributes dialog.
Opens the Object information dialog.
VIEW
Data Setup
SELECTION DIALOG
Whenever a dialog of the program needs to select an entity in a view (node, element,
edge, 3D curve,...) a selection mode is associated with it. A selection mode can define
the way the user picks the entity in the view but also if the entity is added or suppressed
from the selection, and eventually if a specific method of selection is applied (selection
by geometrical characteristics, by propagation…). Selection modes are grouped in the
dialog illustrated below or can also be controlled through the Selection toolbar.
The Selection docking dialog
The tools are split into two groups:

- Selection modes.
- Additional tools which can be applied conjointly with the selection modes.
VIEW
Selection Dialog
Selection Modes
Button Purpose
Selects node.
Selects element.
Selects edge.
Selects 3D curves.
Selects objects.
Selects CAD entities (B-Splines, surfaces...).
Selects the entities cut by a polyline (in 2D). It brings up the Selection by
polyline dialog.
Selects the visible entities contained into a polygon (in 2D). It brings up the
Selection by polygon dialog.
Selects visible entities with a propagation algorithm. It brings up the

Selection by propagation dialog.
Selection by characteristics. It brings up the Geometry dialog which allows

the user to select nodes, edges and elements according to several geometrical
criteria.
Selection by contour value (not yet implemented). It brings up the Selection
by contour dialog which allows the user to select elements according to
contour range.
Selects entities intersecting a plane. It brings up the Selection by plane
dialog.
Selects entities by label. For each type of entity, the entities, whose label is
included in the finite list or in the range of identifiers specified by the user in
the Selection by label dialog, are selected.
(not yet implemented)
Selects a list of objects. The entities contained in the objects that are selected
in the Selection by list of objects dialog are added to (or removed from) the
selection.
Adds all the visible entities to the selection. All selected objects are the target
of the next editing operation.
VIEW
Selection Dialog
Button Purpose
Clears the selection. This button is grayed out when the active selection is
empty.
Invert the selection.
Undo the latest selection modification.
Additional Tools
Button Purpose
Entities picked are added to the selection.
Once an entity is picked, the previous one is deselected.
Entities picked are subtracted from the selection.
Opens the selection information dialog which displays the selection content
(see the figure below).
Notes
· When an entity is selected, its color changes to white.

· For interactive single selection tools (one node, one element...), the user can
press the Ctrl or Shift key when selecting the entity. Selecting an entity with the
Ctrl key down is equivalent to pushing the button and then selecting the
entity. Selecting an entity with the Shift key down is equivalent to pushing the
button and then deselecting the entity.
VIEW
Selection Dialog
· The user can select a lower entity even if it is not displayed. For example nodes
can be selected when only elements are displayed.
Picked Elements Edges Nodes
Displayed
Elements X X X
Edges X X
Nodes X
· The entity pointed to by the user is highlighted so that he can see what he is
about to pick (only when the Info pointer option is active).
VIEW
Selection Dialog
CUSTOMIZE DIALOG
The user can customize what the program does and how it looks to better reflect its
needs. Customizing the program can help the user creates and manages its projects more
efficiently. For example creating custom menu or toolbar can help the user maximizes
its on-screen workspace by displaying only the tools he uses most frequently on a single
menu. Creating custom menu or toolbar can also help the user creates a standard layout
for a team, group, or company. Depending on the type of customization applied to the
part, four tabs are used:
- Commands: Create and customize the program menus.
- Toolbars: Create and customize the program toolbars.
- Menu: Change the layout of the menu bar according to the program module.
- Options: Show or hide screen elements.
Commands
In this tab the user can customize built-in menus and commands or create custom menus
and commands.
The Customize dialog – Commands tab
- Categories: This window displays categories or commands, organized by menu

name or by type. Click a category to change the list of commands in the Commands
window.
VIEW
Customize Dialog
- Commands: To add a button or menu item, drag it from the Commands window
respectively to any toolbar or menu. To add a button to a toolbar that is not shown,
click the Toolbars tab, and then select the toolbar.
- Description: Displays the Help text, explaining what the command does.
Toolbars
In this tab the user can customize built-in toolbars or create custom toolbars.
The Customize dialog – Toolbars tab
- Toolbars: This window lists the available toolbars. To display a toolbar, select the
check box next to the name. To hide a toolbar, clear the check box.
- Reset: Removes any changes the user made to the selected toolbar and restores the
original settings.
- Reset All: Removes any changes the user made to any toolbar and restores the
original settings.
- New: Creates a new, empty toolbar that the user can add buttons and menus.
- Rename: Changes the name of the selected custom toolbar.
- Delete: Removes the selected custom toolbar.
- Import: Brings up a File selector dialog to select a previously exported toolbar in
order to import it.
- Export: Brings up a File selector dialog to export the selected toolbar into a file.
- Show text labels: Displays the tool tip associated with a tool button inside the
selected toolbar.
VIEW
Customize Dialog
External tools
The Customize dialog – External tools tab
Menu
In this tab the user can customize how the program looks by showing or hiding menus.
The Customize dialog – Menu tab
VIEW
Customize Dialog
Application Frame Menu

- Show Menus for: Each module of the program has its own menu lay-out. With this
drop-down list the user can first display this lay-out then customize it. To move or
remove a menu, drag it from its original position to respectively any position in or
outside the menu.
- Reset: Removes any changes the user made to the selected module and restores the
original settings.
Context Menus
- Select context menu: This drop-down list allows the user to display the right-click
menus and to add or remove a menu item. To add menu item, drag it from the
Commands window of the Commands tab into the menu.
- Reset: Removes any changes the user made to the selected right-click menu and
restores the original settings.
Miscellaneous
- Menu animations: Changes the way menus display when the user click on a
command. For example, Slide causes the menus to display with a sliding motion.
- Menu shadows: Displays a shadow behind the menu when it drops-down.
VIEW
Customize Dialog
Options
In this page the user can customize how the program looks by showing or hiding
various elements, such as menu items and tooltips.
The Customize dialog – Options page
Toolbar
- Show Screen Tips on toolbars: Displays on-screen description of toolbar button
when the cursor pauses on them.
· Show shortcut keys in Screen Tips: Displays keyboard shortcuts in tool tips.
- Large icons: Increases the size of toolbar buttons so they are easier to see.
- Look 2000: Changes the look of the program dialogs.
Personalized Menus and Toolbars

- Menus show recently used commands first: Rearranges the menu items by
displaying the recently used commands first.
- Show full menus after a short delay: When active, the user must pause with the
cursor on a menu to display it in whole.
- Reset my usage data: Removes all the changes made in any tab of this dialog and
restores the original settings.
Function Button
- Close: Closes the dialog saving the changes the user made.
VIEW
Customize Dialog
GEOMETRY
GEOMETRY MENU
Construction of a stamping finite element model begins with the meshing of the
geometrical objects defining the tools and blank. This menu provides all the capabilities
that are necessary to import, mesh, move, transform and check a geometrical part.
The Geometry menu
The following items are used to manage the geometrical object and the mesh:
- DeltaMesh: This sub-menu groups mesh tools, which can only be used in the CAD
modules of a project:
· Tool Meshing: This option allows the user to import and mesh CAD files. The
following dialogs are opened:
Meshing: Calls up the mesh generator DeltaMesh® when a
DeltaMESH module is currently active.
GEOMETRY
Geometry Menu
Import of CAD model: if the current state is when a Setup module is

currently active.
Inverse import: For an inverse project, the inverse mesher is used.
· Mesh deletion: Deletes meshed objects.
· Barycentric smoothing: Repositions nodes to improve the quality of a mesh.
· Display history file: Displays all files “.out” of the sub-project in one window.
This represents all the actions done since the creation of the file.
· Restore surfaces: The fine or/and duplicated surfaces (eventually detected
during the assembly) are restored in the DeltaMesh data base. If the user
unchecks toggles “Automatic deletion of thin surfaces” or/and “Automatic
deletion of duplicated surfaces”, their assembly will be “forced”.
- Filleting: Fillet the sharp edges of a 2D mesh.
- Meshing tools: This sub-menu groups specific meshing functions:
· Meshing lines: Projects one or several 3D curves onto a meshed surface and
uses them to modify the target mesh.
· Blank meshing: Creates shell mesh to define a blank sheet. It brings up the
Blank Meshing dialog if the current project is AutoStamp, QuikStamp or
QuikStamp Full Process or the Create flat blank for Inverse project.
- Edition: This sub-menu groups some entities management functions.
· Nodes: Creates and modifies nodes.
· Elements: Creates and modifies elements.
· 3D curves: Creates and modifies 3D curves either in Pre-process or in Post-
Process.
· Destruction: Deletes entities: nodes, elements and 3D curves.
- Transformation: This sub-menu provides for rapid modification of the geometry or
position of a part.
Notes:
Some of the capabilities accessible via this sub-menu are also available in the
Transformations tab of the Data Setup dialog.
Only mesh entities and 3D curves can be copied or displaced. Constraints and
stresses cannot be copied (except for trimming). Consequently data structure
coherence is not preserved following a copy or transformation operation. A mesh
cannot be displaced (or copied) with its carrier surface, contour.
There are the following sets of options:
· Translation: Displacement or copy of a mesh by translation.
· Rotation: Displacement or copy of a mesh by rotation.
· Symmetry: Displacement or copy of a mesh by symmetry.
· Offset: Displacement or copy of a mesh by offset.
GEOMETRY
Geometry Menu
· Extrusion: Extrude nodes into bars, 3D curves or bars into shells, shells into
hexahedral solid elements.
· Divide/Split: Two ways of remeshing:
cutting of quadrangular elements into triangular ones
refinement of a mesh by adding a user-defined number of nodes on
the edges.
· Projection: Project 3D curves, nodes or elements onto an object or plane by
displacement or copy.
· Scaling: Displacement or copy of a mesh by scaling.
· Autopositioning: Positioning by translation of a group of objects onto another.
· Trimming: Trimming of an adaptive or non-adaptive mesh.
· Walls Creation: Creation of a meshed wall based on free edges of shell
elements.
· Flattening: Monitors the evolution of 3D curve on the deformed states of a
blank sheet.
- Check/Repair: This sub-menu groups some mesh management functions.
· Clean Mesh: Modification of a shell mesh by merging nodes and/or cutting 4-
node elements into two 3-node elements.
· Double Elements: Detection (and possibly deletion) of double elements in the
model.
· Double nodes: Detection (and possibly merging) of double nodes in the model.
· Orient Elements: Automatic or manual orientation of shell surfaces.
- Morphing: Modify the tool mesh by applying geometrical transformations onto
specific nodes called Control Nodes and/or specific edges called Feature Lines.
· Topology: Automatic or manual creation and modification of control nodes and
feature lines.
· Transformation: Modification of nodes belonging to the feature lines.
- Surface reconstruction: This option brings up the standard File Selector to save the
current project in an IGES file (.igs). The mesh is converted to IGES entities
(points, lines, surfaces). A second dialog opens where the user can modify some
reconstruction parameters.
GEOMETRY
Geometry Menu
DELETE MESH
This dialog is used to delete the mesh (elements, nodes, discretization criteria)
belonging to geometrical entities (surfaces and/or curves), imported and meshed by
DeltaMESH. This enables the user to subsequently remesh these different entities using
other strategies (sizes, algorithm types, etc.) and obtain a new mesh.
The Delete mesh dialog
There are 2 ways for deleting mesh in CAD module according to the radio button on the
top of the dialog :
- From selected surfaces (using the standard selection tools on visible surfaces): The
mesh of the selected surfaces will be deleted
- From groups in list of the current CAD module: Click to select all groups in list,
click to invert the selection of listed groups.
- The deletion will be applied to the groups greyed in the list.
Notes:
· The selected groups/surfaces must contain geometrical entities (surfaces and/or

curves). If a group contains mesh entities only (nodes and elements)
DeltaMESH will not complete the deletion.
· If the mesh is partially deleted, the nodes belonging to surface edges will be
deleted only if :
the mesh of adjacent surfaces is deleted simultaneously
the adjacent surfaces are not meshed.
· The deletion function can also be used on entities (surfaces and/or curves)
where meshing has failed and therefore where no elements or nodes have been
created. The deletion will make it possible to cancel the "constraints"
GEOMETRY
Delete Mesh
accumulated on these entities by the different meshing criteria. It will then be

possible to mesh these entities with new strategies (e.g. by increasing the size
criteria).
Function Buttons
- OK: Deletes the mesh of the selected groups or surfaces.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing any action.
GEOMETRY
Delete Mesh
SMOOTH MESH
This dialog is used to improve the "finite element" shape quality of the elements already
generated, by using an algorithm that repositions the nodes.
Nodes belonging to surface boundaries are not displaced. Only internal nodes are
displaced, and repositioned exactly on the CAD geometry.
The Smooth mesh dialog
List of Meshed Objects

The list contains all the structure objects of the current CAD module. The smooth mesh
and repositioning operation will occur on the selected objects in the list. Click to
deselect all objects; click to invert the selection of objects in the list.
Notes:
· This function must not be used on the mesh of "die entry fillet" and "die bottom"
areas, because after barycentric repositioning the alignment of the nodes on the
iso-parametrics is no longer preserved.
· However, this function can be used on surfaces to improve the shape of elements
comprising angles that are too acute or to obtuse.
Iterations
The number of iterations performed by the barycentric smoothing algorithm can be
defined so as to improve the quality iteratively. Three iterations are generally sufficient.
GEOMETRY
Smooth mesh
Notes:
· The smooth mesh and repositioning operation on CAD geometry may be costly
in terms of CPU time when there is a large number of elements or when the
CAD surfaces are complex. In this case it is advisable to leave the iterations
number at 1, and if necessary restart the barycentric smoothing when the result
has been checked.
Function Buttons
- OK: Smooth nodes positions of the selected objects.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing any actions.
GEOMETRY
Smooth mesh
DELTAMESH HISTORY
This dialog shows the content of the DeltaMESH output files (.out, .his) of the active
module. The history file contains the reports of all “.out” files.
The CAD history dialog
- Last run messages: Displays the content of the .out file (corresponding to the ouput
of the last run in this module).
- All messages : Displays the content of the .his file (concatenation of all messages
generated by DeltaMESH for the current CAD model).
The name of the chosen history file is displayed in the bottom-left hand corner of the
dialog.
Function Buttons
- Refresh: Refreshes the dialog by reading the history file.
- Close: Closes the dialog
GEOMETRY
Restore surfaces
RESTORE SURFACES
This dialog is used to restore the “joining” eliminated surfaces in the geometrical
DeltaMESH database. These surfaces are the thin or duplicated surfaces. They are
detected when the toggles “Automatic deletion of thin surfaces” and/or “Automatic
deletion of duplicated surfaces” are checked in the dialog “Joining parameters”. If you
wish to restore some surfaces (it means you plan to force the joining for some surfaces)
you must select them. You can use the standard selection tools or the buttons in the
dialog. Ids of all selected surfaces are listed in the dialog.
The Restore surfaces dialog
- Number of thin/duplicated surfaces selected: The first number indicates the

number of bad surfaces selected, the second is the total number of bad surfaces in
the sub-project. If the total number is zero, there is no bad surface (you can check if
the detection toggles in the joining parameters were checked before joining). If there
is at least one surface selected the restore button is active.
- : Selects all the bad surfaces even if they are not visible. You can also use the
standard “Select all” or “Pick” feature, but they will select the visible surfaces. It
means that you have to display the thin/duplicated surfaces through the “Show”
menu or toolbar. The ID of selected bad surfaces will appear in the list.
GEOMETRY
Restore surfaces
- : Deselects all bad surfaces that were selected. This will empty the list. You can
also use the standard “Deselect all” or “Pick” feature in mode “Remove”, but they
will deselect the visible surfaces.
- : click on this button to deselect the surfaces which ID is grayed in the list. If
no ID is grayed then this button is not active.
Function Buttons
- Restore: Launches the DeltaMESH restore action. The restored surfaces must be
joined again by starting a joining action and deactivate the automatic detection of
bad surfaces in the joining parameters. A warning is permanently displayed to recall
this important point. This button is grayed out if no surface is selected (the list is
empty).
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing action.
GEOMETRY
Filleting
FILLETING
General
The Filleting option is used to fillet the sharp edges of a mesh made of shell elements.
This operation is processed with DeltaMESH Fillet.
From the definition of radius nodal values in PAM-STAMP2G, DeltaMESH Fillet
builds a CAD model. It is not visible by the user. This temporary geometrical model
will be meshed by DeltaMESH Fillet and the new mesh will be imported and possibly
merged into the initial sharp edges model. The modified part of the mesh is put into a
new object.
Using few parameters, DeltaMESH Fillet can set an optimal distribution of nodes on the
surface.
The DeltaMESH Fillet dialog- Constant tab page
Methodology
There are 2 important steps in the definition of filleting data :
The first step is the radius values assignment. The radius values are set on the nodes of
selected edges. After selecting the sharp edges, the user can use three different methods
GEOMETRY
Filleting
to assign the radii : Constant, Single and Interpolated. When a radius value is defined on
a node, a circle is displayed in the 3D view.
The second step is the definition of DeltaMESH Fillet meshing parameters such as
maximum element size, chordal error, etc…The user-defined parameters are set in the
Parameters tab page
Notes:
· To display edges use the button of the Visibility dialog.

· To select sharp edge individually or with the elastic rectangle selection, use the
button of the Selection dialog or toolbar.
· To select sharp edges along a path, it is advisable to use either the Selection by
propagation or the Selection by geometry options (in the Edit menu or in
Selection dialog bar or tool bar).
· To change the radius visualization, access to Options tab of DeltaMESH Fillet
dialog
Constant Tab
The same radius value is assigned to all the nodes of selected edges.
- On all edges: this is the default mode, all nodes will be assigned the value defined in
the “Radius” text field. If some nodes already had a radius value it will be reset.
- On edges with no radius: this mode allows the user to set the radius value on nodes
which have no radius assigned. It is useful when the user wants to set several
constant values on different sharp edges.
- Radius: this value is assigned to some nodes of the selected sharp edges according
to the mode chosen above.
- Set radius: When clicking this button the radii are assigned and the graphical view
is updated with the new distribution. DeltaMESH Fillet will use this value when the
OK button is pressed.
Assignment of a constant radius and result of the filleting
GEOMETRY
Filleting
Single Tab
This dialog is used to set a radius value on a single edge in order to modify the filleting
input data locally. The edge does not have to be selected. It is picked in the 3D view.
The Single method tab page
- : This button enables to pick the single edge. Once the edge is picked, the text
field displays the labels of the two nodes of the edges. This can be useful
information.
- Radius: this value is assigned to both nodes of the picked edge.
- Set radius: When clicking this button the radius is assigned and the graphical view
is updated with the new value. DeltaMESH Fillet will use this value when the OK
button is pressed..
GEOMETRY
Filleting
Assignement of a radius to a single edge and filleting result
Interpolated Tab
This dialog is used to set an Interpolated distribution of radius values on selected edges.
The Interpolated method tab page
This method searches the shortest edge-path between 2 picked nodes among selected
edges
GEOMETRY
Filleting
Path search
- : This button enables the user to pick the two nodes between which the
interpolation is computed. The node label can also be typed in the text fields “Node
1” and “Node 2”. If the user inputs bad labels, an error message will be displayed.
- Radius: Radius 1 and Radius 2 are the radii assigned to Node 1 and Node 2. By
clicking on the Apply function button, each node N located on the shortest path
between Node 1 and Node 2 will be assigned an interpolated value between Radius 1
and Radius 2 as a function of the length from Node 1 to N on the path.
- Set radii: When clicking this button, the radii are assigned and the graphical view is
updated with the new distribution. DeltaMESH Fillet will use this value when the
OK button is pressed.
- Clear radii: Clicking on this button will clear radius values for each node located on
the shortest path between Node 1 and Node 2.
Assignement of a interpolated values and filleting result
GEOMETRY
Filleting
Options Tab
This dialog is used to modify visualization settings of the radius values.
The Options tab page
Parameters
This panel controls the display options for filleting.
- Show radii as circles: Displays red circles at nodes on the selected sharp edges.
- Display radii values: Displays the radius numerical value at each node.
Visualization of radii and their value
GEOMETRY
Filleting
Parameters Tab
This panel allows the user to configure DeltaMESH Fillet meshing parameters.
the Parameters tab page
Geometry
- Minimum radius: DeltaMESH Fillet creates a CAD model according to radius
settings on the sharp edges but also according to geometrical criteria. In some cases,
DeltaMESH Fillet is not able to build a surface that fulfills the radius settings.
Consequently, DeltaMESH Fillet gradually decreases the radius value until it is able
to build the proper geometry. Minimum radius is the limit for that decrease.
(Default value: 1.0)
- Geometric precision: During the CAD model creation, DeltaMESH Fillet will not
generate any surface which size is lower than this value. (Default value: 1.0)
GEOMETRY
Filleting
Meshing
- Min. element size: Minimum element size allowed for meshing a fillet.
- Max. element size: Maximum element size allowed for meshing a fillet. The
Max. element size of the fillet elements must close to the initial size of elements
along sharp edges. (Default value: 30.0)
- Quad. surface detection: Automatically detects surfaces with 3 or 4 sides
(deactivated by default). Once detected, these surfaces have priority for meshing.
- Density variation: Defines the density variation of the element size between
surfaces detected by the option Quad surfaces detection. (Default value: 1.2)
- Trim initial sharp edges mesh: This toggle drives the merging of the new mesh into
the initial model. When this toggle is not checked, DeltaMESH Fillet does not
connect the fillet mesh to the initial sharp edges mesh model. So the objects that
initially had sharp edges stay unchanged while the new mesh is put into a separate
object. With this method, one can easily compare several meshing strategies.
(Activated by default)
Criteria
- Chordal error: This value is given in the model length unit and must be positive.
The chordal error parameter defines the maximum distance between elements to the
exact fillet geometry. (Default value: 0.15)
- Max. angle: This value is given in degrees and must be greater than 0°. This
parameter defines the maximum angle between the normals of two adjacent
elements attached to the same surface. (Default value: 15.0)
Advanced parameters
This button opens the DeltaMESH advanced parameters dialog.
Function Buttons
- OK: Launches DeltaMESH Fillet mesh generator with the parameters defined
above. Prior to this action, radius values must have been set (Set radius button).
- Clear all: Clears all the radius values on the model.
GEOMETRY
Meshing Lines
MESHING LINES
This dialog enables the user to create nodes along one or several lines obtained from 3D
curve projections and to disconnect a selection of elements.
Blank sheet mesh before and after the meshing line functionality has been applied
This function makes it possible to create several distinct parts in the tools when tailored
blanks are being stamped. Free edges can be built from the meshing lines obtained.
The Meshing line dialog
Curves
- 3D Curves list: This list displays the 3D curves that have been picked in the 3D
view.
· : By default this button is active. 3D curves can be picked in succession.
· : Removes the selected curve(s) from the list.
GEOMETRY
Meshing Lines
- Direction: The direction of projection of the 3D curve is defined by a vector either

by using the help of the wizard or by typing its components in the text fields.
- : This drop-down list defines whether the projection is done along a direction in
the Global or a user-defined system of axes.
Parameters
- Create a free edge: Creates free edges along the lines projected.
- Min. edge length: Defines a minimum length of the edges for the created elements.
Function Buttons
- Transform: Performs the projection then the modification of the mesh with the
parameters defined above.
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any mesh modification.
Notes:
· The elements onto which the 3D curve is projected must be selected before
pressing the Transform button.
· To project several 3D curves on a single mesh, it is advisable to project each
curve separately.
· The objects are automatically rebuilt
· Several meshes can be cut by a single 3D curve.
This function is available in set-up module only.
GEOMETRY
Blank Meshing
BLANK MESHING
This dialog allows the user to create shell meshes. There are 5 modes of creation,
corresponding to the following tab pages :
- Four points: Creates a meshes with quadrangles from the definition of 4 points in
the 3D model.
- Rectangle: Similar as previous mode but in 2D and with parallel opposite sides.
- 2D contour: Creates a mesh from an arbitrary planar 3D curve.
- Disk/Pie: Creates a mesh bounded by a circular contour on ¼, ½ or ¾ of a disk, or a
full disk.
- Tube: Creates a mesh on a cone-shaped surface with a circular section.
For each mode, the maximal size of the new shell elements must be set. A wizard can
be used to set this size according to computation parameters. The blank name must also
be set by the user.
Four Points
The Four Points tab allows quadrangular meshing by specifying the 4 corners of a 4
sides surface. The program does not check the coherence of the data entered, i.e. the
resulting mesh can be warped or inappropriate.
View of a warped mesh created from 4 points
GEOMETRY
Blank Meshing
The Blank Meshing dialog – Four Points tab
For each corner, the coordinates can be specified either by using the help of the wizard
or by typing its coordinates in the text fields.
Note:
· When 4 points have already been picked, the tool starts to pick from scratch if
additional picks are made.
The Clear positions button resets the coordinate fields.
Rectangle
- The Rectangle tab allows quadrangular meshing of a rectangle by specifying one
corner point, the X axis and the dimension along X (b) and Y axis (a). A drop-down
list (top right-hand side) defines whether the meshing is done in the Global or a user-
defined system of axes. The mesh will be created in the plane XY of the chosen
frame. The user can also rotate the rectangle by setting an angle with the X axis. To
create a square mesh , check the “Square” toggle, a and b will automatically be set
equal. The user can modify a and b with 2 sliders, if the “preview” mode is
activated, sides of the rectangle will adjust while sliders are moved.
GEOMETRY
Blank Meshing
view of 2 rectangle meshes, on the left Angle=0 , on the right Angle= 20 degrees
The Blank Meshing dialog – Rectangle tab
GEOMETRY
Blank Meshing
2D Contour
The Blank Meshing dialog – 2D-Contour tab
This dialog allows the user to create a shell mesh which contour is given by a 3D curve,
this curve must be in plane. The blank contour can be defined by two ways :
- Blank contour: This drop-down list is used to select an object. It lists all the objects
of the model which contain 3D curve(s). There are 2 others modes to select the 3D
curve :
· : Pick the 3D curve in the 3D view.
· : Not yet implemented. The curves contour, can be imported from CAD
file, by opening the File selector.
- Reference direction: The direction of the mesh is defined, depending on a direction
and an angle: the direction of the edges of the mesh will be the projection of the
reference direction in the plane of the contour, turned in that plane by the value of
the Angle. The direction is specified with a vector either by using the help of the
GEOMETRY
Blank Meshing
- Polygonal outline edition: This button allows the user to create a new 3D curve
(blank outline) by opening the 3D curves editor at tab page Parametric (Polygon
editor).
Disk/Pie
The Blank Meshing dialog – Disk/Pie tab
This dialog allows the user to create a shell mesh which contour is a circle arc A drop-
down list (top right-hand side) defines whether the meshing is done in the Global or a
user-defined system of axes. The mesh will be created in the plane XY of the chosen
frame. The user can also rotate the mesh by setting an angle with the X axis.
- Angle: Use this radio buttons to select the angle of the circle arc : ¼, ½, ¾ or full
disk.
- Rext: Radius of the mesh.
- Rint: Internal mesh radius which sets an inner boundary where topology changes.
- Alpha: Coefficient applied to Rint, this gives an internal distance on axis X and Y
wish sets an inner boundary where topology changes. This boundary is not circular.
- Center: Dial the coordinates, use the wizard or pick a 3D point to set position of the
mesh center.
GEOMETRY
Blank Meshing
- NRext , NRint, NTheta: This values cannot be user-defined, they are computed
automatically from other values and from the maximal size criterion. These values
represent the number of shells along the axis in the 3 parts of the mesh.
Description of the pie mesh
Tube
This dialog allows the user to create a conical mesh which section is a circle arc. The
axis of this cone is set through Direction control. This axis might defined in a local
frame.
GEOMETRY
Blank Meshing
The Blank Meshing dialog – Disk/Pie tab

- Base point: This point sets the position of the base plane, point and direction define
the axis of the tube.
- R1 & R2: radii of the tube extremal sections.
- h: height of the tube.
- Theta 1 & Theta 2 : start and end angle of the circular section around the tube axis.
Element Criterion
This panel allows the user to enter the maximum size among the shells of the new the
mesh. If no value is entered in the text field, an error message is displayed.
A wizard helps the user define the maximal size of the shells elements with respect to
the computation parameters such as blank thickness or refinement level. Click on the
following button to open the mesh size wizard:
GEOMETRY
Blank Meshing
Generate Blank in
If a name is entered in the text field, and is not already assigned, a new object is created
with the generated elements. If an object is selected in the list or if the user enters the
name of an existing object a warning dialog will ask to replace the elements initially
contained in the object by the generated elements. If the user does not want to replace
the old elements, then the blank generation is cancelled. If no name is entered, then an
error message is displayed.
Function buttons
- Preview: Causes the display of 3D graphical preview to evaluate the shape of the
mesh to create. It allows the user to modify the parameters -if necessary- until
having a good mesh. Note that the preview feature is not available for mode “2D
contour”.
- Create: Causes the defined mesh to be created.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing any meshing.
GEOMETRY
Create flat blank
CREATE FLAT BLANK

The user could need a flat blank as the projection surface. This can be done by clicking
the button . This feature is available in QuikStamp inverse projects only.
The source object is the object to build the surface from, according the projection
direction.
Function buttons
- OK: Causes the defined mesh to be created in a new object called “Flattened
geometry”. If this name already exists, a number will be added to the name.
GEOMETRY
Create flat blank
ELEMENT SIZE WIZARD

This wizard allows the user to determine the maximum size needed for the elements,
depending on computation parameters. The wizard is called up by the button of

the Blank Meshing dialog.
This size will guarantee that the final size of the mesh (due to adaptive meshing) will
satisfy the size criteria required by the solver for good results (if the user applies the
corresponding maximum level of refinement in the process set-up).
The Mesh Size Wizard dialog
- Computation Type: Select the computation type, therefore the equation used to
calculate the final mesh size.
· Standard: For a standard stamping study 0.5(Rad+Thk/2)
· Springback: For a springback computation, 0.25(Rad+Thk/2)
- Contact type: If the choice is “Penalty”, the “Gravity stage” toggle is disabled.
- Minimal Sliding Radius (Rad): This is the minimal value of curvature radius of the
forming tools on which the blank will slide during the forming stage.
- Minimal Blank Thickness (Thk): Estimation of minimal blank thickness during the
forming.
- Gravity Stage: This toggle is activated if a gravity stage is set-up in the process. If a
gravity stage is planed, the maximum level of refinement will be 5, otherwise 4.
This toggle is disabled if the Contact type is “Penalty”.
- Compute Size: This button launches the second steps and brings up the Compute
Mesh Size dialog.
GEOMETRY
Element Size Wizard
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the parameters entered and/or computed and closes the dialog.
GEOMETRY
Element Size Wizard
COMPUTE MESH SIZE

This dialog is called up by the Compute button of the Element Size wizard.
The dialog allows the user to determine the initial mesh size, depending on the final size
required and the maximum level of refinement during the forming stage. These two
values are computed with the parameters of the first step.
The Mesh Size Wizard dialog
- Final Size Requested: Value computed which can be modified.

- Initial Number of Elements: Displays the corresponding number of elements of the
mesh. It gives an idea of the amount of entities of the blank at the beginning of the
computation.
- Max. Refinement Level: Maximal refinement level during the forming. It is
estimated by the user.
- : The user can increase or decrease the Initial Number of Elements with
these buttons (which increases or decreases the maximum level of refinement and
initial number of elements but left the final size unchanged). He can see in the 3D
view the impact of the modification of these parameters on the position of the future
nodes.
Note:
· If the user does not want to use adaptive mesh, he just has to set the Max.
Refinement Level to 1 by using the decrease button.
Function Button
- Close: Validates the parameters entered and/or computed and closes the dialog.
GEOMETRY
Nodes Management
NODES MANAGEMENT
This function is used to create nodes and modify their positions in the current project.
Creation
The Nodes management dialog – Creation tab
- The new node can be created either by using the help of the wizard or by typing its
coordinates in the X, Y, Z text fields (double-click onto the field). The coordinates of
each new node are entered one after another in the table.
- : When pressing this button, the last node created is deleted. If the user has
disabled the automatic mode, the coordinates of this node are erased from the table.
This button is disabled while no points are listed.
- : When pressing this button, all the created nodes are deleted. This button is
disabled while no points are listed.
- Generate in: To specify if the created nodes are added to the object chosen in the
drop-down list. If a name is entered in the text field, and is not already assigned, a
new object is created with the generated nodes. If an object is selected in the list or
if the user enters the name of an existing object then the generated nodes are added
to this object. If no name is entered, the generated nodes are added to the object
named 'Others'.
GEOMETRY
Nodes Management
- Automatic: if this toggle is checked, a node is created at each pick. In the automatic
mode, the list of coordinates is disabled. If it is not checked, the user has to click on
button Apply to generate the nodes.
-
The Nodes management dialog – Creation tab ,Automatic mode active
Function Buttons
- Apply: The coordinates for the new positions are validated and the newly created
nodes are then visible in the 3D view and automatically selected.
- Close: Closes the dialog without creating any new node.
Modification
This function is used to modify the position of nodes or merge them. The user must
select an editing mode using the Type drop-down list. The modification tab will change
according to the chosen type The nodes are modified when the Apply button is
activated.
- There are 4 types :
- Move
- Node to Node
- Merge List
- Double Nodes
GEOMETRY
Nodes Management
Move
The move nodes panel
- Drag: Allows the user to move a picked node directly in the 3D view using the left
mouse button. Nodes must be visible. When releasing the mouse button the node is
displaced. When this option is activated, the “New coordinates” text fields are
disabled. If the “Drag” action is chosen, the “Automatic” toggle is disabled.
- Position: When in this mode, the user can move a node by picking it in the 3D
view. The “New coordinates” frame is enabled. The user can then modify
coordinates. If the “Automatic” option is activated, the node will directly move to its
new position. If it is not checked, the application will show the new position with a
red marker. To move to this new position, the user has to click on Apply.
- : this button activates the node picking, it is checked by default when the
“Position” action is chosen.
- Automatic: This option is compatible only with the “Position” action. If activated,
the picked node will automatically move to the position defined in the “New
coordinates” frame.
- New coordinates: This panel is active when the Position mode is selected and when
the node to move has been picked in the 3D view. The user can then, either change
each coordinate by pressing the up and down keys, or pick the coordinates in the 3D
view when the button is pressed or dial the coordinates in the text fields.
- Node Label: Displays the label of the picked node.
GEOMETRY
Nodes Management
Function Buttons
- Apply: The coordinates for the new position are validated. This button is disabled if
the Position mode was chosen and if the Automatic option was set active.
- Close: Closes the dialog without moving any nodes.
Node to Node
This mode allows the user to merge two nodes thanks to a picking tool.
The node to node panel
- Node 1: The user can pick in the 3D view the first node whose label is displayed in
the text field.
- Node 2: The user can pick in the 3D view the second node whose label is displayed
in the text field.
Function Buttons
- Apply: Moves the first selected node to the second node position and destroys the
second node.
- Note:
- Connectivities are updated immediately. When the dimension of an element is
decreasing, the element is deleted. Example: When two nodes of the same triangle
or quadrangle are merged, the triangle is destroyed and the quadrangle becomes a
triangle.
- Close: Closes the dialog without merging any nodes.
GEOMETRY
Nodes Management
Merge Selected Nodes

This option allows the user to merge several selected nodes to a new position.
The merge selected nodes panel
- Target: The user has the choice to merge the selected nodes either to a given point
that will be picked in the 3D view (Position) or to the gravity center of all selected
nodes (Gravity center).
- New coordinates: This option is available when the Position mode in the target
panel is selected. The user can then, either change each coordinate by pressing the
up and down keys, or pick the new coordinates of the node in the 3D view when the
button is pressed or dial the coordinates in the text fields.
Function Buttons
- Apply: click on this button to merge the selected nodes to the target position.
- Close: Closes the dialog whether a merging has been done or not.
Double Nodes
This option allows the user to merge double nodes.
The double nodes panel
GEOMETRY
Nodes Management
- Tolerance: The user may enter the value for the merging tolerance in this text field.
All couple of nodes which distance is lower than this tolerance will be detected.
-
Note:
- Connectivities are updated immediately. When the dimension of an element is
decreasing, the element is deleted. New elements might be created. Examples:
- When two nodes of the same triangle are merged, the triangle is destroyed
- When two nodes of the same quadrangle are merged, the quadrangle is destroyed
and a triangle is built from the 3 remaining nodes.
- Detect: When this option is activated, the double nodes are simply detected. All
double nodes will be marked once the user activates the Apply function button.
- Delete: When this option is activated, the double nodes are merged once the user
activates the Apply function button.
Function Buttons
- Apply: Applies merging or detection of double nodes.

GEOMETRY
Element Management
ELEMENT MANAGEMENT
This dialog is used to create and modify elements.
Creation
The user must first select a creation mode using the list of options. Depending on the
creation mode, the user can fill in the data input zones or activate the toggles
corresponding to the required options. The user must click on Apply to create the
elements whose connectivities have been set.
The Element management dialog – Creation tab
- Type of element: This drop-down list enables the user to choose the type of element
to create among the following:
· Bar
· 3-node shell
· 4-node shell
· Hexahedron
GEOMETRY
Element Management
Note
For the two last types the order of points or nodes creation is important to avoid
bad topologies.
1 2
1 2
6
5
3
4
3
4 7
8
- Action: This drop-down list enables the user to choose various ways to create
elements according to the type of element selected (see the table below).
Hexahedron 4-node shells 3-node shells Bars
Pick / Enter points X X X X
Pick nodes X X X X
Transform edges X
Transform 3D curves X
· Pick / Enter points: The user can pick the points in the 3D view and the
coordinates are automatically displayed in the data input zone. The user can
click on Apply to create the element(s), a node will be created at each picked
position. If the “Automatic” option is activated, an element and its nodes will
be created each time the number of picked points is equal to the number of
nodes corresponding to the chosen element type. (example : a quad will be
created every four picks if user has selected type 4-node shell).
Note:
A right-click menu can be used in the data input zone to insert, delete, copy, and
paste a line (point coordinates).
· Pick nodes: The user can pick the nodes in the 3D view. When enough nodes
have been selected to create an element, the user can click on Apply to create the
element. If the “Automatic” option is activated, an element and will be created
each time the number of picked nodes is equal to the number of nodes
corresponding to the chosen element type. (example : a quad will be created
every four picks if user has selected type 4-node shell).
Note:
If the user has not selected enough nodes to create an element and clicks on
Apply, a warning message appears stating the number of nodes left needed to
create the element.
GEOMETRY
Element Management
· : When this button is active, the user can pick in the 3D view, the position
of a node.
- Automatic: : If this toggle is checked, an element will be created automatically
when the number of picks (nodes or points) is equal to the number of nodes
corresponding to the chosen element type. If it is not checked, the user has to click
on button Apply to generate nodes and/or elements.
- Generate in: To specify if the created elements are added to the object chosen in the
new object is created with the generated elements. If an object is selected in the list
or if the user enters the name of an existing object then the generated elements are
added to this object. If no name is entered, the generated elements are added to the
object named 'Others'.
Function buttons
- Apply: Creates the elements using stored connectivities and displays them in the 3D
view.
- Close: Closes the dialog without creating any element.
GEOMETRY
Element Management
Modification
This function enables the user to detect double-elements (same connectivities) and/or to
delete them.
The detect function is activated when the Apply button is clicked.
Function buttons
- Apply: Applies the selected action (detects or deletes double elements).
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any action.
GEOMETRY
3D curves manager
3D CURVES MANAGER
This function is used to create or modify 3D curves in the current project.
Creation
The 3D Curves Manager dialog – Creation tab
- Generate in: To specify if the created 3D curve is added to the object chosen in the
object named 'Others'.
GEOMETRY
3D curves manager
- Actions: This drop down-list enables the user to select a mode of creation of a
curve. The choice of actions are the following:
· Pick / Enter Points: Creates 3D curves either by picking points in the 3D view
or by entering coordinates point after point (line after line in the table). To enter
a point coordinates double-click onto a field.
· From Bars: Creates 3D curves from selected bar elements in the 3D view. The
algorithm will build as many 3D curves as there are contiguous groups of
selected bars.
· From Edges: Creates 3D curves from selected bar edges in the 3D view. The
algorithm will build as many 3D curves as there are contiguous groups of
selected edges.
· From 3D curves: Creates a single 3D curve from selected 3D curves in the 3D
view. The algorithm will build the new 3D curve by joining the extremities of
the selected 3D curves.
· From Section: Creates curves from the section displayed in the 3D view.
· From free edges: Creates 3D curves from the free edges of visible objects. The
algorithm will build as many 3D curves as there are contiguous groups of free
edges.
· Elliptic: Enables the user to create an elliptic 3D curve by selecting 3 points (can
also be a circle). Creation of an ellipse defined by three points, representing the
center of the ellipse, a point on the ellipse defining the major axis with the
center, and a point on the ellipse not in line with the other two points. The three
points define the spatial plane of the ellipse.
When the Circle toggle is active, the three points define the edge of the circle
and the spatial plane. The R field displays the radius and allows the user to
create a concentric circle by modifying the radius value.
· Enter coordinates: Enables the user to create a 3D curve by entering its
coordinates point after point (line after line in the table). To enter a point
coordinates, double-click onto a field.
Note:
· A right-click menu can be used in the data input zone to insert, delete, copy, and
- Minimum length: Displays the length of shortest 3D curves.

- Maximum length: Displays the length of the longest 3D curves.
Note:
GEOMETRY
3D curves manager
If one of the two above values is set, when the user clicks on Apply some points can
be merged or some segments can be split in order to fit the segment length.
- Close: Closes or opens the new 3D curve whether this toggle is checked or not.
- : Deletes the graphical preview of the 3D curve.
Edition
The 3D Curves Manager dialog – Edition tab
- Edited 3D curve: Displays the label of the edited 3D curve. This drop-down list can
be used to select a 3D curve among those present in the current state.
- : The 3D curve to edit can be picked in the 3D view. The Edited 3D curve
drop-down list will be updated.
GEOMETRY
3D curves manager
- Actions: This drop down-list enables the user to select a mode of edition. The
choice of actions are the following:
· Move / Enter points: This option is used to displace points of the 3D curve. To
pick a point onto the 3D curve the button is activated. When the mouse
cursor is moved over the 3D curve, construction points are highlighted using the
mouse to drag and drop a point to a new position. A 3D curve can also be
modified by entering its coordinates point after point (line after line in the table).
To enter a point coordinates double-click onto a field.
Note
· A right-click menu can be used in the data input zone to insert, delete, copy, and
· Split: Enables the user to split the 3D curve at a point picked onto the curve. To
pick the split location onto the 3D curve the button is activated. When
picking the point, the 3D curve is automatically split into two 3D. curves.
· Insert/Add/Remove: This option is used to insert, add or remove points using
respectively the following buttons: . Perform the action by direct

picking in the 3D view.
· Merge with 3D curve: This option is used to perform the junction of the edited
3D curve with another 3D curve. To merge two 3D curves the user has to pick 2
points that must be close to the two extremities he wants to join. The first point
is picked on a 3D curve that is not the edited 3D curve and the 2nd point is
picked on the edited 3D curve. At the second pick the merge is done
automatically. The points of the merged 3D curve (first pick) are appended to
the edited 3D curve. The merged 3D curve is destroyed. To activate the tool for
picking the two points, use the following button:

- Minimum length: Displays the length of shortest 3D curves.
- Maximum length: Displays the length of the longest 3D curves.
Note:
If one of the two above values is modified, the user can click on Apply to modify the
curve.
- Close: Closes or opens edited 3D curve whether this toggle is checked or not.
GEOMETRY
3D curves manager
Parametric
The 3D Curves Manager dialog – Edition tab
Edited polygon
In this section an already defined 3D curve or a new created one has to be specified for
all further modifications.
- New: Pressing this button creates a new polygon. The implicit generated default
name can be modified directly inside the selection box.
- Pick 3D curve in view: Activating this tool allows the user to choose an already
defined 3D curve by picking onto this curve object inside the 3D window. Of course
the user can specify existing curve objects directly via the selection box.
GEOMETRY
3D curves manager
Actions
- Add point to polygon: picking onto the base geometry will create a new 3D point
associated by an automatic generated number. Successive generated points will be
connected by a line segment. The coordinates and default radii (automatically
created in corners) will be printed into the Coordinates table.
- Insert point in polygon: additional points can be inserted at any position. The
polygon editor automatically finds the segment where the point has to be integrated.
Either a new start or end point will be generated or the existing segment will be
split.
- Move polygon point: existing points can be interactively moved by picking and
dragging them inside the 3D window.
- Delete point from polygon: points can be interactively deleted by picking them
inside the 3D window.
- Close / open polygon: activating this this two stage button either closes an open
polygon or re-opens an already closed polygon. When closing the polygon radii
(with specified default value) will be automatically generated at the new segment’s
start and end point.
- Edit polygon point: existing points can be modified individually. Activating this
button opens a small edit dialog.
- The desired point has to be picked inside the 3D window. It’s point number,
radius and coordinates will be printed into the dialog entry fields and can be
modified afterwards. Each modification will be applied after pressing the Tab or
Enter key. Choosing a different point number will switch to the appropriate point if
available or won’t have any effect onto the current selection.
Corners
- Radius: each polygon corner will be automatically smoothed by a radius if the
chosen value is greater zero.
- Set radius to all points: activating this button will apply the specified radius to all
corners. As long as this button is active new values will be applied immediately.
GEOMETRY
3D curves manager
- Edit polygon point: individual corners can be modified (using the current radius
setting) by picking the desired point inside the 3D window.
- Numbers: corresponding point numbers will be visualised inside the 3D window by
activating this option.
Coordinates
The coordinates and radii of each polygon point will be printed inside this table. The
values can be modified by performing a double click onto the appropriate cell. The new
values will be applied by pressing the Tab or Enter key.
Function Buttons
- Apply: Applies the parameters for the creation /edition of 3D curves.
- Close: Closes the dialog without creating/editing any 3D curves.
GEOMETRY
3D curves manager
DELETION OF ENTITIES
This dialog is used to delete mesh or 3D curves. Three types of entities can be deleted
separately or conjointly once the selection has been performed: Nodes, Elements and
3D curves. The “Surfaces” deletion is not available for the moment.
The Deletion of entities dialog
Function Buttons
- Delete: Deletes the selected entities which type is checked.
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any action.
Notes:
· The mesh or 3D curves to delete must be selected before pressing the Delete
button.
· Flattening curves cannot be deleted with this dialog.
GEOMETRY
Translation
TRANSLATION
This dialog allows the user to translate, and possibly copy, selected entities (elements,
nodes or 3D curves).
The Translation dialog
Description
To define a translation the user first selects the mesh to translate then defines the
translation parameters as follows:
- Vector: The translation is defined by a vector either by using the help of the wizard
or by typing its components in the text fields.
- Magnitude: Multiplying factor of the translation (By default: 1).
- : This drop-down list defines whether the translation is done in the Global or a
user-defined system of axes.
- Generate in: To specify if the entity is directly translated or copied then translated.
· When inactive, the selected mesh is only translated.
· When active, the selected mesh is copied then translated and added to the object
chosen in the drop-down list. If a name is entered in the text field, and is not
already assigned, a new object is created with the generated entities. If an object
is selected in the list or if the user enters the name of an existing object then the
generated entities are added to this object. If no name is entered, the generated
entities are added to the object named 'Others'.
GEOMETRY
Translation
Function Buttons
- Translate: Performs the translation with the parameters defined above.
Note:
The mesh to translate must be selected before pressing this button.
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any translations.
GEOMETRY
Rotation
ROTATION
This dialog allows the user to rotate, and possibly copy, selected entities (elements,
The Rotation dialog
Description
To define a rotation the user first selects the mesh to rotate then defines the rotation
parameters as follows:
- Cumulated: These fields display the cumulated rotation angle for each rotation axis.
Note:
· If the three fields θx, θy, θz are filled the rotations are performed successively
round the x, y and z-axes.
- Center: Defines the center of the rotation either by using the help of the wizard or
by typing its coordinates in the text fields.
- : This drop-down list defines whether the rotation is done in the Global or a
- Direct: This tab is used to define the rotation angles (Bryan definition) and whether
the mesh is only rotated or copied. The rotation is performed once the Rotate
function button is pressed.
GEOMETRY
Rotation
· Angle: Value of the rotation angle in degrees.

· Axis: The rotation axis is defined by a vector either by using the help of the
· Generate in: To specify if the entity is rotated or copied then rotated.
When inactive, the selected mesh is only rotated.
When active, the selected mesh is copied then rotated and added to
the object chosen in the drop-down list. If a name is entered in the
text field, and is not already assigned, a new object is created with
the generated entities. If an object is selected in the list or if the user
enters the name of an existing object then the generated entities are
added to this object. If no name is entered, the generated entities are
added to the object named 'Others'.
- Incremental: This tab is used to define the rotation angles. The + and - keys
respectively apply a positive or negative rotation with the value defined in the
corresponding θx, θy, θz fields.
· θx, θy, θz: These fields define respectively the rotation round:
the x axis in the (yOz) plane,
the y axis in the (zOx) plane,
the z axis in the (xOy) plane.
Function Buttons
- Rotate: Performs the rotation with the parameters defined in the Direct panel. The +
and - keys execute the incremental rotation immediately.
Note:
The mesh to rotate must be selected before pressing these buttons.
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any rotations.
GEOMETRY
Symmetry
SYMMETRY
This dialog allows the user to perform a symmetry, with respect to a plane, and possibly
copy, selected entities (elements, nodes or 3D curves).
The Symmetry dialog
Description
To define symmetry, the user first select a plane then defines the symmetry parameters
as follows:
- Plane: This drop-down list allows the user to select any plane of the model.
- : To specify and position a temporary plane onto the model displayed into the
active 3D window. This button brings up the Position Plane dialog.
- Generate in: To specify if the entity is directly moved by symmetry or copied then
translated by symmetry.
· When inactive, the selected mesh is only moved by symmetry.
· When active, the selected mesh is copied then moved by symmetry and added to
the object chosen in the drop-down list. If a name is entered in the text field, and
is not already assigned, a new object is created with the generated entities. If an
object is selected in the list or if the user enters the name of an existing object
then the generated entities are added to this object. If no name is entered, the
generated entities are added to the object named 'Others'.
GEOMETRY
Symmetry
Function Buttons
- Transform: Performs the symmetry operation with the parameters defined above.
Note:
The mesh to move must be selected before pressing this button.
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any symmetry.
GEOMETRY
Offset
OFFSET
For stamping processes it is generally used to create punch and blankholder meshes
from an initial die mesh.
Offset operation
This dialog allows the user to offset, and eventually copy, a mesh.
The Offset dialog
GEOMETRY
Offset
Description
To perform an offset, the user first selects elements, then defines the offset parameters
as follows:
- Contact type: Two type of contacts can be used depending on the quality of the
mesh to offset:
· NL Penalty is dedicated to good mesh, i.e. connected mesh with elements well
proportioned and not warped. It gives accurate results.
· Penalty is used for coarse or unconnected mesh. The results are less accurate but
the algorithm is robust.
- Distance: Distance of the offset. This distance must be reasonable. If the radius is
smaller than the offset distance, singularities may appear and the mesh obtained
could be incorrect.
- : Enables the user to invert the orientation of the normal (therefore of the
offset).
- : Enables the user to pick an element and get its normal which defines the
orientation of the offset
- Orient mesh: can be de-activated if the mesh is already oriented, or if a bad mesh
quality need a manual orientation.
- Generate in: To specify whether the entity is directly transformed by offset or
copied then transformed by offset.
· When inactive, the selected mesh is only transformed by offset.
· When active, the selected mesh is copied then transformed by offset and added
to the object chosen in the drop-down list. If a name is entered in the text field,
and is not already assigned, a new object is created with the generated elements.
If an object is selected in the list or if the user enters the name of an existing
object then the generated elements are added to this object. If no name is
entered, the generated elements are added to the object named 'Others'.
Notes:
· Offset can only be applied to meshes that can be oriented (no multiple edges, no
multiple elements).
· Avoid multiple edges in the selection.
· The symmetry planes are taken into account by the offset.
GEOMETRY
Offset
Function Buttons
- Offset: Performs the offset with the parameters defined above.
Note:
The mesh to offset must be selected before pressing this button.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing any offsets.
GEOMETRY
Offset
EXTRUSION
This function is used to transform entities in N dimensions into entities in N+1
dimensions:
- The nodes into bars.
- The 3D curves and bars into 4-node shell elements.
- The 3-node and 4-node shell elements respectively into prisms and hexahedrons.
Three methods of extrusion, which correspond to the three tab of this dialog, are
proposed:
- Vector: Along a constant direction with a constant height.
- On plane: Along a constant direction ending on a plane.
- Shells normal: Along the normal direction to the shell elements to be extruded with
a constant height.
Extrusion of a bar by using 'On plane' method
GEOMETRY
Extrusion
The Extrusion dialog
Vector
All the entities are extruded along the same direction.
- Magnitude: Total height of the extrusion.
- Direction: The direction of extrusion is defined by a vector either by using the help
of the wizard or by typing its components in the text fields.
- : This drop-down list defines whether the projection is done in the Global or a
On Plane
All the entities are extruded along the same direction, which is perpendicular to the
plane surface.
- Plane list: This is the plane at which the extrusion ends. Hence the last layer of
nodes is on that plane. The plane must not be parallel to the direction of extrusion.
Shell Normals
This mode of extrusion is valid for the shell elements only.
The shell elements (from the selection) are extruded along their normals. They must be
connected to enable the normals to be oriented by propagation
GEOMETRY
Extrusion
- Magnitude: Total height of the extrusion. This vector is local to each shell.
- : All normals might not be oriented properly. To choose the global "side" of
the extrusion (this tool is similar to the offset orientation tool).
Common Parameters
- Number of layers: Number of elements created along the direction of extrusion per
element of the selection. Example: select 12 nodes, extruded with 4 layers. 48 bars
will be created.
- Delete source entities: Deletes the elements initially in the selection.
- Generate in: To specify in which object the new mesh is added. If a name is entered
in the text field, and is not already assigned, a new object is created with the
generated elements. If an object is selected in the list or if the user enters the name
of an existing object then the generated elements are added to this object. If no
name is entered, the generated elements are added to the object named 'Others'.
Function buttons
- Apply: Creates the extruded elements with the parameters defined above and
displays them in the 3D view.
- Close: Closes the dialog without creating any elements.
Notes:
· The elements that are extruded must be selected before pressing the Apply
button.
· The symmetry planes are not taken into account by the extrusion.
GEOMETRY
Divide/Split
DIVIDE/SPLIT
This dialog contains 2 tab pages :
- Division: This dialog allows the user to divide the edges of selected elements into
‘n’ new edges. This leads to new elements creation. Note that bars, shells and solids
can be divided.
- Split: This dialog allows the user to divide each selected 4-node shell (quadrangles)
into two 3-node shells (new triangles).
Divide
The Divide/Split dialog – Division tab
Description
To define a division operation, the user first selects the mesh to divide then defines the
- Delete source entities: Destroys the elements initially selected.
- Number of division
- Generate in: To specify if the shell elements are added to the object chosen in the
GEOMETRY
Divide/Split
added to this object. If no name is entered, the generated elements are automatically
added to the objects that were containing the elements initially selected.
Split
The Divide/Split dialog – Split tab
Description
To define a split operation, the user first selects the quadrangles to split then sets the
- Delete source entities: Destroys the elements initially selected.
- Generate in: To specify if the triangles elements are added to the object chosen in
the drop-down list. If a name is entered in the text field, and is not already assigned,
a new object is created with the generated elements. If an object is selected in the
list or if the user enters the name of an existing object then the generated elements
are added to this object. If no name is entered, the generated elements are
automatically added to the objects that were containing the elements initially
selected.
GEOMETRY
Divide/Split
Notes:
· In the split operation, if some non- quads elements are selected they will not be
taken into account.
· The quadrangles are split in the first diagonal (connectivities 0 and 2 are
linked). In the clean mesh function it is possible to split quads with a maximal
internal angle criterion.
Function Buttons
- Transform: Performs the split or division operation with the parameters defined
above.
Note:
· The mesh to transform must be selected before pressing this button.

- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing the transformation.
GEOMETRY
Divide/Split
PROJECTION
This dialog allows the user to project selected entities (elements, nodes or 3D curves)
onto an object or a plane.
The Translation dialog
Description
To define a projection the user first selects the entities to project then defines the
following parameters:
- Direction: The direction of projection is defined by a vector either by using the help
of the wizard or by typing its components in the text fields.
- Project selection on: Select the object(s) onto which entities will be projected .
- Generate in: To specify if the entities are directly projected or copied then projected
by offset.
· When inactive, the entities are only projected.
· When active, the selected entities are copied then projected and added to the
object chosen in the drop-down list. If a name is entered in the text field, and is
not already assigned, a new object is created with the generated entities. If an
object is selected in the list or if the user enters the name of an existing object
then the generated entities are added to this object. If no name is entered, the
generated entities are added to the object named 'Others'.
GEOMETRY
Projection
Function Buttons
- Project: Performs the projection with the parameters defined above.
Note:
The entities to project must be selected before pressing this button.
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any projections.
GEOMETRY
Projection
SCALING
This dialog allows the user to scale, and possibly copy, selected entities (elements,
The Scaling dialog
Description
To define a scaling operation, the user first selects the mesh to scale then defines the
scaling parameters as follows:
- Direction: The scaling is either Isotropic (defined in all the directions) or in one of
the three main directions X, Y, Z.
- Scale factor: Factor which determines the scale of the selection along one or several
axes.
- Center: Defines the center of the scaling transformation either by using the help of
the wizard or by typing its coordinates in the text fields.
- Generate in: To specify if the entity is directly scaled or copied then scaled.
· When inactive, the selected mesh is only scaled.
· When active, the selected mesh is copied then scaled and added to the object
chosen in the drop-down list. If a name is entered in the text field, and is not
already assigned, a new object is created with the generated entities. If an object
is selected in the list or if the user enters the name of an existing object then the
generated entities are added to this object. If no name is entered, the generated
entities are added to the object named 'Others'.
GEOMETRY
Scaling
Function Buttons
- Scale: Performs the scaling with the parameters defined above.
Note:
The mesh to scale must be selected before pressing this button.
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any scalings.
GEOMETRY
Scaling
AUTOPOSITIONING
This dialog allows the user to position an object onto another.
The Autopositioning dialog
Description
- Direction: The direction of translation is defined by a vector either by using the help
of the wizard or by typing its components in the text fields. It can be seen as the
direction in which the source objects, once positioned, must give the impression of
"pressing" on the target objects. Hence, it makes it possible to ignore the initial
position of the source objects.
- : This drop-down list defines whether the autopositioning is done in the Global
or a user-defined system of axes.
- Imposed Gap: Minimum distance authorized for the positioning.
- Group to move: Select the objects which will be positioned onto the selected objects
of the list Reference on the right-hand side.
- Reference: Select the objects onto which the selected objects of the Group to move
list will be positioned. The entities of the objects selected in that list will not be
displaced.
GEOMETRY
Autopositioning
Relative position of the object to move (in red) and fixed object
before and after autopositioning
Function Buttons
- Transform: Performs the translation of the objects to move onto the fixed objects
with the gap defined above. At the end of the autopositionning, a report window is
displayed, this window mentions the magnitude and the vector of the final
displacement. The user can then modify the displacement (OK button) or cancel the
operation (Cancel button).
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any positioning.
GEOMETRY
Autopositioning
TRIMMING
This dialog is used to trim an adaptive or non-adaptive mesh, to simulate trimming or a
lance by using one or more 3D curves . The user can choose to trim along a given
direction (one direction for all 3D curves) or orthogonal (the direction is locally
computed by using the shells normals). Only shell elements (triangles or quadrangles)
can be trimmed.
This dialog allows the user to project a curve onto an object, and then trim the mesh.
The Trimming dialog
To define a trimming operation the user:

- First selects the elements to be trimmed.
- Picks the 3D curve(s) which will be used to trim the mesh.
- Chooses the trimming mode (orthogonal or not).
- If the orthogonal mode was not chosen, the user defines the direction of trimming.
- Finally the user has to pick some shell(s) in the zone(s) of the mesh to be kept.
GEOMETRY
Trimming
Description
Orthogonal trimming
The user can choose to check the toggle Orthogonal trimming if he wants to trim the
mesh orthogonally. This mode requires that the trimming curves are very “close” to the
mesh and properly discretized. The discretization of curves shall be as accurate as the
mesh discretization.
Curves
- Direction: The direction of trimming is defined by a vector either by using the help
of the wizard or by typing its components in the text fields. This direction control
does not have to be defined if the orthogonal mode is active, so it is disabled.
- : This drop-down list defines whether the trimming is done along a direction in
- : This button enables the user to select 3D curves by picking in the 3D view.
The window on the left-hand is updated with the curve label.
- : This button is used to remove 3D curves from the list of trimming curves.
Kept Zones
- : This button enables the user to choose the zone(s), area(s) to keep. The list
must contain shell elements only. The shell elements must be picked in the 3D view
and must also be in the selection.
- : This button is used to remove shell elements from the list.
GEOMETRY
Trimming
Advanced Parameters
The button calls up the following dialog.
The Advanced parameters dialog
This dialog allows the user to set some parameters that can improve the trimming in
special cases.
- Simply curves: When checked, this toggle will ask the algorithm to simplify the
trimming curves by removing some points when they are aligned. This will lead to
an optimized CPU time. The alignment criterion of 3 points is driven by parameter
Angle. When the user does not want to do any simplification just uncheck this
toggle.
- Angle: This parameter is used when the toggle Simplify curves is checked. As long
as two segments of a 3D curve make an angle lower than this parameter, the
algorithm will simplify the 3D curve by building a single equivalent segment.
Example: 1000 points on a straight line, are treated as a single segment
- Corner angle: When the angle (in degrees) between two 3D curve segments is
greater than this value, the projected point of junction of these 2 segments will be a
mandatory position for a mesh node. This type of position can prevent optimization
of the time step.
- Detection distance: This distance is a proximity criterion which helps find the 3D
curves involved in the trimming of each shell element. All segments within this
range will be used for the trimming of an element. That is why the 3D curves shall
be as close to the mesh as possible. The higher this distance is the less robust the
trimming algorithm is. This parameter is used only in the Orthogonal trimming
mode.
GEOMETRY
Trimming
Additional Parameters
- Optimize mesh: Remeshing is performed by optimizing the time step as far as
possible. The maximum reduction of the smallest time step value is 20%. The
smallest time step is computed using the shell elements, which are trimmed. For an
adaptive mesh, the elements on the border are refined to the highest refinement level
reached by the trimmed elements.
Notes:
· The objects are automatically reconstituted.

· To trim a single mesh with several 3D curves which intersecting each other, it is
advisable to apply as many separate trimming operations as 3D curves.
· Several meshes can be trimmed by the same 3D curve.
· The transformed elements recover the identifier picked by the original element
in the restart file. Example: if an element has been refined or trimmed, its child
will have the same picked element identifier in the restart file. Therefore the
physical data provided by the solver are transferred.
· This function is available in the pre-process module only.
Function buttons
- Trim: Starts the trimming.
Note:
The elements to be trimmed must be selected before pressing this button.
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any trimmings.
GEOMETRY
Trimming
WALL CREATION
This option allows the user to perform the extrusion and the meshing of the free edges
of a selection of shells.
Selected shells Wall creation
The free edges which nodes are located in a symmetry plane are not taken into account
by this transformation. The aim of this function is the generation of raised edges for a
surface blankholder.
The Walls Creation dialog
Description
To define a direction for the extrusion the user first selects the shells on which applies
the extrusion, then defines the extrusion parameters as follows:
- Direction: The direction of extrusion of the free edges is defined by a vector either
- : This drop-down list defines whether the extrusion is done along a direction in
GEOMETRY
Wall Creation
⎛ Height ⎞
- Height: Total height of the extrusion. Hence, Height of an element = ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ .
⎝ N Layers ⎠
- N Layers: Number of layers of shell created elements.
- Generate in: To specify if the new elements are added to the object chosen in the
object named ‘Others’.
Function Buttons
- Create: Performs the extrusion with the parameters defined above.
Note:
· To create a wall the shells on which applies the extrusion must be selected
before pressing this button.
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any wall creations.
GEOMETRY
Wall Creation
FLATTENING
This option allows the user to project a 3D curve on selected objects, and to monitor its
evolution in the states (example: forecasting the contours of a blank from a cutting line
drawn at the end of stamping).
A 3D curve projected in the flattening is said to be "linked" and cannot be modified.
The flattening is available in the post-processing module only.
Initial projected 3D curve
Evolution of
the 3D curve
Final state State 7 Initial state
The Flattening dialog
GEOMETRY
Flattening
Description
To define a direction for the projection the user first selects the shells on then defines
the projection parameters as follows:
- : By default this button is active. A 3D curve can be picked in the active 3D

view.
- : Removes the selected curve from the selection.

Function Buttons
- Apply: Starts the projection. A progress bar monitors the evolution of the
computation. A 3D curve is created and kept in the selection. The user can create a
new object containing this 3D curve. During a change of state in post-process, this
curve will remain "linked" to the elements to which it was projected.
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any projections.
Notes:
· To create a projected curve, the shells on which the projection is applied must
be selected before pressing the Apply button.
· If a point of the 3D curve has no projection on the "target" objects, an error
message is displayed.
· A 3D curve cannot be projected on entities generated in the post-processing
module.
· The reconstruction of the 3D curve in a state takes into account the adaptive
meshing.
· The curves linked can be followed in animation.
GEOMETRY
Flattening
MESH CHECK
This dialog is used to detect, select, delete, isolate or clean the bad shell elements
among visible ones. The cleaning operation is done to improve mesh quality by
transforming shell elements according to several criteria. Elements basic
transformations are nodes merging and quadrangles splitting.
The Mesh Check dialog
GEOMETRY
Mesh check
Display
This frame allows the user to display a mesh quality contour and select the defect(s) to
analyse. Note that the column Contour allows displaying a single value whereas the
Defect column allows selecting all types of defects. When a defect is selected, if the
corresponding limit value is not set an error message is displayed. And the
configuration frame is displayed so the user can set the missing value.
Configuration
This frame allows the user to set the limits for each criterion. The content of this frame
can be shown or hidden by using buttons
- Minimal surface: If the element's area is smaller, the algorithm will try to merge its
2 closest nodes. The element might be deleted or tranformed into a triangle
(merging criterion).
- Minimal characteristic length: If one of the element's characteristic length is shorter,
the algorithm will try to merge its 2 closest nodes. The element might be deleted or
tranformed into a triangle (merging criterion).
- Maximal aspect ratio: If one of the element's aspect ratio is greater the algorithm
will try to merge its 2 closest nodes. The element might be deleted or tranformed
into a triangle (merging criterion). The ideal value for the aspect ratio is 1.
- Maximal warping angle: If the quadrangle’s warping angle (in degrees) is greater,
the quadrangle is split into two triangles (splitting criterion).
- Maximal internal angle: If the quadrangle’s maximal internal angle (in degrees) is
greater, the quadrangle is split into two triangles (splitting criterion).
GEOMETRY
Mesh check
- Undercut angle: If the element’s normal makes angle (in degrees) with the undercut
reference direction greater than (90 – undercut angle), then the element will be
detected. The cleaning of such element is not implemented yet.
Report
This frame allows the user to check:
- The total number of bad shell elements.
- For each requested defect the corresponding number of bad shell elements.
Note that some elements might cumulate several defects.
- The number of multiple edges.
Example of report window
List of Bad Elements

This frame allows the user to :
- List all bad shells (corresponding to the chosen defects).
- Sort the bad shells by labels or by defects.
- Select the elements in the list to perform some actions.
- Select all : Highlights all the elements displayed in the list.
GEOMETRY
Mesh check
- Invert selection : Inverts the selection in the list.
- Deselect all : No element highlighted in the list
- Pick : Pick a shell in the 3D view, it will be highlighted in the list.

- Sort by label: Bad shells are listed in the growing order of their labels.
- Sort by defect: Bad shells are listed by defect, in the growing order of the
corresponding contour value.
- Number of listed shells: As many elements might be listed the user can set the
maximum capacity of the list. If the user wishes to list all bad shells he just has to
check the toggle All. In this case Number of listed shells will be grayed out.
- Label range: If the toggle All is not checked then the bad shells are split into several
groups filled by labels. The number of groups depends on the number of listed
shells.
Example: if you get 2300 bad shells and uncheck All, if number of listed shells is
1000 then you obtain 3 groups. 2 groups of 1000 shells and 1 group of 300.
- The user can switch group by using this dropdown list, the shells in the selected
group will be listed.
Function Buttons
- Clean highlighted elements : Starts the cleaning algorithm on the highlighted

shells of the list. If a great number of elements are bad this operation might take
several minutes.
- Delete highlighted elements : Simply removes the highlighted elements from

the model.
- Select highlighted elements : Add highlighted elements to the selection. The

user might use the view pop-up menu to create a new object. This is usefull to put
the bad shells into separate objects.
- Focus on highlighted elements : The application focuses on the area which fits
all the highlighted elements. This allows the user to go directly to local areas where
the mesh is bad. He can possibly perform some manual checks and/or modifications
in this area.
- Display mode – red shading : All bad elements are displayed in red (even if
they are not highlighted in the list).
GEOMETRY
Mesh check
- Display mode – red edges : All bad elements are displayed with red edges
(even if they are not highlighted in the list).
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any actions.
Notes:
· The elements to clean do not have to be in the selection before performing the
cleaning actions. They have to be highlighted in the list.
· Multiple edges can be detected but not cleaned.
· The user can double-click on a listed shell. The application will automatically focus on
that element in the 3D view the shell edges will be painted in white.
· This function is only available in the Set-up module.
GEOMETRY
Element Orientation
ELEMENT ORIENTATION
A shell surface is consistently oriented when the normals of all its component elements
are oriented in the same direction. To check the orientation of the shell elements use the
Normals option of the View menu.
A consistent orientation of the sheet surface is essential when it is loaded with fluid
pressure, e.g. hydroforming and aquadraw forming.
The Element Orientation option allows the orientation of shell surfaces to be checked
and/or corrected. Particular functions include automatic orientation of elements using a
reference element and automatic reversal of this orientation.
The Element Orientation dialog
Prior to use this dialog, shell elements that have to be oriented must be selected.
Orient Selected Shells

- Reference Element: This field displays the picked reference element. The selected
elements are successively oriented by a propagation scheme starting from this
reference element.
- : When active a shell element can be picked in the 3D view to define the
reference element. The normal of this element will be used
- Orient "Directly": When active all elements will be oriented in the same direction as
the reference element. Otherwise they will be oriented in the opposite direction.
- Show normals: Displays normal of elements for all visible objects.
Function Buttons
- Orient: Causes the orientation algorithm to be applied to the selected mesh part.
- Reverse: Reverses the orientation of the selected elements. This function can be
used before or after the Orient operation in order to “manually” modify the
orientation of a few elements.
GEOMETRY
Element Orientation
- Close: closes the dialog without performing any orientation.
Note:
· The propagation algorithm only works when there are no multiple edges and no
multiple shells. Multiple edges can be detected using the Multiple edges option
either in the pop-up menu of the 3D view or via the View menu. Multiple shells
can be found thanks to the Element edition page by checking “detect” double
elements.
GEOMETRY
Presentation of the Morphing
PRESENTATION OF THE MORPHING

The objective of the Morphing module is to modify the tool mesh by acting upon a
selection of Control Nodes (in red) and/or Feature Lines (in green or blue depending
its type).
The figures below describe the same morphing operation performed first with one, then
with four feature lines.
a) Definition of b) Translation of c) Resulting mesh

1 feature line 1 control node
d) Definition of e) Translation of f) Resulting mesh

4 feature lines 1 control node
Figure a) one feature line has been defined by two control nodes. One of the control
nodes is moved along the global Y-axis as shown in figure b). The figure c) shows the
resulting mesh.
Figure d) four feature lines have been defined by four control nodes. The same
translation is applied to the same control node as shown in figure e). But the resulting
mesh is notably different (figure f)). Figure c) all the mesh lying below and above the
first feature line has been deformed. Figure f), only the mesh surrounded and above
feature lines has been deformed. The three last feature lines act like a rigid constraint on
the mesh.
This simple example illustrates the simplicity of a morphing operation as well as its
complexity regarding the result requested. Most of the problem of reshaping a model
GEOMETRY
Presentation of the Morphing
can be solved with this module depending on the know-how of the user. It is possible to
use as many features lines and control nodes as necessary, with various transformation
capabilities, in order to adjust the tooling.
Once the user activates the Geometry/Morphing menu option, two functions are
available:
- The Topology function helps the user to create and modify control nodes and feature
lines, either automatically or manually.
- The Transformations function applies modifications to the nodes that belong to the
feature lines.
These menu options can be applied with the Morphing Toolbar, which also provides the
user with tools to select feature lines and control nodes (selecting a control line can lead
to the creation of a feature line).
Note:
· Once control nodes and feature lines have been defined in the Topology dialog,
the user selects the control nodes or/and feature lines involved in the
transformations with the Morphing Toolbar. Then the parameters of the
transformation are defined and visualized in the Transformation dialog. Before
definitely applying the transformation to the part, the user can go back to the
Topology dialog and define or select other control nodes and feature lines. This
operation can be repeated as many times as necessary.
GEOMETRY
Topology
TOPOLOGY
The Topology dialog allows the user to manage the Control Nodes and the Feature
Lines.
- The Control Nodes are the only locations on the mesh, which can be accessed by the
user through imposed displacement, rotation or curvature changes. Though
arbitrarily placed, they usually coincide with the corner of a CAD surface since
these locations best depict the topological articulations of the morphed model.
- The Feature Lines consist of groups of aligned nodes linking one control node to
another along smooth "mesh lines" (series of related element edges forming a path
exempt of any sharp angular transition). The two extremities of a feature line are
necessarily control nodes. The deformation of a feature line is entirely defined by
the user, imposing transformations of its two control nodes. In turn, the
displacements resulting from the deformation of a feature line impose the
modifications of the overall mesh through a propagation process called blending.
The Topology dialog
The feature lines can be created in two ways (automatically and manually).
GEOMETRY
Topology
Automatic Detection
This option is not yet implemented. Only the following parameters are available and can
be used conjointly with the manual edit option hereafter.
- Surface angular threshold:
- Edge angular threshold: In the propagation process, the application moves from one
edge to another if the angular transition between them remains lower than a user
specified threshold entered (default = 30 degrees).
- Fitting tolerance: Defines the maximum allowed distance between the nodes
belonging to the feature line and its fitted representation. The value of this data is
entered in the model unit (default = 0.1).
- Restore default Values: This button resets parameters to their default values.
- Set as default: Takes the above parameters as default parameters for detection.
- Auto detect FLs: Automatically detects feature lines and control nodes from the
meshed part and display them respectively with green lines and red points.
Manual Edit
A set of tool buttons located at the bottom of the topology tab is offered to the user for
this purpose. These buttons are managed in the same way as the toolbar buttons. When
one of them is activated the previous active tool button, either in a dialog or in a toolbar
is inactivated.
To modify the control nodes and feature lines the following tools are available:
- : The Add/Remove tool button is used to add or delete control nodes. Once this
button is activated, the user can create control nodes.
To create a control node, the user has to pick a point on the mesh then the nearest
node is used to define a control node, which is displayed as a red marker.
Each time a new control node is selected the application tries to automatically
propagate through the mesh lines until it encounters another control node.
Then a feature line is created to join the two control nodes.
In the propagation process, the application moves from one edge to another if the
angular transition between them remains lower than a user specified threshold
entered (parameter Edge Angular Threshold). If the picked node is already a control
node, the application performs no actions.
The user may also delete control nodes with this tool. In order to do so he has to
hold the Ctrl key while picking on a control node. This action stays without effect if
he does not pick on a control node. When a control node is deleted, all its connected
feature lines are also suppressed.
GEOMETRY
Topology
- : When activated, this button enables the user to build additional feature lines.
First, the user must pick the starting control node. The application then attempts to
propagate along the mesh edges until it finds another control node. Each time an
ambiguity is encountered, the application waits for the user to waive it by picking a
new node belonging to the desired path. Possible solutions are provided by the
application and the suggested nodes are displayed as green markers. (See figure
below). These ambiguities can either be a bifurcation of the mesh edges. If the
desired path crosses a feature line before reaching a control node, the application
sends a popup window containing a warning message proposing the user to create a
new control node at this location. In such case, the application updates this feature
line by splitting it in two.
rd
3 control node
st
1 control node
nd
2 control node
First step Second step
Building a feature line by picking nodes
- : When activated, this button enables the user to delete any picked feature line.
Function Button
- Close: Closes the dialog. Since the use of this dialog is similar to a toolbar,
changes take effect immediately.
GEOMETRY
Topology
TRANSFORMATIONS
This tab manages all the transformations the user wants to apply to the Control Nodes
and the Feature Lines as well as to the mesh. The overall capabilities can be
summarized as follows:
- Moving control nodes,
- Handling the feature line tangency modification,
Jump
The Transformations dialog – Jump tab
Selected control node(s) - use the button - will be moved from the current position to
another one based on the data given below. The parameters that may affect the control
node displacements are the following:
- Reference Frame: Defines the current frame being used to perform the displacement
and rotation of tangencies. The different choices are: Global System, Local (to the
feature line) and the list of the User-defined frames. All of these are listed in the
drop-down menu allowing the user to select one of them.
· Global System: Refers to the application global frame.
· A user-defined frame built by the user who gave a set of three points. To define
a new user-defined frame, a frame button ( ) is provided. The latter opens the
User Defined Frame dialog that manages the creation, modification, and deletion
of the user frames.
GEOMETRY
Transformations
- The Active Plane field defines the working plane of the current frame, selected from
the Reference Frame drop-down menu. Three options are available (XoY, XoZ and
YoZ). Upon the selection of the active plane, the displacement fields of the are
updated accordingly, i.e.:
· XoY: dX and dY,
· XoZ: dX and dZ,
· YoZ: dY and dZ.
- Snap to Grid (not yet implemented): Helps the user displace (move) the control
node along the active plane with higher accuracy, by using the closest grid point
instead of the actual mouse location.
- dX and dY (or dZ): Displays the components of the master node displacement vector
projected to the active plane.
The figures below illustrate a simple transformation.
nd
2 transformation
st
1 selected
control node
nd
2 selected
control node st
1 transformation
a) Control nodes selection b) Transformations definition c) Final mesh
In figures a to c, two different transformations have been defined and performed onto
two distinct control nodes.
GEOMETRY
Transformations
Tangency
The Transformations dialog – Jump tab
The Tangency tab handles the tangency rotations that may happen at one end of the
active feature line.
- Reference Frame: See explanations given for the Jump tab above.
- Active Plane: See explanations given for the Jump tab above.
- Rotation Angle: Displays the rotation angle (in degrees) of the feature line tangent
vector expressed with respect to the Z-axis of the current reference frame. It also
enables the user to impose a new angle by typing it in.
This field is grayed out if the initial tangent vector is co-linear to the Z-axis of the
current reference frame.
- Tangency Scale Factor:
- Equivalent Radius: Displays the local radius at the end of the current feature line.
For null curvature values, its content is "-1" (infinite equivalent radius value).
It also enables the user to impose a new radius by typing it in.
GEOMETRY
Transformations
Slide
The Transformations dialog – Slide tab
Selected control node will be moved from the current position along a selected feature
line based on the data given below (use the button for the control node selection).
- Snap to Grid (not yet implemented).
- dT: Moves the control nodes on the feature lines by this value.
Function Buttons
These buttons handle actions that may be globally applied to the dialog.
- Apply: This button is activated each time the user modifies one of the previously
defined fields and wants to apply these modifications to the graphic. Note that the
action applies only to the selected control nodes and feature lines (see the button
of the Morphing Toolbar).
GEOMETRY
Transformations
USER-DEFINED FRAME
The program manages the model with respect to a unique global orthonormal Cartesian
reference frame. However, to assist in the definition of morphing transformations, the
notion of user-defined local reference frames has been introduced.
This dialog is used to access the reference frame activation and creation functions and it
appears when the button of the Transformations dialog is activated.
A control node associated with a special system of coordinates has the corresponding
local coordinates as its characteristics. Thus a transformation applied to this node will
be expressed in the associated local reference frame.
The User-Defined Reference Frame dialog
A new reference frame will be defined by three points, namely an origin points and two
points defining the (XoY) plane and the direct direction of the frame. The reference
frame is displayed on the control node in yellow.
Taking nodes P1, P2 and P3, the origin is P1, and P2 and P3 define the (XoY) plane.
Description
- The drop-down list allows the user to select one of the previously created frames.
When a frame is selected the coordinates of the points are updated in the Point 1 to 3
fields.
- : The user must pick three points onto the structure displayed in the 3D view to
define the frame. Once the third point has been picked, a dialog appears to enter the
name of the new user-defined frame (see figure below).
GEOMETRY
User-Defined Frame
- : Deletes the selected user-defined frame.

- Point of the reference frame can be modified either by using the help of the wizard
or by typing its coordinates in the text fields. The corresponding Point fields will be
updated with the new point coordinates.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the user-defined frame definition and returns to the Transformations
tab.
- Cancel: Closes the dialogs without performing any changes.
GEOMETRY
User-Defined Frame
SURFACE RECONSTRUCTION PARAMETERS

This dialog appears when an IGES file is saved by the Geometry/Surface
Reconstruction option. Within the morphing functionality, the user can make
modifications to existing 3d geometries. The surface reconstruction option is available
in order to reconstructs the surfaces lying between three or four feature lines and allows
the user to export the modified geometry to an IGES file. The surface reconstruction
parameters allow the user to modify some parameters that controls the building of a
CAD model starting from a meshed part. However, it is advisable to be very careful
with this function, since the default parameters are usually well fitted to the problem.
Note:
· If no feature lines are selected, the entire geometry (defined by feature lines)
will be exported to a CAD file. Please be aware of the fact that this action is
very CPU consuming. If only a small area of the 3D geometry is modified, it is
advisable to define feature lines along this region and to select all the
corresponding feature lines for export: this way, only the selected region will be
exported.
The Surface Reconstruction Parameters dialog

- Precision: Represents the maximum distance allowed between the CAD surface and
the element nodes. From this value is calculated the number of poles of the CAD
surface. For large surfaces, increasing this value will lead to highly increase the
number of poles. Therefore the memory required for the reconstruction could
exceed the memory available on the user's workstation.
- Tolerance: Represents the minimum length of curves saved in the IGES file. Below
this value a curve is not saved.
- Corner Angle: Corresponds to a detection angle for CAD surface corners. The
algorithm can only build 3-edge or 4-edge surfaces. A point on the edge is
identified as a corner if the tangency between two adjacent elements is greater than
the value entered.
Function Buttons
- OK: Performs the reconstruction, saves the IGES file and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog and cancels the reconstruction. No IGES file is saved.
GEOMETRY
Surface Reconstruction Parameters
DIEMAKER
DIEMAKER MENU
The DieMaker menu
The different options and functions provided by the DieMaker menu are listed below:
- Part preparation: Prepares the part before the creation of the addendum, i.e. hides
flange, fills hole, smoothes contour, defines symmetry.
- Tipping: Calculates a local coordinate system for the part.
- Blankholder: This sub-menu groups the functions that allows the user to create a
blank holder surface:
· Outline & section: Creates a blank holder either by defining a simple plane or on
basis of sections through the part.
· Theoretical: Creates a blank holder based on pre-defined surfaces.
· Import: Brings up the standard File selector to import a CAD surface (*.IGS)
which will define the blank holder.
· Elasctic Binder: Not yet implemented.
- Addendum: Allows the user to perform adjustments of the profile curves that define
the addendum surface.
- Die checks: Creates sections on the part (usually the die) to check its shape.
DIEMAKER
Diemaker Menu
DIE PREPARATION
This option is used in PAM-DIEMAKER reverse engineering mode to assign the
addendum and blankholder regions to special DieMaker objects.
The Preparation dialog
Reference Object
When the user has imported and automatically meshed his model, the model is
displayed in the 3D view. This panel gives the name of the source object that has been
imported. This zone cannot be modified.
Add Source to
When a zone of the part has been selected in the 3D view (use the tools provided in the
Edit menu or in the Selection toolbar), press the button that corresponds to this zone, i.e.
Flange, Addendum, Blankholder. The selection is automatically added to an object the
name of which can be modified by the user.
If the part itself has already been assigned following the meshing operation, the Part
button is grayed out. Otherwise the part can be assigned to an object like any other area.
The current assignment can be deleted pressing the Reset button.
Function Buttons
- OK: Assigns the selected zones to their corresponding object and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing any creation of objects and
assignments.
DIEMAKER
Part Preparation
PART PREPARATION
This dialog is used to prepare the part before the creation of the addendum. Depending
on the type of preparation applied to the part, three tabs are used:
- Flanges: The function of this tab is to hide existing flanges in order to be able to
model the addendum tangentially at the surfaces of the part. These areas often
present an undercut angle with respect to the drawing direction.
- Holes: The function of this tab is to consider all holes in the part, therefore also
possible gaps! Parts with holes should be revised after the import in order to
become gap-free. The outline of the part must be gap-free and holes inside the part
can be closed (meshed).
- Rolling Cylinder: For smoothing the outer part contour this tab is used to generate a
set of additional surfaces (close and tangential) to the part.
- Symmetry/Double Part: For symmetrical parts a symmetry plane can be defined for
the modeling of the depth tools. Multiple parts can also be treated within the
program by moving the symmetry plane away from the part and inserting several
small connecting surfaces.
Important Notes:
· Prior to use this option the part must be identified by the program. Use the
right-click menu item Add Selection to Design Part, in the 3D view.
· It is possible to control the way the holes will be meshed by adding splines.
Holes can be holes inside part or holes generated by double part or even outer
holes considering the rolling cylinder capability. Use the spline tool button, ,
and click (left mouse button + SHIFT key) two nodes on the hole edge where the
spline must be anchored. Then, by using the Profile Editor it is possible to add
control points and redesign the shape of the spline.
· Two mesh generators are available. They may be selected by using the
Customize option.
DIEMAKER
Part Preparation
Flange
After opening the dialog, the face outlines retrieved from the CAD import will appear
on the screen. In the current program version hiding of flanges is only possible if the
face information exists, i.e. if a CAD geometry has been read via the DeltaMESH™
interface.
The Part Preparation dialog - Flanges tab
- Undercut Angle: Defines the angle between the surface normal and the Z direction
of the local coordinates system.
- Automatic: The flange areas can be automatically detected and selected. During the
automatic selection, the Undercut Angle is considered. All surfaces with a greater
angle are selected. If there are any empty areas remaining after the hiding
procedure, then these will be likewise selected.
Function Buttons
- Hide: Adds the contents of the automatic selection to an object of "Flange" type.
This object is used by the program, to hide existing flanges in order to be able to
model the addendum tangentially at the surfaces of the part. Note that this object is
not accessible to the user and cannot be manipulated like other objects.
- Show: Removes the contents of the automatic selection from the object named
"Flange" and add them again to the part object. The added area is still selected.
Note:
· It is also possible to manually add (or remove) entities to the flange by using the
right-click menu in the 3D view (Hide selected flanges and Show Flanges
options).
DIEMAKER
Part Preparation
Holes
The Part Preparation dialog - Holes tab
- Gap Tolerance: Forces the surface generation to have a maximum gap (as specified)
to the part border. Since the border nodes of the meshed surface are merged with the
part border the action on this parameter does not appear to the user. But if the CAD
surfaces of the model are exported, and then imported again it is possible to
visualize the effect on NURBS surfaces. The two figures below show the result of
using a too high value. The value should be as low as possible. A too low value
could also prevent surface creation.
Gap tolerance = 1 Gap tolerance = 5
DIEMAKER
Part Preparation
- Angle Tolerance: This angle [in degrees] represents the maximum deviation
between the node-normal at the edge of the part and the appropriate surface-normal
on the NURBS surface. It forces the surface generation to be c1-continuous (at part
border transition) with respect to the specified angle. The default value of 180° is the
maximum 'error' tolerance. It means that a c1-continuous transition is not guaranteed.
But in combination with the gap tolerance a transition (much) better than 180.0
degrees at each point is standard. Only in some "advanced" cases it is useful to
modify this parameter. If the user specifies e.g. 1.0 degree angle tolerance the
algorithm constructs a transition ring with single surfaces. On the figure below, the
big hole consists of these outer ring surfaces, the little flat hole right beside not.
- Meshing Type: The refinement degree of meshing can be selected via this drop-down
list between Coarse, Medium and Fine.
Function Buttons
- Apply: NURBS-surfaces are generated with the outline of the hole as a boundary.
Afterwards, these NURBS surfaces are meshed node-compatible with the boundary.
DIEMAKER
Part Preparation
Hole Outlines
A table which list all visible (non hidden) holes is provided for flexible work.
All non selected holes are marked with blue outlines within the 3D window. Picking
onto a line within the hole table will highlight the appropriate hole in 3D with red color.
All common select mechanisms are implemented within the hole table (pick with
holding the Shift and Ctrl key, right mouse menu for selcting all entries).
Activating the button allows the user to select holes inside the 3D window as well.
The show marker feature will visualise a small vertical lines per hole to localise also
very small holes. Selected holes will get an additional identifier string.
DIEMAKER
Part Preparation
- Create: Closes all selected holes.

- Delete: Deletes the surface/mesh created to fill the holes. If the part has been
duplicated with the Symmetry/Double Part option, duplicated holes are also deleted.
Rolling Cylinder
The automatic algorithm moves/rolls a cylinder along the part border, then a polygon is
generated which reduces the number of concave regions.
The resulting surfaces are generated as NURBS surfaces and meshed node compatible
to the part.
DIEMAKER
Part Preparation
The Rolling Cylinder dialog
Part Curves
Considering the part outline (nodes, normals and tangents) a polygon is generated by
moving/rolling a cylinder (with a constant user-defined radius, perpendicular to the
part) along the part outline. If the radius is set to infinite the circular correcting lines
will be generated as convex lines, tangential to the start/end nodes of the part. The
resulting polygon represents a new part outline with a minimum amount of concave
regions.
Rolling cylinder
Curve
Algorithm principle New part outline
DIEMAKER
Part Preparation
The parameters and functions of this panel are the following:

- Roll. radius [mm]: Defines the radius for rolling around the part. It detects the start
and end of the part curves, which are to be created.
- Curve radius [mm]: Gives the curvature of the part curves. The created part curve is
a circular arc using this radius and the detected end points. The user has the
possibility to change the curvature of a part curve without changing the start and end
point and vice versa.
Note:
· To impose a curve trajectory tangent to the part surface enter –1.

- Min. Cusp Angle [Deg]: Defines the angle between the respective part edge and the
tangent of the part curve. This is a "protect" mechanism to avoid the generation of
bad surfaces/meshes. Both curve/part transitions or corners (left and right) are taken
into account to check the specified angle (default 5.0 degrees). Therefore the
tangents at the curve end point and part border are calculated and the angle is
checked. If the angle is lower than the specified value the generated curve is deleted
and no surface/mesh can be generated.
- Curve transition: By default the end tangents of a rolling cylinder curve are directly
calculated from the virtual cylinder and the specified roll radius.
To achieve a tangential transition to the part contour the left and right tangency to
part can be activated.
DIEMAKER
Part Preparation
The lengths of the tangents can be modified by increasing/decreasing the tangent

factor value.
- Cylinder axes: Activating this option allows the user to rotate the axes of the virtual
rolling cylinder. For an easy use this axes are represented by a coordinate system.
The actual cylinder axes is equivalent to Z.
The axes of selected rolling cylinder curves will get the colors as indicated left
beside the number entry fields of the dialog.
- Curve shape: By default the rolling cylinder approach uses the part outline and
creates something similiar to an offset curve, so the contour of the part outline will
be normally fully taken into account for such calculation. Sometimes it seems to be
useful to generate more simplified curves or to smooth the generated curves
afterwards. With the use of the curve shape slider the user can relax the curve(s) by
increasing the amount of freedom. Free correspond to a spline curve 100% contour
correspond to applying a maximum amount of the part outline.
DIEMAKER
Part Preparation
All parameters described above can be used as pre-settings for the rolling cylinder
creation or can be applied on selected curves.
- Create: Creates the curves, which define the new outline of the part. Activating the
button (within the dialog or within the part preparation toolbar) gives the user
the possibility to create rolling cylinder curves interactively by picking the part
outline twice.
- Delete: Deletes the newly created curves. This function is equivalent to an undo.
Notes:
· The curves can be deleted by using the button of the DieMaker Toolbar.
· The button of the DieMaker Toolbar allows the user to move control points of
a curve.
· The Roll. radius is always smaller than the Curv. radius (If the user chooses a
greater value, the Curv. radius value is set equal to the Roll. radius value).
· If the user sets a Roll. radius equal to the Curv. radius and parameter Min. Cusp
Angle greater than zero probably no part curves will be created unless the part
outline has got real corners.
Part Surfaces
The smoothed concave regions are interpreted as outer holes and will be closed with the
closing hole functionality of DieMaker (trimmed surfaces).
- Meshing: Defines the quality of the mesh surfaces, which will fill the holes between
the new outline and the part.
- Create: Creates the mesh that fills the holes between the new outline and the part.
Each mesh is considered as a hole meshing and is named Outer-holes. Meshes are
node-compatible with the part mesh.
- Delete: Deletes the newly created meshes. This function is equivalent to an undo.
Combined Part Geometry (compulsory)

- Create: The hole meshes are added to the part and also define a new entity named
Outer-holes.
- Delete: This function is equivalent to an "undo all". All meshes, surfaces and curves
are deleted.
DIEMAKER
Part Preparation
Symmetry/Double Part
The Part Preparation dialog – Symmetry/Double Part tab
- Mode: The Symmetry option is used when only one half of the geometry has been
created and when the symmetry plane can be positioned on a straight edge. The
Double Part option is also used when only one half of the geometry has been
created, but the symmetry plane is positioned out of the structure. In this case the
part must be connected to the symmetry plane, then the holes filled, using the Holes
tab.
- Symmetry Plane: Using the button, pick directly in the graphical window onto
the model the entity(ies) defining the symmetry plane position. The entities are
selected by using a wizard.
- Rotation Angle: The symmetry plane can be turned around the z-axis of the active
coordinate system. The angle displays here represents the angle between the x-axis
and the normal of the symmetry plane.
- Distance of S.P. to: This field displays the distance from the symmetry plane to:
· Null Point: This point represents the origin of the active coordinate system.
DIEMAKER
Part Preparation
· Part Outline: The distance is measured from the position picked on the model.
Note:
· Another distance may be entered which updates the position of the plane.
Function Buttons to Connect Part (Transition Curves)

A symmetry plane can also be set outside of the part when using the Double part mode.
Using the spline profile tool of the part preparation toolbar will create a so called
transition curve. Creating transition curves is also possible by selecting at least two edge
nodes of the part outline and pressing Create afterwards. The generated transition curve
is tangential to the part and meets perpendicularly the symmetry plane. Transition
curves can be deleted interactively by using the delete profile tool of the part
preparation (or addendum) toolbar.
- Trans Height: When active, the end point of the transition curve will be displaced
by the specified height value.
Function Buttons to Create the Duplicated Part (Reflection)

- Create: Creates the copy of the part with respect to the parameters described above.
- Delete: Deletes the copy of the part. This action applies only to the last copy
operation.
Note:
· When using the symmetry feature all interactions concerning the blankholder
and profile functionality are symmetric. That means for example that a
creation/deletion of one profile creates/deletes a correspondent object within the
reflected area as well. For special uses, the symmetric property can be switched
off/on via the main window right-click menu.
· A symmetry plane can be set as well for already imported (full) symmetric or
double parts. Therefore it is useful to define a local (active) coordinate system
onto the”real” symmetry axis first. The symmetry plane can be created onto any
part border and moved into the origin respetively YZ plane of the active
coordinate system afterwards (using Rotation angle and Distance of S.P.). This
symmetry plane has to be activated via the 3D context menu (PAM DIEMAKER
/ Symmetry active).
DIEMAKER
Tipping
TIPPING
When a part is imported via CAD file, it is likely that its coordinate system does not fit
the needs of a drawing process. It is then possible to use the Tipping option to define a
local coordinate system which will serve as the work coordinate system for all further
work steps.
With this dialog, coordinate systems can be created, adjusted, activated and deleted.
The Tipping dialog
Active System
This panel displays the currently active coordinate system. At start the global coordinate
system GLOB is displayed.
When a new coordinate system is defined (see paragraphs below), it can be activated as
a work coordinate system by selecting it in the drop-down list. From now on, all
coordinate instructions will refer to the newly created local coordinate system for the
drawing process.
With the button the current transformation of the global system to the active system
can be displayed in the Console tab of Output docking dialog. The tab displays the
numerical data of the active coordinate system (shift and twisting angles) compared to
the global coordinate system.
DIEMAKER
Tipping
The button brings up the standard File Selector dialog to export the active
coordinate system in an IGES or VDA file.
Notes:
· By activating a local coordinate system, the working direction follows the Z

direction of the active coordinate system. The element normals of the part will
be orientated automatically in the working direction once the system is
activated.
· Since the Z-axis of the active coordinate system is always taken for the drawing
direction, its alignment is important for many of the following work steps, i.e.
the Part preparation.
Edited System
The drop-down list displays the current edited coordinate system.
- : When this button is pressed, a new coordinate system COORD is created at the
parts center of gravity projected onto its surface. To relocate the origin of the new
coordinate system, use the Center panel (see below). Several coordinate systems can
be created in succession: COORD_1, COORD_2…
- : When this button is pressed the current edited coordinate system is deleted.
Center
This panel is used to define the center of the new coordinate system either by using the
help of the wizard or by typing its coordinates in the text fields.
Balancing
The part coordinates always refer to the global coordinate system and are not
changeable. However, position and angles of local coordinate systems can be changed
freely in relation to the global coordinate system. For the parts, local coordinate systems
can serve as reference system. As a local coordinate system is moved, the part also
moves. In this way it is possible to balance the part. The drawing direction can be
modified at will (e.g. with regard to minimum pulling depth) without changing the
coordinates of the part in the global coordinate system.
Interactive Tab
- X, Y, Z: These input fields are used to define or adjust the angles of the new
coordinate system.
Use the and buttons to check the position of the part in the drawing coordinate
system. Any alterations the user may make to the orientation of the drawing
DIEMAKER
Tipping
coordinate system will be shown immediately in the 3D window. By turning the

drawing coordinate system through small angles, the orientation of the part can be
adjusted until the desired tip angle has been found. Since the part rotates around the
origin of the drawing coordinate system, it is of great advantage to shift this to the
surface of the element (as described in the above paragraph).
Automatic Tab
With the Automatic button the tip angle can be automatically adjusted according to the
choice made in the drop-down list:
- Drawing Depth: It is optimized in such a way that the difference between the lowest
and the highest point of the part becomes minimal. To finish the optimization
process, the z axis of the local coordinate system under adjustment will be set
automatically to the new drawing direction.
- Undercutting: The result of this optimisation is a balanced part with a minimal
amount of undercutted elements. If several solutions exist the result with best
drawing depth (see option above) will be favoured.
- Inertia Axis: This calculates the principle axis of inertia. Due to this definition the
origin will be identical to the center of gravity. The axes will be adjusted according
to the amount of the inertia tensor values.
- : Pressing this button launches the automatic adjustment of the tip angle.
Display
In form of a ISO-PARAMETRIC representation Drawing Depth \ model (distance of
each node of the part to the highest point of the part) and Undercut by zones
respectively Undercut by angle (angle between element-normal and working direction)
of the part can be determined and visualized.
Cumulated
- X, Y, Z: These input fields are used to adjust the angles of local coordinate system.
For each field a drop-down list is used to select a rotation angle from –90°, 0° or
90° which can be applied to the corresponding local axis by clicking on the value.
Function Button
DIEMAKER
Tipping
EXCHANGE PART
This option allows the user to replace the part geometry that was used to create the die
geometry by another updated geometry. It can also be used to rework geometry,
modifying outer holes for examples, and then reattach the profiles automatically.
The Exchange Part dialog
- Detach profiles: Detaches profiles from the part. Detached profiles are colored in
red.
Note:
· Prior to detach profiles from a part, an operation may be necessary according

to the status of the part. If addendum surfaces have been created or profiles are
joined by connecting lines, it is necessary to suppress them by pressing the
button.
- Exchange type: The user can choose between Import CAD, Import Mesh or Use
selection. Import CAD brings up the Import of CAD model dialog to import a new
CAD geometry. Import Mesh brings up the Mesh file Import dialog to import a facet
geometry (e.g. Nastran). Beside these import mechanisms the user can also select an
already imported object and choose this selection for exchanging the part geometry.
- Import part to global system: Normally this check box has to be deactivated
means that the new part geometry will be imported to the active (local) coordinate
system. Activating this option will import the new part to the global coordinate
sytem.
- Exchange part: According to the chosen exchange type (see above) the import CAD
respectively mesh file dialog will be opened or the user has to select an object for
exchanging the part. When pressing the exchange part button the current part
DIEMAKER
Exchange Part
geometry will be deleted first. Afterwards the control will be given to the import
functionality or will directly exchange the selected part object.
Import from CAD: After pressing the Apply button two successive warning
messages are displayed to ask the user whether he wishes to destroy the old entities:
confirm the destruction.
Import from mesh: normally triangles and quadrangles will be grouped in different
objects. After import these objects will automatically be combined into one part
geometry.
Use selection: in this mode Import part to global system doesn’t have any meaning.
The exchange part algorithm assumes that the selected object has a well defined
position in 3D.
- Search radius: Radius of a sphere in which the end point of a profile is attached to
the part. If the end point is out of this sphere the profile is kept free and its color
remains red. The button can be used to connect manually the profile to the part.
- A drop-down list defines how the algorithm is working to reattach the profiles:
· Displace: The profile moves freely on the blankholder surface until its end point
reaches the part edge. If necessary the shape parameters are modified by the
algorithm.
· Keep Bholder Point: The profile end point located on the blankholder does not
move. The profile is stretched until its other end point reaches the part edge. The
profile parameter that is affected by this action is generally the length.
· Normal to part: The profile moves freely on the blankholder surface until its end
point reaches the part edge and the profile defines a right-angle with the tangent
of the part free edge.
Old part with profiles detached New geometry with profiles attached
'normal to part'
- Reattach profile: Executes the algorithm with the above parameters.
DIEMAKER
Exchange Part
Example
Geometry to exchange Profile are detached
New imported geometry Profiles are reattached
Function Button
DIEMAKER
Blankholder Editor
BLANKHOLDER EDITOR
The Outline & Section option brings up a 2D window where the user can create a
blankholder either by defining a simple plane or on basis of sections through the part.
This option offers numerous possibilities for the generation and modification of the
blankholder. Actions performed in the 2D windows are automatically visualized in the
3D window.
The two figures below illustrate respectively the 2D window at opening and the
synchronization of the 3D window.
2D window showing a section of the part Representation in the 3D window of the

section plane and the boundary curves of the
blank holder
In the 3D window a section plane is automatically positioned in the center of the part.
The XZ-plane is the default setting. Depending on the dimensions of the part, four
boundary curves or outlines are generated (displayed in blue). For each curve three
control points are created by default, and may be used to modify the shape of the curve.
Control points can be added or removed by the user.
The 2D window is divided in the following area.
DIEMAKER
Blankholder Editor
Interaction Toolbar
Most of the actions needed in the 2D or 3D windows are performed in combination with
the specific extension of the DieMaker Toolbar.
Right-Click Menu
A customizable right-click menu provides for settings in the Blankholder Editor. The
items of this right-click menu are not accessible through the menu bar.
- Grid Settings: For ease of orientation, a grid is drawn as a background in the
blankholder editor. The scaling of the grid can be fixed (5 mm, 10 mm, 50 mm or
100 mm as division) or dynamic. Dynamic implies that the grid will be
automatically increased or decreased according to the zoom factor. The grid can
also be deactivated (Ruler off).
- Symmetry Properties: If the part has been built by a symmetry transformation (see
Part Preparation), the blankholder can be created on the whole part or only on half
the geometry.
- Accurate movement: Brings up the Accurate binder movement dialog to define an
accurate translation of the blankholder.
- Accurate rotation: Brings up the Accurate binder movement dialog to define an
accurate rotation of the blankholder.
DIEMAKER
Blankholder Editor
Section Plane
In every main direction (XZ, YZ) the blank holder is defined by two boundary curves or
one section curve. As section curves, either one section per main direction (XZ, YZ) or,
alternatively, two parallel sections with equal direction (XZ or YZ) may be defined. The
boundary curves and section curves can be easily modified using the button of the
Interaction Toolbar (see above).
Outline Curves Section Curve
Outline curves (boundary curves) Section curve
A slider is used to specify the Position of the section plane; with the Reset button the
position of the section plane is set to the default value (the center of the part).
The Generate Curve button enables the user to create a section curve (green line) from
the part and add it to the Outline/Section Curves list (see below). The algorithm for
intersecting the part builds a convex shape over the part. Therefore it needs a defined
direction (the tipping direction) for calculating angles.
The toggle Z/-Z is used to invert the section with respect to the tipping direction. If the
tipping direction is inverted the algorithm only finds two intersecting points and the
result is often a straight line.
The button Parallel Curve is used to create a second section curve. To do so, move the
slider to another position then press the Generate Curve button again. It is not possible
to create more than two section curves.
In the editor window, the section through the part is represented in green, while the
cutting curve is represented in blue. The cutting curve will also be visualized in the 3D
window.
DIEMAKER
Blankholder Editor
Edit Outline/Section Curves

A list allows the user to select the curve to edit (Outline or Section Curves). According
to this selection the Curve Parameters panel changes.
When selecting an outline or a section curve in the list a right-click menu provides the
following functions:
- Reset Outline: If the outline has been modified by the user (addition or
displacement of control points), this option resets the outline to its original shape.
- Reset all Outlines: Same function as described above but for all outlines.
- Delete Curve: Removes the selected section curve from the list and deletes it.
Curve Parameters
Outline Curves
- Process Both Curves: When active, a curve is synchronized with its opposite curve,
i.e. control points on each curve are moved, created or suppressed simultaneously.
- Free Last Nodes in Z: When active, the curve end control points can be moved along
Z-axis.
Section Curves
Curve Parameters panel for a section curve
For each main section (XZ or YZ) the lengths of the final segments of the section line
and the angles to the orthogonal of the working direction are displayed. Only the length
may be modified.
- Curve Smoothing: This parameter is only available if a section curve has been
created through the part. To obtain an exact intersection of the part contour choose
the value 1.0 and press the Generate curve button. If the resulting curve wrinkles too
much, decrease the value. When decreasing the value (by picking onto the small
arrow), the (blue) section curves become automatically smoother. The lowest value
DIEMAKER
Blankholder Editor
is 0.0. Choosing this value the resulting section curve is optimal smooth but no
longer exactly lying onto the (green) part contour. A good compromise is 0.5
(default). When the value is modified, the section curve is not automatically
regenerated. For that the user must press the Generate curve button again.
Modify Surface
The modify blankholder capability (Stiffness parameter and Modify surface push button)
is a shortcut of the functionality implemented in the Binder Section dialog. Please refer
to this chapter for further information.
DIEMAKER
Blankholder Editor
ACCURATE BINDER MOVEMENT

This dialog is used to control the binder (blankholder) movement with more accuracy
than the intuitive mouse control. Two tabs corresponding to the two possible
displacements are available:
- Translate.
- Rotate.
Translate
The Accurate binder movement dialog – Translate tab
Axis
- Move along: By default the translation is done in the stamping direction (Z-axis), but
the user can select one of the other main directions (X or Y-axis).
Note:
· For the X and Y axis the numerical movement can only be fixed. But choosing X
or Y the user gets the ability to move the surface interactively inside the 3D
window within the Z-plane (not restricted to X or Y). Sometimes it is useful to
adjust the blankholder within that way, e.g. after importing a CAD blankholder
surface. It is easier and more intuitive to move interactively within a plane than
moving in X first, and then switch to the other direction in the dialog and move
along Y.
DIEMAKER
Accurate Binder Movement
Movement
- Fixed: Absolute value of the translation given in length units of the initial geometry.
- Relative to part: The value entered corresponds to a distance from the part geometry
to the blankholder in the forming direction. It is given in length units of the initial
geometry. A white line and two blue points represent the distance in the 3D view.
The value initially displayed corresponds to the distance measured by the program.
Three possibilities are offered:
· Distance lowest point part/blankholder: The imposed distance is measured from
the lowest point of the part to the lowest point of the blankholder.
· Minimum distance from part edge: The imposed distance is measured from the
lowest point of the part edge to the lowest point of the blankholder. The two
evaluated points and the distance are visualized in the 3D view.
- Keyboard params: This button calls up the Move with arrow keys dialog to set the
parameters for a translation controlled by the keyboard.
Rotate
The rotation of the blankholder is defined round an axis passing by a point (COG or a
picked node). The axis is perpendicular to the section plane displayed in the
Blankholder Editor, i.e. to the 2D view.
The Accurate binder movement dialog – Rotate tab
DIEMAKER
Axis
- Move along: By default the rotation is done about the Y-axis, but the user can select
one of the other main directions (X or Z-axis).
Note:
· For each chosen rotation axis (X, Y or Z) an appropriate colored reference line
is shown in the 3D window.
Center
- COG: The rotation center is defined by the center of gravity of the blankholder. The
coordinates of the COG are displayed in the Rotate center panel.
- Picked node: The rotation center is defined either by picking a node onto the
blankholder or in the Rotate center panel.
· Rotate center: Defines the center of the rotation either by using the help of the
wizard or by typing its coordinates in the text fields.
Angle
- Cumulative rotation: The angle of rotation is counted positively in the counter-
clockwise direction. Cumulative means that the user can increment or decrement the
current value by using the little arrow buttons right beside the input field.
Alignment
It’s also possible to rotate the blankholder around the Z axis. After activating Z the
Alignment panel becomes visible and the user is able to specify a reference line by
picking two times onto the blankholder (or any other geometry).
Function Button
- Preview: Displays temporarily the new position of the blankholder. The movement
is effectively performed when the Apply button is pressed.
- Apply: Performs the movement of the blankholder with the parameters defined in
the dialog.
DIEMAKER
Move with Arrow Key

This dialog allows the user to adjust some translation parameters assigned to the up and
down arrow keys of the keyboard. The translation concerns the blankholder created in
the PAM-DIEMAKER module.
The Move with arrow keys dialog
The movement of the blankholder may be controlled by three ways:

- Relative: The movement is done in pixels, therefore zoom in the view will minimize
the displacement while zoom out will maximize it.
- Absolute: The movement is done in length units of the initial geometry by pressing
the SHIFT key.
- Faster: The movement is amplified by a value by pressing the CTRL key. This
option works only in combination with the absolute displacement.
Function Buttons
- Apply: Assigns the parameters entered to the keyboard and closes the dialog.
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any settings.
DIEMAKER
THEORETICAL BINDER
The Theoretical Binder approach provides a flexible binder design methodology with
the following capabilities:
- Selection of the part to drive the creation of the binder shape.
- Selection of the binder surface type (analytic and non developable).
- Control of the complexity of the binder surface.
This functionality is available within the 2D blankholder editor or via a separate dialog
for reverse engineering.
Some iteration at this stage will allow the user to create a binder shape which is
suitable.
The Theoretical Binder page within the 2D blankholder editor
Reference Object
This panel is used to select the entity which drive the fitting routine for the binder
surface creation. The selection is made by using the Fit blankholder from drop-down list
by selecting the appropriate entity. This selection is crucial to obtain a good binder
shape. If the software is asked to try to fit the binder to the entire part, then the binder
definition may end up being over complex, sometimes it is recommended to force the
software to fit to a specific selection of surfaces which guides the binder towards the
desired profile (e.g. part on binder applications).
DIEMAKER
Theoretical Binder
Binder Surface
The panel gives the user the option to choose the general characteristic shape and
complexity of the binder surface to be created.
- : The binder surface created will be planar.
- : The binder surface created will be a ruled surface (cylindrical type).
- : The binder surface created will be 'conical' (two radii).
- : This special non developable approach is able to create a surface which could
be curved in X and Y direction. This approach is useful for all applications where
the user needs a "quasi copy" of the referenced geometry (e.g. blankholder
approximation in reverse engineering mode).
Note:
· For all four approaches (plane, cylinder, ...) a nurbs surface is generated.
- Complexity: This slide bar gives the user control over the order of complexity of the
binder shape. This option is not used for plane binder. The bar represents a sliding
scale. Two buttons, Min and Max, can be used to define the complexity of the shape
to respectively its minimum (3) or maximum (60).
Part Part
Binder surface Binder surface
Complexity = 10 Complexity = 50
- Use boundary as reference: When checked the algorithm uses the boundary of the
reference surface to create the boundary (recommended in reverse engineering
mode).
- Automatic repositioning: This is useful if the user wants to modify a fitted surface
after having created the addendum. The user might have translated/rotated the
blankholder so this transformation is taken into account when this option is
activated.
DIEMAKER
Theoretical Binder
- Size ratio: Defines the size ratio between the reference surface and the created
surface. By default the binder surface has the same size as the blankholder surface.
- Tension: This parameter gives an extra "stretch" (linearity direction or in XY for
non developable approach) to the generated surface. Tension = 100 means that the
surface has a high stiffness, tension = 1 means that the surface can be moved like a
sheet of paper.
Surface Linearity
- Linearity: Defines the XYZ components of the vector which represents the axis for
ruled or conical surfaces. The vector is defined either by using the help of the wizard
Application and Parameter Settings

Basically the theoretically binder approach can be used in three different ways:
- approximating a blankholder surface according to the global shape of the part.
- building a blankholder surface which takes a couple of selected part surfaces into
account (e.g. part on binder application).
- rebuilding the original shape of a given blankholder surface (reverse engineering).
For new customers it is sometimes a little bit difficult to understand and handle the
different parameters especially the interaction of complexity and tension.. Due to that
several pre-settings have been implemented:
- Using part as reference (plane, cylinder or conical approach) a complexity of 8 and
a tension of 50 is proposed to the user to achieve a pretty simple and smooth
surface.
- Using part as reference in the non developable mode a complexity of 20 and a
tension of 80 is proposed. Because non developable means curvature in X and Y a
slightly higher complexity is useful. To supress potential oscillations the tension is
increased as well.
- Using the theoretical binder in reverse engineering mode the non developable
approach seems to be best for rebuilding a given reference surface. To achieve the
reference object as good as possible a complexity of 20, a tension of 1 and Use
boundary as reference is proposed here. Because the approximated surface is fully
limited to the reference object a minimum tension is useful to keep the original
shape (as good as possible) all over the approximated surface.
Function Buttons
- Generate: Creates the binder surface and mesh.
- Close: Closes the dialog without creating the blankholder surface and mesh.
DIEMAKER
Binder Section
BINDER SECTION
For modifying the shape of the blankholder, binder sections have to be created first via
the Create new binder section functionality (available in blankholder mode).
Using the right mouse click feature onto this button will open the binder section dialog.
The Binder Section dialog
General
Pressing the Create new binder section button will install a 3D pick tool which can be
applied on binder surface boundary curves.
DIEMAKER
Binder Section
The binder section curves can be manipulated using add control points, select points in
a binder section, move control points and remove points available in the blankholder
toolbar.
The curve manipulation can de done directly in 3D or within the 2D blankholder editor.
These section curves have the meaning of guide lines for modifying the shape of the
blankholder. Pressing Update within the binder section dialog will take into account the
old blankholder surface, it’s (blue) boundary curves and all new created section curves
for generating a new surface which fits all these data as good as possible.
Each blankholder modification will be performed onto the current (visible) shape. A
one step undo is implemented for tracing back to the previous shape.
DIEMAKER
Binder Section
Pick Parameter
• Curve alignment: in Orthogonal fixed mode a binder section curve will be created
perpendicular to the picked blankholder outline. In Free mode a two pick action
provides the creation of an arbitrary straight line. Note that it’s possible to create an
arbitrary grid of section curves with an arbitrary amount of inner intersection points.
Section by Offset
• Parallel to: according to the initial binder frame (blue outline curves) intersections
can be made parallel its local X or Y axis. X-Axis refers to the Outline (XZ) curves,
Y-Axis to the Outline (YZ) curves (see binder curve table within the 2D blankholder
editor).
• Offset: here the user can specify the numerical amount for the parallel intersection
curves. The origin (0.0) refers to the active coordinate system. Especially this is
useful for symmetrical binders if the active system is directly set onto the symmetry
plane.
The increment value for the arrow keys can be specified within the inc field.
• Create: creation of a parallel intersection curve.
Binder Surface
• Stiffness: regarding a simple binder surface and just one intersection parallel to the
local outline (XZ) curves. When modifying this intersection curve it is not well
defined how the manipulation of the binder surface have to be done, means should
the binder manipulation be more local or more global. The next two pictures will
explain this situation:
DIEMAKER
Binder Section
Binder manipulation with stiffness 50
Binder manipulation using stiffnes 80

Stiffness is a heuristical value, 0.0 means extreme local, global means as global as
possible.
• Update: regarding the current binder surface and all outline and intersection curves
a new binder surface will be created.
Note:
· The modification of the binder is implemented for all kind of blankholder

surface types except binders which were created with the part section approach.
DIEMAKER
Binder
BINDER
The Binder dialog provides a flexible binder design methodology with the following
capabilities:
- Selection of the part to drive the creation of the binder shape.
- Selection of the binder surface type (all developable).
- Control of the complexity of the binder surface.
Some iteration at this stage will allow the user to create a binder shape which is
suitable.
The Binder dialog
Reference Object
This panel is used to select the entity which drive the fitting routine for the binder
surface creation. The selection is made by using the Fit Blankholder From drop-down
list by selecting the appropriate entity. This selection is crucial to obtain a good binder
shape. If the software is asked to try to fit the binder to the entire part, then the binder
definition may end up being over complex, it is better to force the software to fit to a
specific selection which guides the binder towards the desired profile.
DIEMAKER
Binder
Binder Surface
The panel gives the user the option to choose the general characteristic shape and
complexity of the binder surface to be created.
- : The binder surface created will be planar.
- : The binder surface created will be a ruled surface (cylindrical type).
- : The binder surface created will be 'conical' (two radii).
- : This special approach is able to create a surface which could be curved in X

and Y direction. This approach is useful for all applications where the user needs a
"quasi copy" of the referenced geometry.
Note:
· For all four approaches (plane, cylinder, ...) a nurbs surface is generated.
- Complexity: This slide bar gives the user control over the order of complexity of the
binder shape. This option is not used for plane binder. The bar represents a sliding
scale. Two buttons, Min and Max, can be used to define the complexity of the shape
to respectively its minimum (2) or maximum (100).
Part Part
Binder surface Binder surface
Complexity = 10 Complexity = 50
- Use boundary as reference: When checked the algorithm uses the boundary of the
reference surface to create the boundary
- Automatic repositioning: This is useful if the user wants to modify a fitted surface
after having created the addendum. The user might have translated/rotated the
blankholder so this transformation is taken into account when this option is
actiavted.
- Size ratio: Defines the size ratio between the reference surface and the created
surface. By default the binder surface has the same size as the blankholder surface.
DIEMAKER
Binder
- Tension: This parameter gives an extra "stretch" (in XY) to the generated surface.
Tension = 100 means that the surface has a high stiffness, tension = 1 means that the
surface can be moved like a paper sheet.
Surface Linearity
- Linearity: Defines the XYZ components of the vector which represents the axis for
ruled or conical surfaces. The vector is defined either by using the help of the wizard
Function Buttons
- Generate: Creates the binder surface and mesh.
- Close: Closes the dialog without creating the blankholder surface and mesh.
DIEMAKER
Binder
CREATE INNER BLANKHOLDER

For defining holes as inner design regions a seperate assignment functionality has been
developed available in the blankholder toolbar.
Create inner blankholder button within blankholder toolbar
Pressing the Create inner blankholder button will open a dialog similar to the closing
holes feature.
An inner region can be defined by selecting a hole via the Hole Outlines table or,
activating the Select Hole-Outline in 3D button, by selecting a hole directly in the 3D
window. A selected hole will be highlighted with red color, non-selected holes are
framed in blue. For an easy association of table entries and part holes the show marker
feature assigns vertical lines to each hole and shows the correspondent hole Id for
selected items.
DIEMAKER
Create Inner Blankholder
For a selected hole a copy of the outer blankholder or a new rectangular and flat
blankholder can be generated into a new inner region.
The user can switch between these regions via the Activate blankholder selection box of
the blankholder toolbar. According to this setting an inner region can be deleted
pressing the Delete blankholder button within the dialog.
Analogue to the outer blankholder management the surface and mesh can be created
respectively deleted using the create/delete blankholder button. Deleting a blankholder
surface doesn’t affect the outer blue curves of the blankholder. For destroying a
blankholder frame completely the Delete blankholder button has to be used.
DIEMAKER
Create Inner Blankholder
PUNCH IMPACT
Within the blankholder toolbar a new two stage (toggle) button has been introduced for
visualising the punch impact.
Punch impact button within blankholder toolbar
Pressing the visualize punch impact button will create a ghost copy of the current
This ghost surface can be directly picked (with the left mouse key) inside the 3D
window and moved interactively up and down along the Z axis of the active coordinate
system. For a more precise movement control the up and down arrow keys of the
keyboard has been enabled as well.
DIEMAKER
Punch Impact
The distance ghost surface to blankholder will be continuously printed into the
Stamp2G info line.
Pressing the punch impact button again will hide the ghost surface. The current
movement will be kept.
DIEMAKER
Punch Impact
PROFILE EDITOR
The button of the DieMaker toolbar brings up the Profile Editor dialog (see figure
below) where the user can perform individual adjustments and fine tuning of the profile
curves.
The Profile Editor dialog
DIEMAKER
Profile Editor
Notes:
· All lengths in the profile editor are given in mm, all angles are given in degrees.
· When shaping the addendum, it is assumed that the edge of the part is complete
and free of gaps. It should also be as straight as possible – i.e. without
serration. If this is not the case, such smoothness can be achieved through the
automatic generation of connecting curves, so filling out unfavorable surfaces
and avoiding errors during the process of surface generation.
Interaction Toolbar
Most of the actions needed in the 2D or 3D windows are performed in combination with
the specific extension of the DieMaker Toolbar.
Right-Click Menu
A customizable right-click menu provides for settings in the Blankholder Editor. The
items of this right-click menu are not accessible through the menu bar.
- Grid Settings: For ease of orientation, a grid is drawn as a background in the
blankholder editor. The scaling of the grid can be fixed (5 mm, 10 mm, 50 mm or
100 mm as division) or dynamic. Dynamic implies that the grid will be
automatically either increased or decreased according to zoom factor. The grid can
also be deactivated (Ruler off).
- Symmetry Properties: If the part has been built by a symmetry transformation (see
Part Preparation), the profiles can be edited symmetrically on the whole part or only
on half the geometry.
- Accurate movement: Brings up the Accurate binder movement dialog to define an
accurate translation of the blankholder.
DIEMAKER
Profile Editor
- Accurate rotation: Brings up the Accurate binder movement dialog to define an

accurate rotation of the blankholder.
Import and Save Profiles

When the Profile Editor is active, it is possible to import or export profiles by using
respectively Import Profile or Export Profile of the File menu. It opens the standard File
selector to load or save a profile template (*.pfl).
2D Window
In the 2D window the profile curve currently under construction is represented in
profile.
Each profile curve consists of three segments:
- Transition to the part defined in the Part Transition panel (displayed in purple).
- The Template defined in the Parameters panel (displayed in blue).
- Transition to the blankholder that is automatically radial (displayed in purple).
Profile Editor Page

Part Transition
- Transition: The transition from the part to the template can be:
· Tangential: The connection is done by a curve segment tangent to the part.
· Radial: The connection is done by an arc of a circle.
- Offset: This option controls the offset between the curve and the part, i.e. the length
of the transition.
· Contour: With the default option the curve follows the part contour with a given
offset.
· Free: On some part contours better results are obtained if the offset curve is
allowed to move freely.
Apply to
Modifications can be applied to actual parameters of the currently displayed curve, or
indeed to all curves of this template. Prior to modifying the parameters, either
Selection or All must be chosen.
DIEMAKER
Profile Editor
Propagate Length Difference

This option works with the length fields (l1, l2…) displayed in the Parameters panel.
When active, all the selected profiles are considered, even if their type differs (standard,
step…). Typing a new value will extend the length of the selected profiles by the
difference between the new and old values. Due to the different slope values between
profiles, the real length difference to the old value can differ between these profiles.
When inactive, all the profiles of the same type are considered among the selection. All
these profiles get exactly the same length value. Due to different slopes for the length
segments, the position of the end points may differ.
Parameters
Once a parameter has been modified, click on the Enter or TAB key or switch into a
different field with the cursor to confirm the data. The modified support curves will be
shown after choosing the function Redraw.
In the case of there is no profile curve loaded, then the Profile Editor can be used as a
pre-set dialog.
Left beside the number fields within the parameter table locks are placed. These locks
are enabled for all length parameters. A double click on such a green lock will turn it
into red and this parameter isn’t modifiable until this lock will be opened again. These
locks are very useful for profiles with more than one length parameter, e.g. Bulge+Step
or UDT profiles. Normally the first most horizontal length segment is reserved for an
implicit modification if the end point has been moved. With these locks other length
segments can be defined for such modifications.
Similiar to the parameter locks the fixed end-point check box allows the user to lock
the movement of the end point. Normally this end point will be automatically moved if
for instance the radius r3 of a step profile has been modified. With fixing the end point
the needed space will be taken from the adjacent length segment l.
A current parameter setting can be stored as a default setting by pressing the Copy
button. A visualized profile can be re-initialized by pressing the Reset button. In this
case the factory settings are used to re-create the profile.
A current parameter setting can be also stored in the CFG-File by pressing the Save
button. This setting will be used as default setting when starting “from scratch” with a
new project.
Note:
· Not all parameters in the list of parameters can be interactively adjusted with
the mouse.
DIEMAKER
Profile Editor
Standard Template
The Standard Template can be created by using the button of the DieMaker toolbar.
- Transition to the part:
· rp: Radius at the part.
· lp: Length of the circular arc or the tangent at the part.
· a1: Slope, i.e. angle between drawing direction and tangential extension of the
transition.
A tangential transition will be generated provided that W(Z) is
applied in such a way that the tangent at the starting point of the
template corresponds to the tangent at the edge of the part (in the
upper example approx. 90 degrees).
- Template:
· l: Length of the first segment.
· r: Radius of the middle segment.
- Transition to the blankholder:
· a2: Second slope.
· rd: Radius at the blankholder.
Bulge Template
The Bulge Template can be created by using the button of the DieMaker toolbar.
- Template:
· r1: Radius of the second segment.
· l1: Length of the first segment.
· a1: Slope of l1 regarding the drawing direction.
· r2: Radius of the fourth segment.
· l2: Length of the third segment.
· r3: Radius of the seventh segment.
· a3: Slope of the fifth segment regarding the drawing direction.
DIEMAKER
Profile Editor
· a4: Slope of the eighth segment regarding the drawing direction.

· h: Height of the bulge regarding the edge of the part.
Bulge + Step Template

The Bulge + Step Template can be created by using the button of the DieMaker
toolbar.
- Template:
· l1: Length of the first segment.
· r1: Radius of the second segment.
· r2: Radius of the fourth segment.
· a3: Slope of the fifth segment regarding the drawing direction.
· h: Height of the bulge regarding the edge of the part.
· r3: Radius of the seventh segment.
· a4: Slope of the eighth segment regarding the drawing direction.
· r4: Radius of the ninth segment.
· l4: Length of the tenth segment.
· a5: Slope of the eleventh segment regarding the drawing direction.
· r5: Radius of the twelfth segment.
· a6: Die opening slope.
DIEMAKER
Profile Editor
Step Template
The Step Template can be created by using the button of the DieMaker toolbar.
- Template:
· r1: Radius of the first segment.
· d: Distance of the fourth segment to the edge of the part.
· a2: Slope of the second segment regarding the drawing direction.
· r2: Radius of the third segment.
· l: Length of the fourth segment.
· a3: Slope of the fourth segment regarding the drawing direction.
· r3: Radius of the fifth segment.
· a4: Slope of the sixth segment regarding the drawing direction.
Spline Template
The Spline template could be seen as an exception to the rule of the first three
templates, in that it can be freely modeled by the addition, relocation and the deletion of
control points.
Forms, which cannot be modeled with parametric templates at present, can probably be
modeled with the spline template. The parameter l (length) corresponds to the projected
length (on the straight line orthogonal to the drawing direction) from the part to the
outline of the die.
As preliminary stage of a free profile curve editor circular arcs and implicitly in
addition straight lines can be integrated into a Spline. A condition for the generation of
a circular arc is at least one control point additionally integrated into the Spline.
The Spline Template can be created by using the button of the DieMaker toolbar.
- Number of nodes: If the user selects a node, according to the default n nodes for the
approximation of the circular arc are generated. If more than one node is selected,
the selected nodes are used for the circular arc approximation and the parameter
number of knots will be ignored. This is meaningful in particular if defined radii are
to be modified.
DIEMAKER
Profile Editor
- Radius: Radius of the circular arc.

- Entry Curve:
· Tangential: If the toggle button tangential is activated, then tangential to the
predecessor node a straight line is generated. If the toggle button is deactivated,
the current Spline or free form connection remains.
· Length: The parameter length determines the length of the straight line in case of
tangential entrance.
- Outgoing Curve:
· Angle: This parameter specifies the orientation of the curve tangent at the last
control point of the circular arc. The angle is measured between the working
direction and the curve tangent. With the “last” circular arc (before the die radius)
the point of contact on the blankholder surface is corrected, so that the last curve
segment is straight (slope).
Arc Template
As specialization of the Spline a simple circular arc can be generated for minimum
addendum surfaces. The appropriate radius is computed automatically. Immediately
after generation of the circular arc this template corresponds to the template Spline, i.e.
all parameters and editing possibilities correspond to the Spline Template.
The Arc Template can be created by using the button of the DieMaker toolbar.
Flange Template
This special template type is for part on binder applications. Part on binder implies that
several areas of the part (normally flanges) will run directly into the blankholder which
breaks the addendum into several different regions. Each addendum region has to be
limited with these flange profiles to achieve a high quality surface transition from
addendum to part.
DIEMAKER
Profile Editor
The Flange Template can be created by using the button of the DieMaker toolbar.
If the flange template button has been activated a two pick action (with holding the
Shift key) has to be performed. The first pick defines the starting point (normally
defined as part point) the second pick defines the end point (blankholder point). Within
this region all kind of profiles can be used to design the local addendum.
UDT Template
Activating the UDT Template button of the DieMaker toolbar will open the 2D
profile editor (for designing a new profile shape) if <new template> has been chosen in
the selection box right beside this button . The 2D profile

editor will automatically switch to the Template Editor page once the user has picked
onto the part boundary for creating a new UDT profile at a specific position. The usage
of the template editor is described in the next section.
The user can create an already designed UDT profile (via the 3D window) if an
appropriate name has been chosen in the selection box .
DIEMAKER
Profile Editor
Template Editor Page
This page is grayed out if a profile other than a User-Defined Template is selected.
The user-defined functionality (UDT) is designed for building individual parametric
profiles from circular arc or straight line.
The basic idea of this approach is to choose a specific region of the part and to build
individual profile for that region inside the 2D editor window. Therefore the user has to
select the UDT profile button, , in the Addendum toolbar first. The selection box
right beside must show <new template> to indicate that a new profile is to be built.
The user picks simply the outer border of the part in the 3D view where he wants to
build an UDT curve. The program generates the part transition region and a first straight
line segment.
The template name (enter a name here) is highlighted to indicate to the user that he can
enter a new name for this template. With the four buttons below the user can add a
circular arc down or clockwise (C-), a circular arc up or counterclockwise (C+), a
straight-line segment or delete the last created segment.
During the construction each radius, length or angle parameter of each segment can be
changed individually in the Parameters panel. The right most button Finish terminates
the profile. This is only possible if the last segment is a straight line. While finishing
this last straight line segment will be enlarged and a circular arc segment is generated
for building the blankholder transition.
Once the finish button is pressed the name toggles to Unfinish, means the structure of
each UDT curve can be modified afterwards. A straight forward generation or
modification is implemented: generation from left to right or from part to blankholder
and modification (of an unfinished curve) from right to left or from blankholder to part.
A finished UDT curve can also be manipulated in the profile editor page.
DIEMAKER
Profile Editor
The name of a finished UDT curve will be enlisted inside the selection box right beside
the UDT profile button in the Addendum Toolbar. If chosen, this profile type can be
created at any arbitrary part position.
Using the right mouse click feature on the UDT profile button opens a separate manager
dialog.
User-Defined Template Management
One or more selected profile templates can be deleted , or exported , with the
standard File selector. Via the button , profile template(s) from different projects can
be imported.
UDT profiles can be automatically approximated using the Rerverse Engineering
mode of PAM-DieMaker. Normally these approximated UDT’s are defined inside the
core module of DieMaker which means that the names are not enlisted inside the
selection box. If the user wants to establish such profiles he can do that by simply
pressing the button inside the template editor page. An automatic generated name
for the currently visible profile will be propagated to the selection box of the addendum
toolbar (user-template0001, user-template0002, ..).
Error Messages and Faulty Behavior of the Software

- If nothing occurs when pressing the button (DieMaker toolbar), then the program
is not able to combine the individual profile curve segments with their current
parameters in such a way as to anchor the curve to the blankholder. Each individual
profile curve segment must be of a certain minimum length. If such a case arises,
then check the individual profile curve parameters.
- If the offset connecting curve at the edge of the part is of a poor quality, then this
could hint at a jagged edge structure. Insert additional profile curves in this area or
rework the outer contours of the part.
DIEMAKER
Profile Editor
- If the profile curves of the part are directed inwards towards the center of the
surface, then the edge region is either strongly undercut or else the element normals
are incorrectly aligned. In the latter case, the direction of work might need to be
turned back through 180°. Examine the established active coordinate system.
- If loops appear within the connecting curve, this could mean that a tangent rotation
exists, the cause of which cannot, for the moment, be identified. To rectify the
problem, either delete one of the profile curves or place one of the profile curves in
a different position.
- If the profile curve in the profile editor is not actually connected to the part, there
could be a problem related to its representation on the screen. If this is the case, then
carry out the function Redraw.
DIEMAKER
Profile Editor
CONTROL LINES
Beside creating profiles perpendicular or vertical to the part outline DieMaker offers the
capability to combine adjacent profiles with so called horizontal control lines.
This feature can be activated by pressing the button of the addendum toolbar.
A control line will be created by picking two control points of adjacent profiles.
Concerning these control lines the most important aspect are the tangents at the end
points. To achieve flexibility without getting confrontated with two many options three
different implicit methodologies are implemented: Using the control lines without any
DOL or built connecting lines the tangents of the adjacent profile planes will be used.
DIEMAKER
Control Lines
If a DOL has been already created the tangents of the DOL at the profile intersection
points (blankholder points) will be used.
Using the control lines in combination with DOL and connecting lines the tangents will
be averaged between part outline and DOL.
The red arrow in the down right area of the control line button indicates that with a
right mouse click a separate Control line options dialog will appear.
DIEMAKER
Control Lines
Sometimes the characteristics of compound control lines are not sufficient. This smooth
operation can be applied on selected control lines which will correct the tangents at each
profile pairwise means concerning the left and right curve. The correction only uses the
end points and is defined according to the flow of a free spline. All mid points will be
re-adjusted (projected) onto the smoothed curve afterwards. The tangents can be locked
activating the Lock curve transitions parameter.
The smooth operation is also available via the 3D context menu.

Each control line consists of a single mid point by default. These points can be moved
interactively, additional points can be inserted or deleted by using the Movement
Control capabilities within the addendum toolbar. Because control lines are real 3D
curves these manipulations are only defined inside the 3D window.
Moving the most left or most right mid point of a control line will adjust the appropriate
end tangent automatically.
DIEMAKER
Control Lines
Control lines can be inserted between each kind of profiles also within hole, rolling
cylinder and double part regions.
DIEMAKER
Control Lines
MOVEMENT CONTROL
This dialog is used to lock certain control point movement directions and handle the
movement interactively and numerically. The movement can be controlled in 3D and
2D as well (blankholder and profile editors).
The Movement Control dialog – 3D tab
Introduction
Moving control points means moving all (pink coloured) points within 3D or 2D spline
curves. Within this context 3D spline curves are control lines and rolling cylinder
curves. 2D spline curves are spline profiles used for addendum design, splitting holes or
rolling cylinder regions or for the use of defining the transition between part border and
symmetry plane. Intersection curves used for binder modifications are 2D spline curves
as well.
Parametric profiles, DOL curves and connecting lines (created between profiles for
addendum surface generation) are no spline curves according to this definition.
The movement control dialog can be opened using the right mouse click feature onto
the Move control points button available in all toolbars except Simulation model mode.
Note:
· All movement settings will be kept if the dialog has been closed.
DIEMAKER
Movement Control
3D Control
• Move free (in viewer plane): a picked control point or a set of selected control
points can be moved interactively in the 3D window according to the current viewer
plane.
• Move along: regarding the active coordinate system the movement can be locked
along X, Y or Z (default). The respective direction will be indicated as cursor icon
during interactive movement.
Using the interactive movement (inside 3D window) the current coordinate value
will be updated inside the appropriate number field of the dialog. This value can
also be modified numerically or using the arrow keys right beside the number field.
The amount of increment can be specified within the inc field.
• Movement onto: regarding the active coordinate system this option provides an
interactive (free) movement onto XY (default), XZ, YZ.
Note:
· This functionality has a reduced meaning for 2D spline curves. Because these
2D curves are mostly defined in a plane which doesn’t correspond to XY, XZ or
YZ such a setting allows the movement according to the specified plane under
the constraint that the plane of the curve won’t be damaged.
DIEMAKER
Movement Control
2D Control
Settings inside the 2D page can only be done if the 2D blankholder or profile editor has
been opened. Otherwise the dialog switches automatically to the 3D page.
• Movement: according to the current curve plane a horizontal, vertical or free
movement will be provided. If horizontal or vertical has been chosen the movement
can be performed interactively or numerically analog to the 3D move along
functionality.
Free (in curve plane) is implemented analog to the 3D move free (in viewer plane)
functionality. Because this mode is only interactive all number fields are greyed out.
DIEMAKER
Check Die Sections
CHECK DIE SECTIONS

This option is usually used after importing a part or after using the PAM-DieMaker
functions. The user should only select one object, the best one being the die.
The die check can either be done manually or by automatic mode, both using as
reference a section normal.
The Check Die Sections dialog
Section Normal
The user must choose a normal vector by which the check will be made. This vector can
be specified either by using the help of the wizard or by typing its components in the
text fields.
Section by Section
This option allows the user to check the die manually section by section with the help of
the picking tool. The user can pick points in succession through which the
sections will go. The sections are then created and appear on the part.
Note:
· This option can be combined with the automatic section creation option and vice
versa.
DIEMAKER
Check Die Sections
Manual
Automatic
Automatic
This option allows the user to have the die sections created automatically by entering a
value for the number of sections (at least two curves).
- N sections: Defines the number of sections to appear on the part. The default value
is 10, but if the user wants a better evaluation of the die check (especially for the
profile of the section length in the curve…), it is better to use 100 for the number of
sections.
- : Creates automatically N sections onto the part (see figure above).
Common Functions
The following functions are available both for the automatic and manual sections
creation:
- : Deletes the sections.
- : Opens the curve plotter dialog which displays two curves, respectively the
profile of section length and the profile of section length variation function of the
linear axis defined by the family of planes cutting the part.
DIEMAKER
Check Die Sections
Function Buttons
- Close: Closes the dialog without any changes since the purpose of this option is
only to check the part.
DIEMAKER
Check Die Sections
DIE OPENING LINE

This option allows the user to import a die entry line from CAD, to create a new one
from the outer edge of the part or to manipulate an already existing curve.
Import
The Die opening line dialog – Import tab
Import/Delete
- : This button brings up the standard File Selector to import the die opening line
from an IGES file (.igs).
- : Deletes the die opening line. If profiles were attached they are kept.
Select
Not yet implemented
DIEMAKER
Die Opening Line
Define
The Die opening line dialog – Define tab
Global Offset
The Global offset value defines the general distance from part boundary to die opening
line. This distance will be achieved within convex part regions and could be
automatically enlarged within concave regions. The enlargement depends on the
Concavity parameter (see below).
Offset from Part

The offset value can be locally changed using the interactive Offset from Part feature.
Activating the tool Add offset by picking part border allows the user to pick onto the
part border inside the 3D window at the desired position. A straight blue offset curve
DIEMAKER
Die Opening Line
will be created perpendicular to the part border. The resulting die opening line follows
the end points of the created offset curves with a smooth interpolation in between.
Using only one local offset curve will have the same effect as using the Global offset.
In some situations the user wants to keep the lengths of already existing profiles.
Therefore a second tool Add offset by selecting profiles gives the user the possibility to
create offset curves using the projected length (into XY plane) of a desired profile.
DIEMAKER
Die Opening Line
The lengths of the created offset curves will be taken into account always within convex
regions and could be ignored within concave regions if the Concavity parameter doesn’t
fit the local part shape (see wheel house in picture above).
For defining the die opening line only the global offset value or the interactively created
offset curves will be used. When defining profiles later on or if profiles were already
defined, they are automatically attached between the part geometry and the created (or
imported) die opening line.
Offset curves can be selected by picking an entry inside the offset table or by activating
the Select offset in 3D tool. One or more offset curves can be selected by picking the
(green) end points or using the rubber band.
Pressing the “red cross” button left beside the selection tool will delete all selected
offset curves.
Several offset curves can also be manipulated interactively inside the 3D window by
activating the Drag offset node in 3D tool. Each offset curve can be manipulated free by
picking and dragging the curve’s end point.
DIEMAKER
Die Opening Line
Concavity
This parameter controls the DOL creation within concave regions. It represents a radius
which will be applied onto the offseted curve. The larger the concavity value the more
smooth becomes the resulting DOL curve. An infinite value will eliminate all concave
characteristics.
Create / Delete
This toggle button is for creating or deleting a DOL curve. All modifications inside the
number entry fields which will be confirmed with the Enter or Tab key automatically
updates the DOL curve.
Modify
An already imported or created DOL can be locally modified via the Modify page. Note
that such modifications will be lost if a re-import or a re-creation of the DOL will be
applied afterwards.
The Die opening line dialog – Modify tab
Three different capabilities will be offered by this page: Approximate circular arc, Align
selection, Smooth selection.
Similiar to modifying free DOL’s (which are represented by connecting lines) several
modifiable DOL points have to be created first.
DIEMAKER
Die Opening Line
The most left and right point of a modifiable region defines the boundary, so for locally
modifying the radius for instance it is recommended to create (at least) five additional
points, three inner points for the circular arc approximation and two outer points for the
limitation of this region.
A modification will be performed by pressing the Apply button. Each modification

implies a re-projection of the DOL curve onto the blankholder surface. This operation
could be quite costly if the blankholder is of complex shape. Deactivating the Curve is
projected onto binder button will visualize the DOL as gray curve positioned in the XY
plane of the active coordinate system.
DIEMAKER
Die Opening Line
In this 2D mode all modifications are done without binder projection and will be much
faster. Activating Curve is projected onto binder or inserting other additional points will
project the DOL onto the blankholder again.
Approximate circular arc

Selecting a couple of modifiable DOL points will approximate an appropriate radius
and print the result into the Approx. radius number entry field of the dialog.
DIEMAKER
Die Opening Line
With this reference value the user can easily insert the destination radius and check the
result by pressing the Apply button.
Align selection
All selected points will be projected onto a straight line defined by the most left and
right point.
DIEMAKER
Die Opening Line
Smooth selection
Regarding a couple of selected points a free spline curve segment will be created
between the most left and right point. This free spline segment will be used and
integrated into the DOL if Tolerance is set to 1.0. A tolerance value between 0.0 and 1.0
will interpolate a new segment between the old shape and the new generated free spline.
Setting Tolerance to 0.0 will keep the old DOL.
If the user wants to keep the position of the inner (selected) DOL points he has to
activate the Keep controls check box. Otherwise all inner points will be projected onto
the new spline segment.
The new spline segment can be created using the already existing tangents at the end
points by activating left and/or right of the Keep transition of selection option (default
setting). Deactivating left and/or right will create a spline segment completely free. The
DOL will be adjusted at the end points according to these new tangents.
Function Button
Note:
· Symmetry is not yet support.
DIEMAKER
Intersect Addendum
INTERSECT ADDENDUM
This option is used to automatically create profile curves between the part and the
blankholder through a given addendum object. These curves can be modified later on to
create a new addendum surface. Prior to that, the user must have identified the different
areas by using the Die preparation option.
The Intersect Addendum dialog
DIEMAKER
Intersect Addendum
Transition Parameters
- Use transition parameters: When checked the user can define the length of the
transition between the curve and the part and between the curve and the
blankholder. This option is grayed out for spline type because these parameters are
mandatory. In parametric mode these transitions are automatically calculated if the
toggle is unchecked. To generate the spline profile the addendum is intersected and
the base for the spline is a polygon. The algorithm searches for the closest part or
blankholder point taking the length transition parameter(s) into account. So the real
length transition can differ if there is not an appropriate node at this position.
- Part Transition Length (mm): Length of the first segment starting from the part
(circular or straight segment).
- Blankholder Transition Length (mm): Length of the last segment (circular) joining
the blankholder.
Section Parameters
Two types of profile curves can be created:
- Spline: The profile curve is based on the curvature of the current addendum surface
and is defined by B-spline curve. The algorithm creates control point at each
intersection of the mesh, therefore following exactly the shape of the addendum.
- Parametric: The algorithm converts the shape of the current intersection polygon
into arcs and lines. Since parametric profile the user can modify it quite easily
within the 2D profile editor.
- Description of the Parametric approach: the approximation algorithm starts with a
sorted list of points (intersection polygon) which is defined from part border to
blankholder. Each single point to point connection is taken into account to evaluate
first all straight line segments of the parametric profiles. For this line
approximation two parameters are available (max. inner angle, approximation
error). Afterwards all circular arc segments are evaluated using two parameters as
well (max. radius, approximation error). If a circular arc can’t be approximated
between two adjacent line segments, a new minimal line segment will be created in
between and the circular arc approximation starts again for the two new sub
polygons. The approximation result is always a sequence of line, circular arc, line
and so on. Due to rather small line segments between two circular arcs a third block
of parameters was introduced to combine adjacent circular arc segments (min
line length, radius ratio).
DIEMAKER
Intersect Addendum
- Parameters for Parametric option:

- 1.) Line approximation:
- - Max. inner angle: inner angle of two adjacent segments of the initial
intersection polygon. If the angle is equal or higher than specified two polygon
segments will be combined to one straight line segment.
- - Approximation error: regarding two adjacent line segments (three points) and
the direct connection of the first and last point this parameter measures the
orthogonal distance of the mid point to the regarded connection line. If the distance
(in mm) is lower or equal than specified these two line segments will be combined
to one straight line segment.
- 2.) Circular arc approximation:
- - Max. radius: if the radius of the approximated circular arc is greater than
specified this segment and the two adjacent line segments are converted into one
straight line segment.
- - Approximation error: regarding a sorted set of points, the tangents of the two
end points and a circular arc defined from start to end point this parameter measures
the orthogonal distance from all mid points to the circular arc segment. If the
distance (in mm) is lower or equal than specified all these points will be put into this
circular arc segment. Otherwise the circular arc will be splitted at the critical points,
minimal straight line segments will be integrated in between and the approximation
will start again for all remaining sub polygons.
- 3.) Combining circular arc segments:
- - Line length: if the length of a straight line segment is lower than specified two
adjacent circular arcs will be combined to one circular arc if the radius ratio
parameter check succeeds.
- - Radius ratio: defines the maximal ratio between two adjacent circular arcs,
means if this value is 1.0 both arc segments have to be identical, 0.9 means that the
radius of one arc segment may differ up to 10 percent to the other. If this relation
succeeds both arc segments (and the straight line in between) will be combined into
one circular arc segment.
- Update Section: pressing this button will recreate a parametric profile at the chosen
position taking the current section parameters into account.
DIEMAKER
Intersect Addendum
Generate Section
- Section Plane: the user can chose between orthogonal and free. Applying the below
described pick tool, orthogonal offers a one pick action and generates the profile
curve orthogonal to the part border. Free offers a two pick action (first pick at the
part border, second pick near DOL) and generates a profile curve along this
specified line.
- Pick Section Position: The user picks a point in the 3D view onto the part's border
and optionally a second point (see section plane description). The profile is
automatically created between the part and the blankholder according to the
parameters defined above.
Function Button
DIEMAKER
Develop Flanges
DEVELOP FLANGES
Flanges which have been hidden by the user during part preparation can be developed
automatically onto the mesh of the simulation model. This functionality is available
within Simulation model mode.
Develop flanges button within simulation model toolbar
Pressing the Develop flanges button visualises the part and the flanges (collected within
a separate object) first and opens a small dialog.
The flange development will be activated by simply pressing Develop. Each flange will
be developed seperately using a geometrical (mesh based) approach. Note that
executing this function may take some minutes.
The result is a continous 3D curve with the characteristic that all nodes are placed onto
the mesh of the simulation model. Pressing Project onto Die will create a second 3D
curve where all segments of the first curve are splitted at each element of the simulation
model. This full node compatibility is mandatory for using this result within the
Trimming module.
DIEMAKER
Develop Flanges
The projection of the first 3D curve will be done in drawing direction (Z of active
coordinate system). If this projection is performed within undercutted areas a message
box will appear with the hint that a probably corrupted curve will be generated. Such
corrupted curves can’t be handled properly within the Trimming module.
DIEMAKER
Polygon Editor
POLYGON EDITOR
This option allows the user to define complex parametric polygons which will be
transformed into Stamp2G 3D curves when pressing the Apply button.
The Polygon Editor dialog
Edited curve
In this section an already defined 3D curve or a new created one has to be specified for
all further modifications.
- New: Pressing this button creates a new polygon. The implicit generated default
name can be modified directly inside the selection box.
- Pick 3D curve in view: Activating this tool allows the user to choose an already
defined 3D curve by picking onto this curve object inside the 3D window. Of course
the user can specify existing curve objects directly via the selection box.
Actions
- Add point to polygon: Picking onto the base geometry will create a new 3D point
associated by an automatic generated number. Successive generated points will be
connected by a line segment. The coordinates and default radii (automatically
created in corners) will be printed into the Coordinates table.
DIEMAKER
Polygon Editor
- Insert point in polygon: Additional points can be inserted at any position. The
polygon editor automatically finds the segment where the point has to be integrated.
Either a new start or end point will be generated or the existing segment will be
split.
- Move polygon point: Existing points can be interactively moved by picking and
dragging them inside the 3D window.
- Delete point from polygon: Points can be interactively deleted by picking them
inside the 3D window.
- Close / open polygon: Activating this two stage buttons either closes an open
polygon or re-opens an already closed polygon. When closing the polygon radii
(with specified default value) will be automatically generated at the new segment’s
start and end point.
- Edit polygon point: Existing points can be modified individually. Activating this
button opens a small edit dialog.
- The desired point has to be picked inside the 3D window. It’s point number, radius
and coordinates will be printed into the dialog entry fields and can be modified
afterwards. Each modification will be applied after pressing the Tab or Enter key.
Choosing a different point number will switch to the appropriate point if available
or won’t have any effect onto the current selection.
Corners
- Radius: each polygon corner will be automatically smoothed by a radius if the
chosen value is greater zero.
- Set radius to all points: activating this button will apply the specified radius to all
corners. As long as this button is active new values will be applied immediately.
- Edit polygon point: individual corners can be modified (using the current radius
setting) by picking the desired point inside the 3D window.
- Numbers: corresponding point numbers will be visualized inside the 3D window by
activating this option.
DIEMAKER
Polygon Editor
Coordinates
The coordinates and radii of each polygon point will be printed inside this table. The
values can be modified by performing a double click onto the appropriate cell. The new
values will be applied by pressing the Tab or Enter key.
Function Buttons
- Apply: pressing this button will transform the generated polygon into a Stamp2G
3D curve. All radii will be transformed into several line segments.
- Close: closes the dialog. If the polygon has been modified without using Apply a
message box will ask the user to proceed.
DIEMAKER
Polygon Editor
ADD BASECURVE
A basecurve inside the DieTrimming module corresponds to a cutting line which is
defined onto the surface of the die. Normally it is the result of the Develop flanges
operation but in general it could be any kind of 3D curve.
Generating Basecurve dialog
Operation Basecurve
An already existing basecurve can be chosen via the selection box or a new basecurve
object can be created by pressing the button. A new basecurve object is initially a
container for the developed flange curve (creation see below). A basecurve (chosen via
the selection box) can be deleted by pressing the button.
Pressing the Develop flanges button will open a separate dialog for specifying the die,
part and flange region first.
DIEMAKER
Add Basecurve
Coming from Diemaker these regions (objects) are automatically set. They relate to the
simulation model (Die), the part object without flanges (Part) and the hidden flanges
grouped within an individual object (Flanges). If the user wants to process an imported
model (independent from Diemaker) he has to choose the different objects explicitly.
When working with a CAD model flanges are not defined as a separate object. In such a
case the geometrical subtraction of part and die will specify the flange area. The
sensitivity of flange recognition can be adjusted using the slider inside the Develop
Flanges dialog. This heuristic value (range 0 until 1) represents the magnitude of a
search radius within nodes will be interpreted as part or flange. Using a higher value
tends to assign critical nodes rather to part than to flange.
Pressing Develop will create a continuous cutting line consisting of all developed flange
outlines and the remaining intermediate part outline segments as well.
DIEMAKER
Add Basecurve
Create Basecurve
The developed flange curve is mostly not node compatible with the underlying base
geometry, means that only the nodes are lying directly on the mesh whereas the line
segments will intersect the elements. Pressing the Set button will create a new 3D curve
which is fully projected (in Z direction) onto base geometry. All line segments of this
curve are proper split at the edges of the triangle elements.
This projection is important for continue with DieTrimming. Proper cutting knifes could
only be generated with a proper basecurve.
The Set functionality will pop up a message dialog if the projection will fail due to
undercutted regions. In such a case the user can proceed or cancel this action.
Insufficient basecurves can be interactively modified with the Polygon Editor by
pressing the Modify polygon button.
Beside imported or developed flange curves the user can interactively create an own
basecurve (with the Polygon Editor) by pressing the Create polygon button.
DIEMAKER
Coordinate Systems
COORDINATE SYSTEMS
Analog to the Tipping dialog in Diemaker local coordinate systems can be defined using
the Coordinate Systems dialog. Regarding the basecurve respectively the global cutting
line the die can be balanced manually or automatically using the Optimization feature.
Coordinate Systems dialog
Active Coordinate system

The current (or active) coordinate system can be set choosing an entry from the
selection box. Coming from Diemaker this field is initialized with the latest active one.
It is named Trim_loacalSystem_ concatenated with the name of this coordinate system.
Starting with a CAD model this field is set to GLOBAL.
Edited Coordinate system

Within this section the user can define his own local coordinate system.
- New: Pressing this button creates a new local coordinate system. Initially it is a copy
of the global system. Two arrows indicate the Z-direction of the active system (blue)
and the Z-direction of the new local system (light brown).
DIEMAKER
Coordinate Systems
- Delete: Deletes the coordinate system (current entry of the selection box).
- Save / Load: Not yet implemented.
- Origin: Center of the new coordinate system. These values can be modified
manually or by activating the pick tool (right beside the coordinate entry fields) the
user can place the new system to an arbitrary position onto the base geometry. The
numbers inside the entry fields describe the translation according to the active
coordinate system.
- Orientation: Describes the rotation (around X, Y, Z) according to the active
coordinate system. These values can be modified manually or using the up and
down arrow keys (one degree rotation per use).
- Optimization: Pressing the Opt button will automatically balance the Z-direction of
the new coordinate system to the best (averaged) orientation of the reference curve
specified in the Depends on selection box. Selecting a curve will show it in the 3D
window. The best orientation is defined by minimizing the deviation of the so called
Alpha, Beta and Normal angles (description see below). Pressing the Settings button
will open a small dialog where the user can specify the amount of weighting for
each angle.
- The numbers of each entry field represent a percentage influence factor. As pre-
defined the influence of Alpha is five times higher than Beta. The heighten 2 means
that each value is squared first and weighted afterwards during optimization.
DIEMAKER
Coordinate Systems
Two planes can be defined regarding each point of the reference curve (mostly
basecurve) and the underlying elements of the base geometry: Z-direction of the
new coordinate system and orthogonal curve bi-normal defines plane A. Z-
direction of the new coordinate system and curve tangent defines plane B.
· Alpha angle: Projection of the underlying element normal onto plane A.

· Beta angle: The projection of the underlying element normal onto plane B.
· Normal angle: Angle between element normal and local Z-direction.
- Start / End / Swap / Clear: the optimization can be limited to a specific curve
segment. Activating Start respectively End and picking onto the reference curve will
define the bounds for this segment. It will be highlighted in the 3D window.
Pressing Swap will invert the specified segment.
DIEMAKER
Coordinate Systems
Pressing Clear removes the segment definition.
Function Buttons
- Set as Active: Activates the new edited coordinate system.
DIEMAKER
Modify Trimline
MODIFY TRIMLINE
Starting from a given basecurve two orthogonal boundary curves define a specific
cutting knife. Such a pair of trimlines can be set using the Modify Trimline dialog. As
many cutting knifes as desired can be specified within the current trim operation.
Modify Trimline dialog
Active Trimline
Before specifying the left and right boundary curve a new trimline object has to be
created first by using the Plus button. After creation the basecurve will be visualised
inside the 3D window indicating that the cutting knifes can be designed now. Selected
items can be removed by pressing the Minus button.
DIEMAKER
Modify Trimline
Definition
After choosing a basecurve from the selection box the left (first) and right (second)
trimline can be generated by activating the corresponding Create button and picking
onto the basecurve inside the 3D window afterwards.
Left and right is defined by applying a clockwise pick onto the basecurve when looking
from above (in –Z direction), see picture below.
A trimline of a cutting knife is often used for an adjacent knife when designing an
additional trim operation. By activating the Select tool the user can directly pick an
existant trimline in the 3D window.
Each trimline can be interactively modified by launching the Polygon Editor.
DIEMAKER
Modify Trimline
Pressing the Update button generates a continuous cutting line composed of the two
trimlines and the appropriate piece of basecurve in between. If Preview is activated the
trimmed part of the base geometry will be visualised in green. Otherwise the continuous
cutting line will be visualised in yellow.
A trimmed area can be displaced by using the Move option. If this button is pressed the
user can pick and drag this section to an arbitrary position.
DIEMAKER
Modify Trimline
TRIMMING OPERATION PUNCHING

Similiar to the Modify Trimline functionality the user can specify punching operations
for arbitrary areas within the base geometry.
Trimming Operation Punching dialog
Operation Punching
Before specifying the actual punching operation a new Trimoperation object has to be
created first using the button. A selected item can be removed by pressing the
button.
Create Hole
Pre-defined polygons (for using them as punching lines) can be chosen via the selection
box. All closed polygons are listed there. A new punching operation can be defined by
pressing the Create polygon button. Doing this will automatically open the Polygon
Editor (please refer to this chapter for further information).
DIEMAKER
Trimming Operation Punching
In combination with the polygon editor arbitrary punching areas can be defined.
Pressing Apply within the polygon editor will create a new (closed) 3D curve which will
be automatically enlisted inside the Curve selection box of the Trimming Operation
Punching dialog.
DIEMAKER
Trimming Operation Punching
The specified punching operation will be transferred to the system by pressing the Set
button. Activating the Preview option will color this area in green when closing the
dialog.
DIEMAKER
Set Workdirection
SET WORKDIRECTION
While defining a global cutting direction via the Coordinate Systems dialog, local
trimming areas can be re-balanced (mostly for applying sliders) using the Set
Workdirection dialog.
Set Workdirection dialog
Active Coordinate system

The definition of a local working direction will be always relative to the active
coordinate system specified via the Active Coordinatesystem selection box.
Trim operation
Each trimming area which has been defined using the Modify Trimline or Punching
Operation dialog will be enlisted in the Trimoperation selection box. The default
working direction for a chosen trimline is in press direction, means equivalent to the Z
axis of the chosen active coordinate system.
DIEMAKER
Set Workdirection
When deactivating this option an individual rotation can be calculated manually or

using the optimization feature.
Individual working directions are mostly useful for defining sliders. By default these
sliders are identical with the X axis of the active coordinate system. The given default
rotation (z = 0; y = 90) represents the initial press direction.
The automatic optimization feature will balance the individual working direction
according to the Alpha and Beta angle of the local trimline. The percentage amount of
influence can be adjusted via the Settings dialog. Further explanations are given in the
Coordinate Systems dialog.
Pressing the Set button will transfer the individual working direction to the system.
Note that the result will be lost if the dialog has been closed without applying Set.
DIEMAKER
Post Values
POST VALUES
The basecurve or any specified trimming area can be validated according to it’s Alpha,
Beta and Normal angle using the Post Values dialog.
Post Values dialog
Curve Selection
The trimming area (curve or cutting line) which wants to be validated have to be chosen
via the selection box.
Pressing Update generates a cylindrical contour visualisation around the selected curve.
This visualization will be created immediately if auto update is activated.
DIEMAKER
Post Values
Colortable Definition
The ranges for the angle validation can be adjusted within the Colortable Definition
section.
Three color ranges will be used to illustrate good or critical regions. The default settings
for Alpha and Normal are zero degree in blue, up to 15 degrees in blue/green and above
15 degrees in red. For Beta the ranges are zero, up to 75 and above 75 degrees. Between
the first and second range the color interpolates between blue and green.
DIEMAKER
Post Values
Post Values
Within this section the user can specify the angle type for validation. The definition for
Alpha, Beta and Normal is given in chapter Coordinate Systems.
The user will get specific information about Alpha, Beta and Normal at a concrete
position by moving the mouse cursor along the cutting line. The corresponding values,
separated by a slash, will be printed inside the 3D window. In the picture below the
angles are: Alpha = 3.84, Beta = 17.94, Normal = 18.30.
The waste size of a specific trimming area will be automatically calculated if

Measurement is activated. According to the end points of the left and right trimline and
a third point onto the intermediate basecurve segment a circle will be calculated. The
value of the Waste Size corresponds to the circle’s diameter.
For validating the waste removal the opening angle between left and right trimline will
be given as well.
DIEMAKER
Post Values
OBJECT TREE
When activating the trimming module an individual object tree panel will be installed
right beside the Visibility page. This object tree will be removed when switching back to
Diemaker or any other Stamp2G module.
Object Tree Panel
This object tree is a structured list of objects ordered by cutting operations and object
types. The highest level of structuring are objects of the Diemaker process followed by
the single cutting operations Trim10, Trim20 etc. Each cutting operation consists of it’s
coordinate systems and all individual objects as base geometry and basecurve (Trim10
operation) as well as trimlines.
Each group of objects can be opened or closed by using the Plus or Minus symbol. In
front of each object a gray Moon or yellow Sun symbol indicates if this object is visible
inside the 3D window or not. A double click onto these symbols will turn the Moon into
Sun and vice versa.
DIEMAKER
Object Tree
MATERIAL
MATERIAL MENU
The Material Menu
The following capabilities are described:

- Material Database Management: How to manage a material data base (public or
private) and its contents. This dialog gives directly or indirectly access to the
following dialogs:
· Material properties: How to create, duplicate or modify a material in a private
material data base.
· Lankford coefficients: Transforms the specified Lankford coefficients into Hill's
coefficients
· New Material: Specifies parameters for the material file to be created. This
function is always available, i.e. even if no project is open.
· Unit Array: Displays the unit system characteristics.
· Material Data: Displays information on the material file.
- Parameter Fitting: Not yet implemented.
MATERIAL
Material Menu
MATERIAL DATABASE
This dialog is used to manage the Material Data Base, which serves for automatic
definition of the material properties of the material used.
Selected Material Data Base dialog

directory path
Database
The user can store data in his database or use a "public" (eventually read-only) database.
These two databases (Private and Public) are directories which contain one file per
material dataset. A material dataset is an ASCII type file whose extension is ".psm".
The automatic access to those databases is specified in the Options dialog of the
Customize menu by defining the path of the directory containing the set of files.
Note:
· It is not advisable to modify with a text editor a material file to fit the user's
needs. The user should create his database by copying an existing one and
modifying it.
MATERIAL
Material Database
Directory
- : Creates a new directory directly above the selected directory in the tree above.
It brings up the dialog:
- : Deletes a directory and all materials files or directory it contains.

- : Allows to rename a directory. It brings up the dialog:
Materials
This toolbar is used to handle the content of a material dataset. All the buttons are
grayed out, but the button, until a material has been selected in the Material List:
- : Brings up the Material properties dialog to define a new material and its
properties.
- : Removes the material from the list and deletes the file from the directory.
- : Brings up the Material properties dialog to edit and/or modify the properties.
- : Copies the selected materials in the list.
- : Cuts the selected materials in the list.
- : Pastes the materials copied or cut in the current directory. If the materials were
cut, the corresponding files are delete from the original directory. If a file already
exists and the user does not want to erase it, the Copy material in dialog is called up
to import the selected material in the private database or in another database
MATERIAL
Material Database
- : Brings up the Material Data dialog in which the content of the material file is
summarized.
- : Imports material file(s) from another directory. It calls up the standard File
selector to load material file(s). After validation the files are copied in the current
database. If a file already exists and the user does not want to erase it, the Copy
material in dialog is called up to import the selected material in the private database
or in another database.
- : Imports materials from the active project. It brings up in succession the two
following dialogs:
- The Import materials from project where materials can be selected from a project
that has been loaded, but which materials are not in the database.
- The Copy material in dialog to import the selected material in the private database or
in another database.
Material List
This list displays in a table all the materials of a given database.
- Name: Name of the material.
- Type: Forming materials are classified in three types on which depends the list of
material laws available (standard steel, special steel and aluminium).
- Reference: This field can be used to classify the materials but since the user defines
the content, he may enter what seems logical to his needs.
- File name: Displays the name of the file with its extension.
- Unit system: Displays the unit system used by the material.
MATERIAL
Material Database
Function Buttons
- Apply: This button is used when a material has to be loaded in the project from the
database. For example, when the user wants to replace the blank sheet material
using the Object Attributes, AutoStamp Macro Process or QuikStamp Macro Process
dialog.
MATERIAL
Material Database
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
The Material properties dialog allows the user to create or edit a material in the Material
Data base.
The figure hereafter shows the Material properties dialog for standard steel.
The Material properties Dialog
MATERIAL
Material Properties
The following paragraphs explain the roles of the various dialog components.
Material Name
This name is used as root name for the material data set which may be saved in the
Material Data Base. A material data set is an ASCII type file whose extension is
".psm".
Material Type
Depending the selection made in the drop-down list, the list of material laws available
changes. These types help the user to choose the material law.
- Standard steel:
· Orthotropic Hill 48
- Special steel:
· Barlat
· Orthotropic Hill 48 Yoshida
- Aluminium:
· Barlat
- Super plastic:
· Non linear viscoelastic
- User-defined:
· Material 184
- Rubber:
· Mooney-Rivlin
MATERIAL
Material Properties
Material Law
According to the selection made here, the corresponding input parameters are displayed
in the Parameters panel (see below). Three plasticity criteria (material laws) are
available:
- The HILL 48 criterion coupled to an isotropic hardening law is the most used
criterion.
- The HILL 48 criterion coupled to an isotropic or kinematic hardening law.
- The HILL 90 criterion type is based on a non-quadratic yield function as opposed to
a quadratic yield function (HILL 48). This criterion is able to take into account
different behaviors during the bending/unbending phase and seems to be well
adapted to aluminium.
The HILL 90 criteria enable to model plasticity convexes in a more general manner
than the HILL 48 model but the simulation time is increased.
Isotropic hardening
No other parameter is needed.
Kinematic hardening
This model is the coupling between the Hill 48 criterion and the mixed model of
Lemaitre and Chaboche. The plastification will occur when σeq - (R + Re0) >= 0
(σeq=equivalent stress, R=isotropic hardening variable).
dXij dR
Yield surface at time t
Yield surface at time t+dt
- Re0: yield stress along the plane of a plate element and along a direction that is at an
angle of 0 degrees with respect to the rolling direction.
- Cx, Xsat: material parameters as dR = Cr.(Rsat - R).dEp where
MATERIAL
Material Properties
· R represents the isotropic hardening variable

· dR represents the variation of R (scalar)
· dEp represents the incremental plastic strain
- C0, Gamma: material parameters as dXij = C0.dEpij – Gamma.Xij.dEp where
· Xij represents the kinematic hardening variables (tensor)
· dXij represents the variation of Xij
· dEpij represents the incremental plastic strain tensor
· dEp represents the incremental plastic strain
X11, X22, X12: initial position of the center of the yield surface in the orthotropic system
(1=rolling direction).
Parameters
This panel is divided into two parts. The upper one is dedicated to general parameters
that are mandatory for all materials.
- E: Young's modulus.
- ν: Poisson's coefficient.
- ρ: Specific density.
The lower one is dependent of the material law chosen (see above).
Orthotropic Hill 48
- Ito-Goya plastivcity: Kc
- Anisotropic type:
· Isotropic: There is no anisotropy so there is no need of Lankford’s coefficient.
· Normal: Only the anisotropy through the thickness is taken into account, so only
one average value r that does not depend on the direction is needed.
· Orthotropic: The anisotropy in three directions is taken into account.
r0, r45, r90 : Lankford's coefficients (anisotropy) along a direction
that is at an angle of 0, 45 and 90 degrees with respect to the rolling
direction.
: This icon provides access to the Lankford coefficients

computation dialog.
MATERIAL
Material Properties
Barlat
Parameters: m, A, B, C, F, G, H
Orthotropic Hill 90
This formulation is an anisotropic elasto-plastic plane stress formulation based on a
non-quadratic yield function (Hill 1990), as opposed to a quadratic yield function (Hill
1948).
For plane stress conditions and in the orthotropic axes, the yield function is written as
m
m
σx +σ y + α m ⎡⎢ (σ x −σ y) 2
+ 2 ⎤2
4σ xy ⎥
⎣ ⎦
m
{ β (σ x2 − σ 2y ) + γ (σ x − σ y )2} = (1 + α m + β + γ )(σ 1y )
−1 m
+ ⎡σ x2 + σ 2y + 2σ xy
2 ⎤2
⎣ ⎦
= (2σ by )m ,
where α (Alpha), β (Beta), γ (Gamma) and m are material parameters which can be
obtained from experimental data. σ 1y is the yield stress under uniaxial tension on the
first orthotropic direction and σ by is the yield stress under equibiaxial tension. The new
yield function provides a more accurate description of the yield surface for aluminum
alloys, which results in better simulation accuracy.
In terms of principal stress components for which,
sin 2θ
σ x + σ y = σ 1 + σ 2 , σ x − σ y = (σ 1 − σ 2 ) cos 2θ and σ xy = (σ 1 − σ 2 )
2
the yield function becomes
m
σ1 + σ 2
m
+α m
σ 1 −σ 2
m
+ ⎡σ 12
⎣
2 ⎤ 2 −1
+ σ2
⎦ {β (σ12 − σ 22 ) cos 2θ + γ (σ1 − σ 2 )2 cos2 2θ } = (2σ )m.
b
y
Orthotropic Hill 48 Yoshida

Parameters of Orthotropic Hill 48 +
X11, X22, X12
Xsati, Bsat, Rsatx
Cx1, Cx2, EpRef
Hnih, Rnih0, AM
Xi, Younga
MATERIAL
Material Properties
Orthotropic Hill 90 Yoshida

Parameters of Orthotropic Hill 90 +
X11, X22, X12
Xsati, Bsat, Rsatx
Cx1, Cx2, EpRef
Hnih, Rnih0, AM
Xi, Younga
Non-linear viscoelastic
Without ρ
.
As, K, m, ξ, f0, εmax , tfil
No strain rate and no hardening curve.
Material 184
Only ρ for parameters
A list of integer values (IUSER) and a list of float values (RUSER)
Mooney-Rivlin
This law is available only for Volume tool.
Only ρ for parameters
ν for load, ν for unload (optional), A and B for load, A and B for unload (optional link
with ν for unload), number of cycles for search between load/unload, number of cycles
for transition between load/unload
: This icon provides access to the Mooney-Rivlin coefficients computation dialog.

No hardening curve and no strain rate model
Material Curve
List which contains all the curves linked to the material. If the users click on one name
of curve in this list, the curve appears in the Curve plotter.
- : Access to the plotter to edit "hardening" type curves.
- : Access to the plotter to edit "forming limit" type curves.
MATERIAL
Material Properties
Strain Rate Model

When the toggle is active, different analytical strain rate models may be selected via a
drop-down list. According to the model chosen, parameters are displayed in the panel,
and the strain rate behavior of the material is summarized below:
Note:
For your computation, the toggle Strain rate filter in Other tab of Advanced
Parameters dialog have to be checked to take account of the strain rate model.
⎡ 1⎤
⎛ ε ⎞ p ⎥
- Cowper-Symonds: σ n = σ y ⎢1 + ⎜ ⎟ ⎥
⎢ ⎝D⎠
⎢⎣ ⎥⎦
⎡ 1 ⎛ ⎛ ε ⎞ ⎞ ⎤
- Johnson-Cook: σ n = σ y ⎢1 + ln ⎜ max ⎜ ,1⎟ ⎟ ⎥
⎣ p ⎝ ⎝ D ⎠ ⎠⎦
⎛ 1 ⎞
-
⎜ ⎡
Modified Jones: σ n = σ y ⎜ 1 + ⎢
( ε u y)
-ε ε ⎤
⎥
( Aε + B) ⎟
⎟,
⎜ ⎢⎣ D u ( ε-ε y ) + D y ( ε u -ε ) ⎥⎦ ⎟
⎝ ⎠
εy is usually set to zero
n ref
⎛ ⎛ ε ⎞ ⎞
b
⎜ ε + ε oref ⎜ ⎟ ⎟
⎜ ⎝ ε ref ⎠ ⎟
- Left shifted laws: σ ( ε,ε ) = σ ( ε,ε ref ) ⎜ ⎟
ε + ε oref
⎜ ⎟
⎜ ⎟
⎝ ⎠
n ref α c ε
- Modified Krupkowsky: σ ( ε, ε ) = k ref α
a ⎡ε + ε oref α b ⎤ , where α = .
⎣ ⎦ ε ref
- Multiple curves: Allows to define several hardening curve for a specific value of
strain rate (the hardening curve in Material curve section is defined for a null strain
rate).
· : brings up the dialog below to define a new curve.
MATERIAL
Material Properties
· : delete the selected curves from the list.

· : edits the curve by opening the curve plotter.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the parameters entered and closes the dialog. Whether the material
has been modified or not, it may be used inside the project.
- Add in material database: Brings up the New Material dialog to create a new
material in the current Material Database.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing any changes (except for the Curve
Plotter which works independently).
Lankford Coefficients Calculation
The Lankford coefficients dialog
Hill's Coefficients
Anisotropic effects can be expressed via the plastic yield function. Using Hill's
coefficients, the yield function is given by:
MATERIAL
Material Properties
1
⎡ ( G + H ) σ 112 + ( F + H ) σ 222 + 2 H σ 11σ 22 + 2 Nσ 122 ⎤ 2
f (σ ) = ⎢ ⎥ ,
⎣ 2 ⎦
where G, F, H, N are the four Hill coefficients. For the numerical calculations, only
coefficients G, F and N must be introduced, since H = 2−G.
Lankford's Coefficients
Using Lankford's coefficients, the yield function becomes:
1
⎡ r σ 2 + r σ 2 + r r (σ − σ )2 + ( 2r + 1)( r + r ) σ 2 ⎤ 2
f (σ ) = ⎢ ⎥ ,
90 11 0 22 90 0 11 22 45 90 0 12
⎢ r90 ( r0 + 1) ⎥
⎣ ⎦
where r90, r45 and r0, in rolled metal sheets, characterize the rolling effects in sheets at
angles of 90°, 45° and 0°, respectively, with respect to the sheet rolling direction.
Function Buttons
- OK: The program automatically transforms the specified Lankford coefficients into
Hill's coefficients by the following formulas:
2
· G=
1 + r0
2 r0
· F=
r90 (1 + r0 )
· N=
( 2r45 + 1)( r90 + r0 ) .
r90 (1 + r0 )
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing any action.
Notes:
· Normal anisotropy can be considered as a special case of planar orthotropy

where
r90 = r45 = r0, or G=F and N=4-G.
· Isotropic behavior can be achieved by defining
r90 = r45 = r0=1.0, or G=F=1.0 and N=3.0.
For these particular cases, the principal axis of orthotropy direction vector need
not be defined.
MATERIAL
Material Properties
Calculation of Coefficients for Barlat's Law

Purpose
This wizard allows to calculate the A, B, C, H and m coefficients of Barlat's law.
This calculation is based on an iterative method which minimize a function whose
variables are the yield stresses and the anisotropy coefficients.
Description of the Box
The Barlat coefficients computation dialog
- Coefficients range: There are 2 text fields per coefficient to be calculated (A, B, C, H
and m). These two values define the range inside which a solution must be found.
Remark about m: avoid varying m coefficient. It is also recommended to choose an
integer value for it.
MATERIAL
Material Properties
- Experiments: Each line of this text field corresponds to an experiment. At least one
experiment at 0° must be given. For each experiment, specify (in this order and on
the same line):
· Angle: An angle (in degrees) with respect to the rolling direction.
· Re: A yield stress in the direction which corresponds to the angle.
· r: A Lankford's coefficient (anisotropy coefficient) in the direction which
corresponds to the angle.
· Weight Re: A "weight" applied to the measure of the yield stress.
· Weight r: A "weight" applied to the measure of the anisotropy coefficient.
Note: The weights are positive or negative values. Thanks to them, the
calculation can be based on measures of Re above all or on measures of r. The
higher the weight, the more significant the measure. You must specify a non-zero
weight for Re at 0 degrees, even if you want the calculation to be based on
measures of r only.
- Parameters:
· Precision: precision for the calculation convergence.
· Maximum number of iterations: maximum number of iterations for each
coefficient calculation.
Function Buttons
- OK: Starts the calculation and closes the dialog. Prior to this action the following
operation are necessary:
· Fill in the text fields corresponding to the coefficients to be calculated.
· Fill in the Experiments zone (an experiment with an angle equal to 0° is
mandatory).
· Fill in the Parameters zone.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing any calculation.
MATERIAL
Material Properties
Calculation of coefficients for Mooney-Rivlin's law

Purpose
This wizard allows to calculate the A and B coefficients of Money-Rivlin's law.
The Mooney-Rivlin coefficients computation dialog
MATERIAL
Material Properties
New Material
This dialog is called up when a new material is added to the Material Database.
The New Material dialog
Reference
This field can be used to classify the materials but since the contents is defined by the
user, one may enter what seems logical to his needs.
File name
The file name is identical to the reference name by default.
Origin
This field can be used to define the origin of the file, which may be a supplier, a
company department...
MATERIAL
Material Properties
Unit Systems
Eleven different unit systems - corresponding to the most common systems- are
predefined.
The name of the Unit system is defined by the 3 basic dimensions:
- Length dimension . mass dimension . time dimension
The predefined systems are:
- M.K.S system Meter . Kilogram . Second
- MM.K.MS system MilliMeter . Kilogram . MilliSecond
- C.G.S system Centimeter . Gram . Second
- C.100K.S system Centimeter . 100Kilograms . Second
- MM.T.S system MilliMeter . Ton . Second
- MM.DAT.S system MilliMeter . DecaTon . Second
- C.G.MIS system Centimeter . Gram . MicroSecond
- MM.G.MS system MilliMeter . Gram . MilliSecond
- F.SL.S system Foot . Slug . Second
- I.PM.S system Inch . Pound Mass . Second
- MM.KG/G.MS system MilliMeter . Kilogram/9.81 . MilliSecond
By default, the M.K.S system (International system) is active.
The unit system may be defined for the solver input.
For each unit system, seven dimensions are defined: mass, length, time, temperature,
energy, force and stress. Unknown and dimensionless are defined for all systems.
Comments
In this window the user can add some notes about the material.
Function Buttons
Three function buttons are associated with this dialog:
- OK: Validates the material creation.
- Verify: Brings up the Unit Array dialog to check to the unit system chosen.
MATERIAL
Material Properties
Copy Material in
This dialog is called up when a material is copied in the Material Database and if the
file is already exists.
The Copy material in dialog
· Directory: Defines the directory that will contain the material file. The
button opens a Browser for Folder dialog from which the user may select a
directory. The and buttons fill the edit box above with
the path defined in Options.
· Two fields allow the user to change the material file and/or reference name.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the material creation.
MATERIAL
Material Properties
Unit Array
Units are displayed in legends according to the user's choice of unit system.
Pushing the Verify button of the New Material dialog will open the Unit Array dialog
which describes basic units of the selected system. Different unit systems may be used
across windows but no conversion will be performed.
The Unit array
The Unit column in the Unit Array dialog defines the unit name. The Conversion
column defines the conversion factor to be applied on the values defined in the M.K.S.
system to give the values in the chosen system.
Pushing the Close button will close the Unit Array dialog.
MATERIAL
Material Properties
Material data
This dialog gives information on the content of material file (extension .psm). It
recovers information from the New material dialog (name, reference, origin, comments)
as well as system data (date of creation of the file, location of the file, name of the
owner).
The Material data dialog
- The user can modify the unit system and the comments. The units are set for
information only.
MATERIAL
Material Properties
PROCESS
PROCESS MENU
The Process menu
- Blank creation: Brings up the Blank meshing dialog.

- Form blank optimization: Brings up the Blank optimization dialog.
- QuikStamp: Brings up the QuikStamp Macro Process dialog.
- Data Setup Wizard: Brings up the Data setup wizard (end-user macro) dialog.
- Tools building: Brings up the Tool builder dialog.
- Accessory: Brings up the Accessory dialog.
- Blank unfolding: Brings up the Inverse solver project creation dialog.
- Simplified tube bending: Brings up Simplified tube bending dialog.
- Customize/Process setup: Brings up the File selector dialog to choice the macro
(files .ksa, .ksq, .ktf, .mct) to open.
- Objects:
PROCESS
Process Menu
· Create object: Brings up the New object dialog.

· Delete objects: Brings up the Delete objects dialog.
· Add selection to object and Remove selection from object: Brings up the Objects
dialog.
· Informations: Brings up the Object information dialog.
· Attributes: Brings up the Objects attributes dialog.
· Content management: Brings up the Object content management dialog.
PROCESS
BLank OptimiZation
BLANK OPTIMIZATION
Starting from a simulation model, a polygon (mostly offseted outline of the punch
object) and an initial blank object (defined by the user) this feature generates a form
blank sheet whose boundary will be approximated according to the given polygon after
a couple of deep drawing simulations. This option is available in setup module via the
Process menu.
The user has to specify several settings within the Blank optimization dialog and start
the solver (preferably QuikStamp) afterwards.
Target
Reference object: Normally the optimized form blank sheet should fit the punch
boundary after deep drawing. This punch object has to be chosen via the selection box
or by applying the select tool right beside this field.
Offset of target contour: This value specifies the distance from the punch boundary for
building the target polygon. Pressing Visualize will generate an appropriate 3D curve.
PROCESS
BLank OptimiZation
Target Contour: Alternatively to the offseted polygon (described above) the user can
choose an already existing 3D curve (e.g. imported polygon) for using it as target
polygon. Pressing Modify will open the Polygon Editor for making individual
adaptations if desired.
Blank
Blank object: Here the user has to specify the initial blank object via the selection box or
interactively using the select tool.
Element size: The result after each simulation is a new blank contour which has to be
meshed for the next iteration. The fineness of these meshes is specified by this value.
Save the blank: After each simulation the blank object will be automatically overwritten
with the next intermediate shape. If this option is committed by pressing the Action
button the initial blank object will be copied into the object default_blank. This setting
is recommended if the user possibly wants to re-run the process later on.
PROCESS
BLank OptimiZation
Copy from default blank: Once the initial blank was saved as default_blank it will be
copied back to the blank object by pressing the Action button.
Build from target contour with offset: For the initial blank object the user can also build
a preformed shape by using the target contour polygon plus separate offset. Pressing
Action will generate a meshed blank taking the Element size parameter into account.
Note that this result will overwrite the object specified in Blank object.
A useful way to specify the blank might be :

1. save the initial blank,
2. build a new one by using the target contour with offset
3. use the copy from default blank after the first optimization.
Optimization
Iteration: Specifies the number of simulations.
Sensitivity: After each simulation the optimization algorithm calculates the distances
(for each node) from the (deep drawed) blank boundary to the target polygon. These
distances (vectors) will be added to each node of the initial blank contour. The result is
a polygon which will be used as blank contour for the next iteration. Sensitivity
represents a scaling factor for each distance vector. By default 20 percent of the
distances will be taken for generating the new blank contour.
Save the provisional results into the database: if this parameter is activated all
intermediate simulation results will be kept inside the database and are available via the
Visibility dialog.
PROCESS
BLank OptimiZation
Function buttons
OK: Accepts and saves all settings and closes the dialog.
Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing anything.
Notes:
· The optimization will be initiated by choosing form blank optimization inside the
Run program after simulation block of the Start a calculation dialog. Pressing OK
will start the optimization loop.
· Currently the blank optimization is only available in single stage mode.
· The final result of blank optimization is the updated blank object.
PROCESS
QuikStamp Macro Process
QUIKSTAMP MACRO PROCESS

The Quikstamp Macro Process dialog (see figure below) is used to build the data set-up
for a QuikStamp direct simulation.
This simulation is based on the direct approach, which just needs the die, the binder and
the blank mesh to define the final shape of the blank.
It is not necessary to define the type of the press with its different actuators with this
approach, since the displacement of the press components is not simulated.
The QuikStamp Macro Process Dialog
PROCESS
Groups
The Groups drop-down list is synchronized with the simplified press represented in the
Holding & Stamping window. This list is used to select the part or process which is
currently defined. When an item is selected in the list, its representation in the window
is displayed by a bold white line. The selection can also be performed by clicking on the
object in the window (this action updates the list also).
Until a part has been completely defined by the user, i.e. all its parameters entered, its
representation in the window is done by a dotted line, otherwise by a continuous line.
The Objects and eventually the Process panels change their form according to the
active selection.
Objects
The Objects panel changes its form according to the active selection. A window and
three function buttons are used to define the meshed parts (objects) of the model which
are associated with the current selection:
- : When active the objects can be picked directly in the 3D view.

- Add: This button brings up the Add objects dialog that is used to select one or
several part of the model. The List all objects toggle displays in the window all the
model objects, even if they are not of the selected type.
- Delete: Select one or several objects in the list and press this button or the keyboard
delete button to remove them from the selection.
Note:
· When the process is selected the Objects panel is grayed-out.
PROCESS
Die Definition
When the Die is selected in the Groups panel the following
parameter must be entered:
- Full die: Specifies to the program that the geometry
used represents the whole die including the binder.
- Die bottom: Specifies to the program that the geometry
used, represents only the die bottom. In this case, the
program will add the Die bottom and binder area to
obtain the full die.
- Friction coefficient: This drop-down list is used to select
the friction coefficient for the die part. The five
following items are available for each part.
· NO: No coefficient is defined.
· LOW: The friction coefficient is set to 0.05.
· MEDIUM: The friction coefficient is set to 0.15.
· HIGH: The friction coefficient is set to 0.25.
· USER DEFINED: The user enters the friction
coefficient.
Binder Definition
- When the Binder is selected in the Groups panel the
following parameter must be entered:
- Activate Binder Wrap: This option is strongly
recommended when the binder surface is curved. It
simulates gravity and binder closing as well, which
results in a curved sheet shape at the end of the holding
phase. Binder wrap is a good approximate solution,
which requires significantly less computer time than an
exact analysis involving gravity and holding
simulations.
- Friction coefficient: This drop-down list is used to select
the friction coefficient for binder part. The five
following items are available for each part.
- NO: No coefficient is defined.
- LOW: The friction coefficient is set to 0.05.
- MEDIUM: The friction coefficient is set to 0.15.
PROCESS
- HIGH: The friction coefficient is set to 0.25.

- USER DEFINED: The user enters the friction coefficient.
- Holding pressure: The holding force applied to the
binder mesh can either be entered as a global Force or a
unitary Pressure.
Blank Definition
- When the Blank is selected in the Groups panel the
following properties can be defined:
- Material: This frame groups the parameters necessary to
define a material for the blank sheet.
- Already defined: When this toggle is active, the material
has already been assigned to the blank. The three
buttons below are grayed-out.
- : This button is used to create a new material for

the blank. It brings up the Material Properties dialog.
- : This button brings up the Material Data Base

dialog to load a material data set.
- : This button is used to edit the material currently

associated with the blank. It brings up the Material
Properties dialog.
- A text field displays the name of the material currently
associated with the blank. This field is grayed-out
because it cannot be modified.
- Type: Displays the type of the material currently
associated with the blank (Standard steel,
Aluminium…). This field is grayed-out because it can
only be modified in the Material Properties dialog.
- Law: Displays the behavior law of the material
currently associated with the blank. This field is grayed-
out because it can only be modified the Material
Properties dialog.
- Rolling direction: It can be defined in a local frame.
- Note:
This direction is indicated for an orthotropic material
only.
PROCESS
- Thickness: Defines the thickness of the blank.

- Refinement: This option may be applied to locally
refine an initially coarse sheet mesh at elements
contacting sharp radii in the tool surfaces.
- Levels already defined: If the adaptive meshing has
been already defined for an area of the model in the
object attributes, this toggle must be activated.
- Max. level: Defines the highest refinement level which
can be reached during the simulation.
- Autopositionning: This option may be used to
automatically position shell surfaces onto the die
surface.
Drawbead Definition
- This option is accessible if Use drawbead toggle has
been check marked in the Process panel. When the
Drawbead is selected in the Groups panel the following
parameters can be defined:
- Restraining force: Force which controls the blank flow
(expressed per unit length).
- : This button brings up the Drawbead Calculation

dialog, which is used to compute restraining and
opening forces from drawbead analytical models.
- : This button brings up the Drawbead Calculation

dialog, which is used to compute a drawbead
geometrical parameter (radius, depth, gap...) from a
given restraining force.
PROCESS
Symmetry Plane Definition

This option is accessible if Use symmetry plane toggle has been check marked in the
Process panel. Defines the object which represents the symmetry plane in the Object
panel. A plane object must have been defined previously.
Process
- In this panel the user defines the parameters of the
process.
- Use drawbeads: When this toggle is active the
drawbeads parameters are taken into account in the
forming phase.
- Use symmetry plane: When this toggle is active a
symmetry plane is taken into account in the forming
phase.
- Number of states for forming: Defines the number of
post-processing states for the forming stage. For each
state various results will be available (deformed shape,
thickness, thinning…). 1 state is always written for the
holding stage (if it exists).
- Direction: This area is used to specify the process
direction. It can be defined in a local frame.
- Binder wrap: A drop-down list provides three options to
control the binder wrap simulation (Standard, Severe,
User-Defined).
- Forming severity: A drop-down list provides three
options to control the implicit simulation (Standard,
Severe, User-Defined). For each option correspond
different parameter values.
- Severity: This button brings up the Forming Severity
dialog where the non-linear number of increments can
be controlled or edited.
- : This button brings up the Advanced Implict

Parameters dialog where the solver parameters can be
controlled or edited.
PROCESS
Function Buttons
- Ok: Causes the defined modeling entities to be created and the associated control
parameters to be set in the object attributes tree, and closes the dialog.
- Close: Records the parameters entered and closes the dialog without performing
any actions.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing any actions (except for the Curve
Plotter which works independently).
Note:
· A gravity behavior cannot be applied to the blank sheet with the QuikStamp
Macro Process. To do so, the user must create a gravity stage and add to the
blank sheet a Gravity attribute directly in the Attribute Tree. Therefore, the
gravity calculation must be performed before the holding and forming defintions
built by the QuikStamp Macro Process.
PROCESS
FORMING SEVERITY
The parameters defined in this dialog are used by the implicit solver to run a PAM-
QUIKSTAMP calculation.
The Forming severity dialog
Description
The values can only be modified by the user when the option "User-defined" has been
set in the QuikStamp Macro Process dialog.
- Number of increment in holding phase: Number of steps used by the non-linear
algorithm for the holding phase.
- Number of increment in forming phase: Number of steps used by the non-linear
algorithm for the forming phase.
- Added number of increments (for information only): These 5 increments are used
for convergence and if refinement is defined. The refinement will take effect in
within these 5 increments.
Functions Button
- Close: Closes the dialog and sets the solver parameters.
PROCESS
Data setup wizard (End-user macro)
DATA SETUP WIZARD (END-USER MACRO)
The Data setup Wizard dialog (see below) is called up by the button of the Data
Set-up dialog or by the Data setup Wizard option of the Process menu.
PROCESS
A macro-command is defined in a name.kxx file associated with the current project,

and the 'xx' entension stands for the type of macro. Therefore, if the project is saved, the
macro-command is also saved in the project. If no file is linked to the project, which is
usually the case when the user is working in a new project, the standard file selector is
opened to import this file.
The user also called the "end-user", is going to use a macro-command usually prepared
by a Supervisor. A macro-command is a set of pre-defined operations similar to a
scenario, which describe any stamping and forming process. The end-user will follow
this scenario by associating the mesh part, he has imported or prepared in the CAD,
module, with the logical process defined by the macro-command.
Stage Toolbar
The Stage toolbar displays as many stages as defined in the macro-command. Each
stage has its own representation in the Diagram depending on the type of components
involved: blank, die, actuators, guides, drawbeads… Therefore the Stage toolbar
displays as many buttons as there are stages. The Diagram display is synchronized both
with those buttons and the Group panel.
The button opens a dialog to rename or deactivate a stage from the current project
(but the stage still exists in the macro-command file).
When all the necessary data of a stage are defined, the stage mark becomes green
instead of red. It is not possible to apply the macro-command, if everything is not
fulfilled.
PROCESS
Group
- Group drop-down list: This list is used to select the component of the Diagram
which will be associated with an object (meshed part) currently defined into the
project. When an item of this list is assigned to an object, its representation in the
Diagram is displayed by a solid line with the same color as the meshed object,
otherwise by a dotted line.
The drop-down list is synchronized with the Diagram, i.e. when a component of the
Diagram is selected, its representation is highlighted in the Diagram. Note that the
component can be selected directly selected in the Diagram and updates the list
consequently.
Note:
The meshed part can also be selected by picking in the 3D view.
- : Opens a dialog to rename or deactivate a group. A macro may have some

groups that will not be useful to describe the process; in that case the user may have
the possibility to remove them.
- will be applied on: Lists the objects associated with the item selected in the Group
drop-down list.
- : Brings up the Add Objects dialog in which the user selects the object(s) he
wants to associate with the Diagram component.
PROCESS
- : This button is used to pick in the 3D view the object to associate with the
Diagram component.
- : Removes from the will be apply on list the selected Diagram component.
- : If the current group is a drawbead, and if it is already associated with an

object of the project, then the user can duplicate this drawbead group with a set of
independent parameters.
Blank
The blank is defined once for all the stage, but some of its properties can be modified to
try several simulation of the same process. This panel may appear with one or two tabs
depending if the blank is a single, tailored or double blank.
Two types of modification can be performed with each blank:
- Parameters window: To access to the edition of a parameter in the list double-click
on it. It will open a dialog where the value can be modified. This dialog may vary
depending on the type of parameter to modify:
· Thickness: To enter the blank thickness.
· Rolling direction: Three fields and three buttons can be used to define the rolling
direction of the material.
Note:
This direction is indicated for an orthotropic material only.
· Material: Edits the material currently associated with the blank. It brings up the
Material Properties dialog.
- Material buttons: To define or assign a material to the blank sheet.
· : This button is used to create a new material for the blank. It brings up
the Material Properties dialog. The material will be created in the current
Material Data Base.
· : This button brings up the Material Data Base dialog to load a material
data set.
· : This button is used to edit the material currently associated with the
blank. It brings up the Material Properties dialog.
PROCESS
Die, Punch… Parameters

This panel works similarly to the blank panel. It is updated each time the end-user
selects a new component of the press (Die, Punch…). The panel lists the parameters
implemented by the Supervisor for this component, therefore accessible to the end-user
for modification.
To access to the edition of a parameter in the list, double-click on it. It will open a
dialog where the value can be modified. This dialog may vary depending on the type of
parameter to modify: real or integer value, vector, 2D function.
Process Parameters
This panel works similarly to the blank panel but concerns only the process parameters.
Import Macro-Command
Pressing the button brings up the standard file selector to import a new name.mct
file. Note that until the project is saved, the previous macro-command file is still linked
to the project.
Pre-defined Macro-Commands
The drop down list shows the already defined macro-command files that can be used
with the project.
Function Buttons
- Ok: Causes the defined modeling entities to be created and the associated control
parameters to be set in the object attributes tree, and closes the editor.
- Close: Records the parameters entered and closes the editor without performing any
actions.
- Cancel: Closes the editor without performing any actions (except for the Curve
Plotter which works independently). All changes are lost.
PROCESS
TOOL BUILDER
The Tool Builder dialog (see figure below) is used to construct the punch, the
blankholder mesh(es) and the die from an initial mesh. Depending on the construction
mode, this initial mesh must be separated into several objects:
- Blankholder source(s).
- Punch source.
- Die source.
- Die fillet (optional).
The Tool Builder Dialog
PROCESS
Tool Builder
Macro
Two modes are available depending on the initial mesh:
- Build tools from die side: The initial mesh represents the tools on the die side.
Therefore the macro builds the punch and/or the blankholder(s) and/or the die from
this initial mesh.
- Build tools from punch side: The initial mesh represents the tools on the punch side.
Therefore the macro builds the punch and/or blankholder(s) and/or die from this
initial mesh.
The Customize button calls up the Advanced setup dialog which specifies the groups
that will be available in the Tool Builder.
The user selects the groups to use in the macro and can also specify whether one or
several blankholders must be created.
Groups
- Group drop-down list: This list is used to select the component of the Diagram
which will be associated with a source object (containing the initial mesh) currently
defined into the project. When an item of this list is assigned to an object, its
representation in the Diagram is displayed by a solid line with the same color as the
meshed object, otherwise by a dotted line.
The drop-down list is synchronized with the Diagram, i.e. when a component of the
Diagram is selected, its representation is highlighted in the Diagram. Note that the
component can be selected directly selected in the Diagram and updates the list
consequently.
Until a component has been assigned by the user, its representation in the window is
done by a dotted line, otherwise by a continuous line.
PROCESS
Tool Builder
- : Removes the group currently displayed from the drop-down list. A macro
may have some groups that will not be useful to describe the process; in that case
the user may have the possibility to remove them.
- Tool name: The mesh, which is built from the source object, can be put in a new
object or added to an existing object or replace the entities of an existing object (see
Delete existing entities in tools option below).
Note:
· However, it is advisable to give to a target object a different name (tool name)

from the source object because it will be possible to make several tests without
altering the source object.
- will be built from object(s): Lists the objects, already existing in the project, that can
be used as source mesh to create the new tool.
- Add: Brings up the Add Objects dialog in which the user selects the source
object(s).
- : This button is used to pick in the 3D view the source object.

- Delete: Removes from the will be built from object(s) list the selected item(s).
Parameters
- Direction from die to punch: Defines the direction from the die mesh to the punch
and mesh. A vector defines the direction either by using the help of a wizard or by
typing its components in the text fields.
- : This drop-down list defines whether the direction is defined in the Global or a
- Blank thickness: This value is required to define the transformation to create new
meshes.
- Contact type: Two type of contacts can be used depending on the quality of the
mesh to offset:
· NL Penalty is dedicated to good mesh, i.e. connected mesh with elements well
proportioned and not warped. It gives accurate results.
· Penalty is used for coarse or unconnected mesh. The results are less accurate but
the algorithm is robust. If there are walls or gaps in the mesh this option cannot
be used.
· Orient mesh: can be de-activated if the mesh is already oriented or if a bad
quality mesh needs a manual orientation.
- Gap: Depending on the contact chosen a gap between the punch and the die can be
necessary. For Non Linear Penalty contact a gap must be defined.
PROCESS
Tool Builder
· on die: This option is only available with the options NL Penalty and Build tools
from punch side, since there are two possibilities of creating the die and the
punch meshes:
CAD Blankholder CAD Blankholder
RCAD
Punch RCAD
Punch
RCAD – gap - RCAD -thickness
thickness thickness gap
gap + thickness
Die Die
Gap on the die side Gap on the punch side
- Blankholder wall height: This option allows the user to add a wall to the
blankholders. The user enters the walls height. Only one layer of shell elements is
created in the wall. Depending on the contact chosen a gap between a blankholder
wall can be necessary. For Non Linear Penalty contact a wall must be added to the
blankholder, which is not advisable with Penalty contact.
- Delete existing entities in tools: When a mesh is created, it can be added to an
existing object. In this case and if this option is activated, the new mesh replaces the
existing entities in the object. If the option is deactivated the new mesh is added to
the existing entities.
Function Buttons
- Ok: Causes the defined modeling entities to be created. This is the list of the main
actions carried out by the tool building macro-command (thBlank represents the
blank thickness value, d represents the direction from die to punch):
· Build tools from die side mode:
Punch:
Offset of the punch source mesh by generating new mesh:
distance = thBlank + gap, direction = d
Creation of the punch object which contains the entities
produced by the offset.
Each blankholder at punch side:
Offset of each blankholder source mesh by generating new
mesh: distance = thBlank, direction = d
Creation of walls on the entities generated by the offset if this
action has been requested: direction = d
Creation of a blankholder object which contains the entities
generated by the offset and the possible walls.
Each blankholder at die side:
PROCESS
Tool Builder
Duplication of new mesh from each blankholder source mesh

Creation of walls on the entities generated if this action has
been requested: direction -d
Creation of a blankholder object which contains the entities
generated and the possible walls.
Die:
Duplication of new mesh from the die source mesh
Creation of a die object which contains the entities generated
by the offset.
· Build tools from punch side mode:
Punch:
If the gap is applied to the punch, offset of the punch source
mesh by generating new mesh (distance = gap, direction = d),
else duplication of new mesh from the punch source mesh
Creation of the punch object which contains the entities
produced.
Each blankholder at punch side:
Duplication of new mesh from each blank holder source
object
been requested: direction = d
Creation of each blankholder object which contains the
entities generated and the possible walls.
Each blankholder at die side:
Offset of the each blank holder source mesh by generating
new mesh: distance = thBlank, direction = -d.
been requested: direction = -d
Creation of each blankholder object which contains the
entities produced by the offset and the possible walls.
Die:
Offset of the die source mesh by generating new mesh:
distance = thBlank + gap, direction = -d. The gap is added to
the offset distance only if the option "add gap to die" is
selected, else the distance = thBlank.
Creation of the die object which contains the entities
produced by the offset.
any actions.
PROCESS
Tool Builder
Notes:
· After execution, the tool builder macro keeps a record of its actions and stores
its launch parameters. Therefore:
The user will retrieve this macro's parameters each time the project
is loaded.
If the tools obtained are not satisfactory, the user can modify the
data and start again without having to delete the generated entities
and objects. At the launch the macro will display the list of objects it
has already constructed. Simply select the objects to delete (the
entities contained in these objects will also be deleted).
PROCESS
Tool Builder
ACCESSORY
The Accessory dialog (see figure below) is used to automatically create a guide, a
locator pin or a spring to guide or restrain the sheet movement during the process.
The Accessory dialog - Guide tab
Guide
This panel enables the user to generate a guide from two reference positions. The guide
is obtained by the creation of an element generated by extrusion of the segment defined
with the two positions in a chosen direction. Border elements can be added to this
element to improve its action. Guides are used in presses to restrain sheet motion (see
figure below).
PROCESS
Accessory
Guides used to restrain sheet motion during gravity
- : Defines the shape of the guide. For the first shape, only one
element will be generated by extrusion of the defined segment. For the second and
third shapes, this element will be completed with two others (at the left and the right
of it). These elements are useful to avoid the penetration of the blank nodes behind
the guide. The value of the angle with the main element is 45 degrees (they are
directed from the external side of the guide, against the center of the model), and
their width is the third of the distance between the two reference positions. This is
the default shape of the guide.
- Point 1, Point 2: For each point, the coordinates can be specified either by using the
help of the wizard or by typing its coordinates in the text fields.
Locator Pin
The Accessory dialog – Locator pin tab
PROCESS
Accessory
The Locator Pin option allows the user to create cylindrical surfaces composed of shell
elements. These surfaces are a convenient way of modeling locator pins used in presses
to restrain sheet motion (see figure below).
Locator pins used to restrain sheet motion during holding
It is usually advisable to generate cylinders using base points on the tools to which the
locator pins are physically attached. The chosen heights should be large enough to
ensure that the cylinders lie within the extended sheet surface during the entire
simulation run. If too short, a cylinder is defined, the sheet may ride over the cylinder
end and so not be properly located during forming.
Common Parameters
- Direction: A vector defines the direction of extrusion either by using the help of a
- : This drop-down list defines whether the extrusion is done in the Global or a
- Height: Defines the height of the extrusion. Only one layer of shell elements
(locator pin and guide) or bar elements (spring) is created.
- Generate in: To specify if the created elements are added to the object chosen in the
drop-down list. If a name is entered in the text field, and is not already attributed, a
new object is created with these elements. If no name is entered, the elements are
added to the object named 'Others'. If the user needs several guides, springs or
locator pins, he must press the Build button each time he wants to create one, and
chooses to add the new elements to the first created object by selecting it in the list.
PROCESS
Accessory
Function Buttons
- Preview: Causes the defined mesh points to be displayed in green in the 3D
graphical window. For locator pins the axes is displayed in blue and the radius in
green. It allows the user to modify the parameters if necessary until having a good
construction.
- Build: Causes the defined mesh to be created.
PROCESS
Accessory
INVERSE SOLVER PROJECT CREATION
In the setup module, clicking the button or selecting the menu Process / Blank
unfolding allows to generate an inverse project from an existing project.
In the design module, this functionality is accessible by the button of the Diemaker
toolbar or via the menu Diemaker / Part check.
The Inverse Solver project creation
Part geometry
The object(s) that will form the part object. Available in setup module, these meshes
will be copied and merged in the new project. The destination name is the part object's
name.
In the design module, the surfaces are used and the build special mesh option is
activated. This allows to build a structural mesh directly from the CAD surfaces.
Part object
The name of the source object that will be used by the solver to compute the inverse
project.
PROCESS
Inverse solver project creation
Material definition
In this section, the user must select the material in the material database.
Initial geometry
The user can select an object which determines the initial geometry for the blank in the
new project or checks the Create flat geometry button to create automatically a flat
surface as the projection surface.
Parameters
Process direction
The user can defines the process direction by setting a vector and a frame.
Function Buttons
- Create: Copy and merges the mesh of objects selected in part geometry list and
creates the new project.
PROCESS
Inverse solver project creation
SIMPLIFIED TUBE BENDING
The Simplified tube bending Dialog
3D curve for tube axis

This is a list of existing 3d curves. The user must select one to give the center line of the
tube.
New: Brings up the 3D curve management dialog.
: Picks a curve in the 3D view and the curve is selected in the list.
Parameters
- Tube radius: Sets the radius of the tube that will be create.
PROCESS
Simplified tube bending
- No. of elements in circ.: Sets the number of elements that will be create in the
circumference of the new tube.
- Element edge size: Sets the size of each elements of the new tube.
- Tube thickness: Sets the initial thickness of the new tube.
- Lankford coefficient: Sets the Lankford coefficient that is used to calculate the tube.
Generate in
This combo box allows the user to specify the object in which the result will be set. If a
name is entered in the text field, and is not already assigned, a new object is created
with the generated entities. If an object is selected in the list or if the user enters the
name of an existing object then the generated entities are added to this object.
Function buttons
- Apply: Creates the tube with the given parameters in the selected object, and
calculate the final thickness. The mesh of the tube is create as a hydroforming
simulation of a tube bending, using the 3D curve as centerline and a estimation of
the final thickness is made.
- Preview: Displays the new tube in the graphical window without creating it.
PROCESS
Simplified tube bending
NEW OBJECT
This dialog is used to create an object. An object can be created even if the entities
which composed the object are not yet selected or created. An object is only a concept
which becomes effective when its content and utilization have been defined. To get
more details on the notion of object, please refer to the Object Attributes Section.
The New Object dialog
- Name: Defines the name of the new object.

- Type: Selects the type of the object. To get more information, please refer to the
Object Type Section.
- OK: Creates the object with the name and type specified and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Cancels the creation and closes the dialog.
PROCESS
Delete Objects
DELETE OBJECTS
This dialog is used to delete one or several object(s).
The Delete Objects dialog
Description
- Type: This drop-down list acts as a filter to display in the List of objects below the
objects of a given type used in the project.
- List of objects: List containing the objects of a given type present in the active
project and which can be destroyed (as an example, in post-process, objects
obtained from a solver calculation cannot be destroyed).
- Also delete entities: When this toggle is checked, the entities contained in the
selected objects are destroyed too.
Function Buttons
- OK: The selected objects are deleted (removed from the list of objects) and the
dialog, closed.
- Cancel: Cancels the suppression and closes the dialog.
Note:
- If the Also delete entities toggle is not checked and if a destroyed object contains
entities which do not belong to any other object, these entities are transferred to an
object named "Others".
PROCESS
Delete Objects
OBJECT INFORMATION
This dialog allows the user to modify the name and color of an object.
The Object information dialog
Description
- Object: Selects the object for which the user want to have information.
- Name: Displays the current name of the object. The user can modify this name by
set another name and clicking on Apply button.
- Color: Enables to change the color of the selected object. The button brings
up the Color dialog.
- Content: Displays the number of explicit elements. The button brings up the
Entity information dialog.
Functions Buttons
- Apply: Applies the change of name and/or color to the object.
PROCESS
Objects Attributes
OBJECTS ATTRIBUTES
The program is based on the notions of object and stage.
Notion of Object
An object is a set of entities to which properties or characteristics - so-called attributes
- are assigned.
The notion of object enables different operations to be applied to a single object, i.e.
assignment of material properties, definition of kinematics, definition of a refinement
level.
When an attribute is assigned to an object of this type, the attribute is applied to the
entities that form the object (referred to as object's explicit entities), but also to all the
entities at a hierarchical level lower than that of the initial entities (referred to as object's
implicit entities).
Example: When the translations of an object which contains an element are locked,
these boundary conditions are automatically applied to the nodes of these elements.
Moreover, the notion of hierarchy of the entities included in an object is used by the
Solver during the refinement of the meshing. Thus, when an element contained in an
object is refined, the four elements created are placed in the object and they retrieve the
attributes of the object which were applied to the father element (material property, ...).
An object is a set of 3D curves, surfaces (CAD), elements, faces, edges or nodes. There
are hierarchies in the entities which form the objects. If the symbol > means
"hierarchically higher", then:
- volume > volume elements > edges > nodes
- surfaces > surface elements > faces > edges > nodes
- 3D curves > 2-node elements > nodes
Notion of Stage
A stage is the definition of a simple computation. Several followed stages (e.g. gravity,
holding, stamping and springback) can be set-up in the same pre-process.
To each object will be applied a set of attributes for each stage, the first is the state of
the object in the stage: active or inactive. If the object is active in a stage, its entities
will be active in the computation of the stage. Most of the attributes are valid only
within the stage where they were defined. However the attributes of the plane and
system objects do not depend on the stage of the project. It is the same for some
structure and global objects attributes:
- the general attribute of the structure objects (color, for example)
PROCESS
Objects Attributes
- the material attribute of the structure objects

- the general attribute of the global object (title and comment of the construction
project)
- the 'restart files' attribute of the global object
which are identical in all the stages.
Description of the Dialog
Filter mode
Contextual
action button
Attributes tree
window
The Object Attributes dialog
PROCESS
Objects Attributes
The Objects attributes dialog is divided in four areas:
Display List Mode

This panel allows the user to select how the attributes are listed inside the Attributes
tree window.
- The List by stage/object/attribute mode, which is the default, displays first the
stages, then the objects and finally the attributes of the objects.
- The List by object/stage/attribute mode lists the attributes assigned to one object or
all the objects.
- The List by stage/attribute/object lists for each attribute type the objects for which a
attribute of this type has been set.
Filter Mode
This panel contains three drop-down lists that allow the navigation through stages and
objects/attribute types. The drop-down lists are displayed in an order imposed by the
display mode (see above).
- By stages (Not available with PAM-QUIKSTAMP application).
- By objects.
- By attributes.
- The push buttons and located on the right of each list select the previous or
next item in the corresponding list.
For each list, the first list items are All … (stages, attributes, objects) and the name of
each item.
Contextual Action Buttons

Depending on the display mode chosen in the Display List Mode panel or the entity
selected in the Attributes Tree Window these buttons change to edit stages, objects or
attributes.
- Manage stages: To create, rename, move, copy or delete a stage. This button brings
up the Stages Management dialog.
- Activate objects: Adds objects to the selected stage. This button brings up the
Activate objects dialog (see below) in which the user can select the objects to add.
PROCESS
Objects Attributes
- Deactivate objects: Removes an object from the selected stage. A warning message
is display to indicate that all the attributes that have been set for this object will be
also removed.
- Add attributes: Adds an attribute to the selected object. This button brings up the
Add object attribute dialog (see below) in which the user can select the attribute to
add. A first list gives the available attributes for the selected object. The program
filters by type object the attributes that can be applied. In addition attributes already
assigned to the object are not displayed in the list.
A second list allows the user to select the stage(s) in which the object will have this
attribute and eventually if the object will have this attribute for the common phase
"All stages".
- Delete attributes: Removes all attributes from the selected object (within the current
stage only).
PROCESS
Objects Attributes
- Deactivate: Removes an object from the current stage. A warning message is

displayed to indicate that all the attributes that have been set for this object will be
also removed (within the current stage only).
- Edit: Depending on the attribute selected an 'attribute' dialog is opened.
- Clear: Removes the attribute from the selected object in the current stage.
- Copy: Copies an attribute in memory.
- Paste: Pastes the copied attribute to the object selected in the current stage if this
attribute is allowed for the destination object. If this attribute already exists for the
object in this stage, a warning message appears to ask user if he want to overwrite it.
The three tables below give what are the available attributes with respect to the type of
object for each type of macro-command.
PROCESS
Objects Attributes
Table (a): AutoStamp Macro Process

Object Type Surface Volume Surface Volume Draw- Spot- Guide Bar Plane Coord. Un- Global
Attributes↓ Blank Blank Tool Tool bead weld Syst. defined Object
All Stages:
Type of Object + + + + + + + + + + + -
Material + + - + - - - - - - + -
(Name, Thick, Roll dir.)
Thickness - - + - - - + - - - + -
Definition - - - - - - - - + + - -
(Plane or System)
Behavior - - - - - - - + - - + -
Spotweld definition - - - - - + - - - - + -
Global advanced - - - - - - - - - - - +
parameters
By Stage:
Cartesian Kinematics + + + + + - + + - - + -
Rotational Kinematics + - + + + - + + - - + -
Contact + + + + - - + - - - + -
Force + + + + - - + - - - + -
Pressure + - + + - - + - - - + -
Gravity + + - - - + - - - - + -
Fluid Cell + - - - - - - - - - + -
Aquadraw + - - - - - - - - - + -
Refinement + - - - - - - - - - + -
Drawbead Forces - - - - + - - - - - + -
Post Analyze + + + + + - + + - - + -
Rigid Body - - + - - - + - - - + -
Springback + + - - - - - - - - + -
Symmetry - - - - - - - - + - - -
Boundary conditions + + + + + + + + - - + -
on points
Transformation + + - - - - - - - - + -
Spotweld action - - - - - + - - - - + -
Mapping import - - - - - - - - - - + -
Stage Information - - - - - - - - - - - +
Control - - - - - - - - - - - +
CPU Control - - - - - - - - - - - +
Global Refinement - - - - - - - - - - - +
Trimming - - - - - - - - - - - +
Autopositioning - - - - - - - - - - - +
Picking - - - - - - - - - - - +
DMP Decomposition - - - - - - - - - - - +
Advanced Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - +
Mapping - - - - - - - - - - - +
User-defined - - - - - - - - - - - +
+ Available
- Not available
PROCESS
Objects Attributes
Table (b): QuikStamp Full Process

Object Type Surface Surface Draw- Guide Plane Un- Global
Attributes↓ Blank Tool bead defined Object
All Stages:
Type of Object + + + + + + -
Material (Name, + - - - - + -
Thick, Roll dir.)
Thickness - + - + - + -
Definition - - - - + - -
(Plane or
System)
Global advanced - - - - - - +
parameters
By Stage:
Cartesian + + + + - + -
Kinematics
Contact + + - + - + -
Force + + - + - + -
Pressure + + - + - + -
Gravity + - - - - + -
Refinement + - - - - + -
Drawbead - - + - - + -
Forces
Post Analyze + + + + - + -
Transformation + - - - - - -
Symmetry - - - - + - -
Mapping import + - - - - + -
Binder wrap + - - - - + -
Stage - - - - - - +
Information
Control - - - - - - +
Global - - - - - - +
Refinement
Trimming - - - - - - +
Autopositioning - - - - - - +
Picking - - - - - - +
Advanced - - - - - - +
Parameters
Mapping - - - - - - +
User-defined - - - - - - +
+ Available
- Not available
PROCESS
Objects Attributes
Table (c): QuikStamp Macro Process

Object Type Surface Surface Draw- Guide Plane Un- Global
Attributes↓ Blank Tool bead defined Object
All Stages:
Type of Object + + + + + + -
Material (Name, + - - - - + -
Thick, Roll dir.)
Thickness - + - + - + -
Definition - - - - + - -
(Plane or
System)
Global advanced - - - - - - +
parameters
By Stage:
Cartesian + + + + - + -
Kinematics
Contact + + - + - + -
Force + + - + - + -
Pressure + + - + - + -
Gravity + - - - - + -
Refinement + - - - - + -
Drawbead - - + - - + -
Forces
Symmetry - - - - + - -
Mapping import + - - - - + -
Stage - - - - - - +
Information
Control - - - - - - +
Global - - - - - - +
Refinement
Autopositioning - - - - - - +
Picking - - - - - - +
Advanced - - - - - - +
Parameters
Mapping - - - - - - +
User-defined - - - - - - +
+ Available
- Not available
PROCESS
Objects Attributes
Right-Click Menus
The functions listed above are also accessible through right-click menus when selecting
Stage, Object or Attribute entities in the Attributes Tree Window.
Remarks:
· All the attributes are not necessarily displayed in the Attributes Tree Window
(example: certain material data of the object are not included).
· The object entities do not need to be displayed in the 3D view.
· The definition of the attributes must take place in pre-process (set-up).
· The double-clicking on a value or an attribute open a dialog to edit the
attribute.
Attributes Tree Window

The Attributes Tree Window displays a short description of the attributes that have been
set. The contents of the tree depend on the type of solver assigned to the document.
To add an object to a stage, the user right-clicks on the stage or uses the Contextual
Action Buttons panel (see above).
To add an attribute to an object, the user right-clicks on the object or uses the
Contextual Action Buttons panel (see above).
To modify an attribute, the user right-clicks either on the attribute description (Lock,
Translation X Y…) or on the attribute label (Rigid Body, Kinematics…) or uses the
Contextual Action Buttons panel (see above). This action opens an Attribute dialog
where the user can define the attribute.
Attributes Check
The control of attributes is done either when pressing the Attributes check button or
automatically by the program if the options Write the input file is selected in the Start
dialog.
This function tests the compatibility of some of the attributes of a project. If some
incompatibilities are detected the following dialog appears and lists the possible
problems. If nothing has been detected this dialog just mentions it.
PROCESS
Objects Attributes
Kinematics checks
This button brings up the Kinematics checks dialog. This function allows the user to see
in the 3D view the kinematics of objects during several stages and so to check these.
PROCESS
Stage Management
STAGE MANAGEMENT
This dialog is called up by the Manage stage button of the Object Attributes dialog, and
is used to create, rename, move, copy or delete a stage.
The Stages management dialog
The user can select in a list the stage on which is applied one of the following
operations:
- : This button calls up the Create stage (see below). The user must enter a Name
for the new stage and then specify its Position with respect to the other stages of the
project (Before or After an existing stage).
- : Deletes a stage an all the attributes assigned to object in this stage.

- : This button calls up the Create stage (see above). The user must enter a new
Name for the selected stage. The other options are grayed out.
PROCESS
Stage Management
- : This button calls up the Copy stage (see below). The user must enter a Name
for the new stage and then specify its Position with respect to the other stages of the
project (Before or After the copying stage).
- : Moves the selected stage up or down in the list.

PROCESS
Kinematics checks
KINEMATICS CHECKS
The Kinematics checks dialog
- Stage: Allows to select the stage and display its parameters. Buttons allow
to switch to previous or next stage.
- Positionings & displacements: Lists the objects involved in autopositioning or
imposed displacement actions.
- Behaviours: Lists the behaviours. Each line corresponds to a kinematics, force,
gravity or pressure condition on an object. It mentions the object’s name, the type of
behaviour and the frame in which the condition shall be applied
- Add to animation: If the toggle is checked, the stage will be included in the
animation. If not checked the animation will skip the stage.
- Stroke: This value is used to simulate the velocity behaviour. The stroke must be
dialed by the user. If the toggle “Add to animation” is not checked, this text field is
grayed out.
PROCESS
Kinematics checks
- Steps count: This value is used to simulate the behaviours. For example, for a
velocity behaviour, the stroke will be divided by the number of steps. The steps
count added to the number of positionings and displacements gives the total
number of steps to simulate the stage.
Animation control
- : These buttons drive the animation, they respectively stop, pause and
start the kinematics check.
- Delay between steps: This value sets the time gap between 2 steps, it is useful to
slowdown the animation for complex data set-up.
- Loop: If this toggle is checked, animation will start again after the last step of the
last animated stage otherwise animation will be stopped automatically.
- Show annotations: If this toggle is checked, some annotations will mention the
current action (positioning or behaviour), the object involved and the number of the
current step.
- Show arrows: If this toggle is checked, some arrows will be displayed to illustrate
the current behaviours (force, velocity ...). They get the same color as the object.
Function Buttons
PROCESS
Type of Object
TYPE OF OBJECT
Objects are used to represents the different components of a real press during holding
and forming operations. The type of an object is a very convenient way to classify
meshes which must have the same attributes.
Surface Blank Object

The surface blank object represents a deformable mesh, composed of 3-node or 4-node
shell elements, on which specific attributes like adaptive meshing and material
attributes can be assigned.
Volume Blank Object

The volume blank object represents a deformable mesh, composed of 6-nodes or 8-
nodes solid elements, on which specific attributes like adaptive meshing and material
attributes can be assigned.
Surface Tool Object

The surface tool object is a non-deformable mesh, composed of 3-nodes or 4-nodes
shell elements, with a simplified behavior. It represents one of the tools used in a
mechanical press other than the blank.
Volume Tool Object

The volume tool object is a non-deformable mesh, composed of 6-nodes or 8-nodes
solid elements, with a simplified behavior. It represents one of the tools used in a
mechanical press other than the blank.
Drawbead Object
The drawbead object is composed of bar elements which follow the projection of an
arbitrary line onto an existing shell surface.
Bar Object
The bar object is composed of bars elements for which the behavior attribute have to be
defined.
PROCESS
Type of Object
Guide Object
The guide object is a specific surface tool for which are used to modelize guides on
contact with the external side of blank (these are useful for gravity and holding stages).
Spotweld Object
The spotweld object is composed of nodes which will defined the spotwelds on blanks.
Plane Object
This object is a plane in space. It can be used either to introduce conditions of
symmetry, as a distance sensor or as a basis for a geometrical construction (definition of
a plane 3D curve, projection of entities..).
Coordinate System Object

This object type makes it possible to define a local coordinate system to specify
velocities, forces or boundary conditions.
Undefined Object
This object is used for mesh parts which can be common to different types of object.
For example, nodes of tools and blank gathered in a single object to analyze histories. It
is also automatically assigned to curves. It can eventually be used for meshes which
have not yet been defined as a specific object.
Global Object
This is a unique object always present in the tree window of the Object Attributes
dialog. It corresponds to all the general parameters of the solver (they are its attributes)
which cannot be assigned to a tool or blank object or to a plane. As an example, the
control parameter which makes it possible to choose the frequencies at which the solver
writes the results in the files is an attribute of the global object.
Note:
· This object cannot contain any plane, coordinate system or entity.
PROCESS
Material Definition
MATERIAL DEFINITION
This attribute is usually associated with the blank and its modification will be available
for all the stages of a process.
The Material definition dialog
Description
- : This button is used to create a new material for the blank. It brings up the
Material Properties dialog.
- : This button brings up the Material Data Base dialog to load a material data
set.
- Name: A text field displays the name of the material currently associated with the
object. This field is grayed-out because it can only be modified in the Material
Properties dialog.
PROCESS
Material Definition
· : This button is used to edit the material currently associated with the
object. It brings up the Material Properties dialog.
- Type: Displays the type of the material currently associated with the blank
(Standard steel, Aluminium…). This field is grayed-out because it can only be
modified in the Material Properties dialog.
- Law: Displays the behavior law of the material currently associated with the object.
This field is grayed-out because it can only be modified in the Material Properties
dialog.
- Rolling direction: A vector defines the rolling direction either by using the help of a
Note:
This direction is indicated for an orthotropic material only.
- : This drop-down list defines whether the rolling direction is defined in the
Global or a user-defined system of axes.
- Thickness: Defines the thickness of the blank.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the chosen parameters for the material.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing any changes in the material
associated with the object (except for the Curve Plotter which works independently).
PROCESS
Thickness
THICKNESS
This dialog allows the user to enter the thickness for Surface tool and Undefined objects.
This value introduces an offset of the surface mesh for the computation and is available
for a non linear penalty contact utilization only.
The Thickness dialog
Description
- Thickness: The thickness given here will be added to the elements of the object for
all the stages if the contact type is NL Penalty.
- OK: Validates the thickness for the object and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without any changes.
PROCESS
Thickness
BEHAVIOR
This dialog enables the user to define the parameters for the behavior of a rigid bar.
Rigid bar are used to model links between mandrel balls in a tube forming process.
The Behavior dialog
- Traction curve: This drop down list proposes the pre-process functions defined in
the project. The traction curve must have at maximum 8 points. This curve
represents the force applied on the rigid bar depending of elongation. The
button opens the 2D curve plotter to define or display this curve.
- Mass: The user can define the mass value of the rigid bar or have help by using
which opens the Mass information dialog. (The mass allows that the bar not
imposes the time step)
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the selected parameters for the behavior and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without assigning any parameters to the behavior.
PROCESS
Behavior
Mass Information
This dialog enables the user to compute the mass of rigid bar depending on all attributes
already defines in all the stages.
The Mass information dialog
- This wizard compute the mass of the rigid bar in order that the rigid bar will not
imposed the time step during computation.
Function Buttons
- OK: Report the value in the Behavior dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without reporting the value in Behavior dialog.
PROCESS
Behavior
POSITION OF THE PLANE

This dialog is called up whenever a plane or a plane attribute (for an object) has to be
defined. It can be used either to introduce conditions of symmetry, as a distance sensor
or as a basis for a geometrical construction (definition of a plane 3D curve, projection of
entities...).
Position of the plane dialog
Definition Mode
This drop-down list is used to select how the plane is defined. The layout of the dialog
changes accordingly as described below.
Three Points
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJGJJ JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJGJJ
The plane is defined by two vectors Center,Position 1 and Center,Position 2 .
- Center, Position 1, Position 2: Defines the position either by using the help of the
wizard or by typing its coordinates in the text fields. For each point the definition is
identical.
Center and Normal

The plane is defined by a point in the space (Center) and a Normal vector.
- Center: Defines the center either by using the help of the wizard or by typing its
coordinates in the text fields.
PROCESS
Position of the Plane
- Normal: The plane normal is defined by a vector either by using the help of the
Center and Main Plane

The plane is defined by a point in the space (Center) and a plane parallel to one of the
three main planes (XY, XZ, YZ).
- Center: Defines the center either by using the help of the wizard or by typing its
- XY, XZ, YZ: Selection of the plane to which the new plane will be parallel.
Two Points and Vector

JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJGJJ
The plane is defined by two points Position 1,Position 2 defining a first vector and a
second Vector.
- Position 1, Position 2: Defines the position either by using the help of the wizard or
by typing its coordinates in the text fields. For each point the definition is identical.
- Vector: The vector is defined either by using the help of the wizard or by typing its
components in the text fields.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the plane creation or modifications.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing any plane creation.
PROCESS
Position of the Plane
COORDINATE SYSTEM
This dialog is called up whenever a coordinate system or a coordinate system attribute
(for an object) has to be defined. Coordinates are normally defined with respect to the
global reference frame. However a different reference frame can be defined using this
dialog.
Position of the Frame definition dialog
Definition Mode
This drop-down list is used to select how the coordinate system is defined. For each of
these options you must define the origin of the system (this origin is only used for the
representation of the coordinate system in the 3D views and for the selection in the
object picking mode). The system obtained is ortho-designated.
The layout of the dialog changes accordingly as described below.
Definition by 3 Positions
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJGJJ JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJGJJ
The coordinate system is defined by two vectors Origin,Position 1 and Origin,Position 2 .
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJGJJ
The Origin defines the origin of the coordinate system, Origin,Position 1 is the local X-
axis and Origin,Position1,Position2 gives the plane in which the local X-axis is defined
(thus the third Z-axis being normal to the plane defined by the 3 points).
- Origin, Position 1, Position 2: Defines the position either by using the help of the
wizard or by typing its coordinates in the text fields. For each position the definition
is identical.
PROCESS
Coordinate System
Definition by Origin and Vector

The coordinate system is defined by a point in the space (Origin) and a Vector which
defines the local Z-axis.
- Origin: Defines the origin either by using the help of the wizard or by typing its
- Vector: Definition of the local Z-axis of the coordinate system. The vector is
defined either by using the help of the wizard or by typing its components in the text
fields.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the coordinate system creation.
- Import: Opens the standard File Selector to load a coordinate system from an IGES
(*.igs) or VDA (*.vda) file
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing any coordinate system creation.
PROCESS
Coordinate System
SPOTWELD DEFINITION
This dialog enables the user to define the parameters of a spotweld.
The Spotweld definition dialog
Geometry
- Count of layers: Number of layers of blank elements to be welded by this spotweld
- Detection radius: Radius search for projection of node onto layers facets. If not
specified, the default value is 5 times the average thickness.
- Limitation of stress concentration:
· Count of extra spotwelds: Number N of multi spot weld generated (3≤N≤8)

· Radius: Radius for multi spot weld generation. Solver will use this value for
positioning the extra spotwelds.
· Max. normal angle variation: Max angle between connected facet having
projection of the same multi spotweld (default=5°); this is not necessary if
geometry has not a small curvature
PROCESS
Spotweld definition
Behavior
- Tension/compression stiffness: Defines the stiffness of the spotweld. Default value
is 0, which corresponds to infinite stiffness.
- Shear stiffness: Defines the shear stiffness of the spotweld. Default value is 0,
which corresponds to infinite stiffness.
- Penalty scale factor: Used inside the spotweld resolution. The default value is 0.1.
- Do not lock rotation: similar to a rivet condition. Blank layers can rotate without
constraints.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the selected parameters for the spotweld definition and closes the
dialog.
PROCESS
Spotweld definition
GLOBAL ADVANCED PARAMETERS

This dialog enables the user to define the global advanced parameters for tools material.
This data is useful only if all blank materials have been defined using user attributes,
and not standard material attributes.
The values of these tools material parameters should be of the same order as the
material data of the blank. They are useful for the determination of the contact stiffness.
The Global advanced parameters dialog
- E : Young modulus
- ν : Poisson's coefficient
- ρ : Specific density
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the selected parameters for the behavior and closes the dialog.
PROCESS
Contact
CONTACT
The contact is defined simultaneously per pair of objects, by declaring that one of the
objects is impenetrable by the other. The contact then permanently prohibits the nodes
of the second object from penetrating inside the volume of the elements of the first
object.
The contact dialog
Description
- Impenetrable by: This window lists the objects with which the initial object enters
in contact and by which the initial object is impenetrable.
- : This button allows the user to add an object by which the initial object will be
impenetrable and with which the initial object enters in contact. This button opens
the Contact definition dialog.
- : Allows the user to delete an object from the list. The user must first select the
object(s) from the list by clicking on it or them.
- : This button opens the Contact definition dialog to display or modify the contact
parameters for the selected contact in list. The parameters can also be displayed by
double-clicking on the item in list.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the selected contact objects and its attributed attributes.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without editing any of the contact types.
PROCESS
Contact
CONTACT DEFINITION
This dialog is used to define parameters which are common whatever the type of
contact used.
The Contact definition dialog
Description
- Impenetrable by: The user may choose from this drop-down list, the object (slave)
by which the initial object (master) will be impenetrable and with which the initial
object will be in contact.
- Scale factor: Scale factor for sliding interface penalty. The default setting 0.03 is
usually satisfactory. With a very coarse sheet mesh, higher values may be required
to eliminate large penetrations. However, values larger than 0.3 may lead to
integration instabilities and should be avoided.
- Friction coefficient: Friction coefficient of the contact.
- Activation: Activation and deactivation time for this sliding interface. By default the
contact is always active during the simulation (start at beginning and stop at end). It
brings up the Sensor definition dialog.
- Advanced parameters: Pressing this button brings up the Advanced contact
parameters dialogs in which some parameters specific to the type of contact used
may be adjusted.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the above parameters.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without editing any contact.
PROCESS
Contact Advanced Parameters
CONTACT ADVANCED PARAMETERS

This dialog is used to change the contact type assigned to an object or modify some of
the parameters of the contact.
The advanced contact parameters dialog
- Contact type: The user can impose the type of contact otherwise the contact is
automatically chosen by the software (see table below). The type can be:
· Automatic (default): The software chooses the contact type depending on the
kinematics and/or the attributes. Warning: In this case the contact and the
attributes must be defined on the same object.
· Penalty: The penalty algorithm tolerates small penetrations during the
simulation. This contact is very robust and accepts non-connected mesh, but it is
less accurate than the non linear penalty algorithm.
· NL Penalty: The non linear penalty contact permanently prohibits the nodes of
the slave object (blank) from penetrating inside the volume of the elements of
the master object (tool). This contact is accurate but must only be used with
connected mesh.
· Lagrangian: This contact is used for aquadraw forming.
· Implicit: For an implicit computation (gravity or springback), the contact type is
always implicit.
PROCESS
Table (a): Contact type used by the solver

with respect to the kinematics and/or attributes applied to the object
Kinematics and attributes Automatic results

Tx and Ty and Tz locked or imposed N.L. Penalty,
Rx and Ry and Rz locked Penalty
Tx and Ty and Tz locked or imposed
Rx and Ry and Rz locked Lagrangian
Fluid Cell or Aquadraw on Blank
Tx or Ty or Tz free or initial velocity N.L. Penalty,
Tx or Ty or Tz free or initial velocity
Fluid Cell or Aquadraw on Blank
Tx and Ty and Tz free or initial velocity
N.L. Penalty
Rx and Ry and Rz free or initial velocity
Rotational kinematics N.L. Penalty
Note:
· For advanced user the table below gives the correspondence between the
parameters used in the interface and those displayed by the solver in the output
messages.
In Interface In solver messages
N.L. Penalty contact advanced
Penalty 15
Lagrangian 16
Implicit 17 (and QUIKSTAMP or
QUIKSTAMP Full Process gravity)
QUIKSTAMP 19 (no gravity)
(QUIKSTAMP Full
Process)
Penalty, Lagrangian and Implicit Contact

- Contact thickness: The contact thickness indicates the distance away from a contact
face where physical contact is established. This thickness may model, e.g., one half
of the physical thickness of the sheet shell elements, the mid-surface of which is
identified with a contact interface.
Note:
If the contact thickness is negative, contact thickness updating is activated and the
program will use the thickness of the area of sheet, tributary to each slave node, as
contact thickness. Initially the thickness is retrieved from the sheet material data.
PROCESS
This option is particularly useful to accurately represent contact conditions under

the blankholder where material thinning greatly affects material flow. An
appropriate gap between tool surfaces should be considered in this case.
- Sharp edges: Specifies that the direction of the normal contact force are
perpendicular to the slave rather than to the master surface. This choice is useful
when the sheet mesh is coarse compared to radii in the tools, avoiding tearing of the
blank caused by inaccurate contact force directions.
Penalty Contact
- Contact acceleration: The contact search accelerator, represents the number of time
steps between contact slave searches. The recommended default values range from
10 to 8.
- Damping: Contact damping default values are suitable for most applications. Higher
values can be tried, should vibration levels be unrealistically high.
· Mass proportional factor: Nodal damping is added to the normal degrees of
freedom of each master and each slave node.
· Stiffness proportional ratio: Nodal damping is added to the normal contact
penalty spring forces acting between the slave nodes and the master surface.
Lagrangian Contact
- Contact acceleration: Represents the number of time steps between contact slave
searches. (default = 10)
Implicit Contact
- Scale factor for Implicit contact: Scale factor for sliding interface penalty. The
default setting 0.03 is usually satisfactory. With a very coarse sheet mesh, higher
values may be required to eliminate large penetrations. However, values larger than
0.3 may lead to integration instabilities and should be avoided.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates these parameters which will be used depending on the final contact
type and closes the dialog
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without update the advanced parameters.
PROCESS
CARTESIAN KINEMATICS
It allows the user to impose boundary conditions, an initial velocity or a velocity on the
nodes of the object. If this object has a rigid body attribute, the kinematics will be
applied at the center of gravity of the object.
Important Note:
· The choice of the entities of the objects to which a kinematics attribute is applied
is very important if the adaptive meshing algorithm has been activated. As an
example: if the user specifies a boundary condition for an object which contains
the edges, then the nodes created on these edges will have the same boundary
condition. If an object to which the condition is applied contains nodes only, the
new nodes will not have this condition.
The Cartesian Kinematics dialog
PROCESS
Cartesian Kinematics
Description
Three panels enable the user to choose the axis on which the kinematics apply. For
each axis the description is identical.
Each condition applies to all of the nodes of the object.
- Translation: If active, the kinematics applies to the translation in the direction
chosen (X, Y, Z).
- Rotation: If active, the kinematics applies to the rotation in the direction chosen (X,
Y, Z).
- Lock: Enables the user to eliminate a degree of freedom in a given coordinate
system.
- Initial Velocity: A text field is associated with each Initial Velocity item. It makes it
possible to define the value of the initial velocity.
Notes:
· A node can have several definitions of initial velocities on the same axe (with
many objects it belongs) only if the values are equal.
· The rotation velocities are expressed in radians per unit of time.
- Imposed Velocity: Allows you to apply a velocity curve for each component in
translation and in rotation. The velocity can be a constant or a curve and is applied
to the nodes of the object.
The button allows the user to gain access to the 2D curve plotter to define a
velocity curve. A text field is associated with each toggle. It allows the user to
define the value of the velocity or a velocity curve as a function of time, using the
drop-down list. In the case where a velocity is defined by a curve, if you click in the
associated text field when the 2D curve plotter is open, the curve is displayed in the
latter.
- Lock & velocity: Allows you to eliminate a degree of freedom and to apply an
imposed velocity in the same stage according to the sensors defined in the Cartesian
kinematics sensors.
- : This drop-down list defines whether the kinematics definition is done in the
- All Lock: this button enables user to lock all translations and rotations at the same
time without checking the 6 degrees of freedom.
- Activation: Brings up the Cartesian kinematics sensors dialog (see below). The
button calls the Sensor definition dialog.
PROCESS
Cartesian Kinematics
Note:
· The sensors are used only for reading old PS2K projects.
- : Allows the user to define a multiplier factor which will be applied on the
ordinate of the curve. It brings up the Function multiplier dialog.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the chosen parameters for the kinematics of the object.
Notes:
· This tab is not available when a Rigid body attribute is set for this object in the
same stage.
· A node can have several definitions of imposed velocities on the same axis (with
many objects it belongs) only with simultaneous respect of the three following
conditions:
For each definition of imposed velocities for the node, the system
object must be in common
The degrees of freedom imposed by the velocities on each axis must
be the same
The velocity curves imposed on each axe must have the same values.
Incompatibilities
The solver verifies the coherence of the motions. Example: the user cannot define a
motion for a set of nodes which includes node N about an axis which passes through
node N.
PROCESS
Cartesian Kinematics (QUIKSTAMP)
CARTESIAN KINEMATICS (QUIKSTAMP)

This dialog enables the user to define the parameters for the Cartesian Kinematics
attribute of a QUIKSTAMP project.
- Lock translation, rotation: Enables the user to eliminate a degree of freedom in the
direction chosen (X, Y, Z).
- : This drop-down list defines whether the kinematics definition is done in the
Function buttons
- OK: Validates the selected parameters for the Cartesian Kinematics and closes the
dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without assigning any parameters to the Cartesian
Kinematics.
PROCESS
Cartesian Kinematics (QUIKSTAMP)
CARTESIAN KINEMATICS (QUIKSTAMP FULL

PROCESS)
This dialog enables the user to define the parameters for the Cartesian Kinematics
attribute of a QUIKSTAMP Full Process project.
- Lock translation, rotation: Enables the user to eliminate a degree of freedom in the
direction chosen (X, Y, Z).
- Displacement: Imposed a 3D displacement in the process direction defined in
Direction.
- OK: Validates the selected parameters for the Cartesian Kinematics and closes the
dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without assigning any parameters to the Cartesian
Kinematics.
PROCESS
rotational kinematics
ROTATIONAL KINEMATICS
Rotational kinematics attribute of an object corresponds to impose angular velocities for
an object. It is used to model the rotation of the 'bend die' object in a tube forming
process.
Center of Gravity
Tube forming Components
Note that the tube forming input data are not issued from a macro-command, therefore
the user must create all the necessary attributes and conditions for each component
(object) of the process (as illustrated in the figure above). For further information,
please refer to the User's Guide.
The Rotational kinematics dialog
PROCESS
rotational kinematics
Axis Definition
- Position: Defines the center of the rotation either by using the help of the wizard or
- Direction: The rotation axis is defined by a vector either by using the help of the
Velocity Definition
- Angular (rad/time): This velocity can be a value or a curve that can be define as pre-
process function in the curve plotter (the button allows the user to gain access
to the 2D curve plotter).
- : This drop-down list defines if the kinematics definition is done in the Global or
a user-defined system of axes.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the selected parameters for the rotational kinematics attribute and
closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without assigning any parameters to the rotational
Kinematics.
PROCESS
Forces
FORCES
This dialog allows the user to apply forces in a given coordinate system. These forces
are applied to the nodes of the object, whether they are explicitly in the object or they
originate from entities of the object. They can be constant or defined by pre-process
curves.
The Forces dialog
Description
- Applied at the center of gravity: The force defined by a function will be applied at
the center of gravity of the object (enable only if a Rigid body attribute is defined in
the same stage). The button allows the user to gain access to the 2D Curve
plotter to define the force by a function.
- Force components: Each toggle (X, Y, Z) is associated with a text field that allows
the user to define the value of the force or a force curve function of time accessible
using a drop-down list.
- : Allows the user a function multiplier and brings up the Function multiplier
dialog.
- Activation: Activation and deactivation time for these parameters. By default the
parameters are always active during the simulation (start at beginning and stop at
end). It brings up the Sensor definition dialog.
PROCESS
Forces
- : This drop-down list defines whether the force is applied in the Global or a
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the chosen parameters for the force applied to the object nodes.
Notes:
· If the object concerned is touched by the adaptive meshing, that is if its content
has to evolve due to the refinement, the force option imposed does not affect the
new nodes of the object.
· If a node is inside several objects with an imposed force attribute, the force
applied will be the vectorial sum of the forces applied to each of these objects.
PROCESS
Sensor definition
SENSOR DEFINITION
This dialog enables the user to define a sensor for a parameter.
The Sensor definition dialog
- The user can define a sensor with:

- defining the start at and stop at values of the progress variable (not necessarily the
time) from which the parameter will be applied.
- a pre-process function defined in the curve plotter (accessible by clicking on

button). The abscissa of this curve must have the progression for unit.
Function Buttons
- OK: Report the value in the sensor definition in the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without reporting the value in the dialog.
PROCESS
Sensor definition
FUNCTION MULTIPLIER
This dialog enables the user to define a multiplier factor for a function.
The Function multiplier dialog
- This factor will be applied on ordinate of the function.
Function Buttons
- OK: Report the value in the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without reporting the value in the dialog.
PROCESS
Force (QUIKSTAMP)
FORCE (QUIKSTAMP)
This dialog allows the user to apply a constant force to the nodes of an object.
The Forces dialog
Description
- Force: Force value applied in the process direction defined in the Control attribute
of the Global Object.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the chosen parameters for the force applied to the object nodes.
PROCESS
Force (QUIKSTAMP)
PRESSURE
This dialog is used to impose a field of pressure on an object. The field of pressure can
be either constant or defined by a curve.
The Pressure dialog
Description
- Pressure: Allows the user to set a pressure field by specifying a value or a curve
that is a function of time (type in its name or select it in the drop-down list). A green
arrow on the object visualizes the direction of the pressure in the 3D view.
- : This button allows the user to open the 2D Curve plotter to define the
pressure by a function.
- : Brings up the Function multiplier dialog.
- Activation: Activation and deactivation time for these parameters. By default the
parameters are always active during the simulation (start at beginning and stop at
end). It brings up the Sensor definition dialog.
PROCESS
Pressure
Function Buttons
- OK: Assigns the pressure attribute. The pressure field will be applied to the object
faces.
PROCESS
Pressure
PRESSURE (QUIKSTAMP AND QUIKSTAMP FULL

PROCESS)
This dialog is used to impose a constant field of pressure on an object in a
QUIKSTAMP and QUIKSTAMP Full process projects.
The Pressure dialog
- Pressure: Pressure value. An arrow on the object in the 3D view visualizes the
direction of the pressure. A negative value reverses the direction.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the selected parameter for the pressure attribute and closes the
dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without assigning any pressure attribute to the object.
PROCESS
Gravity
GRAVITY
This option allows the user to impose a gravity field onto the object. The gravity field is
applied to the nodes of the object whether they are explicitly in the object or
connectivities of the entities of the object.
The gravity dialog
Description
- Calculation: This drop-down list is used to specify the type of calculation:
· Explicit: Takes more CPU time to reach the solution but can be done in any
direction.
· Implicit: Takes less CPU time and uses more memory, but can only be
performed in one of the three main directions (X, Y or Z).
- Gravity value: This drop-down list makes it possible to define the intensity of the
gravity field by specifying a value or a curve, which is a function of time (type in its
name or choose it in the drop-down list).
The button allows the user to open the 2D Curve plotter to define the force by
a function.
- Direction: The direction of application of the gravity field is defined by a vector
either by using the help of the wizard or by typing its components in the text fields.
PROCESS
Gravity
Warning : for an implicit calculation only one of the three main directions of the
global coordinate system can be used (X, Y or Z).
- : This drop-down list defines whether the direction of the gravity field is defined
in the Global or a user-defined system of axes.
- Advanced parameters (for implicit calculation only): Brings up the Advanced
damping parameters dialog to control the damping parameters.
Function Buttons
- OK: Assigns the gravity attribute to the current object.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without assigning or editing any gravity attributes.
Notes:
· If a node is inside several objects with a gravity attribute, the applied force will
be the vectorial sum of the gravities imposed on each of these objects.
· Usually the direction is (0,0,-1) and the intensity is constant with a value of
9.81e-3 mm/ms2.
· When a Gravity attribute is assigned with an explicit computation, a Control
attribute is automatically defined with the following parameters:
Progression type: Time
Stop with: Damping convergence test
· When a Gravity attribute is assigned with an implicit computation, a Control
attribute is automatically defined with the following parameters:
Progression type: Increment
Stop with: Implicit convergence criteria
States total number = 1
Restart total number = 1
Max restart files = 1
PROCESS
Advanced Damping Parameters
ADVANCED DAMPING PARAMETERS

This dialog is used to specify the control parameters of the damping during a gravity or
springback calculation. Each time the kinetic energy reaches a maximum value, the
solver cancels all the velocities of element nodes of the object or makes them equal to
the velocity of the reference node. This damping makes it possible to stop rapidly the
oscillations of an oscillating structure.
The Advanced damping parameters dialog
- Convergence tolerance: This is the precision of the object node position at

convergence time: the convergence is considered as reached when, for a sufficient
length of time, the displacement of the nodes of the damped object is shorter than
this tolerance. By default (tolerance not specified by the user in the text zone), this
tolerance is 0.0001 times the largest dimension of the object. The tolerance is a
length.
- Activation: Activation and deactivation time for this parameter. By default the
parameter are always active during the simulation (start at beginning and stop at
end). It brings up the Sensor definition dialog..
- Close: Closes the dialog and takes into account the modifications.
PROCESS
Advanced Damping Parameters
FLUID CELL
Functions and Applications

The fluid cell entity models pressure build-up in an enclosed fluid volume. Pumps
which add or extract fluid from the cell may be considered as well as regulation valves
which limit the maximum pressure. The fluid is considered to be ideally compressible
and its mass is ignored.
In sheet forming applications, fluid cells may be used to model forming processes with
fluid media such as hydroforming and flexforming, illustrated in figure below.
Note that the fluid cell input data are not issued from a macro-command, therefore the
user must create all the necessary attributes and conditions for each component (object)
of the process. For further information, please refer to the User's Guide.
HYDROFORMING PROCESS
F1
Pressure build up
in enclosed fluid Die
Piston
F2 F3
Piston Tube Piston
FLEXFORMING PROCESS
Pressure build up F Press housing
caused by pump
Pump
Rubber
membrane
Die
Sheet
Schematic representation of the hydroforming and flexforming processes
PROCESS
Fluid cell
Dialog Box
This dialog enables the user to define the parameters for the fluid cell.
The Fluid cell dialog
Curve Selection
The button allows the user to gain access to the 2D curve plotter which is used to
specify time varying pressure limits and flow rates into the cell.
PROCESS
Fluid cell
Fluid Bulk Modulus

The Bulk modulus of fluid K is used to calculate the cell pressure p using the formula:
p = K (V F − VC ) / VF ,
where VC is the volume of the fluid cell and VF is the volume of the fluid contained in
the cell when uncompressed.
Normally the physical bulk modulus of the fluid should be specified, although in special
applications such as superplastic forming with strain rate control, an artificial K value
may be used. Very large values of K may lead to integration stabilities, particularly if
the fluid cell volume is small. However, in normal applications with water or oil
emulsions these problems seldom occur. If encountered they can be cured by reducing
the time step factor.
Volume Definition
Ideally, the fluid cell should be defined as a closed volume with shell elements and the
orientation of the elements should be such as to have their normal pointing inwards.
- Axis for volume definition: The direction of this axis is defined by a vector either by
using the help of the wizard or by typing its components in the text fields.
Warning, only one of the three main directions can be used (X-axis, Y-axis or Z-
axis).
The volume of the fluid cell is calculated by summing up the contributions of
rectangular prisms drawn on each boundary segment with sides parallel to a
specified integration direction, as illustrated in figure below.
Segment j
Integration
Direction
Z
Shell mesh defining

boundary of fluid cell
VCELL = ∑ V j
e
j
an
Pl
O
Z=
Prism of volume Vj
Integration formula for calculating the cell volume
PROCESS
Fluid cell
Note
· Surface elements whose normals are perpendicular to the integration axis do

not contribute to the volume sum and can be omitted. When symmetry has been
exploited in the model, it is often convenient to leave out surface boundaries on
symmetry planes, while choosing an integration axis which lies within them.
- : This drop-down list defines whether the axis definition is done in the Global or
- Initial volume: It can be defined by the user to avoid model positioning problem.
Optional
- Volume flow rate curve: Select in the drop-down list the curve that defines the
volume flow rate.
- Maximum fluid pressure curve: Represents the maximum pressure the system can
develop within the fluid cell.
- Maximum velocity curve: The maximum sheet velocity should be limited to 10 m/s
to avoid unwanted inertia effects. Note that the average sheet velocity Vs is related to
the flow rate F by the approximate formula Vs ≈ F / Am , where Am is the area of
moving boundaries in the cell.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the selected parameters for the aquadraw process and closes the
dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without assigning any parameters to the aquadraw.
PROCESS
Fluid cell
AQUADRAW
This option creates an aquadraw attribute for the blank which can be used to model the
forming process illustrated in figure below.
Note that the aquadraw process input data are not issued from a macro-command,
therefore the user must create all the necessary attributes and conditions for each
component (object) of the process. For further information, please refer to the User's
Guide.
Fluid may escape

F between sheet and binder
(stable aquadraw regime)
Sheet Punch
Holder
Binder Die Cavity Binder
Pump and/or Pressure

Regulation Valve
Schematic illustration of the aquadrawing process
The process makes use of conventional deep drawing tools, but the die is filled with a
relatively incompressible fluid such as water. Additional pumps and valves may be
included to prebulge the sheet and/or to control the maximum fluid pressure. During
forming the pressure in the die cavity rises as the fluid is compressed until the resultant
force acting on the sheet is sufficient to lift the blankholder. At this point fluid begins to
escape via the gap between the binder and sheet, relieving the pressure and reducing
friction on the die side. A continuous controlled lift of the blankholder during forming
is generally desirable and is known as a stable aquadraw regime.
PROCESS
Aquadraw
Dialog Box
This dialog enables the user to define the parameters for the aquadraw attribute.
The Aquadraw dialog
Curve Selection
The button allows the user to gain access to the 2D curve plotter which is used to
specify time varying pressure limits and flow rates into the cell.
PROCESS
Aquadraw
Fluid Bulk Modulus

The Bulk modulus of fluid K is used to calculate the cell pressure p using the formula:
p = K (V F − VC ) / VF ,
where VC is the volume of the fluid cell and VF is the volume of the fluid contained in
the cell when uncompressed.
Normally the physical bulk modulus of the fluid should be specified, although in special
applications such as superplastic forming with strain rate control, an artificial K value
may be used. Very large values of K may lead to integration stabilities, particularly if
the fluid cell volume is small. However, in normal applications with water or oil
emulsions these problems seldom occur. If encountered they can be cured by reducing
the time step factor.
Volume Definition
Ideally, the fluid cell should be defined as a closed volume with shell elements and the
orientation of the elements should be such as to have their normal pointing inwards.
- Volume definition with: The volume is defined between the blank an object selected
in this drop-down list, usually the die.
- Axis for volume definition: The direction of this axis is defined by a vector either by
using the help of the wizard or by typing its components in the text fields.
Warning, only one of the three main directions can be used (X-axis, Y-axis or Z-
axis).
The volume of the fluid cell is calculated by summing up the contributions of
rectangular prisms drawn on each boundary segment with sides parallel to a
specified integration direction, as illustrated in figure below.
Segment j
Integration
Direction
Z
Shell mesh defining

boundary of fluid cell
VCELL = ∑ V j
e
j
an
Pl
O
Z=
Prism of volume Vj
Integration formula for calculating the cell volume
PROCESS
Aquadraw
Note
· Surface elements whose normals are perpendicular to the integration axis do

not contribute to the volume sum and can be omitted. When symmetry has been
exploited in the model, it is often convenient to leave out surface boundaries on
symmetry planes, while choosing an integration axis which lies within them.
- : This drop-down list defines whether the axis definition is done in the Global or
- Initial volume: It can be defined by the user to avoid model positioning problem.
Optional
- Volume flow rate curve: Select in the drop-down list the curve that defines the
volume flow rate.
- Maximum fluid pressure curve: Represents the maximum pressure the system can
develop within the fluid cell.
- Maximum velocity curve: The maximum sheet velocity should be limited to 10 m/s
to avoid unwanted inertia effects. Note that the average sheet velocity Vs is related to
the flow rate F by the approximate formula Vs ≈ F / Am , where Am is the area of
moving boundaries in the cell.
Binder
This panel is used to specify the binder object. When the solver detects that the contact
force between blank and binder is zero, a stable aquadrawing regime is assumed and the
die pressure is subsequently held constant.
- Binder identification: Select in this drop-down list the object which represents the
binder.
- Fluid pressure scale factor:
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the selected parameters for the aquadraw process and closes the
dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without assigning any parameters to the aquadraw.
PROCESS
Aquadraw
REFINEMENT
This dialog makes it possible to assign the adaptive attribute to the shells of the object
and to choose the refinement levels of these shells.
The adaptive meshing functions on 3- and 4-node shells.
The Refinement dialog
Description
- Uniform level: Define the initial refinement level of the object. It is similar to forcing
the refinement. At the beginning of the calculation all the shells of the object will
have at least this refinement level, but it can be higher if these elements are picked
and already higher or if they are assigned by the initial refinement of another object
(in order to preserve the coherence of the mesh).
- Set at: For information only. This value is defined in the Global Refinement
attribute.
- Maximal level: During the calculation, the level of a shell element cannot exceed this
level.
- Set at: For information only. This value is defined in the Global Refinement
attribute.
- Local initial level: this option is actually used in order to refine the mesh at the
beginning of a calculation in a particular area (near locking drawbeads for example).
PROCESS
Refinement
All the elements closed to the target object (less then distance) are automatically
refined to the local initial level.
- : This button allows the user to add a region.This button opens the Link
definition dialog (see below).
- : Allows the user to delete a region from the list. The user must first select the
region(s) from the list by clicking on it or them.
- : This button opens the Link definition dialog to display or modify the region
parameters for the selected region in list. The parameters can also be displayed by
double-clicking on the region in list.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the chosen parameters for the refinement of the object.
Incompatibilities
An object that possesses this attribute can only contain shell elements susceptible to be
refined (isotropic or orthotropic).
If the user assigns a nil initial level an error message will be displayed. A maximum
level nil or lower than the initial level displays an error message.
An element cannot belong to two objects with a Refinement attributes. Hence, the
intersection of the objects with this attribute must be empty.
The solver activates the adaptive meshing algorithm whenever an object has an adaptive
meshing attribute. In such a case, the solver checks that the maximum angle of
refinement is well defined, and that all the isotropic and orthotropic shell elements have
a maximum level of refinement. If not, an error is triggered.
Notes:
· Levels are integer values.

· A non refined element has level 1.
PROCESS
Refinement
· A maximum level of 4 is similar to authorizing three times refining of the

elements.
· Two criteria can cause an element to be refined:
Angle variation between normals of adjacent elements (see defaults
in the Global Refinement attributes).
Proximity of tools with low curvature radius.
· Uniform level: The initial level of refinement allows the user to ignore the
splitting operations of elements in the interface while preserving the stresses.
This initial level is immediately visible in the first state written by the solver.
PROCESS
Drawbead forces
DRAWBEAD FORCES
This dialog allows the user to assign the "drawbead" material to the two-node elements
contained in the object. The drawbeads are used by the solver to apply a given
restraining force on the blank while exerting an opening force to the blankholder.
A "drawbead" element applies a force to the elements which pass through the cylinder
whose axis is the segment which links the two connectivities and whose radius is the
drawbead's action radius:
- A restraining force is applied to any shell element of the restrained objects. The
intensity of this force is L.Fr where L is the length of the intersection between the
drawbead and the shell and Fr is the restraining force per unit of length.
- An opening force is applied to the elements of the pushed objects. The intensity of
this force is L.Fo where Fo is the opening force per unit of length and L is the
length of the part of the drawbead which exerts a restraining force (therefore
intersecting with an element of restrained object), and which, moreover, intersects
with an element of pushed object.
Note:
· The forces are lineic (expressed in drawbead length unit).
The Drawbead forces dialog
PROCESS
Drawbead forces
Restraints
- List: The list displays the name of the restrained object and its associated
restraining and opening forces.
- : This button allows the user to define the restrained object and the restraining
and opening forces exerted on it. It opens the Restraints definition dialog.
- : Removes the object selected from the list of objects restrained.
- : This button opens the Restraints definition dialog to display or modify the
parameters for the selected restraining force in list.
Opening Force Applied on

- List: List of pushed back objects (typically the blankholder). The list displays the
name of the object plus the direction of the force exerted on it.
- : This button allows the user to define the pushed back object, and the direction
of the opening force exerted on it. It opens the Opening Force dialog.
- : Removes an object from the list.
- : This button opens the Opening Force dialog to display or modify the parameters
for the selected opening force in list.
Parameters
- Action radius: The radius used by the solver does not correspond to the real radius
of the drawbead. It allows the user to locate the field about the element that form
the drawbead where the element to be restrained and the elements to be pushed back
are identified.
- Options available only for AutoStamp project:
· Activate lockbead: No restraining force value is needed. The solver will
automatically apply a restraining force in order to stop the movement of the
element crossed by the drawbead.
· Activate edge line effect: When the blank border is closed to the drawbead
(distance less then width) the restraining force is decreased.
· Width : Represents half the drawbead width.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the chosen parameters for the drawbead object.
Note:
· A double-click on a list item opens the corresponding dialog.
PROCESS
Drawbead forces
Restraints Definition
This dialog is used to associate an opening and restraining forces with a drawbead
object and to select what object will be restrained by the drawbead object.
The Restraints definition dialog
Description
- Restrained object: This drop-down list displays the list of object available in the
project. The user must select the object which is restrained, typically the blank in a
stamping simulation. Only surface blank type object are listed.
- Restraining force: Force which controls the blank flow (expressed per unit length).
- Opening force: Force which tends to resist to the closing of the blankholder
(expressed per unit length).
- : This button brings up the Drawbead Calculation dialog, which is used to

compute a drawbead geometrical parameter (radius, depth, gap...) from a given
restraining force.
- : This button brings up the Drawbead Calculation dialog, which is used to

compute restraining and opening forces from drawbead analytical models.
- Thickness variation:
- Plastic strain increase:
PROCESS
Drawbead forces
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the chosen parameters for the kinematics of the object.
Drawbead Calculation
To avoid the meshing task of drawbeads and large CPU time due to a real simulation,
the program provides analytical drawbead models. From geometrical data, this dialog is
used to calculate the restraining and opening forces generated by a drawbead. The
calculation is based on the Stoughton's model2.
Remark: the forces are per unit length.
The dialog is divided into the two following panels.
Drawbeads Parameters
According to the analytical model chosen the panel changes its form as follows:
Step model Semi-circular model Rectangular model

- Step model:
· R1, R2: Drawbead radii.
· G: Gap between the drawbead walls.
· D: Depth.
- Semi-circular model:
· L2: Drawbead width.
· D: Depth.
2
Stoughton, T.B., 1988: Model of Drawbead Forces in Sheet Metal Forming, Proc. of 15th Biennal
IDDRG Cong. Dearborn, MI, May, 1988, pp
PROCESS
Drawbead forces
- Rectangular model:
· L1, L2: Drawbead widths.
· D: Depth.
Note:
· All the geometrical data must be entered.

- Friction: Whatever the model chosen, the friction coefficient between blank and
tools must also be defined.
Restrained Object
In this panel the properties of the blank are defined or recalled if the blank material has
already been defined.
- Name: This drop-down list allows the user to modify or define the object restrained.
- Estimate K and n: If there is no value for K and n and if the material has a hardening
curve, this button allows you to calculate K and n such that the curve obtained for a
Hollomon's law is as near as possible to the hardening curve.
- Thickness: Thickness of the object restrained
- E: Young's modulus of the object restrained
- Re: Yield stress of the object restrained
- K, n: Hollomon's law coefficients
- r: Average anisotropic coefficient of the object restrained (r = (r0 + 2.r45 + r90) / 4).
Note:
· If a material is associated with the object restrained and if that material has
properties used to calculate forces (thickness, E, r, Re, K, n), they are
automatically proposed in the text fields.
PROCESS
Drawbead forces
Function Buttons
- Ok: Validates the parameters entered and calculates the restraining and opening
forces. A dialog appears with the resulting restraining Fr and opening forces which
asks validation for these results.
- After validation the program returns either to the calling dialog, which can be the
Restraints Definition or Drawbead force or QuikStamp macro process dialog).
If the user cancels then the program returns to this dialog.
If no value is found or if the parameters do not make it possible to obtain a value
then an error message is displayed.
Forces Calculation
To avoid the meshing task of drawbeads and large CPU time due to a real simulation,
the program provides analytical drawbead models. From the restraining force and all
but one geometrical data, this dialog is used to calculate the opening force generated by
a drawbead and the last geometrical data. The calculation is based on the Stoughton's
model3.
Remark: the forces are per unit length.
The dialog is divided into the two following panels.
Drawbeads Parameters
According to the analytical model chosen the panel changes its form as follows:
3
Stoughton, T.B., 1988: Model of Drawbead Forces in Sheet Metal Forming, Proc. of 15th
Biennal IDDRG Cong. Dearborn, MI, May, 1988, pp
PROCESS
Drawbead forces
Step model Semi-circular model Rectangular model

Note:
For all models, the unknown parameter is selected in the Compute drop-down list while
all the other parameters must be defined.
- Step model:
· G: Gap between the drawbead walls.
· D: Depth.
- Semi-circular model:
· L2: Drawbead width.
· D: Depth.
- Rectangular model:
· L1, L2: Drawbead widths.
· D: Depth.
- Friction: Whatever the model chosen, the friction coefficient between blank and
tools must also be defined.
Restrained Object
In this panel the properties of the blank are defined or recalled if the blank material has
already been defined.
- Name: This drop-down list allows the user to modify or define the object restrained.
- Estimate K and n: If there is no value for K and n and if the material has a hardening
curve, this button allows you to calculate K and n such that the curve obtained for a
Hollomon's law is as near as possible to the hardening curve.
PROCESS
Drawbead forces
- Thickness: Thickness of the object restrained

- E: Young's modulus of the object restrained
- Re: Yield stress of the object restrained
- K, n: Hollomon's law coefficients
- r: Average anisotropic coefficient of the object restrained (r = (r0 + 2.r45 + r90) / 4).
Note:
· If a material is associated with the object restrained and if that material has
properties used to calculate forces (thickness, E, r, Re, K, n), they are
automatically proposed in the text fields.
Function Buttons
- Ok: Validates the parameters entered and calculates the unknown geometrical
parameter and the opening forces. A dialog appears, with the resulting opening force
and the corresponding unknown geometrical parameter, which asks validation for
these results.
After validation the program returns either to the calling dialog, which can be the
Restraints Definition or Drawbead force or QuikStamp macro process dialog).
If the user cancels then the program returns to this dialog.
If no value is found or if the parameters do not make it possible to obtain a value
then an error message is displayed.
For R1 calculation, two values can be proposed due to the lack of unity of the
solution (there will also be two possible values for the opening force).
PROCESS
Drawbead forces
Opening Force
This dialog is used to define the pushed back object, and the direction of the opening
force exerted on it
The Opening forces dialog
Description
- Applied on: Select in the drop-down list the object on which the opening force is
exerted (typically the blankholder).
- Along: The direction of the opening force is defined by a vector either by using the
help of the wizard or by typing its components in the text fields.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the opening force direction and the pushed back object selection.
PROCESS
Drawbead forces
POST ANALYZE
This dialog is used to activate the marks and to write the history of the entities.
Description
- Node marks: Any node that comes into contact with an element face of the current
object will take the color of that object.
In post-process, the visualization of the marks is made by isocolor. Only the
impenetrable elements placed in the object will be taken into account.
- Line marks: Not yet implemented.
- Node history: If it is enabled the nodes of the object will be in the history file.
- Element history: If it is enabled, the elements of the object will be in the history file.
The drawbeads cannot be in this history file. If the object contains such entities, an
error message will be generated by the solver.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the chosen parameters and closes the dialog.
Note:
· Avoid assigning the Element history or Node history attribute to objects that
contain many elements or nodes (typically the blank) since the file generated is
likely to occupy too much space on the disk.
PROCESS
Rigid Body
RIGID BODY
This dialog enables the user to define parameters for a rigid body.
The Deformable rigid body dialog
- Type: by default, the rigid body type is automatically set, depending on contact
types and kinematics definition. The user has the possibility to explicitly define the
type of rigid body, between “regular” (rigid body of type 0 in the solver), “user-
defined” (type 3) and “simplified” (type 4) types (see the table below for
explanation on the automatic choice).
- Mass
· factor: The default factor is 1. A mass proportional to that of the blank is
applied. It is possible to define a factor to modify this value.
· value: The value of mass.
- Deformation height factor: A value suitable for the conventional stamping problems
is calculated (the calculated value corresponds to a tenth of the largest dimension
along X, Y or Z of the object). It is possible to define a factor to modify this value.
It is used for simplified rigid body with NL penalty contact (see table below).
- Inertia: The center of gravity and moments of inertia along the axis (of the global
system) can be explicitly specified by the user.
PROCESS
Rigid Body
- Activation: Activation and deactivation time for The rigid body definition. By
default the parameters are always active during the simulation (start at beginning
and stop at end). It brings up the Sensor definition dialog.
Function buttons
- OK: Validates the selected type of rigid body with or without edition of its
parameters and closes the dialog. The deformable rigid body attribute is then added
to the object in the object attribute tree.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without adding any rigid body to the object.
Note:
· The table below helps the user to choose which parameters to define for a rigid
body with respect to the kinematics and attributes applied to the object. 'Rigid
body type number' is an information for advanced user.
Rigid Body
Parameters
Kinematics and attributes Contact type type used by Examples
used
the solver
Rigid Body
Tx and Ty and Tz locked or Tools in
N.L. Penalty, type 4
imposed mass classical
Penalty =
Rx and Ry and Rz locked process
simplified
Tx and Ty and Tz locked or Rigid Body
imposed type 4 Punch in
Lagrangian mass
Rx and Ry and Rz locked = Aquadraw
Fluid Cell or Aquadraw on Blank simplified
Mass and Rigid Body Blank
Tx or Ty or Tz free or initial N.L. Penalty height type 4 holder in
velocity deformation = classical
Rx and Ry and Rz locked
Penalty mass simplified process
Tx or Ty or Tz free or initial Rigid Body
velocity type 4 Die in
Penalty mass
Rx and Ry and Rz locked = Aquadraw
Fluid Cell or Aquadraw on Blank simplified
Tx and Ty and Tz free or initial Rigid Body
Balls for
velocity type 0
N.L. Penalty mass tube
Rx and Ry and Rz free or initial =
bending
velocity Regular
Rigid Body
Bend die for
type 3
Rotational kinematics N.L. Penalty mass tube
=
bending
User-defined
-
PROCESS
Springback
SPRINGBACK
This dialog specifies that a Springback attribute is assign to the object. Obviously the
object concerned is of Surface blank type only. A springback calculation must be
performed after the last stage of a process.
The Blank springback dialog
- Calculation: This drop-down list is used to specify the type of calculation that is
associated with the springback:
· Explicit: Takes more CPU time to reach the solution.
· Implicit: Takes less CPU time and uses more memory.
- Advanced parameters (for explicit calculation only): Brings up the Advanced
damping parameters dialog to control the damping parameters.
- OK: Assigns the springback attribute to the current object
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without assigning any springback attributes to the object.
Note:
· When an implicit Springback attribute is assigned, a Control attribute is

automatically defined with the following parameters:
Increment progression
Stop with: Implicit convergence criteria
States and Restart: Total number =1
Restart max files = 1
No history, no print.
PROCESS
Springback
SYMMETRY
This attribute can be assigned to a plane-type object.
The Plane Symmetry dialog
Description
- Symmetry: Allows the user to assign the attribute of symmetry plane. In the solver
and in certain transformations of the interface, this attribute is taken into account by
locking the translations in the direction normal to the plane and the rotation about
the two axes of the plane.
- Tolerance: Any node whose distance to the plane is shorter than the tolerance
belongs to the plane and will be submitted to the symmetry boundary conditions in
the solver and in some functions of the interface.
Function Buttons
- OK: Assigns the symmetry plane attribute.
PROCESS
Boundary conditions on points
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS ON POINTS
The Boundary conditions on points dialog
- : This button allows the user to add boundary condition on a point. This button
opens the Lock point definition dialog (see below).
- : Allows the user to delete a boundary conditions on a point from the list. The
user must first select the object(s) from the list by clicking on it or them.
- : This button opens the Lock point definition dialog (see above) to display or
modify the boundary conditions for the selected point. The parameters can also be
displayed by double-clicking on the contact in list.
PROCESS
Boundary conditions on points
- Visualize the positions: Check this option allows to visualize in the 3D view the
points and its boundary conditions.
- : This drop-down list defines whether the boundary conditions are applied in the
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates boundary conditions for points and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing anything.
PROCESS
Transformation
TRANSFORMATION
This option allows the user to impose a Transformation attribute for surface blank
object. This is an optimization of the blank position. The transformation operates on the
nodes of the object.
The Transformation dialog
Rotation
Rotations by an angle α around an arbitrary axis, defined by the direction of vector R,
and with respect to an origin of rotation defined by point Po, will cause
Xnew = Xold(Po) + A(α),
PROCESS
Transformation
where
A(α) = (Ao•R)R + (Ao−(Ao•R)R)cosα + (RxAo)sinα,
with Ao = Xold − Xold(Po).
- Activate: When this toggle is unchecked the panel is grayed out.
- Axis: The rotation axis is defined by a vector either by using the help of the wizard
- Angle: The angle is entered in degrees.
Translation
Translations with a value a in the direction of translation vector T have the effect
Xnew = Xold + T.
- Vector: The direction and magnitude of the translation are defined by a vector either
Scale
Scaling with distinct factors for the X-, Y- and Z-coordinates and with respect to an
origin point Ps will cause
Xnew = X(Ps) + (Xold − X(Ps)) * Scale X
Ynew = Y(Ps) + (Yold − Y(Ps)) * Scale Y
Znew = Z(Ps) + (Zold − Z(Ps)) * Scale Z.
- Scale X, Y, Z: Defines the 3 scale factors on X, Y and Z-axes.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the selected parameters for the transformation and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without assigning any parameters to the transformation.
PROCESS
Spotweld action
SPOTWELD ACTION
The Spotweld action dialog
Description
- : This button allows the user to add an action. This button opens the Link
definition dialog.
-
- : Allows the user to delete an action from the list. The user must first select the
action(s) from the list by clicking on it or them.
- : This button opens the Link definition dialog to display or modify the parameters
for the selected action in list. The parameters can also be displayed by double-
clicking on the item in list.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the spotweld actions.
PROCESS
Spotweld action
MAPPING IMPORT
This dialog enables the user to define the attributes of a surface blank object for recover
on it the residual properties of a part - with a different mesh - from a previous
simulation.
The Mapping dialog
- File name: Name of the ASCII file which will automatically be stored in the project
directory. The button opens the standard File selector to retrieve a file name.
The path is not taken into account.
- Part name: Name of the blank object to import from the ASCII file
- Variables to import: All listed shell variables can be mapped on the target mesh (the
mesh of the surface blank object of the current project). These variables must have
been stored previously in the mapping file upon export of the part.
PROCESS
Mapping import
- Mesh transformation in global system: A transformation is applied on the imported

mesh to fit with the position of the mesh of the blank object before mapping. This is
useful if the blank mesh in the project is not expressed in the same system than the
imported mesh, or if the part has to move to be in a new position. This
transformation is defined by a translation vector (first column) and a rotation around
the origin (defined by its matrix in the global system). By default, no transformation
is applied (no translation, identity matrix for the rotation).
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the parameters and creates the mapping attribute for the object of the
chosen stage and closes the dialog.
PROCESS
Mapping import
BINDER WRAP
This dialog enables the user to activate the binder wrap behaviour on the blank holder
(or part of the blank holder part of the die) object for simulating the holding stage in a
QUIKSTAMP Full Process simulation. In this case, the blank holder object is not
translated during the holding simulation, but is in final position from the beginning.
The Binder wrap dialog
Description
- Number of increments: This is the number of increments used for the binder wrap
simulation. By default, the number of increments is 20.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the chosen value for the binder wrap. Notice that some modifications
occur when activating this attribute :
· The total number of increments is set to 30 in the Control attribute dialog.
· The contact friction is set to 0 in all contacts.
· The “elasticity smoothing” is activated in the Advanced implicit parameters
dialog.
PROCESS
Stage Information
STAGE INFORMATION
This is a general attribute of a stage.
The Object information dialog
- Title: Displays the current name of the stage. The user can modify this name.
- Comments: Allows the user to add personal comments to the stage.
- OK: Applies the change of name and/or comments to the stage.
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any changes.
PROCESS
Stage Information
CONTROL
This dialog allows the user to define the parameters that control the calculation.
The Control dialog
Progression Type
The writing dates of the view file, history points, end of computation, etc. are expressed
in the type of progression selected. It is either the Time or the Stroke of object. In such a
case, an object name is required.
This option is common to both the Start/stop and Outputs tabs.
Note:
· The Stroke of object is calculated from the length of its trajectory, which is
different from its displacement.
trajectory
displacement
PROCESS
Control
Start/stop
This page allows the user to define the starting values and the stop criteria of the run.
The Start/Stop page of the Control dialog
Start values
- Start at: Value of the progression variable at the beginning of a calculation (usually
choose 0). A non nil value can be useful when a picking is performed and the user
wishes to start from the final value of the progression variable of the previous
calculation. This is particularly the case when doing a lance.
PROCESS
Control
- Time origin: Origin of the time. It allows the user to determine an origin for the time
when the progression variable is the stroke of object. This is useful when, after a
picking in a restart file (to do a lance for example), the user wishes to continue the
calculation without having to modify the velocity curves.
- Recomputed: If enable, the solver computes the Start at following an
autopositioning (only if the object has not moved)
Stop Criteria
- Pinch tests: Set this toggle when at least one pinch test must be performed. The
solver detects a pinch situation between two objects when a node is in contact with
the two objects simultaneously and cannot penetrate them. If a pinch test is activated
between these two objects, the solver stops the calculation.
· : This button allows the user to add an pinch. This button opens the Pinch
dialog.
· : Allows the user to delete a pinch from the list. The user must first select
the action(s) from the list by clicking on it or them.
· : This button opens the Pinch dialog to display or modify the parameters for
the selected pinch in list. The parameters can also be displayed by double-
clicking on the item in list.
- Damping convergence tests: This toggle is automatically set when at least one
gravity attribute exists in the current stage.
Note:
· The damping convergence test is not compatible with the implicit convergence
option.
- Implicit convergence criteria: The calculation stops depending on the tolerances
defined in the Implicit calculation page of the attribute Advanced parameters. If an
implicit springback attribute is defined for the blank in a stage, a Severity button is diplayed
and can be used to open the Severity implicit parameters dialog where the user can
define the number of increments for springback calculation.
Note:
· This option is chosen if a springback or gravity attribute is defined.
PROCESS
Control
- Progression: The calculation stops depending on the value of the final progression.
- Distance: The calculation stops depending on the maximal allowed distance
between the two named objects, which can also be a plane. If the distance is lower
than this value, the computation stops. This criterion is useful to stop a computation
with die without punch part (the user just has to create a plane positioned at the end
of the stroke of the punch, and asks a null distance). It is also useful when an
autopositioning is asked for the moving tool before the computation and when the
pinch test is not possible (penalty contact for example), because the final
progression before starting the run is not known.
Data Check
- Stop after data check: The calculation will stop after a data check, even if there is
no problem encountered during this check.
- Initial penetration test: When a calculation starts, this test detects either if, at the
initial instant, for each contact pair of objects, a node penetrates an impenetrable
element or if a node which could be created by adaptive meshing would then
penetrate an impenetrable object.
- Tolerance: This is the penetration tolerance accepted if the initial penetration test is
active. If, when the calculation is started, a node or a future mid-node penetrates
into a face (impenetrable for this node) with a value higher than the tolerance, the
program displays an error message and stops the calculation at the first cycle.
- Divergence test (not yet implemented): If this option is enabled, the control of the
divergence of the analysis is activated. The following points are tested:
· Excessive drop of the time step.
· Unacceptable variation of the world energy.
If the contact is active.
· Important drop of the contact energy.
· Ejection of a node.
· Abnormally excessive thickening.
If one of the tests indicates a divergence in the calculation, the solver

immediately stops it by writing a final state file and a restart file
PROCESS
Control
Outputs
This tab allows the user to define the frequencies of writings during the stage
computation (histories, states...).
The Outputs tab of the Control dialog
Stroke unknown
- Estimated stroke based on initial distance: This option is only available in stroke of
object progression type. It is useful when the stroke is unknown (ex: multistage)
and when one needs to have access to all types of outputs for the states (Total
number, Interval, etc…).
This option allows estimating the stroke based on an initial distance between two
PROCESS
Control
objects in a defined direction. The user can select from two drop-down lists the two
objects from which the distance will be calculated. The direction can either be
picked or manually entered (see below). The computation of this distance is done
just before the beginning of the stage and estimates the writing periods in dividing it
by the number of writings chosen.
Note:
This option is available only when either one of these stop criteria of the Start/Stop
tab is selected: Pinch tests, distance, maximal thinning. The availability of this
option depends on the selected stop criteria and on the progression type chosen.
- Direction: The direction is defined by a vector either by using the help of the wizard
- : This drop-down list defines whether the direction is given in the Global or a
States
In this panel are defined the frequencies of state writings during the stage computation.
The choices proposed here are highly dependent of the following factors:
- The type of progression chosen: time or stroke of object.
- Whether the distance is known or not.
- If the distance is not known whether it can be estimated or not (cf. Estimated stroke
based on initial distance).
These factors are taken into account by the interface, and only the available selections
are proposed according to these factors.
- States drop-down list: The user must select among the four choices below and enter
the desired value in the corresponding text field.
Note:
The first two options are not available when the stroke is not known or not
estimated.
· Total number: Total number of writings.
· List from bottom: Number of progression values written from the end of the
computation.
· List from beginning: Number of progression values written from the beginning
of the computation.
· Interval: Interval value at which the calculation will write a progression value.
- Settings: Opens the Contour settings dialog.
- : Opens the Plot at dialog which is used to defined the states to be written for
the List from bottom and List from beginning options.
PROCESS
Control
Restart
- Restart frequency drop-down list: Time or length of trajectory of the progression
that separates the writing of two consecutive restart files.
The user must select among the two choices below and enter the desired value in the
corresponding text field.
· Total number: This option allows determining the frequency for writing restart
files.
Note:
This option is not available when the stroke is not known or not estimated.
· Synchronize with states: This option is available only when the Total number or
Interval options are selected in the States panel. It allows to synchronize the
restart frequency with the states frequency and according to the option selected
(Total number or Interval).
· Interval: This option determines the progression variable between two writings
of a restart file.
- Maximum number of restart files: In order to be certain to have at least one complete
file, should a problem occur (machine, calculation…), the user should ask for at
least two files. However, the number should not be too high to avoid taking too
much disk space.
Note:
The last restart file is not necessarily the file with the highest number. Indeed, if n is
the maximum number of restart files, when the solver has written n restart file, it
then writes over the first one, then the second one, etc.
History
- History frequency drop-down list: Time or length of trajectory of the progression
that separates the writing of two consecutive points in the history file.
The user must select among the two choices below and enter the desired value in the
corresponding text field.
· Total number: This option allows to determine the frequency for history
information. 1000 by default.
Note:
This option is not available when the stroke is not known or not estimated.
· Interval: This option defines the interval of the progression variable between
two writings in the history file.
- Settings: Opens the History curves settings dialog.
Prints
- Cycle period: Number of cycles that separates the writing of two consecutive lines
in the listing file. 10 by default.
PROCESS
Control
Pinch Definition
This dialog is used to specify which object will be involved in a pinch test.
A pinch test can be defined between two objects which do not necessarily follow an
imposed movement. Utmost attention must be exercised if, during a picking, the
attributes of the objects are kept. Indeed, when changing from the holding phase (for
which a pinch between the blankholder and the die is defined) to the stamping phase (in
which the blankholder usually no longer has an imposed movement), if the pinch test
between the die and the blankholder is not de-activated, the calculation will be
interrupted as soon as a blank node is in contact with the die and the blankholder.
The Pinch dialog
Two windows allow the user to select the objects involved in the pinch test definition.
- Activation: Defines the range of application of the pinch. It brings up the Sensor
definition dialog.
- OK: Validates the selected objects for the pinch test and returns to the Start/stop tab
of the Control dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without adding any definition in the Start/stop tab of the
Control dialog.
PROCESS
Control
Plot at
This dialog allows the user to fill in the list of states in the Outputs tab of the Control
dialog. The user can enter in this dialog the values of the progression variable for
which each state will be written. These values are indicative: The state will be written
during the cycle that immediately follows the given value.
The periodical definition box of states to be written contains the following controls:
- Set: This toggle button allows periodical definition of the values with deletion of
the values already defined in the list of states to be written.
- Add: This toggle buttons allows the addition of the values defined in the periodical
definition box in the list of states to be written.
- From: Start-up value for the periodical definition.
- To: Final value for the periodical definition.
- Step: Step between the two values.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the above parameters and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: closes the dialog without editing the list of states.
PROCESS
Control
Contour Settings
This dialog is called by the Settings button of the States panel in the Control dialog.
The contour settings dialog
- Default: Applies some default parameters.

- All: All the parameters are selected for the contours setting.
Function Buttons
- OK: Selects the parameters for the contour settings and closes the dialog.
PROCESS
Control
History Curve Settings

This dialog is called by the Settings button available in the History panel of the Control
dialog.
The parameters available in the History Curve Settings dialog are those selected
(checked) for the elements which have history attributes selected in the Post analyze
dialog.
The Global tab The Object/interface tab The Element tab
The History curve settings dialog
The following function buttons are common to all the tabs of the History Curve Settings
dialog:
- Default: Applies some default parameters.
- All: When activated, this option will select all the parameters for the History Curve.
Function Buttons
- OK: Selects the parameters for the History Curve settings and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without setting or modifying the history curve
parameters.
PROCESS
Control (QUIKSTAMP)
CONTROL (QUIKSTAMP)
This dialog allows the user to define the parameters that control the PAM-
QUIKSTAMP calculation.
The Control dialog
- Progression type: The writing dates of the view file, history points, end of
computation, etc. are expressed in increment. For a PAM-QUIKSTAMP
calculation, this corresponds to the number of steps used by the non-linear
algorithm.
Stop Criteria
- Automatic stop, severity depend: The solver stops the calculation on the total
number of increments. This number is in function of the imposed severity: holding
phase + forming phase + binder wrap.
PROCESS
Control (QUIKSTAMP)

defined in the Implicit calculation page of the attribute Advanced parameters.
Note:
This option is chosen if a gravity attribute is defined.
Severity
- Binder wrap: This option is strongly recommended when the binder surface is
curved. It simulates gravity and binder closing as well, which results in a curved
sheet shape at the end of the holding phase. Binder wrap is a good approximate
solution, which requires significantly less computer time than an exact analysis
involving gravity and holding simulations. A drop-down list provides three options
to control the binder wrap simulation (Standard, and Severe are imposed by the
program, and the value is entered by the user for User-Defined).
- Forming severity: A drop-down list provides three options to control the implicit
simulation (Standard, and Severe are imposed by the program, and the value is
entered by the user for User-Defined).
- Severity: This button brings up the Forming Severity dialog where the non-linear
number of increments can be controlled or edited.
Process
- Direction: if the button is checked the user can define the direction of the process by
selecting an item in the list and selecting a frame in the list. Otherwise the direction
is the opposite one of the displacement attribute or the opposite one of the gravity
attribute.
States Writings
- Number of states: Defines the frequencies of writings during the stage computation
(histories, states...). A least one state is written. For holding stage, the number of
states is always 1.
Function Buttons
- Ok: Sets the control parameters in the object attributes tree, and closes the dialog.
any actions.
PROCESS
Control (QUIKSTAMP Full Process)
CONTROL (QUIKSTAMP FULL PROCESS)

This dialog enables the user to define the parameters for the control attribute for a
QUIKSTAMP Full Process project.
The Control dialog
- Progression type: The writing dates of the view file, history points, end of
computation, etc. are expressed in increment. For a PAM-QUIKSTAMP
calculation, this corresponds to the number of steps used by the non-linear
algorithm.
Stop Criteria
- Automatic stop, severity depend: The solver stops the calculation on the total
number of increments. This number is in function of the imposed severity: holding
phase + forming phase + binder wrap.
defined in the Implicit calculation page of the attribute Advanced parameters.
Note:
This option is chosen if a gravity attribute is defined.
PROCESS
Control (QUIKSTAMP Full Process)
Severity
- Total number of increment: Number of steps used by the non-linear implicit
approach to reach the equilibrium.
Process
- Direction: if the button is checked the user can define the direction of the process by
selecting an item in the list and selecting a frame in the list. Otherwise the direction
is the opposite one of the displacement attribute or the opposite one of the gravity
attribute or the opposite one of the force attribute.
States Writings
- Number of state writings: Defines the frequencies of writings during the stage
computation (histories, states...). The button opens the Contour settings
dialog.
History
The button opens the History curves settings dialog.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the selected parameters for the control and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without assigning any parameters to the control.
PROCESS
CPU Control
CPU CONTROL
This attribute is a general attribute of the computation.
The CPU Control dialog
Mass Scaling
- Characteristic length: When activated, the user can type in the text field a value for
the length. All the elements which have a characteristic size smaller than this value
will have their mass increased so that their elementary time step corresponds to that
of an element which has a characteristic size equal to the value input by the user.
- : Pressing this button calls up the Mass Scaling Wizard which helps the user to
calculate the characteristic length. In the dialog the user select the Blank object and
the Stage type. The final size is estimated from the initial blank mesh and the
numerical parameter associated with the stage.
PROCESS
CPU Control
Reduction Factor
- Reduction factor: When active, the user can enter in the text field the reduction
factor for refinement.
This is the value corresponding to the variation factor of the time step when a
refinement occurs. Indeed a perfect rectangular element sees its time step value
divided by 2 when it is refined. If this text field is not set, no correction is done by
the solver. Setting a value in the interval [1,2] corresponds to the factor that the
solver uses to divide the local time step of the refined element. According to the
stability conditions, the density of the element must be increased. A value equal to
1.33 and no “tool geometry” criterion represents a good compromise between
computation speed and quality of the results.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the parameters above and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without defining the time step nor the mass scaling for
the object.
PROCESS
Global Refinement
GLOBAL REFINEMENT
This dialog is accessible only if the refinement is activated for at least one object.
The only one parameter which must always be set to define correctly the adaptive mesh
algorithm is the maximal adaptive angle that the solver allows between two neighbors
before refining them.
The global refinement dialog

for AUTOSTAMP and QUIKSTAMP Full Process
Criteria
- Maximal angle: Maximum value for the limit angle used by the adaptive meshing
angle criterion. It must be defined whenever the adaptive meshing is activated. The
default value is 10 for AUTOSTAMP and 6 for QUIKSTAMP Full Process.
- Set minimal level at: This parameters is used to define at which progression (time,
stroke of an object or increment) the parameter Uniform level defined in the
refinement attribute of a stage must be activated.
- Start maximal level at: This parameter is used to define at which progression
- Maximal refinement level defined in the refinement attribute of a stage must be
activated.
PROCESS
Global Refinement
- Curvature radius criterion: If set, activates the criterion which refines elements
which are close to contact surfaces that will (by their geometry) impose a joining
angle greater than the maximal adaptive angle allowed. If this criterion is not set,
results still stay correct but forbid a future springback computation.
- Bending criterion (available only for AutoStamp project): If set, activates the
criterion which refines elements presenting an important transverse shear strain
value.
Interruption
- Memory size: Maximum memory size allocated from which the refinement is
interrupted. It is expressed in megabytes and its default value is 4000 Mb.
- Number of elements: Maximum number of elements from which the refinement is
interrupted (1.e+9 elements by default).
- Minimal element size: This value allows the user to define the minimal size that the
elements will have after refinement(s). If an element has a characteristic size equal
to 8 and a maximal level of refinement equal to 3, its final characteristic size will be
equal to 2. If this field is set to 2.5, this element will not be refined until its maximal
level, and its refinement will be stopped in the level 2 to preserve it from a
characteristic size less than 2.5.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the chosen parameters for the global refinement.
PROCESS
Global Refinement (QUIKSTAMP)
GLOBAL REFINEMENT (QUIKSTAMP)

This dialog enables the user to define the parameters for the Global refinement attribute
for a QUIKSTAMP project.
The only one parameter which must always be set to define correctly the adaptive mesh
algorithm is the maximal adaptive angle that the solver allows between two neighbors
before refining them.
The global refinement dialog for QUIKSTAMP
Criteria
default value is 10.
- Set minimal level at: This parameters is used to define at which progression
(increment) the parameter Uniform level defined in the refinement attribute of a
stage must be activated. This parameter cannot be changed.
- Start maximal level at: This parameter is used to define at which progression
Maximal refinement level defined in the refinement attribute of a stage must be
activated. This parameter cannot be changed. The value is calculated to correspond
to 5 increments before the end of the forming stage (the total number of increments
is: binder wrap + forming severity increments + 5) .
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the chosen parameters for the global refinement.
PROCESS
Global Refinement (QUIKSTAMP)
TRIMMING
This attribute allows to let the solver do the trimming of the current object by 3D curves
before the computation of the current stage. The trimming is an attribute of the global
object in a stage. It is the equivalent action of the trimming function of the Geometry
menu.
Remeshing is performed by optimising the time step as far as possible. The maximum
reduction of the smallest time step value is 15%. Only shell elements can be trimmed.
The Trimming dialog

- : This button allows the user to add a trimming operation. This button calls up
the Trimming definition dialog.
- : Allows the user to delete an operation from the list. The user must first select
the operation(s) from the list by clicking on it or them.
- : This button opens the Trimming definition dialog to display or modify the
trimming parameters for the selected trimming in list. The parameters can also be
displayed by double-clicking on the item in list.
- and : modifies the position of the operation in the list.
PROCESS
Trimming
- List of trimming: This window lists the trimming operation defined with the
Trimming definition dialog. The order in which trimming operations are performed
could be important.
- Parameters: This window lists the paremeters that have been set in the Trimming
definition dialog for the selected trimming operation: name, object to trim, name of
the curve, direction of the trimming, definition of the kept area, corner angle.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the trimming definition in the Global object of the selected stage.
Trimming Definition
This dialog is used to define a trimming operation, i.e. name, object to trim, name of the
curve used, direction of the trimming, definition of the kept area, corner angle.
The Trimming definition dialog
PROCESS
Trimming
Method
To define a trimming operation the user:
- First selects the elements to be trimmed.
- Picks the 3D curves which will be used to trim the mesh.
- Chooses the trimming mode (orthogonal or not).
- If the orthogonal mode was not chosen, the user defines the direction of trimming.
- Finally the user has to pick some shell(s) in the zone(s) of the mesh to be kept.
Dialog
- Name: Name of the trimming operation (by default, Trimming n).
- Object to trim: This list displays blank surface type objects only.
- By the 3D curves of: List containing the objects whose 3D curves will trim the
current object with each a direction for the projection of the curves.
Note:
· A curve must be in an object, and must be activated in the stage to appear in this
list.
- Orthogonal: The user can choose to check the toggle Orthogonal trimming if he
wants to trim the mesh orthogonally. This mode requires that the trimming curves
are very “close” to the mesh and properly discretized. The discretization of curves
shall be as accurate as the mesh discretization.
by using the help of the wizard or by typing its components in the text fields..
- : This drop-down list defines whether the trimming definition is done in the
- Remaining entities: Activates by default the 3D position or element or node picking
mode. When the user clicks a 3D position, it will appear in the list.
- Kept zones: List containing the 3D position defining the kept zone:
· : The user pick a 3D position in the 3D view to indicate which part of the
object to trim will be kept. The solver will look for the closest node to this
position of the current object when the trimming is done. This node will
determine the entities to remain. It is useful when you start a computation where
the blank is not yet stamped: just click the position onto the fixed tool for the
forming, which is easier than select an entity of the flat blank (which will be
trimmed after being formed).
The solver determines by propagation, starting from each entity to keep, the
parts of the object to remain for the next stages, so the entities to delete too.
PROCESS
Trimming
Advanced Parameters
The button calls up the following dialog.
The Advanced parameters dialog
This dialog allows the user to set some parameters that can improve the trimming in
special cases.
- Simply curves: When checked, this toggle will ask the algorithm to simplify the
trimming curves by removing some points when they are aligned. This will lead to
an optimized CPU time. The alignment criterion of 3 points is driven by parameter
Angle. When the user does not want to do any simplification just uncheck this
toggle.
- Angle: This parameter is used when the toggle Simplify curves is checked. As long
as two segments of a 3D curve make an angle lower than this parameter, the
algorithm will simplify the 3D curve by building a single equivalent segment.
Example: 1000 points on a straight line, are treated as a single segment
- Corner angle: When the angle (in degrees) between two 3D curve segments is
greater than this value, the projected point of junction of these 2 segments will be a
mandatory position for a mesh node. This type of position can prevent optimization
of the time step.
- Detection distance: This distance is a proximity criterion which helps find the 3D
curves involved in the trimming of each shell element. All segments within this
range will be used for the trimming of an element. That is why the 3D curves shall
be as close to the mesh as possible. The higher this distance is the less robust the
trimming algorithm is. This parameter is used only in the Orthogonal trimming
mode.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the trimming definition and returns to the Trimming dialog.
PROCESS
Trimming
AUTOPOSITIONING
This dialog allows the user to define an autopositioning operation. The movement is a
translation of an object along a given direction onto another object. At the end of the
automatic positioning, the elements of the first object are exactly "above" the entities of
the second object.
The Autopositioning dialog
Description
- : This button allows the user to define an autopositioning operation that will be
added to the Autopositioning list. It opens the Autopositioning definition dialog to
edit the autopositioning (see below).
- Removes an autopositioning definition from the Autopositioning list.
- : This button opens the Autopositioning definition dialog to display or modify the
autopositioning parameters for the selected autopositioning in list. The parameters
can also be displayed by double-clicking on the item in list.
- and : Order being an important matter in this case, the user can change the
position of the objects in the autopositioning list.
PROCESS
Autopositioning
- Autopositioning list: The order of the list represents the order of execution of each
autopositioning. A double-click on a list item opens the Autopositioning definition
dialog to edit it.
- Parameters: This window lists the parameters of the autopositioning selected in the
Autopositioning list (object1, object2, direction and tolerance).
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the chosen parameters for the autopositioning.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing any autopositioning.
Autopositioning Definition
The user defines in this dialog the name of the autopositioning operation, the object that
will be moved, the fixed object onto which the object to move will be positioned, the
direction of the movement and finally the tolerance distance between the two objects.
The Autopositioning definition dialog
Description
- Name: The user must enter a name to identify the autopositioning.
- Objects: This window lists the objects on which an autopositioning will be done.
The user must select one or several of them.
PROCESS
Autopositioning
- Position onto: This window lists the objects onto which the autopositioning will be
done (the fixed object). The user must select one or several of them.
- Along: The translation is defined by a vector either by using the help of the wizard
- Tolerance: The user can enter in the text field the value of the tolerance on the
penetration. At the end of autopositioning, the penetrations cannot exceed this
tolerance. The default value is 0.001.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the selected parameters for the autopositioning.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without adding any object to the Autopositioning list.
Notes:
· The importance of the initial position of objects and the direction of positioning
can be described very easily by the two following figures.
Object
to move
Fixed
object
Direction Autopositioning
Autopositioning in a given direction
Object
to move
Fixed
object
Direction Autopositioning
Autopositioning in the opposite direction
PROCESS
Autopositioning
· The automatic positioning takes into account the thickness of the shells and the
initial levels of refinement in the case where the object has an adaptive meshing
attribute.
· An element concerned by the automatic positioning cannot be long to two
objects which have a thickness, a refinement level or a contact attribute.
· At least one element concerned (element from the source or target object) must
belong to an object which has a contact attribute:
At least one face of element of the source object must be impenetrable by a node
of a target object or at least one face of element of target object must be
impenetrable by a node of element of the source object.
PROCESS
Autopositioning
PICKING
This dialog enables the user to define a picking attribute for an object. In multistage
process it is not possible to stop the calculation and to use the Computed model option
to do a picking in the restart files. Therefore, this attribute is used to keep or modify
some results from a stage to another.
The Picking dialog
- Keep velocity: Allows keeping, for the nodes of the picked objects, the velocity
they have when the last restart file of the previous stage was written. It is used for
example in a multistage computation of a stamping run with lance during the
forming stage.
- Multiply stress by factor: This value must belong to the interval [-1,1]. The solver
multiplies all the stresses of the elements by this factor upon initialization. The
default value is 1. A nil factor is generally used to cancel all the stresses on a picked
blank in a restart file. Value -1 makes it possible to start a calculation in which the
stresses are all inverted (so-called "SPRINGFORWARD" method).
- Pick time origin: If the progression of picking project is stroke, the value of time is
set in the control attribute in time origin parameter.
- Pick progression: The value of progression of the picking project is set in the
control attribute in the parameter start at without Recomputed parameter.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the selected parameters for the picking and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without assigning any parameters to the picking.
PROCESS
DMP Decomposition
DMP DECOMPOSITION
This dialog is used to specify the type of domain decomposition used in parallel runs.
The DMP Decomposition dialog
For the current code version, the following decomposition methods are implemented:
- LCB: For linear coordinate bisection where the mesh is divided along a given
cutting direction. (Default and recommended for model stretched along one
direction)
· By default, i.e. the Automatic toggle checked, the longest structural direction is
taken.
· When the Automatic toggle is unchecked, the cutting direction is given by a
vector either by using the help of the wizard or by typing its components in the
text fields.
· : This drop-down list defines whether the axis is defined in the Global or a
- CCB: For cylindrical coordinate bisection where the mesh is divided in pie slice
along a given rotation axis.
PROCESS
DMP Decomposition
· Model center: The rotation axis is positioned at the center of the model.
· Position: The position of the rotation axis is defined either by using the help of
the wizard or by typing its coordinates in the text fields.
· Axis: The rotation axis is defined by a vector either by using the help of the
· : This drop-down list defines whether the axis is defined in the Global or a
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the selected parameters for the DMP decomposition and closes the
dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without assigning any parameters to the DMP
decomposition.
PROCESS
Advanced Parameters
ADVANCED PARAMETERS
The Advanced Parameters attribute must be used cautiously, since it requires a good
knowledge of the Finite Element simulation.
Element
Advanced parameters dialog – Element tab
Shell Element
- Thickness integration rule: Defines the distribution of the integration points across
the thickness, and the weight of each point. There are two integration rules:
PROCESS
Advanced Parameters
· Gauss: The distribution is done to improve the quality of the results.

· Uniform: Distributes evenly the integration points with an equal weight.
- Number of integration points: Defines numerical integration in the thickness
direction. 5 points usually give a good quality of results.
- Shell Hourglass Control: The hourglass control algorithm is used to avoid the
degeneration of the mesh. It avoids over-stiffening.
· Stiffness using elastic modulus: By default the hourglass control is based on the
elastic modulus of the material.
· Stiffness using plastic: Hourglass control is based on the plastic tangent
modulus. This results in a less severe damping of the hourglass modes.
- Shell anti-drilling: The shell anti-drilling projection applies to thin shell elements.
The addition of a projection scheme is necessary to remove any parasitic straining
due to drill rotation.
· Penalty: Anti-drill by adding penalty on z-rotation.
· Projection: For improved results in case of strongly warped shells, use the
projection method.
- Element type: Defines the shell element formulation.
· BELYTSCHKO-TSAY (default): The Belytschko-Tsay element is a simple and
efficient element. It is based on the concept of uniform reduced integration.
· HUGHES-TEZDUYAR: This element has correct rank (i.e. no hourglass modes).
It gives good results for vibration and shock-dominated problems and is a
substitute for the Belytschko-Tsay element when excessive hourglassing is
observed.
· BELYTSCHKO-WONG-CHIANG: The formulation of this element is based on a
better kinematic field (also the shear strains are calculated by a nodal
projection). The same hourglass control method of the Belytschko-Tsay shell
element is used. The addition of a projection scheme makes its use as a six
degrees-of-freedom shell element very accurate in warped configurations.
· BWC FULLY INTEGRATED: The fully integrated BWC element is a shell element
based on the formulation of Belytschko and al. The main differences are the
following:
Instead of using one point integration in the plane to evaluate the
forces and moments, 4 Gauss integration points are used to obtain an
exact integration of the internal forces. This results in a full rank
element, ie. No zero energy modes (hourglass modes) are present in
the element. This removes the need for hourglass control used in both
the classical BT and BWC elements, but results in more CPU time to
evaluate the internal forces of the element since 4 integration points
are used.
PROCESS
Advanced Parameters
An assumed shear field based used to avoid shear locking in the

element due to full integration.
An assumed membrane field is used to avoid membrane locking due
to full integration.
- Strain order: To take into account or not the second order term in the strain and
thickness calculation. Possible values are 1 or 2, but 2 gives better results quality
with the drawback that it is more time consuming.
- Accurate total strain: When this toggle is checked (default) a Lagrangian method is
used to calculate the total strain. The Lagrangian method gives an exact value of the
total true strain since it uses the deformation gradient.
When the toggle is not checked an incremental method is used. The incremental
method adds the incremental strain to the Almansi strain at the previous time step. It
is an approximation since high order terms are neglected. These high order terms
accumulate for large deformations.
Solid Element
- Integration rule: Integration rule for solid elements.
· Uniform (default): Uniform underintegration which uses1 integration point.
· Selective reduced: Solids using the selective reduced integration rule have 8
integration points for the deviatoric strain part and 1 integration point for the
volumetric strain to avoid the so-called volumetric "locking" in case of
incompressible material behavior. Generally, this element is 4 times as
expensive as the uniformly underintegrated solid element.
- Hourglass type: Hourglass control is recommended to avoid over-stiffening.
· Viscous (default): Viscous method using hourglass base vectors.
· Flanagan-Belytschko viscous: Viscous method using hourglass shape vectors
· Flanagan-Belytschko stiffness: Stiffness method using hourglass shape vectors
- Quadratic and Linear bulk viscosity coefficient: An artificial bulk viscosity is
computed whenever a solid element is undergoing compression and is added to the
pressure. This viscosity permits the formation of shock waves and damps out
numerical oscillations. The calculation uses a quadratic (default 1.2) and linear
(default 0.06) coefficient.
- Hourglass viscosity coefficient: The solid hourglass viscosity coefficient prevents
vibrations in zero energy (hourglass) modes. (default 0.1).
PROCESS
Advanced Parameters
Implicit Calculation
The parameters defined in this dialog are used to run an implicit calculation (for
springback and gravity).
Advanced parameters dialog – Implicit calculation tab
Parameters
- Maximum number of non-linear iterations: Defines the maximum number of
iterations to achieve convergence of a card. The default value is 20.
- Displacement convergence tolerance: Relative displacement precision required
between two successive non-linear iterations.
· Enforced: When activated, once the maximum iteration number is reached the
convergence criterion is supposed to be satisfied.
PROCESS
Advanced Parameters
- Energy convergence tolerance: Relative energy precision required between two

successive non-linear iterations.
- Solver type: Defines the solvers available for linear equations.
· Direct: This solver helps to solve linear systems directly and is based on
complete triangulation of the matrix.
· PCG: Preconditioned Conjugated Gradient.
Maximum number of PCG iterations: The Preconditioned Conjugated
Gradient is supposed to converge after NDOF iterations (where
NDOF is the number of degrees of freedom of the model). The
maximum number of PCG iterations is obtained by multiplying this
parameter by NDOF.
PCG convergence tolerance: Relative precision required between
two successive PCG iterations.
Enforced: When activated, once the maximum iteration number is
reached, the convergence criterion is supposed to be satisfied.
Gravity
- Damping scale factor: The implicit damping is a quasi-static simulation that uses
virtual springs between each increment to maintain the object submitted to gravity.
The damping scale factor increases or decreases the stiffness of these springs.
Increase gravity damping scale factor in case of contact problems. Decrease
damping scale factor for faster simulation. (Default 1)
Options
- Displacement control value (buckling risk): minimum displacement applied on
increments (arc length).
- Line search: Line search steps number.
- Dynamic relaxation (stress smoothing): Dynamic relaxation option is activated and
switched to Newton iterations at a given cycle number (by default: 10).
- Elementary matrix storage option (for PCG solver only): If not active, the matrix is
stored in memory. If active, the matrix is not stored and is calculated at each PCG
iteration.
PROCESS
Advanced Parameters
Other
Advanced parameters dialog – Other tab
Time Step
- Time step calculation: The user has the option to choose between a large and a
small time step calculation. In this option, the characteristic length of the element is
taken into account: The larger the size of the element, the larger the element time
step.
- Bending option: The user can choose from no bending and large bending options.
The No bend option will take into account a value for the thickness of the object. It
may therefore lead to considerable increases in the shell time step when the shell
contains small and thick shell elements.
- Scale factor: In general the solution is stable with the default time step scale factor
(0.9). In exceptional cases, e.g. with strongly distorted solid elements, the user may
want to reduce this factor to achieve a more stable solution when the default value is
too large. This reduction factor can also be specified as a function of time. In the
latter case, the user may select in the drop-down list a function previously defined.
PROCESS
Advanced Parameters
Viscoplasticity
- Velocity correction for viscoplasticity: For reasons of CPU time, the velocity used
for the calculation is higher than the effective velocity. Consequently, when the
viscoplasticity is activated, the plastic strain velocity must be corrected in the solver
to simulate the behavior of the material correctly. The coefficient to be applied is
the reverse of the coefficient applied to the stamping velocity.
Example:
For a stamping performed at 10 m/s with an effective velocity of 1 m/s, specify a
coefficient of 0.1.
- Strain rate filter: Strain rate filtering damps high frequency vibrations and avoids
erroneous predictions of stresses that may occur when using common strain rate
laws together with elastic-plastic materials.
Contact
- Contact type chosen: See the explanations given for the Penalty contact parameters
and Advanced contact parameters dialogs. The choice made here updates the
contact type for the project, therefore changes the contact type attribute. An implicit
contact algorithm can also be displayed but not changed in case of implicit
simulation (gravity).
- Default contact thickness (with contact type NL Penalty only): To manage the
contact between two entities with a nil thickness (shells with nil thickness or volume
elements), the program uses a protection thickness. It can also be user-input except
if it was picked out from a restart file. If it is not supplied to the solver, it will be
assessed automatically during the analysis.
By default, the default contact thickness will be automatically calculated and
assigned to the object.
Drawbead
- Activate drawing angle option: When this option is activated, the restraining force is
no more perpendicular to the drawbead, but opposed to the draw-in velocity.
Furthermore, his value is decreased.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the parameters and closes the dialog box.
PROCESS
Advanced Parameters
ADVANCED IMPLICIT PARAMETERS

(QUIKSTAMP AND QUIKSTAMP FULL PROCESS)
The parameters defined in this dialog are used by the implicit solver to run a
QUIKSTAMP or QUIKSTAMP Full Process calculation (forming or gravity
simulation).
The Advanced implicit parameters dialog

box as displayed when accessed through the
object attributes tree (left) or through the
QUIKSTAMP macro dialog (above).
- Elasticity behavior: When active, all materials are considered with an elastic
behaviour in the simulation.
- Elasticity smoothing: When active, the Young modulus is reduced for accelerating
the Newton iterations convergence (by reducing the discontinuity between the slope
in elastic and plastic phase).
PROCESS
Advanced Implicit Parameters (QUIKSTAMP and QUIKSTAMP Full Process)
Parameters
- Maximum number of non-linear iterations: Defines the maximum number of
iterations to achieve convergence of a card. The default value is 20.
- Displacement convergence tolerance: Relative displacement precision required
between two successive non-linear iterations.
- Energy convergence tolerance: Relative energy precision required between two
successive non-linear iterations.
- Solver type: Defines the solvers available for linear equations. The solver type
cannot be changed for a forming QUIKSTAMP run
· Direct: This solver helps to solve linear systems directly and is based on
complete triangulation of the matrix.
· PCG: Preconditioned Conjugated Gradient.
Maximum number of PCG iterations: The Preconditioned Conjugated
Gradient is supposed to converge after NDOF iterations (where
NDOF is the number of degrees of freedom of the model). The
maximum number of PCG iterations is obtained by multiplying this
parameter by NDOF.
PCG convergence tolerance: Relative precision required between two
successive PCG iterations.
Enforced: When activated, once the maximum iteration number is
reached, the convergence criterion is supposed to be satisfied.
Gravity
- Damping scale factor: The implicit damping is a quasi-static simulation that uses
virtual springs between each increment to maintain the object submitted to gravity.
The damping scale factor increases or decreases the stiffness of these springs.
Increase gravity damping scale factor in case of contact problems. Decrease
damping scale factor for faster simulation.
Options
- Displacement control value (buckling risk): minimum displacement applied on
increments (arc length).
- Line search: Line search steps number.
PROCESS
Advanced Implicit Parameters (QUIKSTAMP and QUIKSTAMP Full Process)
- Dynamic relaxation (stress smoothing): Dynamic relaxation option is activated and

switched to Newton iterations at a given cycle number (by default: 10).
- Elementary matrix storage option (for PCG solver only): If not active, the matrix is
stored in memory. If active, the matrix is not stored and is calculated at each PCG
iteration.
Function Button
- OK: Validates the selected parameters for the attribute and closes the dialog.
- Close: Closes the dialog and sets the solver parameters.
PROCESS
Mapping
MAPPING
This option is designed for transferring analysis result data from one simulation to
another with a flexible, version-independent interface file. A typical application is the
"coupled" analysis between a sheet metal forming simulation using PAM-STAMP 2G,
and a crash analysis using PAM-CRASH. Although the part result transfer option can
be used for other applications, it was designed for the stamp/crash coupling case.
This first phase can export analysis data issued from a stamping simulation. At the end
of the stamping simulation (or any other process), PAM-STAMP 2G exports a specific
output file containing all desired data of the pre-selected physical properties (e.g.
thickness, plastic strain, Anisotropy direction, stress tensor...) for the exported structure
part. This output file is in ASCII format.
The second phase can consist in performing a crash analysis, which imports data from
previous stamping simulations. Therefore, the above mentioned (stamping) output file
will be read during the initialization of the crash run. The user can choose the physical
quantities to be restored (plastic strain, stress tensor, thickness…). If the imported part
was not well positioned in the first phase, the correct positioning can also be done at
this stage.
The Mapping dialog
- File name: Name of the ASCII file which will automatically be stored in the project
directory. The button opens the standard File selector to retrieve a file name.
The path is not taken into account.
PROCESS
Mapping
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the parameters and creates the mapping attribute for the global object
of the chosen stage and closes the dialog.
PROCESS
User-defined attribute
USER-DEFINED ATTRIBUTE
The User-defined attribute dialog
- User-defined cards: this option is used in order to activate options which are not
available via the GUI Interface.
- Model objects Id:
· : This button allows the user to add a model objetcs Id. This button opens
the Model object Id Definition dialog.
· : Allows the user to delete a model objetcs Id from the list. The user must
first select the model objetcs Id(s) from the list by clicking on it or them.
PROCESS
User-defined attribute
· : This button opens the Model object Id Definition dialog to display or modify
the parameters for the selected model objetcs Id in list. The parameters can also
be displayed by double-clicking on the item in list.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the parameters and creates the user-defined attribute for the global
object of the chosen stage and closes the dialog.
PROCESS
Object content MANAGEMENT
OBJECT CONTENT MANAGEMENT

The Object content management dialog allows the user to modify the mesh entities
(elements and 3D curves) of an object (called target object) by :
Adding the entities of source object(s), the user can possibly delete the sources object(s)
after the transfer.
By replacing the current entities by the source object(s)’ entities. the user can possibly
delete the sources object(s) after the transfer.
By exchanging the entities with a single source object’s entities
The Object content management dialog
Source objects
- Source objects: list of all the objects of the project. The user can select one or
several objects if he wants to Add or Replace the mesh entities. In case of Exchange,
he must select only one source object. Otherwise an error message will be
displayed.
- Delete object(s) after transfer : this toggle allows the user to delete the source
object(s) that were selected.
PROCESS
Target objects
- Target object: list of all the objects of the project. The user has to select one object.
The content of this object will be modified according to the following actions.
- Add mesh : if this radio button is active, clicking on Transfer button will add the
mesh entities of source object(s) into the target object.
- Replace mesh : if this radio button is active, clicking on Transfer button will add the
mesh entities of source object(s) into the target object and remove or delete the
previous mesh entities. If the toggle “Delete previous content” is checked, the initial
mesh of target object is deleted. Otherwise the initial mesh is removed from the
target object. Note that this toggle is disabled if the radio button “Replace mesh” is
not active.
- Exchange mesh : if this radio button is active, clicking on Transfer button will
switch the mesh entities of target and source object.
Function buttons
- Transfer: Applies the selected actions and modify object(s) content.
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any transfer between objects.
PROCESS
ANALYSIS
ANALYSIS MENU
This menu is used to access post-processing tools and some pre-processing controls,
and in particular for preparation of results for display.
The Analysis menu
Menu options are as follows:

- Information on: This sub-menu groups information tools.
· Entities: Gives information on various types of entities.
· Distances: Displays the distance between two entities.
· Angles: Measures radius and angles between points and measures angle
between vectors.
- Data Control:
· Mesh Checks: Modification of a shell mesh by merging nodes and/or cutting 4-
node elements into two 3-node elements.
ANALYSIS
Analysis Menu
· Attributes checks: This function tests the compatibility of some of the attributes
of a project.
· Kinematics checks: Allows the user to control the kinematics during all the
process.
- Curve Analysis:
· Section: Creates and displays cutting planes.
· Contour Cut: Not yet implemented.
· Time History: Not yet implemented.
· Strain path: Brings up the Strain path dialog.
· Curve Plotter: Creates, modifies or displays 2D curves inside a project in
progress.
- Result Analysis:
· Flattening: Projects a 3D curve on a list of objects, and to monitor its evolution
in the states
· Model Locking: Locks certain degrees of freedom of the model (by certain
nodes), and to amplify the displacements of the other nodes.
· Solver Contours: Not yet implemented.
· User Contours: Not yet implemented.
- Reports:
· Model: Creates a report of model. It brings up the Model reporting dialog.
· Material: Creates a report of a material. It brings up the Material reporting dialog.
· Process: Creates a report of a process. It brings up the Process reporting dialog.
· Table: Creates a table report. It brings up the Reporting table dialog.
· Draw-in: Creates a report. It brings up the Draw-in dialog.
ANALYSIS
Entity Information
ENTITY INFORMATION
This dialog, called by the Analysis/Information on sub-menu, allows to get information
on various types of entities.
The Entity Information dialog
Description
- Entity type: This drop-down list enables the type of entity the user wants
information on. One can choose among the following:
· Element
· Node
· Edge
· Surface
· Object
· 3D curve
ANALYSIS
Entity Information
- Identifier: This text field displays the label of the entity once picked. The user can
also enter the label manually in the text field.
- : This button is active by default. Each time the user picks an entity in the 3D
view, the latter is highlighted in green and its characteristics are displayed in the
dialog.
- Entity Analysis: This list displays various information on the entity picked such as
the area, the normal, etc.
Note:
· If the user chooses to pick the entity, the entity analysis is displayed
automatically.
· If the user chooses to enter the label of the entity manually, the Analyze function
button must be activated in order to have the list displayed.
· If the active state is a post-process state and a contour is displayed, it gives the
value of the countour display corresponding to the entity.
Function Buttons
- Analyze: Displays the analysis sheet of the entity chosen in the case where the user
enters the label manually.
- Clear: Clears the Analysis list.
ANALYSIS
Measure Distance
MEASURE DISTANCE
This dialog allows the user to get information on the distance between two selected
entities.
The Measure Distance dialog
Description
- The upper two drop-down lists allow the user to select the type of entity he wants
information on.
- : This button allows to pick the entity the user wants information on. If this is
the selected mode for choosing the entitie(s) then the label automatically appears in
the text field. Each time the user picks an entity in the 3D view, the latter is
ANALYSIS
Measure Distance
highlighted in green and a blue line is displayed to materialize the distance until the
second entity is picked. A green line materializes the final distance.
- Label: These text fields display the label of the chosen entites.
- Distance Analysis: This window lists the distance information of the entities
selected (For example: distance along X, Y, Z global axes). If the user chooses the
picking mode to select the entities, then the distance analysis list is displayed
automatically. If the user chooses to enter the labels of the chosen entities,
manually, then it is necessary to activate the Measure function button in order for
the list to be displayed.
Function Buttons
- Measure: Displays the distance measurement when the user chooses to enter the
labels of the entities manually.
- Clear: Clears the Distance Analysis list.
ANALYSIS
Measure Angle
MEASURE ANGLE
This dialog allows the user to measure radius and angles by the definition of three
points and measure an angle between two vectors. This dialog is called up by the
Analysis/Information on sub-menu.
The Measure Angle dialog
Radius and Angles Between 3 Positions

- Position 1, Position 2, Position 3: Defines the position either by using the help of
the wizard or by typing its coordinates in the text fields. For each point the definition
is identical. Each time the user picks an entity in the 3D view, the latter is
highlighted in green and a blue line is displayed to materialize the distance until the
next entity is picked. Three green lines materialize the final angle.
- Radius and Angles list: This list displays information on the radius and angle values
between the three selected points (for example: angle at posititon 1,2,3, center
position,etc.). If the user chooses the picking mode to select the entities, then the
distance analysis list is displayed automatically. If the user chooses to enter the
ANALYSIS
Measure Angle
labels of the chosen entities, manually, then it is necessary to activate the Measure
function button in order for the list to be displayed.
Angle between 2 Vectors

- Vector 1, Vector 2: A vector is defined either by using the help of the wizard or by
typing its components in the text fields. For each vector the definition is identical.
Function Buttons
- Measure: Displays the distance measurement when the user chooses to enter the
labels of the entities manually.
- Clear: Clears the angle and radius list.
ANALYSIS
Strain path
STRAIN PATH
This dialog, called by the Analysis/Curve analysis sub-menu, allows to visualize as a
curve the values reached by the major strain / stress and minor strain / stress of an
element during all the computation states.
The Strain path dialog
Strain path of
- Element label: allows to pick an element in the 3D view or set the label (if the label
is typed in, the Plot button validates the input).
- Fiber: allows to select for which fiber of the element the path must be computed.
- Linearity check: after the path is computed, a check is done on the growth of the
points ordinates (with a tolerance) state after state. If this check is satisfied, the
displayed path can be considered as valid and a green marker appears in the dialog.
If it is not satisfied, a read marker appears. Pushing the Options button brings up the
Linearity check dialog (see below). You can set the check tolerance in this dialog.
ANALYSIS
Strain path
FLD window
- The three options allow to select the way the path is displayed in the FLD window
(if it is open). The user can either disable this display or enable it with or without
clearing any previous path before adding a new one.
- Clear paths: deletes all paths from the FLD window.
Curve plotter
- The three options allow to select the way the path is displayed in the curve plotter
window. The user can either disable this display or enable 2D curve creation (the
same for all paths or one curve per path).
Function Buttons
ANALYSIS
Curve Plotter
CURVE PLOTTER
The Curve Plotter dialog enables the user to create or modify 2D curves inside a project
in progress. The plotter icon is visible wherever a curve can be a function

parameter. Example: material law, imposed forces, section analysis...
Toolbar Graphical window

Curve list panel
The Curve Plotter dialog
ANALYSIS
Curve Plotter
Right-Click Menu
The layout of the Curve Plotter dialog illustrated above can be modified using a right-
click menu inside the Graphical Window. This menu also enables the user to create,
destroy, or modify a curve.
Right-click menu
This sub-menu provides the following functions:

- Create: This option displays the Curve Creation dialog. Only Pre-process curve can
be created. The type of the curve cannot be changed once the curve is created.
- Copy: Copies the curve selected in the Curve List panel (if several curves are
selected, an error message is displayed). The user needs to define the name of the
curve created, as well as its type (and possibly the associated material if this is a
hardening curve or a FLC).
Note:
If the curve copied is of the hardening type, it replaces the hardening curve
associated with the object selected, which will then be destroyed.
- Delete: Deletes the selected curves (prohibited for the hardening curves).
- Plotter properties: Displays or hides the Plotter properties dialog.
Toolbar
Button Purpose
Brings up the Curve Creation dialog. Only Pre-process curve can be created.
The type of the curve cannot be changed once the curve is created.
Creates a forming limit curve (FLC) which can afterwards be used in the
Forming Limit Diagram. It brings up in succession:
- The FLC curve creation dialog to give a name to this curve and define the
object to which the curve apply.
- The Curve Plotter dialog where the available creation modes are by a list
of point or by Keeler law.
Copies the curve selected in the Curve List panel.
ANALYSIS
Curve Plotter
Button Purpose
Suppresses one or several curves from the Curve List panel.
Reads a curve file. This button brings up the File Selector dialog to open a
curve file (ASCII *.asc or binary *.bf).
Exports all the visible curves. This button brings up the File Selector dialog
to save a curve file (ASCII *.asc or binary *.bf).
Import a curve and replace the active curve (ASCII *.asc only).
Export active curve (ASCII *.asc only).
Saves the active 2D curve window. This button brings up the File Selector
dialog to save an image file.
Insertion of curve points:
- By a mouse click in the Graphical Window, the user can add a point to the
curve. The curve is redrawn and the point list is automatically updated.
Translation of curve points:
- If a curve point is selected by a mouse click, it can be moved by dragging
the cursor inside the limits defined by the previous and next point
abscissas.
Deletion of curve points:
- By a mouse click onto a point of a curve in the Graphical Window, the
user suppresses the point. The curve is redrawn and the point list is
automatically updated.
Hides or displays the Curve List and Curve Properties panel so that the
Graphical Window fill the entire 2D screen.
Zooms in on a rectangular area specified by its center and a corner*.

Working steps:
- The first click specifies the center of the zoom area.
- Release the position to specify one of the corners.
The window’s size ratio (width/height) must not be considered during the
Zooms in on a rectangular area specified by two corners*.
Working steps:
- The first click specifies the first corner of the zoom area.
- Release the position to specify the opposite corner.
*
This option is also available for a 2D graphical window
ANALYSIS
Curve Plotter
Button Purpose
The window’s size ratio (width/height) must not be considered during the
Reset the zoom*.
Graphical Window
Each curve is plotted with a different color in a 2D window.
When the user moves the mouse cursor over a curve point, the coordinates of this point
are displayed in a pop-up window. These points are the real construction points for the
curve, i.e. they can be edited (see Curve properties dialog). The name of the curve is
always displayed next to the curve.
The scaling of the grid and axes is dynamic, which implies that the grid and axes will be
automatically either increased or decreased according to a zoom or a resizing of the
window.
Zooming
The user will have the possibility to zoom in and zoom out the graphical view in a way
that is standard in the software. There are four zoom operations, centered zoom, corner
zoom, zoom out and reset zoom, all described in the Camera Toolbar section.
Curve List
This dialog is used for the selection of curves. Each button is associated with a type of
curve. When a button is pressed the curve names associated with the type are displayed
in the list:
- : Pre-process curve.
- : Hardening curve.
- : Forming Limit Curve.
- : Profile curve.
- : Time history.
Curves selected in the list are automatically displayed in the Graphical Window.
ANALYSIS
Curve Plotter
Curve Properties
This dialog is used to edit the curve parameters. The curve edited is the one selected in
the Curve List panel (see above). If several curves are selected in the latter dialog, the
program chooses the first one.
The dialog is divided into the three following tabs.
General
- Curve name, Abscissa label, Ordinate label: These text fields can be used to modify
the name, X and Y axis legends of the selected curve.
- Line style: This panel defines the line style of the curve.
· : The button brings up the standard Color dialog to assign a color to the
curve.
· : This drop-down list allows the user to select various types of line:
straight, slashed, dotted, axis.
· : This drop-down list allows the user to select various line width.
- Marker Style: When markers are used to represent the points on the curves it is
possible to modify their type in this panel.
· : Three shapes are available for the marker representation.
· Four sizes are available for the marker representation.
Definition
- Mode: This drop-down list determines the layout of the Definition tab. The contents
of this drop-down list is also dependent of the type of curve currently selected. The
possible choices are the following:
· Point list (available for all type of curve): It allows the user to modify any point
of the curve. A curve is represented as a linear interval function defined by
series of 2 values (x,y), where x is the abscissa and y is the value of the
corresponding function.
Value pairs x, y are entered in the Abscissa and Ordinate columns after double-
clicking onto the field to edit.
· Hollomon law (for material curve only): It enables the user to define a law of
behavior for an isotropic or an orthotropic material. If the material is orthotropic,
the curve applies along the rolling direction. The user must specify parameters K
and n for the function
σ = K .ε n
Parameters to define for the plotting are the step of point creation and the max
number of points to discretize the curve.
ANALYSIS
Curve Plotter
· Power law (for material curve only): Elastic-plastic behavior can be input as a
power law. The user must specify parameters a, b, n for the function
σ = a + b.ε pn ,
where ε p is the effective plastic strain.
· Krupkowsky law (for material curve only): Elastic-plastic behavior can be input
as a kupkowsky law. The user must specify parameters k, Eps0 ( ε o ), n for the
function
σ = K (ε o + ε p ) ,
n
where ε p is the effective plastic strain.

· Keeler (for Forming Limit Curve only): Defines a forming limit curve based on
the Keeler and Goodwin model.
Parameters needed:
Thickness (expressed in millimeters).
Coefficient n of Hollomon's law (hardening coefficient).
These two values can be estimated from the material properties of the
object to which the curve is related by pressing the Estimate button.
A warning message reminds the thickness unit (the object could have
a thickness expressed in another unit, this value must then be
converted).
The user can also type in the values directly in the text fields. The
curve is limited by straight line Y = X.
- Apply: Validates the parameters entered above and redraws the curve in the
Graphical Window.
- Reset: Resets the input data to their default values.
Operator
- Mode: This drop-down list determines the layout of the Operator tab. It enables the
user to choose among arithmetic operators. The possible choices are the following:
· Affine Transformation: Abscissas and ordinates are respectively defined by
X = Ax + B and
Y = Cy +D
· Velocity control: Draws a velocity curve for the punch from known parameters
(initial, end and maximum velocity, stroke distance).
· Mathematical operators on X: Provides some arithmetic operators, predefined by
the program that can be applied on abscissa values.
ANALYSIS
Curve Plotter
· Mathematical operators on Y: Provides some arithmetic operators, predefined by

the program that can be applied on ordinate values.
- Apply: Validates the parameters entered above and draws the curve in the Graphical
Window.
Keeler and Goodwin Law

This Forming Limit Curve has been used for about twenty years and has yielded
numerous successful results. It must be noted, however, that this empiric formula was
obtained from experimental trials on standard steel test specimens and that the
thicknesses never exceeded 5mm. As for new steels, the Keeler and Goodwin FLC
seems to be below the experimental curves and are therefore rather restrictive.
Important...
- the validity of the Keeler and Goodwin law is not verified for steel with a thickness
in excess of 5mm.
- do not draw hasty conclusions when applying the law to new steels (deep drawing
steels, high tensile steels, high strength steels, Dual-Phasis steels...). It might
underestimate or overestimate the forming capabilities of these new materials.
- the generalization of the Keeler and Goodwin law to materials with a hardening
coefficient in excess of 0.21 is not conclusive.
- do not use the Keeler and Goodwin law on aluminium.
ANALYSIS
Curve Plotter
Curve Creation
The Curve creation dialog
Only Pre-process curve can be created.

- New curve name: Defines the name of the curve.
- Definition mode: Defines how the curve is built.
· Independent curve: A single curve can be created by point list definition, laws or
arithmetic operators.
· From 1 curve: An operator such as Offset or Affine transformation is applied to
an existing curve to create a new one.
· From several curves: The user combines several curves using arithmetic
operators to obtain a new curve.
· Dynamic (for From 1 curve or From several curves only): The curves defined
with this option are automatically updated if their parent curve(s) is (are)
modified.
- Mode: The content of this drop-down list is dependent of the choice made in the
Definition mode panel above.
· Point list (for Independent curve only): A curve is defined as a linear interval
function by series of 2 values (x,y), where x is the abscissa and y is the value of
ANALYSIS
Curve Plotter
the corresponding function.

Value pairs x, y are entered in the Abscissa and Ordinate columns after double-
clicking onto the field to edit. The program controls the coherence of the
abscissa values entered, i.e. a given point must be inside the interval defined by
the previous and next points.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the curves definition. The curve is then added to the Curve List panel
with a prefix Copy followed by the name of the origin curve.
- Cancel: Cancels the curve creation.
Plotter Properties
The dialog is divided into the two following tabs.
General
The Plotter Properties dialog – General tab
- Chart title: Title which is displayed in the Graphical Window and on the printed
output.
- Curves: Two toggles can be activated to respectively set the same line width for all
the curves and to represent curve construction points as markers.
- Grids: Two buttons are used to control the display of the vertical and horizontal
lines of the grid.
ANALYSIS
Curve Plotter
Axis
In this tab the user controls the axis parameters of curves.
The Plotter Properties dialog – Axis tab
- Abscissa axis: The abscissa axis is the same irrespective of the number of curves
selected. By default, abscissa axis is displayed according to a linear scale. Bounds
are automatically calculated by the program when Automatic range toggle is active.
Min and Max fields can be used to set bounds for the axis.
- Ordinate axis: The ordinate axis can be set independently for each curve using the
Curve drop-down list. In this case, it is advisable not to display too many curves
with different scales, for reasons of clarity. When toggle is active only one Y-axis
is displayed for all the curves. Bounds are automatically calculated by the program
when Automatic range toggle is active. Min and Max fields can be used to set bounds
for the axis. This latter capability is useful for curve adjustment. Bounds are not
modified when the view is zoom-in or zoom-out.
ANALYSIS
Model locking
MODEL LOCKING
This transformation allows the user to lock certain degrees of freedom of the model (by
certain nodes), and to amplify the displacements of the other nodes. When the
amplification factor is equal to 1, this corresponds to the cancellation of the global
movement of the rigid body (change of visualization system of the model).
This transformation is applied to each state loading and calculated by imposing the
displacements of 1, 2 or 3 nodes distinct from the model (according to the number of
symmetry planes).
The Model Locking dialog
Description
- Lock the model: Activates the locking transformation on the nodes of the model.
- Node 1, Node 2 and Node 3: The three nodes can be picked in the 3D view or their
numbers can be typed in the text fields.
· If there is no symmetry plane detected in the project, three nodes are necessary.
They have the following imposed movements:
Node 1: Fixed node, its displacement is always nil.
Node 2: Node with a translation movement along the initial (Node 1,
Node 2) straight line.
Node 3: node with a movement along the initial plane (Node 1, Node
2, Node 3).
· If one symmetry plane is detected in the project (one or several parallel planes),
two nodes are required. They have the following imposed movements (where
Nor the normal of these planes):
Node 1: node with a translation movement on the straight line
defined by the initial node Node 1 and the Nor direction:
ANALYSIS
Model locking
Its projection on the symmetry plane(s) is constant. This node will be

fixed if it is included along a symmetry plane.
Node 2: Node with a movement along the plane perpendicular to the
symmetry plane and that passes through the initial Node 1 and Node 2
nodes:
Its projection along the symmetry plane(s) remains on the straight
line that passes through the projected points P1 and P2 and through
the initial points Node 1 and Node 2.
· If two non-parallel symmetry planes are detected in the project, only one node is
necessary. It has the following imposed movement:
Node 1: Node with a movement along the plane perpendicular to two
symmetry planes and passing through the initial node Node 1:
This node will be fixed if it is included in the intersection of the
symmetry planes.
- Amplification Factor: Multiplying coefficient applied to the displacements. It must
be positive or nil (if it is nil, all the nodes are fixed).
- Display Symbol: Displays the triangle formed by the 3 nodes (if no symmetry plane
is detected), or the line formed by the two nodes (if a symmetry plane is detected).
Function Buttons
- Apply: Validates the locking of the model and displays symbol on node locked (if
this option has been activated).
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any actions.
Notes:
· If the user applies this transformation, he can only choose the first state
available as reference states in isodisplacements. In addition, this isovalue will
display the effective displacements during the calculation (following the
cancellation of the movement of the rigid body) and will not take into account
the above amplification factor.
· The user must select the nodes among those of the first state available, since
they must be present in all the states of the project.
· This transformation is available in post-process only.
ANALYSIS
Model reporting
MODEL REPORTING
This dialog allows to create a report file containing information (number of entities in
the objects…) about the model. The report is an HTML file with eventually an image
file.
The Model reporting dialog
Report file
- Directory: Defines the directory that will contain the report files. The button
next to the input field opens a Browser for Folder dialog from which the user may
select a directory for the location. The default directory is either the reporting
default directory defined in the Options dialog or the last directory where a report
file was created or open.
- File name: Name of the report file. The file extension should be .html or .htm.
- Add image of active view: Captures and adds in the report file an image of the active
3D view.
Objects to describe
- This list displays all the model objects. The user selects here the objects whose
description must be included in the report.
Function Buttons
- Save: Creates and saves the report file and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without creating any report.
ANALYSIS
Model reporting
IMAGE REPORTING
This dialog allows to capture an image from the active view and create an image file for
use in a report.
The image reporting dialog
Filename
- Name of the image file
Type
- Image file format. Since the image is created for a report, only Web formats (PNG,
JPEG and VRML) are available here.
Parameters
These parameters are disabled for VRML file format.
- Color mode: image color resolution. The available resolutions depend on the
selected file format.
ANALYSIS
Image reporting
- Width: image width in pixels

- Height: image height in pixels
- White background: when this option is activated, the image background is white
Function Buttons
- Save: Creates and saves the image file and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without creating any image.
ANALYSIS
Image reporting
MATERIAL REPORTING
This dialog allows to create a report containing information about the material attributes
of some model objects. The report is an HTML file with eventually some image files.
The Material reporting dialog
Report file
ANALYSIS
Material reporting
Objects
- This list displays all the objects which have material attributes. The user selects here
the material of which of these objects must be included in the report.
Curve image parameters

These parameters allow to chose the format of images that will be created in the report
to visualize material curves (hardening, forming limit…)
- Format: only one format is available here : PNG format
- Color mode: 256 colors or 65536 levels of gray
- Width: width in pixels
- Height: height in pixels
- White background: when this option is activated, the background of images is white
Function Buttons
ANALYSIS
Material reporting
PROCESS REPORTING
This dialog allows to create a report file containing information about all the attributes
defined for some calculation stages. The report is an HTML file with eventually an
image file.
The Process reporting dialog
Report file
3D view.
Stage
- This list displays the calculation stages defined in the current project. The user
selects here the stages for which the attributes must be included in the report.
Function Buttons
ANALYSIS
Report table
REPORT TABLE
This dialog allows to create a report file containing information (position or contour
value) about some of the nodes or elements of the model. The report is an HTML file
with eventually an image file.
The Report table dialog
Report file
3D view.
ANALYSIS
Report table
Selection
- Value type: The user can choose here to report the coordinates of some nodes or the
contour value of some elements.
- Entity/Object: If the Coordinates mode was selected, the user can type in the label of
the nodes or pick them in the 3D view to add them to the table. If the Contour mode
was selected, he can type in the label of the elements or pick them in the 3D view to
add them to the table. Two picking modes are available : pick one single node or
element and pick one object. If an object is picked, all nodes or elements of this
objects are added to the table.
- : deletes selected items from the table of nodes / elements to report.

- The reported information (node or element label, position or contour value) can be
visualized in the table.
Function Buttons
ANALYSIS
Draw-in
DRAW-IN
The aim of the « draw-in » functionality is to analyze some specific profiles. In top
view, the profiles are straight lines, limited by a reference contour (usually the initial
blank contour) and the blank sheet contour (free edges). The top view is defined by a
reference normal (which is usually Z). The planes in which profiles are built are defined
by a point (also called « measure point »), a « measuring vector » , and the reference
normal. These lines are projected on the die surface to obtain 2D « geodesic » lines and
we compute their length. This functionality is available in any post-process state.
ANALYSIS
Draw-in
The Draw-in dialog
Global parameters
- Reference contour: this contour is used as reference. The intersection of the measure
plane and this contour gives the 1st extremity of the geodesic line. This contour can
be a 3D curve or the contour of the blank in another state of the analysis. Contours
are put in a drop list : all 3D curves and all states. If the user selects blank in another
state then the free edges are computed in the chosen state on object « blank object »
and a new 3D curve is created. By default the contour can be the first 3D curve
found in the model, or if there are no 3D curves, the contour of the blank in the
initial state. When switching reference contour the computed profiles are removed.
All measure planes remain unchanged. The user can click Compute to update the
« geodesic lines ».
ANALYSIS
Draw-in
- Blank object: the free edges of that object are the contour to analyse. The measure
points are on that contour. A point on that line is the 2nd point of the geodesic line.
This object is chosen in a drop list among all objects with « surface_blank »
property. By default , the plane object is the first object with « surface_blank »
property found in the model. When switching blank object, the computed profiles
are removed. All measure planes remain unchanged but measure points are
recomputed by intersection of the plane with new free edges. The user can click
Compute to update the « geodesic lines ».
- Reference normal: this vector is the normal of the reference plane (top view). This
plane is used to set the measuring vectors. A measure plane is defined by the
measuring vector, the reference normal and the measure point (on the blank
contour). The standard vector custom control provides all capabilities needed.
- Die object: all segments joining the reference contour to measure points are
projected on that object in the direction of the reference normal. Consequently, all
« geodesic » lines are on the die object’s surface. This object is chosen in a drop list
among all objects with « surface_tool » property. By default , the die object is the
first object with « surface_tool » property found in the model. When switching
blank object, the computed profiles are removed. The user can click Compute to
update the « geodesic lines ».
Set planes
- Set measure points/planes: these points are on the blank contour. There are 3 ways
for setting the points. One mode is manual (pick points) , two modes are automatic.
These modes are selected in combo box.
ANALYSIS
Draw-in
· Pick points :
the user can pick a 3D point on the blank contour to delete or create a
measure point. The standard position-picking tool can be plugged. If the
mode is « creation » then the measure point is created only if the reference
normal and the measuring vectors are correct (not null). Whenever possible,
compute the point on measure contour. If point cannot be computed
(intersection of the plane and free edges not found) then this plane will be
skipped in the draw-in computation. To pick a plane in 3D : use the standard
picking of point and search the nearest plane. At each measure point, a
marker is drawn to ease the picking of planes/points.
· Automatic:
There are 2 automatic modes to generate measure planes :
The first mode is « Set planes number ». The user sets the number
of planes he wants to create between 2 planes he has previously built.
The 2 planes must be selected in the list and have the same
measuring vector.
The second mode is « Set interval ». The user sets the maximal
distance between planes that will be built between 2 planes he has
previously built. The 2 planes must be selected in the list and have
the same measuring vector.
To start the automatic generation click on the button below :
To select the planes click directly in the list, only 2 planes

selected.
ANALYSIS
Draw-in
- Measure vector : this vector gives the direction of the sample. It is used to build the
measure plane. This vector can be displayed in the 3D when the plane is fully
defined.
ANALYSIS
Draw-in
Function Buttons
- Compute: this is the main action button. If at list one measure plane is defined, it
will build and project the line (between the measure point and the reference point)
on the die object. The projection is done in the direction of the reference normal. To
compute the projection we can use the « section » capabilities available for options
« profiles » and « check die sections ». The 3D « geodesic » lines are then displayed
with 3D annotations mentioning their number, their length etc…
- Clear all: reinitializes the dialog
- Top view : this button changes the camera position to view the objects in the
reference normal direction. Once draw-in is reported in the 3D it is a shortcut to 2D
representation.
- Close: closes the dialog
ANALYSIS
Analysis Dialog
ANALYSIS DIALOG
This docking dialog is used to access pre and post-processing tools, and in particular for
the preparation of results for display. Depending on the type of checking applied to the
model, four tabs are used:
- Contours: The function of this tab is to display iso-contours of geometrical
characteristics or variables computed from a deformed mesh file.
- Section: Allows the user to create, modify, display, duplicate, and delete cutting
planes.
- Curves: Enables the evolution curves to be plotted for values stored during PAM-
STAMP 2G calculation.
- Analysis: Groups miscellaneous tools.
Contours
Variable list
The Analysis dialog – Contours tab
The different components of this tab are the following:

- Display: If active, any option changed in the dialog will update the active 3D
window.
- : Displays isolines on the model. Each of these lines mark the positions where
the contour value is constant. This option is an addition to the Normal, Smoothed
and Banded display modes described below. It is included in the Isolines display
mode.
ANALYSIS
Analysis Dialog
- : Displays in the upper left corner of the active 3D window a legend containing
all information about the variable: name, minimum and maximum values, color -
value scale. A double-click on the legend brings up the Legend Configuration
dialog to modify color or legend level for results displayed as iso-contours, by zone
or by level. This legend can also be dragged and dropped anywhere in the window.
- : Recomputes the contour to take the parameters changes into account.
- Variable List: A drop-down list is used to select the variable or characteristic to
display. This drop-down list is structured like a tree where the file icon represents
a group of variables or characteristics and the red toggle , the characteristic that
can be displayed.
The possible variables are the following:

· Thickness
Value
Thinning
· Strain
Value
Directional
Major
Minor
Plastic - Membrane
Plastic - Max. over thickness
Plastic - Min. over thickness
Strain rate - Membrane
Tensor
Major
Minor
Major and Minor
ANALYSIS
Analysis Dialog
· Stress
Value
Directional
Major
Minor
Max. absolute
Min. absolute
Equivalent - Membrane
Tensor
Major
Minor
Major and Minor
· FLD
Strain
Zones by FLC
Zones by Quality
Rupture risk
Stress
Zones by FLC
Rupture risk
· Kinematics
Displacement
Norm
Directional
Vector
Velocity
Norm
Directional
Vector on node
Vector on element
· Energy
Internal
Hourglass
Membrane
Bending
Transversal shear
· Mesh Quality
Size
Characteristic length
Shell aspect ratio
Volume
Area
Edge length
ANALYSIS
Analysis Dialog
Shell joining angle

Angle between shells
Curvature radius
Inner shell angle
Warping angle
Maximum inner triangular angle
Maximum inner quadrangular angle
Minimum inner triangular angle
Minimum inner quadrangular angle
· Undercut
By zones
Angles with normal
· Distance
Distance between objects
· Draw depth
Draw depth/ Model
Draw depth/ Binder
· Numerical
Refinement level
Wrinkle criterion
· Contact
Pressure
Normal (current)
Tangent
Normal (maximum over time)
Marker
Current
Previous
· Position
· Imported
Imported from file
- Display Mode: Variables or vectors may be displayed in 5 different ways according
to the selection in this drop-down list and to their type:
· Normal (scalar): Displays one value per element. For nodal variables the
element value is computed as the middle value of all nodes defining the element.
The structure is visualized according to the selected view type with one color
per element representing the intensity of the scalar variable.
· Smoothed (scalar): Displays one value per node using the hardware Gouraud
algorithm for interpolating colors between the nodes defining the elements.
· Banded (scalar): Displays one value per node using a texture mapping between
the nodes defining the elements. This results in a banded color distribution in the
elements.
ANALYSIS
Analysis Dialog
· Length depends on norm (vector): The length of the vector depends on the
result value.
· Fit in element (vector): The size of the element delimits the size of the vector.
Section
This tab allows the user to cut the model by a section plane and display either the model
partially cut or the intersection of the model with the section plane. In the intersection
mode, the contour values (if a contour is selected in the view) are also graphically
represented by lines whose thickness is variable.
The Analysis dialog – Section tab
- : Allows to position a section plane onto the model displayed into the active
3D window. Pressing the arrow at the right of the button brings up a menu
When the button is pressed, the option that was selected in the top of this menu
becomes active. The user can then either move the plane by picking a point or a
node. He can also directly set the plane normal to be one of the main axes or open
the Position Plane dialog by selecting the More options item .
ANALYSIS
Analysis Dialog
- : Pressing this button opens a new view in which the section defined by the
current section plane is displayed in 2D mode.
Note:
In this window the section cannot be rotated with the mouse. Other mouse
movements are available (translation, zooms, etc.).
- : This button brings up the Section planes dialog which allows the user to
manage (create / delete / rename) the existing section planes.
- : This button brings up the New contour cut dialog in which a curve can be
created by analyzing a result along a section of the model.
- : Allows to create 3D curves from the section. It brings up the Create 3D curve
from section dialog (see below).
- Section plane: This drop-down list allows the user to select the section plane that
defines the section displayed in 3D or 2D section modes. A Default Section is
always available at the center of the model, in the YZ plane.
- Plane display: This drop-down list allows the user to select the display mode of the
selected section plane. Four modes are available : not visible, box, grid and
transparent.
- : this wheel allows the user to move the selected section plane
by clicking on the wheel, holding the mouse button down and moving on the right
or the left. The farther from the wheel axis the user clicked, the stronger the plane
displacement is. This allows fine to fast displacement.
- : when this button is pressed, a wheel action rotates the section plane around its
local X axis. This axis is represented in the view by a red line at one corner of the
plane.
- : when this button is pressed, a wheel action rotates the section plane around its
local Y axis. This axis is represented in the view by a blue line at one corner of the
plane.
- : when this button is pressed, a wheel action translates the section plane along its
normal.
ANALYSIS
Analysis Dialog
- No section: This is the default mode. None of the sections listed in the Plane list are
applied to the active model.
- 3D section: The active section of the Plane list is applied to the model in the active
3D window. The part of the model located at one side of the plane is hidden.
- 2D section: The active section of the Plane list is applied to the model and the
window is in 2D section mode. Only the intersection of the plane with the model is
shown.
- Reverse: Reverses the section (i.e. the visible part and the cut part).
- Options: This button calls up the Section options dialog, which allows the user to
control some section display parameters (mainly in 2D mode).
Right-Click Menus
When the user moves the cursor of the mouse in the 3D or 2D cross section windows,
some of the functions presented in this dialog can be performed through right-click
menus.
Section capabilities available in the right-click Section capabilities available in the right-
menu of the 3D window click menu of the 2D window
ANALYSIS
Analysis Dialog
Curves
The values are read from the <project>.his file.
The Analysis dialog – Curves tab
Description
- X: This drop down list is used to select the variable on the X-axis.
- Y: This drop down list is used to select the variable on the Y-axis.
If the definition of variables requires new parameters, another dialog will appear.
This dialog can also be called up by the button.
- Plot History: Build the history curve and opens the Curve Plotter to visualize it.
- : This button brings up the Curve Plotter.
List of variables
The possible choices for variables depend on the contents of the history file, which is
determined by the attributes assigned to the objects in the pre-process which was at the
origin of the calculation. When a variable is not accessible, the choice is shaded out in
the list of options. Below is the description of all the possible choices in the two option
lists, and any dialog that may appear:
- Time
- Progression
ANALYSIS
Analysis Dialog
- Global:
· Total energy
· Kinetic energy
· Internal energy density
· Hourglass energy density
· External work
· Time step
- Objects: An intermediate dialog appears in which the user may chose the object on
which the variable is measured.
· Hourglass energy
· Internal energy density
· Kinetic energy
· Shell membrane energy
- Thickness:
· Value
· Thinning
- Strain:
· Major
· Minor
· Plastic – Membrane
· Strain rate
· Plastic – Max. over thickness
· Plastic – Min. over thickness
- Stress:
· Major stress
· Minor stress
ANALYSIS
Analysis Dialog
· Max. absolute
· Min. absolute
· Equivalent stress – Membrane
- Shell energy:
· Membrane energy density
· Buckling energy density
· Transverse shear energy density
· Wrinkle criterion
- Node:
· Displacement
· Velocity
· Normal pressure
· Max. normal pressure
· Friction pressure
Analysis
The Analysis dialog – Analysis tab
The following functions are currently available:
- : Displays/hides the Animation toolbar.
- : Brings up the Kinematics checks dialog.
ANALYSIS
Analysis Dialog
- : Brings up the Flattening dialog to project a 3D curve on a list of objects, and

to monitor its evolution in the states.
- : Brings up the Model Locking dialog to lock degrees of freedom of the model
for the springback post-processing..
- : Brings up the Strain path dialog.
- : Brings up the Measure distance dialog to get information on the distance

between two selected entities.
- : Not yet implemented.
ANALYSIS
Analysis Dialog
LEGEND CONFIGURATION
The legend configuration dialog appears when the user double-clicks directly on the
legend of the active 3D view. It allows the user to modify certain display parameters of
the contour selected in the 3D view.
Values Range
The Scalar Contour Legend – Values range tab
- Automatic: Sets automatically the scale to the minimum and maximum value
calculated on the entities displayed in the 3D view.
- User-defined: Allows the user to define a constant range of values, regardless of the
entities displayed, and to assign a constant color to the entities whose isovalue is
outside of this range. This range and the associated colors are fixed.
· Maximum: When the isovalue of the entities is higher than the value indicated
here, a constant color is assigned to them, determined by the choice in the list of
options Color above on the right hand side.
The default color is WHITE.
· Minimum: When the isovalue of the entities is lower than the value indicated
here, a constant color is assigned to them, determined by the choice in the list of
options Color below on the right hand side.
The default color is WHITE.
· Fit: Adjusts the range to the maximum and the minimum of the entities
displayed (namely useful in the animation, when the automatic range is
calculated on all the states, and the user wishes to fix it to the current state).
ANALYSIS
Legend Configuration
Colors Range
The Scalar Contour Legend – Colors range tab
Entities whose isovalue is within the scale range have a corresponding color, defined in
degraded between two boundary colors. These colors are parameterizable by means of
their angles (between 100 and 359 degrees). Blue corresponds to an angle of 359
degrees (0 degree), red to 120 degrees, and green to 240 degrees.
The two boundary colors can be defined by dragging the two sliders inside the colored
area.
The Reverse button allows to reverse the two boundary colors.
The Reset button initializes the two boundary colors to their default values.
ANALYSIS
Graduations
The Scalar Contour Legend – Graduations tab
- Number: Allows the user to choose the number of values displayed in the scale.
(maximum 20, default : 9).
- Format: The Decimal option displays all the values in a decimal format (ex. 0.012).
The Exponential option displays all the values in an exponential format (ex. 1.2e-2).
The Auto option chooses automatically the decimal or exponential format, as a
function of the range of values (if the scope is lower than 1e-5, or if the values are
higher than 1.e+5, the exponential solution is selected, otherwise the decimal
solution is preferred). The Auto option is the default one.
- Decimals: Allows the user to choose the number of decimals displayed for each
value in the scale. (maximum 14, default : 6).
ANALYSIS
Isolines
The Scalar Contour Legend – Isoline tab
This page allows to define how the isolines are drawn when this options is activated.
- Line style: three styles are available : solid, dashed, dotted.
- Line width: width of the lines in pixels unit.
- Line color: selection of the lines color through a standard Color selection dialog.
- Display values: when this option is activated, a label is attached to some of the
isolines. This label displays the contour value represented by the lines.
ANALYSIS
Zone Color
The Scalar contour legend dialog layout differs when the isocolor is an isozone (level of
refinement, zone of risk failure for a FLD).
The Scalar Contour Legend – Zones color tab
- Zones: The user can change the color associated with each zone displayed. For this,
the user selects in the Zones list the zone whose color he wishes to modify.
- Colors: When an item (Zone or Level) is selected in the Zones list, the current color
of the selected item appears. Three colors are available:
· Black
· White
· Selected: The color is defined by an angle in degrees between 100 and 360.
Blue corresponds to an angle of 359°, red to an angle of 120°, and green to an
angle of 240°.
Note:
· The "mark" isozone selected in the active view disable these controls: this
isocolor uses indeed the colors of the "mark" objects (as if some ink had been
put on them and transmitted to entities by contact). Directly modify the color of
these objects (color attribute) to change the color of the zones.
ANALYSIS
Function Buttons
- OK: Applies the changes defined and closes the dialog.
- Apply: Applies the changes defined in the current tab.
- Cancels: Closes the dialog without performing any changes in the legend display.
ANALYSIS
THICKNESS
Description
Display of isocolors for the thickness of 3-node and 4-node elements. These isocolors
are available in the following modules:
- PAM-STAMP 2G pre-process.
- PAM-STAMP 2G post-process.
- The calculation of the thickness depends on the active module:
- Pre-process Pam-Stamp 2G Module : A thickness based on the following rules is
assigned to each of the 3-node or 4-node elements:
· If the element has its own thickness, then its value is that of the thickness. Two
methods enable an element to have a specific thickness:
Retrieving the element's thickness during the mesh import.
Retrieving the element's thickness by PAM-STAMP 2G picking.
· If it has not any proper thickness, it inherits that of the objects which contain it.
If several objects impose a thickness to it, its value will not be valid, else the
value will be the thickness of the only object that contains it (if this object is a
surface tool object without any thickness, the element will be assigned the value
0.).
- PAM-STAMP 2G post-process Module: The thickness of each element,
calculated by Pam-Stamp 2G, is saved in the state file that corresponds to the active
state. This is the value assigned to the element. The elements imported in the post-
process module have their own thickness if they were imported with them,
otherwise they have a Non Value.
Values are displayed at the elements.
Procedure
Select a state in the list displayed in the Project dialog.
In the drop-down list of the Contours tab of the Analysis dialog, activate the toggle
which corresponds to the type of value to display:
- Value: Thickness of the element.
- Thinning (Post-process module only): A dialog opens to choose between the True
and the Engineer value of thinning.
The value of the True thinning is: -ln (Th/Thi)
The value of the Engineer thinning is: 1 - (Th/Thi)
with
ANALYSIS
Thickness
Th: current thickness,

Thi: initial thickness.
The active 3D view will be updated as a function of the isocolor chosen. The display of
iso-values can be modified in the Legend Configuration dialog.
ANALYSIS
Thickness
STRAIN
Description
Display a strain isocolor in the active 3D view, as an isosurface or an isotensor. These
isocolors are available in the PAM-STAMP 2G post-process module.
Procedure
Select a state in the list displayed in the Project dialog. The strain of each element,
calculated by PAM-STAMP 2G, is saved in the state file which corresponds to the
active state.
which corresponds to the type of value to display.
Depending on the value chosen a dialog opens to:
- Select the fiber on which the strains are displayed (Upper, Membrane, Lower). For
top or bottom fiber, shell elements must be oriented.
- Choose the direction whose strain component is displayed
- Choose between the True and the Engineer value of strain.
The value of the True strain is: ln (1+((Lo-L)/Lo))
The value of the Engineer strain is: 1 - (L/Lo)
with
L: current length in major direction,
Lo: initial length in major direction.
The active 3D view will be updated as a function of the type of value chosen. The
display of contours can be modified in the Legend Configuration dialog.
Values
Display of the strain contours on the elements which correspond to the active 3D view.
The following choices are available:
- Directional: Strain along one direction.
For shell elements, the direction considered is first projected in the medium plane of
the element. Negative (or positive) value means that the element is compressed (or
drawn) along the selected direction.
- Major: Maximum of main strains.
- Minor: Minimum of main strains.
ANALYSIS
Strain
Tensors
Display of the strain contours on the elements which corresponds to the active 3D view.
- Major: Displays the maximum of main strain with its direction.
- Minor: Displays the minimum of main strain with its direction.
- Major and minor: Displays the major and minor strains.
Note:
· If the values obtained for the top or bottom fibers are not valid, check that
elements are correctly oriented.
ANALYSIS
Strain
STRESS
Description
Display a stress isocolor in the active 3D view, as an isosurface or an isotensor. These
isocolors are available in the PAM-STAMP 2G post-process module.
Procedure
Select a state in the list displayed in the Project dialog. The stress of each element,
active state.
Depending on the value chosen a dialog opens to:
- Select the fiber on which the stresses are displayed (Upper, Membrane, Lower). For
top or bottom fiber, shell elements must be oriented.
- To choose the direction whose stress component is displayed.
display of isovalues can be modified in the Legend Configuration dialog.
Values
Display of strain isosurfaces of the elements which correspond to the active 3D view.
- Directional: Stress along one direction.
For shell elements, the direction considered is first projected in the medium plane of
the element. Negative (or positive) value means that the element is compressed (or
drawn) along the selected direction.
- Major: Maximum of main stresses.
- Minor: Minimum of main strains.
- Equivalent: Stresses are calculated with:
· Von Mises's law for isotropic entities,
· Hill 48's law for orthotropic entities as per HILL 48's law with isotropic
hardening,
ANALYSIS
Stress
· Lemaitre/Chaboche's law for orthotropic entities as per HILL 48's law with
kinematic hardening,
· Barlat's law for orthotropic entities as per Barlat's law.
Tensors
Display of the stress isotensors of the elements which corresponds to the active 3D
view.
- Major: Displays the maximum of main stress with its direction.
- Minor: Displays the minimum of main stress with its direction.
- Major and minor: Displays the major and minor stresses.
Note:
· If the values obtained for the top or bottom fibers are not valid, check that
elements are correctly oriented.
ANALYSIS
Stress
FORMING LIMIT DIAGRAM (FLD)
Description
The FLD diagram is displayed in a 2D window and is juxtaposed to the 3D window
where the same results are displayed onto the structure. It contains points which
represent the shell elements and the external faces of bricks in the space of main strains
or stresses (minor in abscissa, major in ordinate). These main values are found again in
the strain/stress isocolors. For a given material it is possible to use a Forming Limit
Curve (FLC) which separates the diagram into two zones: above the curve, the points
correspond to elements in rupture. From this diagram and using the FLD, the user can:
- Group the elements per "zones" of diagram, a zone corresponding to a part of the
diagram delimited by FLCs.
- Group the elements per "zones" of quality (strains diagram only).
· Zone 1 : cracks. Points located above the forming limit curve.

· Zone 2 : excessive thinning. Points located between the forming limit curve and
the same curve decreased of 10% of the curve value at x=0.
· Zone 3 : safe zone.
· Zone 4 : insufficient stretching. Points located inside the circle whose center is
the origin and whose radius value is 0.002.
· Zone 5 : wrinkling tendency. Points located above the y=-x straight line and
under the y=((-1-Rm)/Rm)*x straight line (Rm = Average Lankford coefficient).
· Zone 6 : strong wrinkling tendency. Points located under the y=-x straight line.
- Quantify the "risk of rupture" per element, by measuring the distance d of the point
associated to the element to the FLC selected as reference. A negative value
corresponds to a point below the curve, positive to a point above.
· For the strains diagram, d corresponds to the distance in Y (constant minor
strain) to the FLC:
ANALYSIS
Forming Limit Diagram (FLD)
Note:
· If the point is on the left of the FLC, the curve is continued in the direction of the
first segment. If the point is on the right of the FLC, the curve is continued by
the line Y=X.
· For the stresses diagram, d corresponds to the minimal distance to the FLC :
Note:
· If the point is out of the definition domain of the FLC, the associated element
will have a NonValue.
ANALYSIS
Procedure
- Select a state in the list displayed in the Project dialog.
- To have access to the forming limit diagram window, the user must select in the
Analysis dialog the variable related to the FLD
The variables are classified into two types, which define the points of the diagram:
· Strain: X=minor strain and Y=major strain.
Zones by FLC: The diagram is separated into zones by the FLCs
displayed inside it. These FLC are those selected in the window.
Each zone corresponds to one part of the diagram located between
two FLCs, above and below all the FLCs. A default color is assigned
to each zone (from blue for the lowest zone of the diagram where the
risk is the lowest, to red for the zone where the risk is the highest),
which can be modified in the Legend Configuration dialog.
Only one fiber can be selected for the shell elements.
Zones by Quality: The diagram is separated into zones of quality. A
default color is assigned to each zone (from blue for the zone of
cracks to red for the zone of strong wrinkling tendency), which can
be modified in the Legend Configuration dialog.
Only one fiber can be selected.
Rupture risk: The value of each element corresponds to the distance
in the diagram between the point which represents the element and
the FLC. If the point is below the curve, the distance is multiplied by
-1, which means that the higher the value of the element, the higher
the risk of rupture, depending on the reference FLC selected.
Several fibers can be displayed on a single diagram, each of them
with a color (you can obtain the display of the associated legend in
the FLD Configuration dialog to recover the fiber-color
correspondence).
The value of the element in the 3D view is the maximum risk of the
fibers displayed (i.e. the fiber located most above the curve).
· Stress: X=minor stress and Y=major stress.
Zones by FLC: See explanations given above for strain.
Rupture risk: See explanations given above for strain.
ANALYSIS
- When the variable is selected it brings up the FLD (strain or Stress) Zones by dialog
in which the user can select one or several FLC curves and the fiber concerned.
- Click on OK to plot the diagram.
Note:
· The Create a FLC button brings up the Curve Plotter dialog where a Forming
Limit Curve can be created. On a more general basis, the curve plotter can be
used independently to edit all types of curves (modified, destroyed, imported,
exported).
Utilization of the Forming Limit Diagram (FLD)

The diagram is a 2D graphic window accompanied with a right-click menu with the
following capabilities:
- Fit Display: Fits the diagram in its window.
- Zoom Out: Zooms-out the FLD diagram,
- Create a FLC: Create a forming limit curve (FLC) which can afterwards be used in
the diagram. It brings up successively:
· The FLC curve creation dialog to give a name to this curve and define the object
to which the curve is applied.
· The Curve Plotter dialog.
- Plot a trajectory: Displays the strain trajectory followed by an element in the
diagram.
- Configure: Configures the diagram (graduations, drawing and displayed domain). It
brings up the FLD Configuration dialog.
ANALYSIS
The single selection and the screen area selection of elements are possible directly in the
diagram. This makes it possible, namely, to isolate risk points in by selection and also
inside an object.
It is also possible to use the Camera toolbar to perform zooms in the diagram.
FLD Configuration
Configuration of the display in the FLD graphic window. This dialog appears when the
user select the Configure option in the Right-click menu of the FLD.
The FLD Configuration dialog
Description
Additional Display
- Draw the legend: Displays the legend in the case of the risk of rupture isovalues
which show the correspondence between the fibers of the shell elements and the
colors of the points.
- Draw Y=X: Displays the y = x straight line.
- Draw constant thinning lines: display of the straight lines y = -x + y0 with y0 evenly
spaced (as per Step) between Minimal and Maximal. Value y0 corresponds to the
intersection of the straight line with the vertical axis. All the points located on this
straight line have a thickness strain equal to -y0.
ANALYSIS
Color of points
Use one color per fiber:

Use colors of elements: The points are displayed in the FLD with the same color as the
elements in the 3D view (default option).
Function Buttons
- OK: Applies the parameters defined above to the Forming Limit Diagram.
ANALYSIS
DISPLACEMENT
Description
Display of the isocolors or isovectors of the node displacements. This isocolor is
available in the post-process module.
Procedure
Select a state in the list displayed in the Project dialog. The displacement of each node
is the distance between its position in the active state selected in the list and its position
in the reference state (first state).
- Norm: Displays the iso-displacement in norm.
- Directional: Displays the iso-displacement along a direction. A new box appears that
allows the user to specify the direction along which the displacement will be
expressed. This direction will be normalized, if it is not.
- Vector: Displays the iso-displacement in the form of a vector field. A vector is the
resultant of the three components of displacement and is normalized.
display of iso-values can be modified in the Legend Configuration dialog.
Note:
· If nodes are fixed to eliminate the movement of a rigid body only the first state
can be chosen as a reference. Moreover, the real displacement will be displayed
(that is to say without taking into account the amplification factor).
ANALYSIS
Velocity
VELOCITY
Description
Display of isosurfaces or isovectors of the node velocities which correspond to the
active module. These isocolors are available in the post-process module.
Procedure
Select a state in the list displayed in the Project dialog. The velocity of each node,
active state. This value is assigned to the node.
- Norm: Displays the isovelocity in norm.
- Directional: Displays the isovelocity along a direction. A new box appears that
allows the user to specify the direction along which the displacement will be
expressed. This direction will be normalized, if it is not.
- Vector on node: Displays the iso-velocity in the form of a vector field. A vector is
the resultant of the three components of velocity and is normalized.
- Vector on element: Displays the projection of the vector which is the average of the
velocities of the nodes of the 3- or 4-node element on that element. For the bricks,
the vector displayed is the average vector of the velocities of the nodes of the
element. The origin of the vector is the center of the element. The color corresponds
to the norm of this projection for each element. This isovector allows the user to
visualize the flow of material on the shell elements.
ANALYSIS
Velocity
ENERGY
Description
Display an energy isocolor in the active 3D view, as an isosurface. These isocolors are
available in the PAM-STAMP 2G post-process module.
Procedure
active state.
Values
Display of energy isosurfaces of the elements which correspond to the active 3D view.
- Internal
- Hourglass
- Membrane
- Bending
- Transversal shear
ANALYSIS
Mesh Quality
MESH QUALITY
Description
This dialog allows the user to display the contours linked to the geometrical values of
the elements, classified in three parts: size of the mesh, inner angles of triangles and
quadrangles and angle between triangles and quadrangles. These contours are available
in the following modules:
- Meshing module.
- PAM-STAMP2G pre-process module.
- PAM-STAMP 2G post-process module.
- Values are displayed at the elements (except "elements angle" and Curvature radius:
at the edges)
Procedure
The active 3D view will be updated as a function of the isocolor chosen. The display of
iso-values can be modified in the Legend Configuration dialog.
The toggles are divided into 3 groups :
Size
- Characteristic length : This length is used by PAM-STAMP 2G to determine the
stability time step of each element. For elements with the same material property
and a low thickness with respect to the characteristic length, the stability time step is
proportional to the characteristic length.
See the user manual for more information on the value of the stability time step.
- Volume (brick elements): The value is the oriented volume. A negative value
indicates that the volume element is badly oriented (the nodes of the brick are not in
the correct order).
- Area : Displays contours on 2D elements classified by area size.
· 3-node elements: the value is the surface area of the element,
· 4-node elements: the value is the average surface area of the element (i.e. the
semi-norm of the vectorial product of the diagonal vectors).
- Length: 2-node elements or edges (you can choose): distance between the two
nodes of the entity.
ANALYSIS
Mesh Quality
Shell Joining Angle

- Angle between shells:
· If the edge belongs to only one element, the value is 0 (free edge).
· If the edge belongs to only two elements, the value is the angle between the
average normals of these two elements.
· If the edge belongs to more than two elements, the value is not valid (multiple
edge).
- Curvature radius: Parameter : 'valid' maximum radius. The interesting values of
radius are small values. To avoid a scale with a trend towards the infinite (flat
zones), the system will only display radii smaller than this value.
· If the edge belongs to only one element, the value is not valid (free edge).
· If the edge belongs only to two elements, let 'r' be the value of the radius of
curvature between these two elements; if 'r' is larger than the maximum 'valid'
radius, the value is not valid, else the value is equal to 'r'.
· If the edge belongs to more than two elements, the value is not valid (multiple
edge).
Remark : the free and multiple edges can be displayed using the options in the
View menu.
Inner Shell Angle

- Warping angle (4-node element): For each corner, the normal vector is determined
as perpendicular to the two edges. The value corresponds to the maximum angle (in
degrees) between two of these normals (which indicates the twisting level of the
element).
- Maximum inner triangular angle: The value is the maximum angle (in degrees)
between two successive edges of 3-node elements.
- Maximum inner quadrangular angle: The value is the maximum angle (in degrees)
- Minimum inner triangular angle: The value is the minimum angle (in degrees)
- Minimum inner quadrangular angle: The value is the minimum angle (in degrees)
ANALYSIS
Undercut
UNDERCUT
Description
This dialog allows the user to display the regions of a tool surface which cannot be seen
by an observer looking along the stamping direction.
This display is available in the following modules:
- Meshing module.
- Values are displayed at the elements.
Procedure
- By zones: This choice brings up a dialog in which the user defines the stamping
direction and the critical angle. The program will order elements into safe, critical
and undercut zones following the rule illustrated in the figure below:
Threshold = 90° + critical angle
Stamping
Undercut: α ≤ 90° direction
Critical: α ≤ Threshold
Safe: α > Threshold
α
G
n
Element
surface
A default color is assigned to each zone (red for undercut, blue for critical and green
for safe), which can be modified in the Legend Configuration dialog.
- Angles: This choice brings up a dialog in which the user defines the stamping
direction.
The active 3D view will be updated as a function of the isocolor chosen.
ANALYSIS
Undercut
DISTANCE BETWEEN OBJECTS
Description
Display a distance isocolor in the active 3D view, as an isosurface. These contours are
available in the following modules:
- Meshing module.
Values are displayed at the nodes.
Procedure (single state mode)
Select a state in the list displayed in the Project dialog.

The displayed isovalues are the minimal distances from the nodes of one set of objects
to the elements of another set of objects.
1st set of object

Objects list: the user can select in this list the objects composing the first set of objects
ANALYSIS
Distance to 2nd set : if this option is activated, the distances from the nodes of this set
of objects to the elements of the second set of objects will be computed and the values
will be displayed at the nodes of the first set.
: this button activates a tool to pick an object in the 3D view. This object is then
added to the first set of objects.
2nd set of object

Objects list: the user can select in this list the objects composing the second set of
objects
Distance to 1st set : if this option is activated, the distances from the nodes of this set of
objects to the elements of the first set of objects will be computed and the values will be
displayed at the nodes of the second set.
added to the second set of objects.
Type of distance
Numerical: the computed distances are purely geometric
Physical: the computed distances are the geometric distances minus half the elements
thickness (local or from material attributes)
Procedure (multiple state mode)
ANALYSIS
The displayed isovalues are the minimal distances from the nodes of one set of objects
to the elements of another set of objects.
When several projects and states are loaded and visualized (in multistate mode), the
distance contour dialog allows to select different project and state for the first set and
the second set of objects.
1st set of object

States list: the user can select in this list the state for which the position of nodes and
elements of the first set of objects must be considered.
Objects list: the user can select in this list the objects composing the first set of objects
Distance to 2nd set : if this option is activated, the distances from the nodes of this set
of objects to the elements of the second set of objects will be computed and the values
will be displayed at the nodes of the first set.
added to the first set of objects and the selected state is also updated according to the
picked object.
2nd set of object

States list: the user can select in this list the state for which the position of nodes and
elements of the first set of objects must be considered.
Objects list: the user can select in this list the objects composing the second set of
objects
Distance to 1st set : if this option is activated, the distances from the nodes of this set of
objects to the elements of the first set of objects will be computed and the values will be
displayed at the nodes of the second set.
added to the second set of objects and the selected state is also updated according to the
picked object.
Type of distance
Numerical: the computed distances are purely geometric
Physical: the computed distances are the geometric distances minus half the elements
thickness (local or from material attributes)
ANALYSIS
Numerical
NUMERICAL
Refinement
- Value: at the element (three or four nodes).
- Type: isozone.
Purpose
Display of the isocolors of levels of refinement of elements. These isocolors are
available in pre and post-process modules:
The calculation of the level depends on the active module.
Pre-process Module
This value corresponds to an adaptive level, following an calculation with refinement,
or a level definition.
All the elements imported or created by the pre-process module have, by default, a
refinement level equal to 1.
Post-process Module
The refinement level of each element, calculated by the solver, is saved in the state file
which corresponds to the active state. This is the value assigned to the element.
Wrinkle Criterion
This isovalue represents the variations of the normal about a reference normal, hence
the wrinkles. The displayed isocolor is the angle (in degrees) between the reference
normal and that of the elements, amplified by a certain factor: when the angle between
the normal of a plate element and the reference normal is small, this angle is amplified.
This value is assigned to the element.
ANALYSIS
Numerical
CONTACT PRESSURE
Description
Display of the normal and tangential contact pressure isocolors in the active 3D view, as
isosurface (Normal – Max. over time) or vector (Normal and Tangent). These isocolors
are available in the PAM-STAMP 2G post-process module.
Values are displayed at the elements for isosurfaces and at nodes for vectors.
Procedure
active state.
Values
This isocolor displays the maximum contact pressure value applied to each node by all
the elements which are in contact with it, calculated by PAM-STAMP 2G, and saved in
the state file which corresponds to the active state. This is the value, either normal or
tangential, which is assigned respectively to the element or node. This value makes it
possible, namely, to identify the zones where there is a contact (the normal contact
pressure there being non null).
- Normal (current)
- Tangent
- Normal (maximum over time)
ANALYSIS
Marker
MARKER
Description
Display of mark isocolors. These isocolors are available in the PAM-STAMP 2G post-
process module.
Values are displayed at the nodes.
Procedure
active state.
Values
This isocolor displays the nodes (and the elements through smoothing) which are:
- In contact with elements of objects which have a mark attribute between the
beginning of the calculation and the active state.
- In contact with the object elements which have the mark attribute.
The "marked" nodes take the color of the object which has the mark attribute.
ANALYSIS
Marker
SECTION PLANES
This dialog is used to manage sections.
The Section planes dialog
- Planes: Section names are displayed in this window.
- : Pressing this button brings up a dialog to enter the name of the new section.
After validation (Press OK), the Position plane dialog is opened. When the plane
position is defined an undefined section is added to the list.
-
- : Select one or several sections in the list and press this button.
- : Select a section in the list and press this button to enter a new name for the
section in the Name of the plane dialog.
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing any change.
ANALYSIS
Section Options
SECTION OPTIONS
This dialog controls the display of plane sections in the 2D and 3D views.
The Section options dialog
Contour Display
- When a contour is selected in a view with a 2D section displayed, the contour values
are represented by some thick lines whose thickness is a function of these values.
- Depends on widow size: when this mode is selected, a scaling factor depending on
the window size is applied to the lines thickness. This ensures that the range of line
thickness is well adjusted to the window.
- Represents real values: when this mode is selected, no scaling factor is applied. The
lines thickness are equal to the contour values. This mode is useful for contours
whose values are expressed in the same units than the model geometry (the
“thickness” contour for example)
- Null thickness value: reference value the representation of which is a line with a
zero thickness. Therefore, the more remote a value is from the reference value, the
thicker the line which represents this value.
- Thickness factor: fixed line thickness scaling factor (in addition to scaling factor
described above)
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the settings defined in the dialog and closes the dialog.
- Apply: Applies the settings defined in the dialog and keeps the dialog open.
ANALYSIS
Section Options
NEW CONTOUR CUT

This dialog makes it possible to plot a curve which represents either the variation of an
isovalue along a section of the model or the shape of the section.
The new contour cut dialog
Type
In this panel the user activates the toggle which corresponds to the type of profile to be
plotted.
- X=Cartesian Abscissa Y=Contour Value: Plotting of the isovalue as a function of the
cartesian abscissa of the section.
- X=Curvilinear Abscissa Y=Contour Value: Plotting of the isovalue as a function of
the curvilinear abscissa of the section. This selection must be completed by a
pathway direction defined with the and Reverse path button.

- X=Cartesian Abscissa Y= Cartesian Ordinate: Plotting of the geometrical profile
within the coordinate system of the section plane.
ANALYSIS
New contour Cut
Curve
- Name: Name of the curve.
- X Legend: Legend displayed on the X axis.
- Y Legend: Legend displayed on the Y axis.
Start Point
- : When active the user pick a point on the section in the 2D or 3D window (in
a 2D view only). The pointer of the mouse changes its appearance until a point
is picked. When the point is picked the section is colored in red and a red arrow
indicates in which direction the values are taken onto the section. The picked point
defines the origin of the curve.
- Reverse path: Makes it possible to change the direction of the section pathway.
- X value of the point: Displays the X curvilinear abscissa of the picked point.
Note:
· These two buttons are active in X=Curvilinear Abscissa Y=Contour Value mode
only.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the profile curve creation and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Cancels the curve creation and closes the dialog.
ANALYSIS
New contour Cut
LOAD SEVERAL STATES

This dialog is called up by the button of the Animation Toolbar. It allows the user to
select the time for displaying deformed structures and define animation over time in the
active 3D view. Two different computations may be animated simultaneously by first
loading the animation as usual for the first structure, then changing the active window
to the window displaying the second structure and select the desired states for this
second structure.
The Load several states dialog
Animated States
- All the states: By default all states are selected for animation.
- Selected states: Provides access to the list of post-process states of the active
project. This multiple-choice list enables the user to choose the states that will be
loaded.
Loading Progress
When the loading is initiated, a progress box appears in which the user can monitor the
progress of the loading.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the selection of states, loads the animation and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without loading any animation.
ANALYSIS
Animation Properties
ANIMATION PROPERTIES
This dialog is called up by the button of the Animation Toolbar.
The Animation properties dialog
Description
The Between states slider allows the user to select the frame refresh delay between
successive states.
The After last state slider allows the user to select the delay between the first and last
state displays.
Any modification of the settings takes effect immediately.
The real display speed will depend on the graphical board and the size of the displayed
structure.
Function Button
The Close button closes the dialog.
ANALYSIS
Animation Properties
SOLVER
SOLVER MENU
This menu controls the execution of a calculation.
The Solver menu
The different options and functions provided by the Solver menu are listed below:
- Start: Launches the calculation of the current project.
- Restart: Restarts a calculation from a dump file (*.rst).
- Status: Queries the status of the calculation from the solver (remaining time).
- Periodic Status: Not yet implemented.
- Messages: Displays the content of the output and message files (*.out and *.msg
respectively).
- Instant State: Plots a state immediately (*.res).
- Dump: Writes a restart file immediately (*.rst).
- Stop: Stops the calculation of the current project.

- Calculations: Not yet implemented.
- Hosts: Selects the host where the calculation will run (machine and solver location
which can be local or on the network).
SOLVER
Start a calculation
START A CALCULATION
This function allows the user to create a solver input file and/or start up the calculation.
The Start dialog
Host
- Run on list: List of hosts on which the solver can be executed. Only one host may
be selected.
- Configure: This button brings up the Host dialog which allows the user to add,
delete or edit items in the host list.
SOLVER
Start a calculation
- Working Directory: This text field displays the full name of the current project
directory seen from the selected host. This name takes into account the directory
equivalencies that have been defined in the configuration file for the selected
machine. The user has the possibility to make direct modifications if necessary.
Action
- Write input file only: This tick box enables the user to create the input file without
start up (if it is a multistage project, the pre-process file gn.pre is the input file).
An information message indicated the name of the solver input file (either gn…).
This toggle is disabled if the pre-process module is not loaded.
- Start the calculation only: When active, this option enables the user to start up the
calculation without creating the input file (if it already exists).
- Write the input file and start the calculation: When active, this option creates the
input file and starts up the calculation. If the pre-process module is not loaded, this
option is not available.
- Check attributes: When active, the attributes are checked before running the
computation and the results are displayed in a dialog. You have the possibility to
launch the computation after checking the attributes by pressing the “Continue”
button in this dialog.
Run Mode
- Run immediately: When this option is selected, the calculation is started
immediately.
- Run in batch mode: When this option is selected, the calculation is started up when
the previous calculation in the batch queue has been completed.
Run program after simulation

- Program name: It is useful for running the blank optimization functionality. In
standard run, select “—no program –“. The solver will be launched normally. For
running optimization of the blank outline, select “form blank optimization”, after
having defined the data in the Blank Optimization dialog.
Function Buttons
- OK: This function button validates (activates) the option selected in the Run Mode
panel with the parameters entered in the other panels.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without creating any input files nor starting any
calculations.
SOLVER
Restart a calculation
RESTART A CALCULATION
This function allows the user to restart a calculation from a dump file (*.rst).
The Start dialog
Restart File to Use

The program displays the list of restart files currently available for this project.
SOLVER
Restart a calculation
Stop Criteria to Modify

It is possible to modify stop criteria (Progression, Pinch tests, Distance to object,
Damping convergence tests) before restarting a calculation, although this is not
necessary. If a stop criterion has not been redefined, it will keep the value that it has in
the restart file.
Output Parameters to Modify

It is possible to modify output parameters before restarting a calculation, although this
is not necessary. If an output parameter has not been redefined, it will keep the value
that it has in the restart file.
Function Buttons
- OK: This function button validates the parameters entered and restarts immediately
the calculation from the restart file selected.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without creating any input files or starting any
calculations.
SOLVER
Hosts
HOSTS
This dialog allows the user to select a host where the calculation will run.
The Hosts dialog
Hosts
This window lists the names of hosts on which a calculation can be started from the user
computer.
Function Buttons
- : This button allows to add a host and opens the New Host dialog.
- : Enables to give the properties of a selected host in the Hosts list by opening the
New Host dialog.
- : Removes the selected host from the Hosts list.

SOLVER
Hosts
NEW HOST
This dialog allows to define a local or network host that can run calculations.
The New Host dialog
SOLVER
New Host
Display
The user defines here the display name of the host. This name will appear in the Hosts
list of the Start and Restart dialogs.
Host
The user selects here whether the host is the user’s computer (by checking the Local
button) or another computer (by checking the Network button). In the case of another
computer, the IP address or the host name must be specified in the neighbor text field.
Executable File Path

The user defines here the full path of the solver executable file. In the case of a network
host, this path must be defined from the host (and not the user’s computer) point of
view.
Messages directory
The user defines here the full path of the directory where are located the messages files
that will be used by the solver. In the case of a network host, this path must be defined
from the host (and not the user’s computer) point of view. This directory usually resides
in the installation directory.
Solver type
The user selects here the host environment (Unix or Windows) and the type of solver :
- Mono : the calculation will run on one processor only
- SMP : the calculation will run on one or several processors in SMP mode
- DMP : the calculation will run on one or several processors in DMP mode. When
this mode is selected, the DMP nodes button brings up the DMP nodes configuration
dialog :
SOLVER
New Host
This dialog allows to accurately choose the repartition of processors on each host
running the DMP calculation. The first host of the repartition list must be the
same than the one defined in the Host panel. If no repartition is defined, only the
number of processors will be asked (as in SMP mode) when launching the
calculation.
Launch script path

The user defines here the full path of the script which has to be used to launch the
calculation on Unix (this field is disabled for Windows hosts). This script is usually the
pamworld script delivered in the installation.
PAMHOME path (if not set by the user environment)

The user defines here the full path of the installation root directory (the PAMHOME
environment variable) on Unix hosts (this field is disabled for Windows hosts).
PAM_LMD_LICENSE_FILE (optional)
The user optionally defines here the path of the solver license file or the address of the
license server.
Folder equivalences
- : Allows to define some folder equivalences by opening the New Equivalence
dialog.
- : Deletes the selected equivalence.
- : Allows the user to edit the properties of the selected equivalence.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the options selected as well as the data entry.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without performing any of the above actions.
SOLVER
New Equivalence
NEW EQUIVALENCE
The New Equivalence dialog
Mounting Point
This panel enables the user to enter the path of the Graphic User Interface and Solver
hosts by means of two Browse buttons, in order to establish equivalencies between the
two.
Function Buttons
- OK: This button allows to establish the equivalency between the two specified
paths.
- Cancel: This buttons closes the dialog without performing any equivalence.
SOLVER
New Equivalence
SOLVER MESSAGES
This dialog displays the content of the output and message files of the project (*.out
and *.msg). Obviously these files exist only if a calculation has run.
Note:
· The output file is an ASCII file that can also be edited with a standard text
editor.
The Solver messages dialog
- Multistage output messages / Output messages: Displays the whole content of the
file.
- Specific messages: When active the content of the file can be filtered by type of
messages (Errors, Warning, Information).
- Look for: This text field allows the user to search for character string in the file.
and buttons orient the search respectively up and down the current position in
the file.
- Automatic refresh: When active the display is refreshed every time the file is
written.
SOLVER
Solver Messages
Function Buttons
- Read: Refreshes the display.
SOLVER
Solver Messages
CUSTOMIZE
CUSTOMIZE MENU
The Solver menu
The different options and functions provided by the Solver menu are listed below:
- Advanced mode: Allows to use the Toolkit.
- Licenses: Brings up the Customize tokens dialog.
- Options: Brings up the Custom options dialog.
- External tools: Free toolbar buttons to associate with an external program.
- Mouse configuration: Not yet implemented.
CUSTOMIZE
Licences
LICENCES
This dialog allows the user to choose the token needed in his session, therefore giving
flexibility to the work. Being part of a workgroup it could be useful to take only the
token needed for a user and let another user works with a different application.
The Licenses option dialog
Each check box refers to a token. If no license is available for the application, the
choice is grayed-out.
At dialog opening, the checked boxes correspond to the applications currently used (to
the token already taken).
At the end of a session, the last choice of the user is saved in the configuration file.
The token corresponding to a non-checked box will be released if already taken.
- Apply: When the user activates this button, each token corresponding to a checked
box is taken (if a token is available at this time). Whatever the number of tokens
checked a supplementary token is taken for the Graphical User Interface.
If the corresponding token, is already taken, it is not taken a second time.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without any changes for the token.
CUSTOMIZE
Licences
OPTIONS
This dialog allows the user to define the program configuration file. All the variables
are initialized with the values read in this file.
Diemaker
This tab defines the default values of PAM-DIEMAKER module.
The DieMaker Tab
CUSTOMIZE
Options
Part Preparation
- Merge node tolerance: several actions like closing holes, rolling cylinder etc. modify
the part mesh by combining the the original object with new generated sub-objects.
This combination generates doubled nodes at the mesh borders which have to be
merged for achieving a full node compatible mesh (without unnecessary free edges).
This combination of nodes will use a tolerance value (default 0.1 mm) specified by
this parameter.
Meshing
- Options: Brings up the Meshing Parameters dialog.
Blankholder Movement
- Options: Brings up the Move with arrow keys dialog.
Addendum
- Options: Brings up the Addendum parameter dialog.
Trim Blankholder
- Algorithm: for generating a proper die the (yellow) blankholder surface can be
splitted off at any profile end point (perpendicular to the blankholder outline) or can
be trimmed. Depending on the amount of generated profiles Split off generates a
couple of single surfaces. This algorithm works well for flat and light curvatured
binders. For higher curvatured binders the Trim surface approach is recommended.
This algorithm always generates one surface with an inner trimming polygon
identical to the die opening line.
Simulation Model
- Options: Brings up the Simulation model options dialog.
CUSTOMIZE
Options
DeltaMesh
This tab defines the default values of DeltaMESH®.
The DeltaMesh tab
- Import Options: Brings up the Import parameters dialog to specify default import
parameters for a CAD file.
- Joining Options: Brings up the Joining parameters dialog to specify default joining
parameters for CAD surfaces.
- Meshing Options: Brings up the Meshing parameters dialog to specify default
meshing parameters for a CAD file.
- Inverse meshing: Brings up the DeltaMesh inverse parameters dialog.
- Advanced: Brings up the DeltaMESH Advanced Parameters dialog to adjust the
DeltaMESH generator default parameters.
CUSTOMIZE
Options
Process
The Process tab
- QuickStamp Macro: The Options button brings up the QuikStamp Configuration

dialog to set the default parameters of the QuikStamp macro-command.
- AutoStamp Macro: Not yet implemented.
- Object Properties: Not yet implemented.
- Solver Parameters: The Options button brings up the Solver Parameters dialog to
set the default parameters for the explicit solver.
CUSTOMIZE
Options
Files Location
The program uses different directories and files to retrieve or store data. The variables
which describe these directories and files are defined in this tab.
The Files location tab
Basically all the files and databases which can be manipulated (imported, exported or
opened) could have their default location specified to the program. To specify a path
for a type of files, double-click on the corresponding line. The button that appears
brings up the Browser for Folder dialog which allows the user to select a directory.
Solver Location
The user can select within the list of machines on the network, the ones on which the
solver can be executed.
CUSTOMIZE
Options
- Solver Host: This button brings up the Host dialog, which allows the user to add,
delete or edit items in the host list.
GUI Parameters
The GUI parameters tab
- Language: Default language is English and cannot be changed in the current

version.
Visibility
Not yet available.
CUSTOMIZE
Options
Display
- Drawing styles: Brings up the Drawing style dialog.
- Display option: Brings up the Views display options dialog.
Mouse
Not yet available
Reporting
The user can define a default directory and an external editor launch command to save
and read the reporting files.
- Files directory: this is the default directory open by file selectors when opening a
report or creating report files.
- Editor command: this is the command used to launch an external HTML editor
when the user opens an existing report. This command should include the keyword
FILENAME which represents the file selected by the user. Example :
“C:\Editor\Editor.exe –o FILENAME”
Others
- Set Advanced mode at startup: Automatically sets the advanced mode to ON.
- Activate undo feature: when this option is activated, some actions (that edit the
model geometry for example) can be cancelled by selecting the Undo item of the
Edit main menu.
CUSTOMIZE
Options
Geometry Parameters
This tab allows the user to set the default parameters for some geometry tools.
The Customize Parameters dialog – Geometry tab
- Maximal distance between elements: This value is used to propagate offset trough
non-connected meshes.
- Maximal distance between edges: This value (in degree) is used to propagate
orientation trough non-connected meshes.
- Maximal angle between edges: This value, in degrees, is used to propagate
- Minimal edges overlap ratio: This value (between 0 and 1) is used to propagate
- Default: Restores the default values of the geometry tab.
CUSTOMIZE
Options
Contours
This tab allows the user to customize some contour attributes type by type and to set
some common display parameters.
The Customize Parameters dialog – Contours tab
Customized contours
- Enable custom contour: when this option is activated, it is possible to store some
contour parameters for any type of contour and apply them each time a contour of
the same type is selected. The list shows the contour types that were customized and
currently store default parameters.
- : deletes the custom configuration of the selected contour type.
CUSTOMIZE
Options
- Store current contour options: this button allows the user to add a custom
configuration for a type of contour. To add a custom configuration, select a contour
in the view, modify the display parameters and then click on this button. The
parameters are then saved and the selected contour type appears in the list.
The stored parameters depend on the type of contour :
- Scalar contours: value range, color range, colors for out of range values
- Zone contours: color of each zone
Legend options
These options specify which values range is displayed below the color bar when a
contour is selected.
- Display value range of active state: when this option is activated, the value range for
the active state only is displayed.
- Display value range of all loaded states: when this options is activated, the value
range for all the loaded states is displayed. This option is different from Display
value range of active state only if several states are loaded, in multi-state mode
therefore.
Color options
- Extra color smoothing: when this option is activated, the color smoothing (activated
by the Smoothed contour display option) is improved by the use of a larger palette
of colors.
Quality by FLD options

These values are the default values of two parameters interfering in the calculation of
the quality zones by FLD contour. These parameters can be modified when selecting
this contour.
- Unstretch limit: this value delimits the area inside which an element is considered
unstretched. In the FLD window, this value is the radius of a circle whose center is
the origin (unstretched elements have their FLD points inside this circle).
- FLC offset: this value defines the offset percentage applied to the forming limit
curve interfering in the quality zones by FLD contour. The area between this curve
and the offset curve delimits the marginal zone.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the parameters above and closes the dialog.
- Cancel: Closes the dialog without any changes for the default parameters.
CUSTOMIZE
Options
Meshing Parameters
This dialog allows the user to choose the mesh generator that will be used for inner and
outer holes or for addendum surfaces meshing. In addition for each mesh generator he
can set default parameters.
Meshing Parameters dialog (respectively for DELTAMESH and DIEMAKER)
DELTAMESH
Size

- Active: The test is activated (by default).
- Minimum size: Minimum element size for an object.(default value: 0.1).
Chordal Error
CUSTOMIZE
Options
- Active: The maximum chordal error test is activated (by default).

0.15).
Angle Criteria
This parameter defines the maximum angle between two adjacent elements for meshing
within the same surface and/or the same 3D curve.
activated (by default).
PAM-DIEMAKER
- Edge length: Defines the maximum edge length for an element.
- Chord error: Defines the maximum distance between a point located in an element
plane and the model geometry that must be preserved when meshing.
Addendum Parameter
This dialog sets the default parameters that PAM-DIEMAKER applies to the addendum
construction.
The Addendum parameter dialog
- Drawbead Inner/Outer: These two fields give the offset distance from which the
drawbeads are created with respect to the die opening line. The first field defines the
offset distance for the inner drawbead while the second for the outer drawbead. The
tip box forces the outer drawbead creation.
CUSTOMIZE
Options
- Profile attach EPS: Radius of a search sphere in which the end point of a profile is
attached to the part. See the Exchange part dialog for further details.
- Profile attach type: Drop-down list that defines how the algorithm is working to
reattach the profiles. See the Exchange part dialog for further details.
- Correct profile transitions:
- Smooth section curve: Defines the smoothness of the section curves used to draw
the addendum (within the range 0, 1). A value of 0 achieves the strongest
smoothness, yet this could jeopardize the quality of the section contours of the
resulting curve. At a value of 1, the contours are perfectly styled at the cost of the
smoothing out procedure. The preset default value rests at 0.5.
- Surface smooth (VDA): The transformation of the CAD-representation of PAM-
DIEMAKER into the VDA-representation may lead to defective areas because of
rounding- and / or approximation errors. When this value is greater than 0.0, the
surfaces will be simplified (independently from each other) with the predefined value
(in mm) as a maximum; the surface will be 'stretched' according to the user input.
Often, using a parameter value of 0.01-0.05 mm helps in avoiding the errors. In
addition, the file size will be much smaller after smoothing; the higher the smoothing
value the higher the data reduction.
- Import/Export surface in global coord. system: All coordinate information during
data export and in the dialogs either refers to the active or the global coordinate
system. The default setting of the toggle button (inactive) is the active coordinate
system.
CUSTOMIZE
Simulation Model Options
SIMULATION MODEL OPTIONS

This dialog sets the default parameters that PAM-DIEMAKER uses when it builds a
simulation model at the end of the addendum construction, i.e. when from the modeled
die a connected, gap-free mesh simulation model is built. This new object will be used
in the pre-processing session (data set-up).
The Simulation model parameters dialog
Simulation Model
Starting from the part geometry, the meshed addendum surfaces and the trimmed
blankholder surface(s), a new object called die will be created. The user can specify the
creation of additional reference objects via the Generated model for option:
• Die - no additional reference object will be created.
• Die+Binder – two additional objects for the punch and blankholder region will
be created.
• Die+Binder+Radius – three additional objects for the punch region, the
blankholder region and the DOL radius will be created.
CUSTOMIZE
Note that all additional objects will share the nodes and elements from the original die
object.
3D Curves
With this option the user can export several line objects as 3D curves (polygons) into
the Stamp2G setup module. These curves are internally stored as NURBS-curves and
can be transformed into a Stamp2G 3D curves (polygons) for using it in AutoStamp for
example. In this context this transformation is called export because the resulting 3D
curve will be used outside DieMaker environment. To be available are the export of
drawbeads, the die opening line (if imported or created) and/or the part outline. These
3D curves will be kept if the user deletes the simulation model afterwards.
Preformed blanksheet
- Generate blanksheet: When this toggle is active a blank mesh object is
automatically built when the simulation model is built. The contour of the blank is
based on the simulation model binder shape.
- Meshing: The Options button brings up the Options dialog here below.
· Edge length: Defines the maximum edge length for an element of the blank.
· Chordal error: Defines the maximum distance between a point located in an
element plane and the blank geometry that must be preserved when meshing.
Two additional sliders give the user the possibility to vary the shape of the blank
concerning the associating blankholder surface.
- Offset to blankholder: The preformed blanksheet is principally a copy of the

original underlying (yellow) blankholder surface created in the blankholder mode.
To avoid numerical errors during simulation this blanksheet can be shorten or
CUSTOMIZE
downsized concerning the blankholder boundary. This is synonym to an inward

offset of these curves. The offset value is specified in percent of the appropriate
blankholder curve length.
-
- Shape of blank: in the above picture the blank was generated with 100% following
the original blankholder surface. In the next picture 0% of the original shape was
used. Each intermediate value will generate an interpolation between both
maximum values.
Function Buttons
- Apply: Records the entered parameters and closes the dialog.
- Close: Closes the dialog without any changes for the default parameters.
CUSTOMIZE
DELTAMESH ADVANCED PARAMETERS

This dialog allows the user to interactively change some general DeltaMESH®
Stamping and Filleting parameters.
This dialog can be called with Advanced parameters button situated in the Meshing
dialog.
The user can also define new default values for these parameters via Customize menu.
On each tab a Default button allows the user to reset the parameters to their default
values.
Geometry
The Geometry tab
Visualization
- Number of isoparam.: Number of iso-parametric curves to display the surfaces. By

increasing this value it is possible to estimate the shape of surfaces more accurately
and to detect surface parameter problems (iso-parametric curves very close to the
edges, not regularly spaced, etc.).
(Default value: 1)
CUSTOMIZE
DeltaMESH Advanced Parameters
- Geom. discretization: This value represents the chordal error used to show surfaces
(contours and iso-parametric curves) and curves. The lower this value is, the more
faithful the representation of surfaces and/or curves will be, but the display time will
also increase (on workstations fitted with graphic boards providing limited
performance it may be worth increasing this value to display large models).
Note:
· If one of these two values is modified, a DeltaMESH® Stamping session will be

executed in batch to update the model with these new parameters.
Model
- Reference space: Size of the space containing the CAD model (in the automobile
sector, 4,000 mm is a common value). The system's precision will be calibrated
according to this parameter. The minimum authorized value for tolerances
dimensions specified in DeltaMESH Stamping (import tolerance, joining tolerance,
element size, etc.) is computed based on this parameter and is equal to:
« Reference space » x 10-5 (i.e. default value: 0.04).
Important notice:
· Therefore it is very important to modify this parameter if the size of the relevant
part is very different from 4000, or if another unit of measurement is used
(meter, inch, etc.).
(Default value: 4000)
Joining
- Split surface edges: Splitting status of surface edges for joining operations. If this
toggle is deactivated, joining will be performed without splitting the surface edges,
so that only surfaces with coinciding nodes will be joined. This toggle must only be
deactivated in very specific cases.
(Activated by default)
CUSTOMIZE
Meshing
The Meshing tab
Criteria
- Max. warping angle: Maximum permissible warping value for quadrangular

elements. During meshing, two adjacent triangles elements will only be transformed
into a quadrangle if the warping of the resulting quadrangle is less than this value.
(default value : 10°)
- Merging triangles angle: Minimum internal angle permitting two triangles elements
to be associated to form a quadrangle. During meshing, two adjacent triangles will
only be transformed into a quadrangle if the smallest internal angle of the resulting
quadrangle is less than this value.
(Default value: 60°)
- Max. validity angle: Maximum angle between the normals of two adjacent elements.
A surface's mesh will be considered invalid (and will therefore be rejected) if the
angle between the normals of two adjacent elements is greater than this value.
CUSTOMIZE
- Max. inner angle: Maximum angle required inside an element. Above this angle,
diagonals will be swapped to attempt to satisfy this criterion.
- Min. inner angle: Minimum angle required inside an element.
- Force mesh generation: Parameter enabling you to force meshing of a surface even
if several elements do not comply with all the defined quality criteria.
(Activated by default).
Important notice:
· When this parameter is active, we recommend you to check the meshing quality
when an error is indicated in the report.
- Limit the elongation: Parameter enabling you to activate limitation of element
elongation within a surface (default value: non active). When this toggle is active,
the maximum element elongation must be entered in the « Limit » field.
(Not activated by default).
Note:
· This parameter must only be activated in special cases where the quality of the
element has to be controlled (meshing of blanks, etc).
- Limit: If the toggle Limit the elongation is active, this limit corresponds to the
maximum length/width ratio authorized for the elements generated.
(3. by default)
Quad. Surfaces Detection
- Over-discretize: Parameter concerning over-discretization of 3 or 4-sided surfaces.

This parameter defines the type of density progression within each surface. If it is
activated, a higher number of elements will be generated within the surface (about
10%).
(Activated by default).
- Corner limit angle: Maximum value of the angle making it possible to detect corners
of 3 or 4-sided surfaces. A corner will be created if the external angle of two
consecutive curves is greater than this value.
(10. by default).
- Distortion angle: Maximum angular distortion of elements compared to perfect
quadrangles. If one of the angles is greater than this value, the surface will not be
selected as a 3 or 4-sided surface.
(40. by default)
CUSTOMIZE
Filleting
The Filleting tab
Fillet parameters
- Default fillet radius: Default filleting radius that is used if a wrong value (i.e.
negative value) is set to an edge.
(5. by default).
- Sharp edges bifurcation angle: This parameter is used during fillet surfacic model
when DeltaMESH Fillet chains the selected sharp edges to create fillet path.
It permits to detect bifurcations in sharp edges paths and to detect abrupt change of
direction (greater than this value). If you decrease this value, DeltaMESH Fillet will
take into account much more discontinuities in the sharp edges paths.
(45. by default)
- Inactive edge angle: When a selection of sharp edges is stopped in the middle of the
mesh, DeltaMESH Fillet takes into account another sharp edges called “inactive” at
the ends of the path. These sharp edges influence the sharp edges pattern at the ends
CUSTOMIZE
of the path (corner pattern with one, two or three edges)

(30. by default)
- Section angle: During creation of the fillet surfacic model, the angle between two
successive section normals must be lower than this value. This parameter influences
the decrease of radius size to minimal radius size. Lower this parameter is, more
difficult is the generation of surfacic model but better the quality is.
(25. by default)
- Corner curvature: This parameter influences the curvature of corner with more of 3
sharp edges. When this value tends to zero, the corner is “flat” and when this
parameter tends to 1, the corner is more “rounded”.
(0.5 by default)
- Deviation angle: This parameter is linked with the treatment of corner with more
than two edges. The angle (in degree) between section normals and sharp edges
direction have to be lower than this value. Lower this value is, more space is
necessary to build a corner surfacic model but the smoothing quality is better.
This parameter is also used when DeltaMESH Fillet trims initial sharp edges.
Elements near fillet mesh that are too distorted are merged if angle between normals
vectors is lower than this value.
(40. by default)
- Parallel sharp edges angle: Near a sharp edges corner, two sharp edges will be
considered parallel if their angle is lower than this value. In this case, the created
surface includes these two sharp edges in a unique section.
(15. by default)
- Radius reduction ratio: This parameter is used to decrease gradually the chosen
radius size to Minimal radius size. DeltaMESH Fillet will multiply by this value the
radius size until reaching the minimal radius size when it can’t generate a surface
with the chosen radius.
(0.8 by default)
CUSTOMIZE
QUIKSTAMP CONFIGURATION
This dialog specifies the default parameters for the QUIKSTAMP macro-commands.
The QuikStamp Configuration dialog
Die
- Full die: Specifies to the program that the geometry used, represents the whole die
including the binder.
- Die bottom: Specifies to the program that the geometry used, represents only the die
bottom. In this case, the program will add the Die bottom and binder area to obtain
the full die.
- Friction coefficient: This drop-down list is used to select the friction coefficient for
the die part. The five following items are available:
· No: No coefficient is defined.
· Low: The friction coefficient is set to 0.05.
· Medium: The friction coefficient is set to 0.15.
· High: The friction coefficient is set to 0.25.
· User Defined: The user enters the friction coefficient.
Binder
- Binder wrap: This option is strongly recommended when the binder surface is
curved and therefore must not be used when the binder surface is plane. It simulates
gravity and binder closing as well, which results in a curved sheet shape at the end
CUSTOMIZE
QUIKSTAMP Configuration
of the holding phase. Binder wrap is a good approximate solution, which requires
significantly less computer time than an exact analysis involving gravity and
holding simulations.
- Friction coefficient: This drop-down list is used to select the friction coefficient for
the binder part. The five following items are available:
· No: No coefficient is defined.
· Low: The friction coefficient is set to 0.05.
· Medium: The friction coefficient is set to 0.15.
· High: The friction coefficient is set to 0.25.
· User Defined: The user enters the friction coefficient.
- Holding pressure: The holding force applied to the binder mesh can either be
entered as a global Force or a unitary Pressure.
Blank
- Already defined: When this toggle is active, the material has already been assigned
to the blank.
Process
- Use drawbeads: When this toggle is active the drawbeads parameters are taken into
account in the forming process.
- Process: This area is used to specify the process direction.
- Binder wrap: A drop-down list provides three options to control the binder wrap
entered by the user for User-Defined).
- Forming severity: A drop-down list provides three options to control the implicit
entered by the user for User-Defined). Each option corresponds to different
parameter values.
The button brings up the Forming Severity dialog where the implicit solver
parameters can be controlled or edited.
Function Buttons
- OK: Sets the default parameters and closes the dialog.
CUSTOMIZE
Solver Parameters
This dialog allows the user to set the default parameters for the explicit solver.
Contact
The Solver Parameters dialog – Contact tab
- NL penalty (by default): This contact is recommended if more precise result is

needed. CAD data of the tool must be of good quality.
- Penalty: IF CAD data of the tool are not of very good quality, then penalty contact
is recommended.
Note:
Only one contact type can be applied during the calculation (simulation stage set-
up), combination is not possible.
- Scale factor: Scale factor for sliding interface penalty. The default setting 0.03 is
usually satisfactory. With a very coarse sheet mesh, higher values may be required
to eliminate large penetrations. However, values larger than 0.3 may lead to
integration instabilities and should be avoided.
CUSTOMIZE
Global Refinement
The Solver Parameters dialog – Global Refinement tab
default value is 10.
- Curvature radius criterion: If set, activates the criterion which refines the elements
close to contact surfaces that will (by their geometry) impose a joining angle greater
than the maximal adaptive angle allowed. If this criterion is not set, results still stay
correct but forbid a future springback computation.
CPU Control
The Solver Parameters dialog – CPU Control tab
- Reduction factor: When active, the user can enter in the text field the reduction
factor for refinement.
This is the value corresponding to the variation factor of the time step when a
refinement occurs. Indeed a perfect rectangular element has its time step value
divided by 2 when it is refined. If this text field is not set, no correction is done by
the solver. Setting a value in the interval [1,2] corresponds to the factor that the
solver uses to divide the local time step of the refined element. According to the
stability conditions, the density of the element must be increased (like with the use
CUSTOMIZE
of the Mass scaling option). A value equal to 1.33 and no “tool geometry” criterion
represents a good compromise between computation speed and quality of the
results.
Advanced parameters
The Solver Parameters dialog – Advanced parameters tab
- Thickness integration rule: Defines the distribution of the integration points across
the thickness, and the weight of each point. There are two integration rules:
· Gauss: The distribution is done to improve the quality of the results.
· Uniform: Distributes evenly the integration points with an equal weight.
- Number of integration points: Defines numerical integration in the thickness
direction. 5 points usually give a good quality of results.
- Shell anti-drilling: The shell anti-drilling projection applies to thin shell elements.
The addition of a projection scheme is necessary to remove any parasitic straining
due to drill rotation.
· Penalty: Anti-drill by adding penalty on z-rotation (default).
· Projection: For improved results in case of strongly warped shells, use the
projection method.
- Strain order: To take into account or not the second order term in the strain and
thickness calculation. Possible values are 1 or 2, but 2 gives best quality of results
with the drawback that it is more time consuming.
- Scale Factor: In general the solution is stable with the default time step scale factor
(0.9). In exceptional cases, e.g. with strongly distorted solid elements, the user may
CUSTOMIZE
want to reduce this factor to achieve a more stable solution when the default value is
too large. This reduction factor can also be specified in function of time.
- Time step calculation: The user has the option to choose between a large and a
small time step calculation. In this option, the characteristic length of the element is
taken into account: The larger the size of the element, the larger the element time
step.
- Bending option: The user can choose from no bending, bending and large bending
options. The No bend option will take into account a value for the thickness of the
object. It may therefore lead to considerable increases in the shell time step when
the shell contains small and thick shell elements.
Drawbead
The Solver Parameters dialog – Drawbead tab
Restraining parameters
- Thickness variation:
- Plastic strain increase:
Global parameters
- Activate edge line effect:

- Activate drawing angle option:
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the parameters and closes the dialog.
CUSTOMIZE
Drawing style
This dialog allows the user to configure some drawing attributes (mainly text font and
color). These attributes are gathered by groups listed in the dialog. Each group can be
customized by selecting it and clicking the button or double-clicking on it.
The Drawing style options dialog
The groups that can be customized are :

- DEFAULT: default configuration
- COLOR_BAR: configuration of the color bar displayed when a contour is selected
- TITLE: configuration of the title of a view (project name, state name…)
- SYMBOL_ANNOTATIONS: configuration of symbol (circle, arrow, text)
annotations
- CONTOUR_AND_PROPERTIES_ANNOTATIONS: configuration of annotations
of type “contour value” and “attributes” annotations
- MEASUREMENT_ANNOTATIONS: configuration of annotations generated by
the measurement tools
- ISOLINES_VALUES : configuration of the labels attached to the isolines displayed
when a contour is selected and the Isolines display option is activated
- DIALOG_FIXED : configuration of the fixed spacing font used in some dialogs
Configuring a group brings up the following dialog :
CUSTOMIZE
- Color: the foreground color of text can be defined here through the standard color
definition dialog brought up by the Change button
- Text background: by activating the Opaque option, the background color of text can
be defined through the standard color definition dialog brought up by the Change
button
- Style: by activating the Border option, a border will be drawn around the text in the
same color than the selected foreground color
- Text font: the font used to draw text can be defined here through the standard font
selector dialog brought up by the Change button
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the parameter setting and closes the dialog.
CUSTOMIZE
DISPLAY OPTIONS
These variables allow the user to configure the display in the graphical windows (3D
views, 2D cross section, FLD).
The Views display options dialog
Show Entities
- Free nodes: highlights nodes that do not belong to any element.
(Not activated by default)
- Free mesh edges: highlights the free edges of surface meshes. This option is useful
to check the connection between surface meshes. A connected surface mesh has one
closed free edge only, which is the boundary surface.
- Multiple mesh edges: highlights the multiple edges of the mesh. This option is
useful to check the T-junction or multiple junctions.
- Free CAD edges: highlights the free edges of surfaces. This option is useful to check
the connection between surfaces (a connected surface only has one closed free edge,
which is the boundary surface).
Vector Length
This panel controls the display of vectors and tensors when a contour of this type is
selected.
- Proportional to the norm: the length of lines representing the vector or tensor of a
shell element is proportional to the norm of the vector or tensor.
CUSTOMIZE
Display Options
- Fit in the shells: the shell element contour delimits the length of the lines
representing the vector or tensor.
- Length factor: scaling factor applied to the length of the lines representing the
vector or tensor.
Show Markers
- Model origin: displays a marker at the origin (0.,0.,0.) position of the model
- Shells normals : displays arrows representing the normal of each shell element
Lightings
- Max. angle for smoothing: when this option is activated, a smooth lighting is applied
to the model by computing some average normals common to neighbor shell
elements and defined at the nodes of these elements rather than considering one
normal per element
- Limit angle: when the Max angle for smoothing option is activated, this value
defines the limit angle (in degrees) between normals for computing an average
normal. When the angle is over this limit, each neighbor element has independent
normals. This allows correct representation of surfaces with sharp angles.
Function Buttons
- OK: Validates the parameter setting and closes the dialog.
CUSTOMIZE
Display Options
WINDOW
WINDOW MENU
The Window Menu
The different options and functions provided by the Window menu are listed below:
- New Window: Opens a new project window, displaying the active model in its
default orientation.
- Cascade: Arranges all open 3D and 2D windows one behind the other with the title
bars showing. This is the default when a new model is opened.
The same action can be performed with the icon of the Standard Toolbar.
- Tile Horizontal: Arranges all open 3D and 2D windows horizontally side-by-side so
that each one is completely visible.
- Tile Vertical: Arranges all open 3D and 2D windows vertically side-by-side so that
each one is completely visible.
- Arrange Icons: Arranges minimized 3D and 2D windows along the bottom of the
application window.
- 1 ...
2 ...
3 ...: All open project or macro-command windows are listed at the bottom of the
Window menu. Click to choose the window to activate.
WINDOW
Window Menu
HELP
HELP MENU
The Help Menu
The different options and functions provided by the Help menu are listed below:
- Help Contents: Displays the Contents page of online Help. The user can also display
the Contents page of online Help by pressing function key F1. The Contents page
contains links to all Help topics.
- Manuals: This sub-menu gives access to the hard copy documentation. This
documentation is available in an electronic format with the file extension: .pdf
(Acrobat Reader4 version 4 and later).
- Tip of the Day: This option is not available in the current version.
- Session: This option is not available in the current version.
- About PAM-STAMP 2G: Displays the copyright notice, version number of the
application and what are the available modules. When the mouse moves over this
dialog a tip box appears giving the number of days left before the license expires.
4
Acrobat Reader is a registered name of Adobe Systems Incorporated
HELP
Help Menu
MACRO
PRESENTATION OF THE MACRO-COMMANDS
The concept of a macro-command is divided into two steps:
- Define the macro-command according to process requirement.
- Use the macro-command in the standard software environment by entering a
reduced number of parameters in a process already defined.
A macro-command is stored in an ASCII file (extension .mct).
General Overview
Terminology
Prior to read the description of how to use a macro-command, it is advisable to read this
section in which some terms often employed are explained.
- Supervisor. The supervisor is usually the only people who can create a macro-
command. He defines the stages, the diagram of the process, the groups of tools, the
default process attributes and the attributes that will be requested from the end-user.
- End user. He is the people who uses the macro-command defined by the
supervisor. He enters the values for the parameters that can be modified for each
stamping project (holding force, velocity, friction…).
- Group. A group is a specific type of object like blank, tube, punch, drawbead… A
group is defined by its representation in the schematic grid (Stage panel) and
specific type of attributes directly accessible in the Group panel. A group, as seen by
the supervisor, corresponds to an object, as seen by the end user.
- Attribute. An attribute is a data to be assigned to a group (and so to objects
belonging to this group). It can be a friction coefficient, a direction, a 2D curve…
- Stage. The stage is a sequence in the stamping process in which each object has
only one type of kinematics: locked, movement, force. The complete process to
simulate must be split into different stages, according to the behavior of each group.
- Parameter. Value which is common to different groups and/or is to be asked to the
end user when he wants to apply the macro-command. It can be a real (friction
coefficient, thickness), a direction, a material property, an integer (level of
refinement, number of plots), a 2D curve.
MACRO
Presentation of the Macro-Commands
Macro-Command – Supervisor's Level

The Stamp Tool Kit is a convenient software environment in which a user called the
supervisor can define most of his stamping processes. A macro-command can be
opened using the Project/Open option or created with the Project/New Macro option.
At opening of a macro-command file, the menu bar of the main window is rebuilt to fit
the needs of macro-command management (see figure below).
The Stamp Tool Kit is a 2D window in which the following area can be distinguished:
- Toolbar: Tool buttons of this toolbar are short cuts to some menu options.
- Blank panel: It is used by the supervisor to enter the parameters of the blank. Three
types of blank can be defined: Single, Tailored and Double.
- Tools panel: It contains the non-deformable groups which will be associated later
by the end user with the corresponding meshes of the project.
- Parameters panel: It lists the parameters used by the macro-command.
- Preview panel: This panel displays a schematic representation of the process at one
of its stage and as it will be seen by the end-user. Therefore the display is
synchronized with the stage currently edited in the Stages panel.
- Stages panel: A stage is designed in a 9x9 matrix (default configuration) plus a line
to specify the post-processing parameters. Each stage is represented in a separate tab
and summarized in the Preview panel.
- Attributes and Behaviors panel: This panel displays for each component of a stage a
tab in which a tree gives a short description of the attributes that have been set for
this component.
MACRO
Presentation of the Macro-Commands
Specific Menu Bar Standard Toolbar
SpecificToolbar Stages (Schematic Grid) Attributes and Behaviors
The Stamp Tool Kit
Macro-Command – User's Level

The use of a macro-command from the user's point of view is described in the
AutoStamp Macro Process Section.
MACRO
Menu Bar
MENU BAR
The Menu Bar is specific to the Stamp Tool Kit. Most of the menu and their options are
different from the usual environment provided by the program, that is why they are
briefly described here. However, it is possible to navigate from this environment to the
project environment since they are available at the same time (switch from one to
another by using the Window menu).
Menu Tree when using the Stamp Tool Kit Environment
- File menu:
· New: This option allows the user to create either a new macro or a new project.
It brings up the New Macro dialog.
· Open: Brings up the standard File Selector to open macro-command files
(*.mct).
· Close: Closes the active macro-command window.
· Close All: Closes all the macro-command and project windows (i.e. all the 2D
and 3D windows).
· Save: Save the active macro-command (*.mct).
· Save As: Opens the standard File Selector to save the macro-command in
another location or under another name.
MACRO
Menu Bar
- Blank menu: See explanation in the Blank Definition Section.

- Tool menu: See explanation in the Tool Definition Section.
- Stage menu: See explanation in the Stage Definition Section.
- Parameter menu: See explanation in the Parameter Definition Section.
- Window menu:
· Cascade: Arranges all project model windows one behind the other showing the
title bars.
· Tile: Arranges all project model windows side-by-side so that each one is
completely visible.
· 1 Box ...
2 Double Action ...
3 Curve Plotter ...: All open project or macro-command windows are listed at
the bottom of the Window menu. Click to choose the window to activate.
MACRO
Toolbar
TOOLBAR
The Stamp Tool Kit toolbar can be moved to any location in the window. When the
mouse cursor is moved over a tool button, a text field pops-up under the tool button and
displays tips about the tool.
Depending on the type of macro, the toolbar can be one of the following:
AutoStamp
QuikStamp full process
Tube forming
This toolbar cannot be customized.
Button Purpose
Deactivates any other tool button.
Undo the last action
Brings up the Add Standard Tool dialog.
Brings up the Add Guide dialog.
Brings up the Add Drawbead dialog.
Brings up the Add Spacer dialog.
Brings up the Add Spots dialog.
Brings up the Add Trimming dialog.
Brings up the Add Symmetry dialog.
Brings up the Add Gaz spring dialog.
This tool button is used to lock the movement of a tool. After pressing this
button, the user must select in the schematic grid of the Stage panel the tool
onto which this attribute will be applied. The attribute is automatically
applied.
This tool button is used to assign a velocity condition to a tool. After pressing
this button, the user must select in the schematic grid of the Stage panel the
tool onto which this attribute will be applied. It brings up the Cartesian
Kinematic dialog.
This tool button is used to assign gravity behavior to the blank. After
pressing this button, the user must select in the schematic grid of the Stage
panel the blank. It brings up the Gravity dialog.
MACRO
Toolbar
Button Purpose
This tool button is used to assign a pressure to a tool. After pressing this
button, the user must select in the Stage panel the tool onto which this
attribute will be applied. It brings up the Pressure dialog.
This tool button is used to assign a force to a tool. After pressing this button,
the user must select in the Stage panel the tool onto which this attribute will
be applied. It brings up the Force dialog.
This tool button is used to assign sprinback behavior to the blank. After
pressing this button, the user must select in the schematic grid of the Stage
panel the blank. It brings up the Springback dialog.
This tool button is used to assign a fluid cell to the blank. It brings up the
Fluid Cell dialog.
This tool button is used to assign a displacement to a tool. It brings up the

Cartesian kinematics dialog.
Brings up the Add Feature dialog.

Brings up the Add Elements dialog.
Brings up the Add Nodes dialog.
Brings up the Add Tool dialog. A free tool that can be used to define
boundary conditions for springback.
MACRO
Blank Definition
BLANK DEFINITION
The blank definition is called up by the corresponding item of the Menu bar and
displayed in the Blank panel.
- Single blank definition.
- Tailored blank definition (not yet implemented).
- Double blank definition.
Whatever the type of blank to define is, the operation to perform is identical; enter a
thickness value for the single blank or two values if it is a tailored or double blank.
Note:
· The blank is defined once for a macro-command, i.e. for all the stages. It is not
possible to change the type of blank during the process.
· The blank type must be chosen at the beginning and must not be changed after a
stage creation.
MACRO
Blank Definition
STAGE DEFINITION
The procedure to define a stage is as follows:
- Select the Add option in the Stages menu.
- Enter the name of the stage, its type and position in the process in the Stage dialog
that appears.
- From the Blank panel define the type of blank used.
- From the Tools panel drag and drop the different tools necessary to the stage
definition. The supervisor by dragging the tools in the schematic grid of the Stages
panel draws the schematic of the stage.
To assign the tool attribute (velocity, force, displacement...) the supervisor must use the
Groups panel. The representation of tool changes when an attribute has been assigned to
it.
When a tool is positioned in the schematic grid of the Stages panel its representation
changes according to its position to the blank (over or under the blank corresponds
respectively to an upper or lower icon). By default, the blank representation spreads
over six columns of the matrix. The number of columns and rows of the matrix can be
controlled by using the arrows located on each side.
Stages panel
MACRO
Stage Definition
When selecting a tool (or the blank), a right-click menu provides the following
functions:
- Add position: Select a tool icon then by a mouse click at another position. The tool
icon is duplicated.
- Add Standard Tool: Brings up the Add Standard Tool dialog.
- Add Guide: Brings up the Add Guide dialog.
- Add Spacer: Brings up the Add Drawbead dialog.
- Add Symmetry Plane: Brings up the Add Symmetry dialog.
- Add Drawbead: Brings up the Add Drawbead dialog.
- Add Trimming: Directly position the symbol on the blank.
- Add Gravity: Brings up the Gravity dialog.
- Add Springback: Directly position the symbol on the blank.
- Add Feature Lines: Brings up the Add Feature dialog.
- Add Elements History: Brings up the Add Elements dialog.
- Add Nodes History: Brings up the Add Nodes dialog.
- Add Free Tool: Brings up the Tool dialog.
- Add Lock: Brings up the Cartesian Kinematic dialog..
- Add Velocity Driven: Brings up the Cartesian Kinematic dialog.
- Add Force Driven: Brings up the Forces dialog.
- Delete Behaviour: Removes the attributes that have been assigned to the tool.
- Delete Tool in the current Stage: Deletes the tool, removes its positions and
suppresses its tab from the Groups panel.
- Delete Tool's Position: Deletes only the tool at the position pointed by the mouse
cursor.
- Delete Drawbead in the Current Stage: Deletes the drawbead, removes its positions
and suppresses its tab from the Groups panel.
- Delete Drawbead's position: Deletes only the drawbead at the position pointed by
the mouse cursor.
Note:
· The right-click menu is contextual and may not display all the above options at
the same time.
MACRO
Stage Definition
Add Stage
This option allows the supervisor to create a stage and add it to the macro-command
(process).
The Add Stage dialog
A Name must be entered.
Type
Enter the type of the stage you want to create.
Location
This panel allows the supervisor to position a stage as First stage or After one of the
existing stages.
MACRO
Stage Definition
Data
This panel is used to specify what is the status of the stage at its creation:
- Empty: The stage has no tools, no blank and therefore no attributes assigned.
- Keep tools: The stage is created with the same tools as the previous stage, but the
attributes assigned to the tools are not transferred.
- Keep tools and behaviours: The stage is created with the same tools and associated
behaviours as the previous stage.
- Keep all: The stage is created with the same tools and all properties are transfered .
- A drop-down list may be used to change the definition of the previous stage.
Function Buttons
- OK: Creates the stage with the parameters defined above.
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing the stage creation.
MACRO
Stage Definition
TOOL DEFINITION
The procedure to add a tool is identical for each tool:
- Press the tool button in the Toolbar or select the Tool menu option corresponding to
the tool to implement.
- In the dialog which appears, chose a type for the tool.
- Give a name to this tool or keep its default name, then press OK.
The tool is automatically displayed in the Tools panel with its schematic representation
and its name. When the tool is not currently used in a stage, a comment "not used" is
written next to its name (see figure below).
Tools panel right-click menu
When selecting a tool, a right-click menu provides the following functions:

- Rename: Brings up the Rename Tool dialog.
- Delete: Deletes the selected tool.
- Thickness (for standard tools only): Brings up a dialog to enter a thickness for the
tool.
- Tool type (for free tool only): The user can select the object type of tool in a list in
the sub-menu.
MACRO
Tool Definition
To position a tool in a stage, the user must select it in the Tool panel with the mouse
then drag it and drop it the Stages panel to the requested position or use the right-click
menu in the schematic grid to add directly the tool to its position.
Button Menu Option Purpose

Add Standard Brings up the Add Standard Tool dialog.
Tool Standard tools are defined by fictitious material attributes.
They have to be associated with attributes such as lock,
imposed velocity or force. They usually represent the die,
blankholder and punch, i.e. all the standard components of a
press.
Add Guide Brings up the Add Guide dialog.
A guide can only be applied lock or imposed velocity.
Add Drawbead Brings up the Add Drawbead dialog.
A drawbead will be applied restraining and opening forces.
Add Spacer Brings up the Add Spacer dialog.
A spacer is a tool that can have contact with other tools.
Add Spots Brings up the Add Spots dialog.
Spots are specific tools which represent the constraint
between double-sheet blank. It can only be associated with
the blank onto the schematic grid.
Add Trimming Brings up the Add Trimming dialog.
A trimming tool is composed of 3D curves that will trim the
blank before or during the current stage, in a defined
direction.
Add Symmetry Brings up the Add Symmetry dialog.
plane
Add Feature Brings up the Add Feature dialog.
line A feature line is entity that will mark the blank during the
computation (e.g. the die entry radius or the drawbeads. It
could be plate elements or 3D curves (because the drawbeads
cannot have contact attributes with other entities).
Add Elements Brings up the Add Elements dialog.
history Group whose elements will be added in the history file of the
corresponding stage.
Add Nodes Brings up the Add Nodes dialog.
History Group whose nodes will be added in the history file of the
corresponding stage.
Add Free Tool Brings up the Add Tool dialog.
A free tool that can be used to define boundary conditions for
springback.
MACRO
Tool Definition
Note:
· The representation of a tool in the Tool panel is identical to the one displayed in
the Toolbar.
MACRO
Parameter Definition
PARAMETER DEFINITION
This panel lists the parameters created by the supervisor for the current macro-
command. It is important to understand that a parameter is created to force the end-user
to assign a value. For example, when a "Punch Velocity" parameter has been defined
with the preceding comment "[End User]", it means that the end-user will mandatory
have to enter a value, otherwise the macro-command cannot be executed.
The Parameters panel
When selecting a parameter in the panel, a right-click menu provides the following
functions:
- Add: Brings up the Add Parameter dialog.
- Copy: Copy the parameter and add a number to its name and brings up the Add
Parameter dialog.
- Edit: Brings up the Add Parameter dialog.
- Delete: Deletes the selected parameters.
MACRO
Add/Edit Parameter
This dialog is called up by the Add or Edit option of the right-click menu of the
Parameter panel.
The Add parameter dialog
- Name: Defines the name of the parameter.

- Information: The user can add some notes about the parameter.
Type
Depending of the type chosen the Value field changes accordingly:
- Integer: The value entered is an integer.
- Real: The value entered is floating point number.
- Direction: In this case no value is to be defined here. The end user will be asked a
direction when he will use the parameter.
- 2D Function: In this case, a default curve is automatically defined. The end user will
be able to modify the definition of this function by calling up the Curve Plotter
dialog when he will use the parameter. The button 'curve plotter' is used to edit this
curve.
MACRO
Modification Level
This panel defines at which level this parameter acts:
- Supervisor: The Value entered next will not be asked to the end user when he will
use the macro-command. It could be a default value stored in the configuration file.
- End user: The Value entered next will be asked to the end user when he will use the
macro-command.
Wizard
A wizard can also be added to the value asked to the end user, that will help him to find
the value adapted to the mesh of the selected object:
- None: By default, no help is performed.
- Refinement levels: not yet available.
- Mass scaling: Finds the minimal element size for the mass scaling factor. It brings
up the Mass Scaling wizard in data setup wizard.
- Drawbeads: Finds the opening and restraining forces of the drawbeads depending
on the geometry. It brings up the Drawbead calculation dialog in data setup wizard.
- Gaz spring mass: Compute the mass of the spring. It brings up the Mass information
dialog.
- Displacement: Finds the displacements between die and blank holder and punch. It
brings up the Compute distance dialog (see below).
- Global refinement: Not implemented.

- Velocity: not yet available.
Function Buttons
- OK: Creates the parameter with the parameters defined above.
- Close: Closes the dialog without performing the parameter creation.
MACRO
ATTRIBUTE DEFINITION
The Attributes panel is synchronized with the Stages panel: each time a tool is selected
within a stage, a tab containing its attributes is displayed. Therefore, the number of tabs
corresponds to the number of tools used in a stage. When switching from a stage to
another the Attributes panel is updated.
The attributes panel
When selecting a attribute in the tree window, a right-click menu provides the following
functions:
- Edit: Opens up a dialog corresponding to the attribute to modify. The different
attributes that are available are listed in the Object Attributes Section.
- Clear: Clears all the attributes assigned to this tool.
- Copy: Copies an attribute in memory.
- Paste: Pastes the copied attribute to the object selected in the current stage if this
attribute is allowed for the destination object. If this attribute already exists for the
object in this stage, a warning message appears to ask user if he want to overwrite it.
MACRO
Attribute Definition

PAM STAMP 2G 2003 Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PAM STAMP 2G 2003 Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Insert the front cover image in this header , then position and resize it !

Courtesy: Jaguar Cars

User defined mesh formats ---------------------------------------------------------- 43

Project Dialog-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 145

Compute Mesh Size ----------------------------------------------------------------- 194

Die Preparation ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 262

Control Lines--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 316

Import Macro-Command --------------------------------------------------------------403

Coordinate System------------------------------------------------------------------- 444

Material reporting --------------------------------------------------------------------- 578

DeltaMESH Advanced Parameters ---------------------------------------------- 666

Status Bar Output Dialog Docking Dialogs Graphical Window Area

Main screen lay-out

The Menu Bar

Toolbars and Docking Dialogs

· : Any translation in the screen XY plane. Ctrl + M2.

· : Rotation of a section plane around any axis. Alt + M2.

· Picking of several entities by defining a window: click one point of a diagonal

3D View right-click menu

· Normals: Displays arrows representing the normal of each shell element.

Before smoothing After smoothing

The second case is when the connecting lines were already

The generation of the control line is completely free whether no DOL

- Section: Controls the cross-section display.

ADD (OR REMOVE) A SELECTION OF ENTITIES

The Objects dialog

Main Direction Wizard

These wizards give priority to the direction indicated on the button.

· Click once on the Z button to define the vector (0,0,1).

Project Menu after a File or Project has been opened

- Save: Save the active project (*.psp).

· DieTrimming mesh: Brings up the standard File Selector dialog to export

The New Project dialog

The New Macro dialog

The Save variations dialog

- Blank object: Selects the blank object to move or resize

- : Adds a variation in the list by bringing the Variation properties dialog.

The Project Management dialog

- : Allows the user to create a new directory in the current one.

The File Selector

The roles of the various dialog components are as follows:

- : Allows the user to create a new directory in the current one.

VIKING Files (*.prj): The data exported have information about

CAD File Exportation

MESH File Importation

ANSYS files (*.cdb)

IDEAS files (*.unv)

· NOMSEL name of the element selection

· In reading, if an entity does not belong to any selection, it will be placed in

NASTRAN files (*.nas)

PATRAN files (*.pnf)

TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

PNG (Portable Network Graphics)

USER DEFINED MESH FORMATS

The User-defined mesh formats dialog

The Picking dialog

- Pick progression and time:

· The identifiers of the imported entities are modified.

· If an object called "Blank" is recovered in a project where there is already an

SAVE DELTAMESH MODULE

The Save DeltaMESH module dialog

NEW DESIGN MODULE

MESHING – IMPORT TAB